Home

CA50/UCA Client & Server Developer & User Guide (p/n 72E

1. Connected Hide Details 2 Information Type Status Figure G 3 Connected Window Downloading Data using an ActiveSync Connection To download data from the host computer to the CA client via ActiveSync 1 Connect the CA50 client to the host computer using a USB cable Host Computer USB Port Figure G 4 Connecting the CA50 G 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Page intentionally blank Appendix H UCA Server Backup and Restore UCA Backup amp Restore The UCA server backup and restore process allows an administrator to restore the UCA server configuration in the event of a system failure It also allows an administrator to duplicate the configuration of a UCA server in production to use as a quick setup for other servers Key Features The UCA Backup amp Restore has the following three features 1 UCA Backup Archives the configurations of the UCA database and UCA profiles XML profile files 2 Restore Restores the backed up data on the target server and also the profiles This action cleans up the existing contents of the database and restores data from the backup 3 Reconfigure Allows the UCA server administrator to reconfigure the Server IP Address Store ID PBX IP Address PBX Port Number and cleanup the temporary tables phone extension table and device users table Configuration Replication To replicate configuration on other servers perform a
2. 4 14 network settings aa 4 29 no phone error a 4 39 non listen accessible channel walkie talkie 4 32 7 5 notification messages customize J 14 0 operating environment 0000 e eee A 1 operating system Fi CUCL uz APA F 1 upgrade cee es 12 1 VEFSION aoaaa ana 4 2 4 29 optimize battery management 13 6 implementation 000 cee ee eee 13 2 scanner performance 4 15 user device settings 3 9 Index 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide wireless infrastructure 3 10 wireless network for VoIP 3 10 opona l APIS 7am Aa Ka nah oem ib eels tek AA 11 2 console users 20 eee 11 36 device users 1 ee ee 11 29 alco bje lt 444042002 PAA cee ne 11 18 phone extensions 11 14 OCS weasiueudestaus eeeceetiend ce uses oe 11 22 OS upgrade See operating system out of box battery management 3 9 CA MENU AA 3 12 CA menu options aana 4 19 GADO CIIEND a mawa daira GAO mGA anes ace ee 5 1 firsttime use eee 3 11 license wea cnc ee ddeckdbadeebagdee ae een 12 1 DOW GI AA F 1 P PATINO aa day abd erat ond dh nee Er S 1 2 1 3 4 55 re AE ee 6 58 11 26 11 44 13 7 park call no available extension 4 49 on any available extension 4 47
3. 0 aa 3 11 07A IST PA PRA AP 3 12 ICC MOUS sma AA AA AA ANAN AA AA AA 3 13 PONGE ON era AA AA AA ee eee ee ee eee eee 3 13 Chapter 4 CA50 Modes of Operation NEN EN NAA AA AA 4 1 CA50 Login Post deployment a 4 2 LOODUS AA HA aceon 4 2 POW T O aa AA AA cence vane AA AA ANDA 4 2 Employee Identity Validation Scanning a Login Bar Code and entering a PIN QQQXXa 4 3 OOOO o AA PA 4 4 Display Status ICONS aap NAAN GA AA AA 4 5 CASO Keys Actions and Features asaan ABG LAD Gaba cate Saman LANANG AN GILAS Naa 4 7 CAO INGICANONS za NAA APAN a 4 10 LE DNOC ONS za ANG ANAN AA 4 10 40 fe 081 a e1 1 e 1A APA AAP PA AAP AA 4 11 DECC MM ee AA 4 12 MUSING NN lo AA 4 13 Wireless Security Protocols for the CA5O a 4 14 Dadap maa AA A E E 4 15 Table of Contents Vil LAS Ol SCANNING aaa ANA ANAND senses cat canes NAGA see onda AANO 4 15 SCANNING Considerations ecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeececeeeeeceeseeeeseeeseeueeeeseeaeeeesseaeeeesanees 4 15 OC AUN AAP 4 16 FRCS DUNG NE NO naaa aa AA AA AA 4 17 Performing a Warm Boot u 1 111 1 4 17 Peroimno a Cold BOOT AA AA 4 17 Waking the CASO aaa 0NA a PAANAN ene eee AA 4 18 Accessing ihe IN 5 sects see ssc com sce niaaa a segue a a iaa aE aE REN 4 18 Out of Box CA Menu Options 111 a 4 19 Walkie Talkie Multicast Communication a 4 31 RF Network Optimization for Walkie Talkie C
4. E 1 Step 1 UCA Server Install e Overview of Server Functionality 5 1 6 2 e Server Hardware Requirements 6 7 e Server OS Requirements 6 7 e Install UCA Server Software 6 9 e Validate UCA Server Software Installed Properly 6 45 Step 2 Business Application for CA50 Generate e Definition of a Business Application 10 2 e Build Web Business Application 10 3 e Launching Business Application 10 3 12 2 e Employee Identity Validation 4 3 10 3 11 5 11 40 E 14 e Reference Implementation Demo Solution E 1 Step 3 CA50 Device Settings Optimize Settings e Rapid Deployment Bar Codes 12 1 F 1 e XML Profiles for Configuring the CA50 7 1 D 6 e Optimize Battery Life 3 9 Development and Deployment Checklist 2 3 Step 4 UCA Server Files and Databases Populate with Site User Specific Information Create Users Accounts 9 20 D 1 e Importing User Information 9 25 Create Phone Book Extensions 9 9 D 1 e Importing Extensions 0 ois 9 25 Create XML Profiles 000 7 1 D 1 Create Groups and Roles 9 30 D 1 Optional IP PBX Integration 9 41 D 1 Self Contained Pre built Demo E 1 Deployment E
5. 9 28 Deleting Associated Base Profiles a 9 29 Roles and Groups NAO VIEW a satis eset sates AA AA AA 9 30 OOOPS aapa AD AA 9 30 OSS a AA AA AA AA AA 9 33 System Management Tab View 11112110 a 9 37 VST sA E 9 37 COOC U EI AA E 9 43 TOOS AA AA AA AA 9 47 UCA Server WebConsole GUI Utilities 20 0 0 ccc cece cc 0a 9 52 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide FV TIO a A E 9 52 BACH A P EEA E E O 9 52 Import Utility LL 9 55 Chapter 10 CA50 Business Application Development NENE AA ANA AA AA a 10 1 Business Application Overview 10 2 Business Application Development Environment u a 10 2 CA50 Web Application Developer Guide 10 3 Launching a Business Application a 10 3 Automating the Launch of the UCA Client Application 2 10 3 Employee Identity Validation 10 3 PICO SIA mGA AA AA AA 10 4 FACSOONSS FOTMIAL aka E Apa 10 4 HTML Elements Uu a 10 5 Best Practices and Considerations for CA50 Development ccccceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes 10 12 Data Ors ei AA 10 12 Access to Communication Options and the Web Application u 10 12 Business Applications and their Extensions ccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesseneeeenaaees 10 16 Business Application Extensions Web Service 7 aanawannannaaaannann aaa kan
6. Confirm Password Save Cancel Figure 9 24 Edit UCA User Password Window 4 Enter the new password in the Password text box 5 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password text box 6 Click Save to change the password or Cancel to terminate the session Deleting a User See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting entries in the UCA server UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 25 Device User Import File Format Use this option to load data in bulk instead of creating users and phone extensions one at a time via the UCA server s Web Console Bulk loading of phone extensions and CA50 users into the UCA database is enabled To create and import phone extensions see page 9 13 The CA50 user import feature uses a comma separated value CSV format that must include a header line as follows locExtID ExtUsrlID firstName lastName userName PIN Role Token userStatus Selectable Group List Permanent Group List Sample Import Line A sample import line is as follows 0002 2000 Joe Smith Joe Smith 5555 Sales A Lumber Electrical Bath NewHire Sample import line notes e Ifthe location ID string has leading zeros in the database leading zeros must be included in the import file If the file is edited using Microsoft Excel the field must be manually formatted to text within Excel e Between items a space is optional The sample above shows items with and without spaces
7. a 3 2 4 9 SANGA 4a ane be eee eee ae 4 37 states kbar eee a eae ed ae athe we eae ace 4 53 technical spec 2 ee ee A 2 transferring a call 4 46 ISAC amahan ow r dh home he AA woh a Rew 3 10 WebConsole 000 eee eee eee 9 2 9 7 when scanning 0 a 4 54 voice quality ico ppc Ox Coe we ee 3 10 volume key 000 cee eee eee 3 3 4 7 4 9 W wake CA50 200085 3 11 4 2 4 18 14 6 walkie talkie and business apps 4 57 and unicast calls AA 4 36 and voice calls eee eee 4 36 CAS AA 4 31 changing transmit channel 4 34 channels aa 4 33 6 4 6 6 communication 4 31 6 2 6 5 communication setup and maintenance 6 4 GOMMQUIATIOIN i ta scsi towns NA Ew mh ars 4 31 functions channel settings 4 32 7 4 Indications 4 4 4 10 4 11 4 12 initiating connection 0000 0 eee 4 34 KONG ara Weide hw side pa ape sector ar 3 2 3 3 4 7 modes do not disturb 4 33 7 5 NONG aa aang Gara Wag ee ee 4 33 7 5 SCAN oh dae anaidai Abas Bee 4 33 7 5 single channel 4 33 7 5 multicast functionality 1 3 naming channels 4 33 7 24 receiving a 4 34 SOUMO e iee a Gma BI ana See we Ba aa KA panot 4 9 speaker ee 3
8. B 2 B 3 eight slot spare battery charger wall mount B 13 B 15 employee login generation of employee login bar code D 15 identity validation 4 3 10 3 D 15 E 14 OGM PNP 4 3 extensions porting 00 cc eee eee eee 9 13 F features CA5070 OUOLF5KV11R 08 xviii CA5070 OUOLF5KV18R 285 xviii TG TIN E E oR epee BR 9 52 find utility server GUI 9 52 firewalls configuring 6 47 firmware See operating system four slot spare battery charger SEND aadd dka en a ee Dh Mal NY ee ee B 8 FUSION lOQ wawa iced dedce a dd Gre Gat eens AD NA ANA 4 29 G GU aabangan LORI LAWA eee ee are 4 6 5 H HTML usage cee eee J 4 I SS eera rneer EA 6 8 6 54 IMDOM UUINY scisiirroreri tisane ime ti EEEE 9 55 indications UE ol o MEOE E EEEE EET 4 11 charging os a aiaa a adaa a a eee 4 10 4 12 ei 4 12 Information service aaa aa xxi ingress protection rating 14 3 inserting battery 0 0 00 eee eee 3 4 install demo version UCA server software 6 20 production version UCA server software 6 11 UCA server software 6 10 installation software 2 0 0 eee ee eee 6 8 Internet Information Server 6 54 Internet Information Services 6 8 IP PBX See PBX aki anak ate oak PRA AA 14 3 K key attributes AA
9. 6 54 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server Security The UCA server supports the following security related features e SSL Encryption e Directory level password protection of sensitive Web services e Encryption of server configuration files e Encryption of passwords stored in the UCA database SSL Secure Socket Layer Secure Sockets Layer is a protocol developed by Netscape for transmitting private documents via the Internet SSL uses a cryptographic system that uses two keys to encrypt data a public key known to everyone and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message Both Netscape and Internet Explorer support SSL and many Web sites use the protocol to obtain confidential user information such as credit card numbers By convention URLs that require an SSL connection start with https instead of http To enable SSL on the UCA server an SSL Certificate is required The certificate can be purchase by trusted companies such as VeriSign and others For test purposes Microsoft provides a utility called SelfSSL that can be used to generate SSL certificates for testing purposes only The SelfSSL utility is part of the IIS Resource Kit available on the Microsoft Web site For the purpose of this discussion assume the use of SelfSSL to generate the certificate Refer to the SelfSLL documentation for operational details Use SelffSSL to Generate the SSL Cert and Apply it to the De
10. cccccccceeececceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaseetseaeeetaeeeeees 8 26 Add Menu States ccccceecceceseececeeeceeceececeeececeueeeeseuecesausecessuseesseaeeetsuaeeeesugeeesaeeetsees 8 27 Ada Ment EO Ha AA AA AA 8 27 Chapter 9 UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface ONG NEN AA AA 9 1 UCA Server WebConsole Interface Overview aaa 9 2 Login 16 tine UCA Server SYSIEM 2 NANANA AA 9 3 System Status Tab VIEW mel nNG ANYA Gin Aap AN niaii ani Na pa nadan 9 5 1 1A ee 0 gt nee ee E ee eee eee 9 5 GCS AA 9 6 Phone and Walkie Talkie Tab View ccccccccecccsseccseeceeeeaeeeceeceseeeeseeeseesesaeeeseeeseneeaes 9 7 AGANE AS ENCA 9 7 Phone Extension Pool 1 11 a 9 8 Phone Extension Import File Format a 9 13 Additional Phonebook Entries Aa 9 14 Deleting Phone Extensions a 9 17 Device User Accounts Tab View 1 9 18 HECEN SCS aaa NANA AA 9 18 PAM ASS AA aeahapanieaaanatoateds 9 19 Editing User FHA SSW ONO sA AASA AA ANA ANA AA AA ANA AA NAA 9 23 Deleting a User AA AA rie 9 24 Device User Import File Format ccccccccccsseeecceeeeeseeeseeseeeeesseaeeessegeeessaeeeeseaeeenss 9 25 Profile Management Tab View ccccccccccssseccceeececeeseecseeceeseecesseaseesseeesseeeessanseessagees 9 26 Create an Associated Base Profile a 9 27 Editing an Associated Base Profile
11. A channel can be set as Accessible single channel only by setting the type to SCO in the WTT gt Chlist gt Ch element CA50 Modes of Operation 4 33 Device Modes There are four walkie talkie communication modes for additional information see page 7 5 These different modes tell the device how to handle the channels to which it has access The modes are e Single Channel Mode e Users can talk and listen only on this channel e The only way to end Single Channel mode is to leave the channel manually e Normal Mode e In Normal mode users listen on Listen Talk channels and Listen Only channels e Users talk on the default channel only J NOTE One Listen Talk channel must be set as the default channel e Normal mode is exited when the user manually selects a channel other than the default talk channel causing the device to enter Single Channel mode e Scan Mode e In Scan mode users listen on Listen Talk channels and Listen Only channels e When a user presses Talk the mode switches to Single Channel mode on the last Listen Talk channel heard e Do not disturb Mode e Do not disturb mode supports an extended period of time when a user wants needs to be unreachable but is still able to use the business application This may be required when a user takes a break or is given a task that does not require the communication feature e In Do not disturb mode the device does not receive any notifications or incoming walkie talkie c
12. Ensure the Enable30Agent field is set to TRUE Click the Finish If the MSP server version is earlier than 3 1 1 the settings definition file should be downloaded from http support symbol com support product softwaredownloads do 2 Creating the UCA settings definition In a Web browser go to hitp server ip msp web to log in to an MSP server Select the Library tab Select the Settings tab Select the Create button Select the UCA settings xml Enter UCA Client Setup for the name field Enter UCA Client Setup in the description field Enter the server IP address of the UCA server UCA Client Setup Enter the store number in which the UCA server is installed Enter the desired SSL entry depending on whether or not SSL should be enabled or disabled Specify whether or not the SSL certificate errors should be ignored Enter the HTTP port when SSL is not used or use the default Staging and Deploying CA50s 12 5 Enter the secured HTTP port when SSL is used or use the default Use the default for the Log Off Service Use the default for the New Extension Service Use the default for the Session Check Service Select Language use the default web service path Select TRUE for persist on a cold boot Click the Finish button This UCA settings definition only applies to the UCA client application running on the CA50 If the MSP server version is earlier than 3 1 1 the settings definition file should be downloaded
13. Figure 9 43 System Management View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 43 2 Select an entry to configure in the Settings column 3 Inthe detail view of the setting entry click Edit 4 Modify the setting as needed 5 Click Save or Cancel to terminate the session J NOTE See System Settings on page 6 48 for a detailed list of the system settings for CA50 Client Server software Console Users Console Users provides the ability to create edit and delete UCA System users The Console Users view displays a user s User D First name Last Name Status and dates for account creation and activity To view Console Users e Click the Console Users tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the tab view System Management Console Users System Settings Console Users Tools Add To List For Delete Returned 2 results Find JuseriD 7 User ID Role First Hame Last Hame Status User Created User Modified Last Login siiin An Ain Ain i 1 23 00 SA00 71700 3223 2009 6 34 00 Meraner Manager Manager A SM 22009 1 23 00 3422009 1 2300 342 009 1 23 00 PM PM PM Figure 9 44 Console Users View 9 44 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Creating a New Console User To create a console user in the UCA server 1 Click the System Management tab gt Console Users tab gt Create The Create User window displays System Management Console Users gt Console User
14. Figure D 13 Login Prompt Employee Logs in to the UCA Server vV Go to Menu gt Applications to see the application by name Footwear was created in using profile builder Launching it hits the URI http 192 168 0 253 Footwear Footwear aspx that was assigned when creating the menu Scan external UserID bar code these bar codes were generated in Step 5 on page D 15 e 1001 for User1 e 1002 for User2 The UCA server validates the user ID If a valid UserID is found the UCA server sends the completed base XML profile back to the CA50 user device See step Step 6 Populate the UCA Server Database with 2 Users on page D 11 and step Step 5 Create an XML Profile Called Footwear xml on page D 6 The CA50 user should see their user name and phone book extension on the CA50 display NOTE Fora fully functional Demo Solution that enables price lookup voice calls and walkie talkie communication see Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo From desktop navigate to Menu gt WT Channels to see the channel Footwear displayed This was created using UCA Profile builder set to listen on channel 3 Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo Overview The CA50 Demo is a Self contained pre built solution that allows a user to quickly and easily demonstrate all major CA50 and UCA server functionality such as e Walkie talkie communication Voice calls e Price lookup business application This demo includes ALL the document
15. PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt DownloadFiles gt Attributes e DownloadAtStartUp Y Enter Y to download the files soon after user login e HTTPURL Source file location and name e PathOnDevice Destination path on the device the default path on the CA50 device to which files are downloaded is Application Download e OverWrite N Enter Y to overwrite the existing file on the device if applicable Example 1 lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Response wav PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt Source http server somecompany com Response wav Destination Application Download Example 2 lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Wav Response wav PathOnDevice Wav Overwrite N 5 Source http server somecompany com Wav Response wav Destination Application Download Wav 1 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Download Files to the CA50 Device After User Login The UCAClient has the capability to download files from an HTTP server to the CA50 device at a point in time after user login A menu option can be provided to allow the user to download files any time Example lt Menu ID 4 name Applications title Applns gt lt entry ID 1 value Download Files S L DOWNLOADFILES gt lt entry ID 3 value Price Check S S http server somecompany com Sample aspx gt lt Menu gt The Download Files menu option displays on the Application m
16. Succeeded Processing Motorola UCA ServerManagement Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Processing Client Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Encrypting configuration section Succeeded UcaConsole configuration section Figure 6 12 Adding ACL UCA Server 6 17 Media Relay Figure 6 15 UCA Server Backup amp Restore Motorola UCA Server Profile Builder Ga Ple EJ Builder a Kai Taga a an in IT ANA PK Jina an nf Ta Gathering required information Figure 6 16 UCA Server Profile Builder 16 Click Yes to start the console or click No Figure 6 17 Start Web Console 17 If Yes is clicked to start the Web Console now the following Web Console window displays See for login information Figure 6 18 WebConsole GUI Login IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see it is required to use the default Web AN Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin lt is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Admin Password can be changed on the UCA server console from System Management gt Console Users gt Console User Detail gt Edit Console User Passwords Note that the Username and Password entered during th
17. ccccccccseeccceceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeesseaeeeeeseeeeeessaaes 13 7 MONS IMTORMGIION paaa ANN ANAN AA AA 13 7 Operations Information aNG 13 7 Walkie Talkie IATORMAUON aNG n E nE EEEn 13 7 EESE S p E E LAG E E N E E E E nb 13 7 Stages of Planning and Preparation a 13 8 Pre deployment Activities First Site 13 8 Deployment Activities Per Site 0110 00220 aaaaaaa aaa 13 8 Planning and Preparation Activities 20 00002 asana aasa aa nananana knna aa kkkna aa ksna aa ksna aa 13 9 Developing a List Of Roles 0 2 naaana nananana 13 9 Developing a List Of Groups iiaiai niani aaa ieaiaia 13 9 Planning Walkie Talkie Channels and Addresses 0000022mmm usssanunaaasanasanans 13 9 Planning User Authentication Device Users and Console Users 13 9 Planning PBX Integration a mama asaaaaa nana nNG GG KAN GG KNA NN GG LAAN GNG NAAN GG KK ANN kKKK AA Kks naaa KN 13 10 Developing User Profile Templates and Associations 7 0000amasassanaaassnns 13 10 Developing Custom Business Applications optional cccccssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees 13 10 Identifying Site Specific Settings 13 10 Configuring Site User Lists with Role Group Assignments cccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 10 Configuring a Site Phone Extension
18. http UCAlnstallMachine Motorola UCA ServerManagement GroupManagement asmx This Web service can be used by external programs to modify the UCA group data in the UCA database AddGroup This method adds a Group Dept into the UCA system The groups are added into the B Groups table int AddGroup string sStoreNumber GroupInfo group nfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store Number group nfo Group Information info class that describes the organizational group department ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log Related Classes public class GroupInfo public GrouptInfo string GroupToken string GroupName string GroupExtID bool IsSelectable UCA Server Optional APIs 11 19 Grouplnfo Class Members Table 11 6 GrouplInfo Class Members Class Member Description Group Token Group ID Must be unique GroupName Group name for display purposes GroupExtID Group number IsSelectable Is this group selectable by the user at login RemoveGroup This method removes a group from the UCA system The groups are rem
19. 004 006 Back Figure 4 30 Extensions List Display CA50 Modes of Operation 4 47 6 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to the appropriate extension and press Select to transfer the call all Trsf CN Call transfered Ok Figure 4 31 Call Transferred Display 7 When the call is transferred to the selected extension it appears on the target device as an incoming voice unicast call 8 Press the right soft key Ok to return to the desktop or to the prior business application screen J NOTE When the device detects no user activity after 3 seconds the device defaults to an Ok right soft key press and returns to the desktop or the prior business application screen Parking a Call When the CA50 receives a voice unicast call the call can be parked for retrieval by another CA50 device There are two Call Park options e Parking the call on any available extension allowing the user to pick up the call e Parking the call on an available extension within a group and or department allowing the user to pick up the call J NOTE The options above are available only if they are enabled on the UCA server The system variable corresponding to this setting is Phone Gateway CallPark ByGroup Enable See Table 6 2 on page 6 48 for more information Call park is available only in PBX mode Parking a Call on any Available Extension To park a voice unicast call on any available extension 1 On the
20. 14 34 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Database Errors Phone Book Table 14 24 Phone Book Errors Error Code Description 70011 Exception occurred while getting PB Group List Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 70021 Exception occurred while getting User Extension List By Group Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 70031 Exception occurred while getting UCA Ext Group List Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Device Table 14 25 Device Errors Error Code Description 72011 Exception occurred while adding device Registration Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72021 Exception occurred while getting device Registration Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72031 Exception occurred while updating device Registration Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72041 Exception occurred while removing device Registration Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72061 Exception occurred while getting all inactive devices Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72071 Exception occurred while getting all devices Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72081 Exception occurred while updating device AC status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72091 Exception occurred while updating device activity by user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72101 Exception occurred while updating device activity by IP address Refer to the NT Event Log for more detail
21. 2462 N 2467 oo 2472 14 2484 Allowed Channel by Region Factory Default Channel Mask Reg Key Channels 1 6 and 11 North American Domain Channel Scheme Channels 1 through 11 ESTI Domain Channel Scheme Channels 1 through 13 Japan Channel Scheme Channels 1 through 14 13 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 13 2 Allowable Channels Users and Maximum Power Levels United Japan Frequency States Europe Singapore Cia be glad Channel MH 20 MH 20 10 20 MH elit MHz 81 l MHz MHz MHz p e ppe pff 2 MHz MHz No Z O O O mm mah 2 lo fo lo eee ppp lo fo lo eee ppp a e e eee pref m a p e e epe ppp m a e e p epe ppp m a p e p epe ppf a a e e p fe fe pepp e je p e eee ppi Site Installation Guidelines 13 5 Table 13 2 Allowable Channels Users and Maximum Power Levels Continued United Japan China Israel Korea Frequency States Europe Singapore 5 20 Channel MHz 20 20MHz 20 10 20 MHz MHzl8 MHz MHz law fw e epp fe fe fh ol lll let tS e j e e p pe eph j e e p pe Feth o e eke kke Fb h 20 MHz MHz MHz G1 1 v e fo fe eee ppp a fo p eee ppp 189 2 Eh FE FEE Consult the local authorities these regulations are subject to change at any time The Japanese channels operating at 10 MHz bandwidth operate at half the data rate as the channels with 20 MHz bandwidth for the same mo
22. 4 Enter the group information to change in the appropriate text boxes Any field except Group ID can be updated in this window 5 Click Save to save the edits or Cancel to terminate the session Deleting Groups See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting entries in the UCA server Roles Roles describe the actions and activities of each user For example a role can be a title such as Sales Manager or Sales Representative Roles view displays the current roles in the server In this view create edit and delete roles Groups Roles Add To List For Delete Roles and Groups Returned 3 results Find Role ID J ee rea Role ID Hame C Sales Sales C ErontEnd Front End C Manager Manager Figure 9 33 Roles View Role Number 5590 5591 5592 9 34 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Creating Roles To create a role in the UCA server 1 Click the Roles and Groups tab gt Roles tab gt Create The Role Create window displays Roles and Groups Roles gt Role Create Groups 1 Role Details Role ID must be unique Hame Role Number Save Cancel Figure 9 34 Role Create Window 2 Enter a unique Role ID in the Role ID must be unique text box A Role ID can be an associate title J NOTE Ensure you use a unique string of characters that does not include spaces The Role ID is the key used
23. 4 On the left side of the window under Network Configuration click LAN gt Subnet to configure the WS2000 LAN a WS2000 Wireless Switch ae Network Configuration Subnet1 22 el LAN Description Interfaces Lae Subnet je VLAR Name Subnet VATTEN o lial WAN toy Wireless IP Parameters b T paa Firewall Port Config IF Address 192 1768 0 1 aot Router g IF Filtering Network Mask 755 255 255 0 i LIN System Configuration Default Gateway i ge System Settings S Certificate mart DHCP Gl User Authentication O This interface does not use DHCP X E CO This interface is a DHCP Client 2 Cfa Firmware Mat i Lagging Configuration C ae SNMP Access a KA NTP Servers fa Status amp Statistics Advanced DHCP Serer Update DMS CG This interface is a DHCP Relay d Relay server IF s Ca Figure E 3 Subnet1 Settings a Ensure the static IP address is set to 192 168 0 1 factory default WS2000 setting b Ensure Ports 1 through 6 and WLAN1 are assigned to Subnet 1 The screen should appear as shown in Figure E 3 letter b c Enable the DCHP server by clicking the radio button This Interface is a DHCP Server Set the following Address Assignment Range 192 168 0 100 to 192 168 0 150 d Click Apply est CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 5 On the left side of the window under Network Configuration select Wireless gt WLAN 7
24. 5 When the Scan window displays Waiting as shown in Figure F 2 aim the laser at the appropriate bar code and press the Scan key to scan and decode an RD bar code see Scanning on page 4 16 Upon a successful decode a beep sounds and the CA50 LED blinks green RD bar codes must be scanned in the appropriate order 6 After scanning all the Rapid Deployment bar codes the Processing windows display the status such as device registration or network connection Processing Processing Processing This may take a Registering Device Connecting while Please Wait 123 123 12 23 2 Cancel Figure F 3 Processing Windows 7 The deployment process continues to configure the device When configuration of the device completes the Staging window displays all Staging LI Your Device is Ready to Use Figure F 4 Staging Window 8 Press the right soft key OK to continue When all deployment steps complete a reboot may be required If the device requires a reboot the Reboot Alert window displays before the device boots all RD Ont Device will reboot in 3 seconds Figure F 5 Reboot Alert Window J NOTE f the device required a reboot processing on the device starts at the point it left off prior to the reboot When configuration is complete e The device has a valid network configuration and the CA50 is on the RF network e The UCA client application is ready to communicate with a UCA server The
25. Editing User Information To edit user information in the UCA server 1 Click the Device User Accounts tab gt All Users tab 2 Click the external user ID to edit from the list of users in the External UserID column see Figure 9 19 on page a User detail window displays Device User Accounts All Users gt UCA User Recent Users All Users 1 User Detail First Name Kevin Last Name Smith Common Hame Kevin Smith External UserID 10027318 Role Sales Status A 2 Selectable Groups No selectable groups are currently defined for this user 3 Permenent Groups Details Figure 9 21 UCA User Window 9 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 Click Edit The Edit Phone Extension window displays Device User Accounts All Users gt UCA User gt Edit UCA User Recent Users All Users 1 General User Details First Hame Kevin Last Name Smith Common Name Kevin Smith External UserID Role Sales v Status Active v 2 User Groups Available Selectable Managers These groups are selectable upon logging onto the system Garden i Dept Head New Hire Cashiers Lot Lumber Seasonal Serice Desk Other Paging Permenent These groups are permently assigned to the user Bath Electrical DeptHead Figure 9 22 Edit User Information Window 4 Enter the user information to change in t
26. The Webcode META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the Webcode decoder By default disabled Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies C 11 Custom Tags lt META HT TP Equiv code11 checkd igitcount content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv trioptic39 content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv trioptic39 redu ndancy content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv rss1 4 content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv rsslim content parameter gt lt METAHTTP Equiv rssexp content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv webcode content parameter gt Parameters code11 no check digit verify no check digits code11 one chec k digit verify one check digit code11 two chec k digit verify two check digits Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True Enables the property False disables the property Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder Example lt META HT TP Equiv code11 checkd igitcount Content code11_one_check _digit gt lt META HTTP Equiv trioptic39 Content enabled gt lt META HT TP Equiv trioptic39 redu ndancy Content true gt lt META HTTP
27. autofocus gt lt option selected selected value 1 gt Work Stock lt option gt lt option value 2 gt Move Cages lt option gt lt option value 3 gt Manage Cage lt option gt lt option value 4 gt Manage Aisle lt option gt lt select gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type submit id RightSoftKey value Exit gt lt form gt lt body gt Entering a Date in the Spin Box HTML Mwindowsce B x Fie Zoom Tools Help 15153 Enter Date o7 i8 o08 Hext Cancel Figure l 2 Date in Spin Box Sample HTML Code lt body gt lt form name formli method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx id form1 gt lt input type submit id spinbox name USERID SpinBoxLabel Enter Date SpinBoxLabelPos beforespinbox ShowArrows no SpinBoxLine 2 SpinBoxMaskDigit value LeftBtnLbl Next RightBtnLbl Cancel gt lt form gt lt body gt Sample Business Applications l 9 Scanning Item Enter Quantity Using Spin Boxes When scanning an item and entering the item s quantity the first screen display directs the user to scan an item for which the stock quantity will be entered S windowsce B x File Zoom Tools Help Scan 3n Item Options Back Figure I 3 Scan an Item The next screen display requires the user to enter the stock quantity see Sample HTML Code Add Spin Boxes Post Quantity to Server to use Spi
28. 11 37 B Groups table 11 10 11 15 11 18 aaa Ace tare God E ee HANG 11 19 11 20 11 31 B PhoneExt table 0000 11 16 B Roles table 11 9 11 22 11 23 ia hae ah ACE MANA eed MANAY NANANG 11 24 11 30 11 37 B SystemSettings table 11 6 B User table 11 11 11 29 11 32 ee ge a eee ANG ea poe oe AGE ANG 11 33 11 34 11 36 backlight settings 4 27 bandwidth decrease roam times through channel mask 13 3 number of CA5os deployed per site 13 2 wireless network optimization 13 2 bar code enable disable 0 0 00 c eee eee C 1 enabled ce eee C 2 scan sample 0 000 cee eee eee 4 19 SCANNING dn ate waned om Ge eine A een doe 4 9 4 16 scanning functionality 1 2 supported 0 ce ees C 2 bar code login 1 ee eee 4 3 bar codes Index 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide one dimensional 0c eens 4 15 battery ACCESSOMIES ees B 2 eel AA 4 8 4 17 charging ccc eee eee eee B 13 B 15 battery in CA50 0 00002 eee 3 8 eight slot CA50 charging cradle B 2 B 3 eight slot charger B 2 B 8 firsttime use 0 a 3 8 indications 4 10 4 12 B 4 B 7 B 9 preparing CA50 for use 3 4 single slot cradle B 6 s
29. AppAlertDND AllowTone N AllowVisibleIndicator yY AllowVibrateIndicator Y gt lt Alerts gt lt MetricsLog URI http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client Metrics asmx options PTT Device OuUtgoingCall IncomingCall CollectionInterval 60 gt lt DebugLog gt lt Log category WTT level Error gt hog category Phone level Error gt lt Log category Agent level Error gt lt Log category Browser level Error gt lt Log category Scanner level Error gt lt DebugLog gt lt MenuStates gt lt State ID 1 Name DesktopNoCall LSKey Menu M L FrontMenu RSKey Phn Bk M L PhoneBook LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default 5 lt State ID 2 Name AppNoCall LSKey Options M L FrontAppMenu RSKey Phn Bk M L PhoneBook LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 3 Name DesktopCallActive LSKey Options M L DeskCallActive RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 4 Name AppCallActive LSKey Options M L AppCallActive RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 5 Name DesktopQuietMode LSKey Exit DND S L QuietMode N RSKey LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey detault gt lt State ID 6 Name AppQuietMode LSKey Exit DND S L QuietMode N RSKey LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey deraulc gt lt
30. Called CA50 displays the caller s caller ID If the CA50 puts the call on hold no music on hold is heard on either end If Avaya phone puts the CA50 on hold music on hold is heard on both ends H 3232 P2P e Caller CA50 plays a call progress tone locally e Caller CA50 displays the outgoing caller ID Called CA50 plays a ring tone locally Called CA50 displays the caller s caller ID No music on hold heard on either end SIP PBX e Caller CA50 gets a call progress tone from PBX Caller CA50 displays the outgoing caller ID Called CA50 plays a ring tone locally Called CA50 displays the caller s caller ID If the CA50 puts the call on hold music on hold is heard on both ends if the PBX is setup with music on hold If Avaya phone puts the CA50 on hold music on hold is heard on both ends SIP P2P e Caller CA50 plays a call progress tone locally e Caller CA50 displays the outgoing caller ID e Called CA50 plays a ring tone locally e Called CA50 displays the caller s caller ID e No music on hold heard on either end Cisco Call Manager e Caller CA50 gets a call progress tone from PBX Caller CA50 displays the outgoing caller ID Called CA50 plays a ring tone locally Called CA50 displays the caller s caller ID If the CA50 puts the call on hold music on hold is heard on both ends if the PBX is setup with music
31. Content enabled gt lt META HT TP Equiv code93 redund ancy Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code93 minlen gth Content 30 gt lt META HTTP Equiv code93 maxlen gth Content 30 gt lt META HTTP Equiv i2o0f5 Content enabled gt lt META HTT P Equiv i20f5 verifyche ckdigit Content true gt lt META HTT P Equiv i20f5 reportche ckdigit Content true gt Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies C 7 Table C 1 Custom Meta Tags Continued Symbology Property Description Custom Tags Parameters Example lt META HTTP Equiv i20f5 redundan cy Content true gt lt META HTT P Equiv i20f5 redundan cy content parameter gt True enables the property False disables the property The 120f5 Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 redundancy property 20f5 MinLength The 120f5 MinLength lt META nn O to 55 lt META META Tag is an action HTT P Equiv i20f5 minlength HTTP Equiv i20f5 minlength tag used to set the content parameter gt Content 30 gt code128 min length property l20f5 MaxLength The I20f5 MaxLength lt META nn O to 55 lt META META Tag is an action HT TP Equiv i20f5 maxlengt HTT P Equiv i20f5 maxlengt tag used to set the h content parameter gt h Content 30 gt code128 max length property i20f5 converttoean13 The lt META True enables the lt META HTTP Equiv i2o0f5 i20f5 converttoean13 HT
32. Group Create Groups 1 Group Details Group D must be unique Hame Footwear Group Group Humber Figure D 9 Create a Group 4 Create a Base XML profile association with the Role and Group When the CA50 user logs into the UCA server their role and or group must be associated to a base XML profile For this exercise Footwear xml was created for the association See Step 5 Create an XML Profile Called Footwear xml on page D 6 Profile Management Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 13 Enter the field information shown in Figure D 10 and click Save Profile Associations gt Profile Association Create Profile Associations 1 Profile Association Details Template File Footwear xml Description Footwear Profile Role Shoe Sales v Group Footwear Group Figure D 10 Profile Association 5 Create Phone Book Extensions based on Group a Create four phone extensions extensions 10 11 12 and 13 for the Footwear Group When the users in the Footwear Group login they get one of these extensions To create phone book extensions Phone and WT Phone Extension Pool Phone Extension Pool gt Create Phone Extension Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool 1 Phone Extension Details Group Footwear Group PEX Password Extension Type Dynamic UCA Ext Figure D 11 Create Phone Extension b Repeat this process and create phone extensions for e
33. If sound is not audible there may be a problem with the device The CA50 battery in the device does not From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select charge to select Programs gt UCA Sys Info to verify correct battery temperature voltage and current statistics If the temperature is gt 35 C place the device in the charger and move it to a cooler place CA50 seems sluggish From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select to select Programs gt UCA Sys Info to check memory allocation problems or WLAN connection issues If AVAIL RAM is significantly lower than 18996 or if AVAIL VIRT is significantly lower than 29120 reboot the device If the condition persists contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support see Service Information on page xxi 14 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 5 Troubleshooting the CA50 Device Continued Problem Solution There is no WLAN connection 1 From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select to select Settings gt Network gt Network Status to check the Active Profile and IP If there is no IP address consider connecting to a different network 2 From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select to select Programs gt UCA Sys Info e Use the left soft key Next to display the P screen If there is no IP for the WLAN then there are problems commu
34. Is live profile is a setting that is added to a base profile at login oe HA Is user preference is a setting that can be controlled by the UCA user Figure 9 40 Phone Settings View Phonebook Settings Phonebook settings are values used to configure the way users view phone book extensions Phonebook settings also allow large phone extension lists to be broken out into specified range values System Management system Settings gt System Setting Detail System Settings i System Setting Detail Setting Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount Description The starting number of ranges to attempt to break a list into Value 3 Is Live Profile False Is User Preference False Is live profile is a setting that is added to a base profile at login Is user preference is a setting that can be controlled by the UCA user Help Text Figure 9 41 Phonebook Settings View 9 42 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide High Level System Settings High level UCA server operational settings can be modified by a UCA Administrator who can view and set many system options for Profiles IP addresses Logins Timeouts Web Page allocation Database Maintenance and Media Relay values Systern Management system Settings gt System Setting Detail System Settings 1 System Setting Detail Setting System Notif MediaRelay IPAddress Description IP Address for the Media Relay Server Value 10 10 10 2 Is Live P
35. KI Motorola Installation Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install UCA Server Version 2 0 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder HA Destination Folder pron Files Motorola UC4 Server InstallShield Figure 6 55 nstallation Destination Window 18 Choose the destination directory in which to install the UCA server software The default directory is C Program Files Motorola UCA Server 19 Click Back to change settings or click Next to proceed with the installation The InstallShield begins to extract files and the install runs without further intervention Extracting Files Extracting File setup program files4microsoft sql To Directory c N3bb8094173e2f4bd4be01 520 LILLLLLL Figure 6 56 Extracting Files IMPORTANT This installation requires Internet Information Services IIS If IIS is not installed on the host AN machine the installation aborts 20 The SQL Server 2005 Express is installed Figure 6 57 to Figure 6 64 display in sequence as the install proceeds Framework is already loaded and the computer processor speed During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process stopped 1 IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 15
36. Names M S Range023 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType FirstName gt lt entry ID 5 values Recent Calls M S Recent xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetRecentCal lList sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType ALL amp amp sSortType MostRecent gt 7 30 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 4 name Applications title Appins gt lt entry ID 1 value Price Check S S http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp Sample aspx gt lt entry ID 2 value PriceCheck2 S S http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp2 Default as Dt ae lt Menu gt lt Menu 1D 5 sentry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 6 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 7 centry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 8 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt entry ID 6 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 9 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 10 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt Menu gt lt Men
37. PECOMMOURE MECA SEINE si E H 4 Appendix I Business Applications Supplement MAP OCTIGUIOND samaan aaa haaa AA AA bka l 1 Adding a Menu ODOM AA I 2 Launching a Business Application on UCAClient Startup XAa I 3 Setting the HTML Page Title 2 I 4 Adding a Timer to Visible and Vibrate Indicators I 4 Enabling the BackLight for HTML Pages 110 1 I 5 Download Files Delete Downloaded Files a I 5 Download Files to the CA50 Device Upon User Login cc nananana aa aaaaaaa nasaan l 5 Download Files to the CA50 Device After User Login cc ceeccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees I 6 Delete Downloaded Files a I 6 Adding User Information to the HTTP Header 707070220000sasasasanananaasnnunanaaasananasassana I 6 Assigning a Default Value to the SpinBoxControl ccccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 7 Cl I 7 Code Samples for HTML Pages in Business Applications 7 Enlarging Fonts in a Menu List u 1 I 7 Entering a Date in the Spin Box HTML 1 1 12 a I 8 Scanning Item Enter Quantity Using Spin Boxes a I 9 Adding and Enlarging Images Fonts I 10 Enlarging Special Characters aaa AALAGA DADAANAN GAGA I 12 Table of Contents XV LED Settings HTML Business Application cccccccec
38. RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value DND Text to display over the soft key specified in id lt input type Command This input element allows business application developers to define a name POWEROFF options soft key for users to power off the device id RightSoftKey value PowerOff gt input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name POWEROFF POWEROFF is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to power off the device options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value PowerOff Text to display over the soft key specified in id J 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name REBOOT options value Reboot gt lt input type Commana id RightSoftKey name ABOUT options value About gt This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to cold boot the device input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to exec
39. The phone book provides access to all currently logged in CA50 devices and any and all static or additional extensions The phone book is divided into static and dynamic sections Each dynamic section downloads to the device from the server each time the CA50 is used Dynamic sections are small and do not take a significant amount of time to download no more than a typical screen download Static sections download at CA50 login and can be updated if the server configuration options change By default the Phone Book menu includes the following server configurable options Extensions First Names Last Names Departments and Recent Calls Extension lists all currently logged in extensions and any and all static extensions Last Names lists all currently logged in users by last name On any screen in the Phone Book press the right soft key to go back to the previous screen CA50 Modes of Operation 4 43 To browse the phone book e On the CA50 desktop Figure 4 17 A press the right soft key to display the Phone Book Menu Figure 4 17 B atl 2 10 56 lt i ail 2PhnBk Gm eae Channel 2 Last Names Floor Departments Back A B Figure 4 17 CA50 Desktop A Phone Book Menu B By Extensions 1 To view extensions in the phone book press the Up or Down keys to scroll the Phone Book menu Figure 4 17 B highlight Extensions and press Select to pick an extension The Extensions menu displays a scrollable list of sta
40. The second attribute of the Log entry is the level attribute The level attribute informs the UCAClient application how much information is logged in the log file The values for the level attribute also correspond to the values for the log settings in the UCACleint reg file as illustrated in Table 14 4 Table 14 4 Log Elements Level Attributes Value in the UCAClient reg File Value for the Level Attribute of the for Debug Level Parameters Log Entry in the XML Profile Description 0 Off No logging is provided 1 Info Only information messages are logged in the log file 2 Error Information and error messages are logged in the log file 3 Warn Information error and warning messages are logged in the log file 4 Debug Information error warning and debug messages are logged in the log file J NOTE The only way to disable the UCAClient application from generating a log file is to make the LoggingEnabled parameter a value of zero in the UCAClient reg file and then reboot the CA50 Log settings contained in the XML profile override log settings in the UCAClient reg file when a user profile is received from the UCA server Example Log File Content An example of the content of a log file generated by the UCAClient application is listed below 05 03 2007 05 44 15 56059 000001ms CAgent SetComState wtmode 1 ch 31 05 03 2007 05 44 16 57137 001078ms cancel readnotify requestID 1 notifpending 0 cancelpending 0 05 03 2007 05 44
41. UCA Server Optional APIs 11 47 UCA Phone Extension Screen File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Kg Back gt x a A p Search r Favorites p Z bi Address httpinstallmachine MotorolaUCASamplesiUCAPhoneExtensia Go Links msn nd pe Search i Pop ups Allowed bp Messenger Jj UCA Phone Extension Example Microsoft Internet Explorer Seles r gt UCA Phone Extension Sample Store Number Phone Extension Group Description Extension Password User Credentials User Add Dynamic Extension 2007 Copyright Motorola Inc All rights reserved Figure 11 3 UCA Phone Extension Screen Sample Table 11 15 UCA Messaging Sample Application Screen Fields Field Description Store Number The default store number is 0002 Phone Extension Extension number to add Group Organizational group to which the extension should be assigned Description Description of extension Extension Password Password for extension with the PBX User Password Valid user name and password Windows login for the user of the UCA server machine The optional API is located in a protected directory on the machine 11 48 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 12 Staging and Deploying CA50s Overview To stage and deploy CA50s at a customer site use MSP Stage which establishes communication with the RF infrastructure and initial connectivity to the UCA
42. amp Server Developer amp User Guide User Profile Section J NOTE See page 7 25 and page 7 27 for a sample Base XML Profile and Completed User XML Profile respectively User Profile Elements J NOTE Several User Profile Elements values such as server somecompany com and various values defined in this section come from the UCA Server System Settings database See Table 6 2 on page 6 48 for information about these entries Note that case matters when changing entries in the profile Error does not equal error or ERROR There are eleven elements in the user profile section lt Profile gt 1 User The User element contains the basic user information User ID User Name Store ID Role ID Role Name Primary Group ID and Primary Group Name These values are taken from the UCA Server System Settings database files 2 Audio The Audio element specifies the default gain settings for the various audio paths The audio paths that can be set are Speaker used for walkie talkie and notifications Receiver used for phone calls Mic microphone and HeadsetMic microphone in the headset These settings can be saved as user preferences The first time a user logs on the default values are used When a user logs off the user s current settings are saved and are used the next time that user logs on Valid entries are between O and 6 3 Phone The Phone element specifies all settings necessary to configure the phone component This include
43. details 14 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 11 XML Profile Errors Continued Error Code Description 32036 No matching profile template found for given user login parameters Refer to the NT Event Log for more detail 32061 Exception occurred while removing the user phone extension from the extension pool due to profile build failure See the NT Eventlog for more details 32062 Exception occurred while exporting the profile data See the NT Eventlog for more details 32063 No phone extensions available in the specified group See the NT Eventlog for more details 57034 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a base profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57035 An exception occurred while attempting to get a base profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57061 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to validate a base profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57063 An exception occurred while validating a base profile Error in Schema Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57064 An exception occurred while validating the base profile against the schema Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57065 An exception occurred while validating the base profile against the schema Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57101 Profile already exists in the database 57103 Invalid location specified 57104 Invalid role specif
44. disabled by default Option to Beep or Log the loss of RF Signal This feature is controlled by the following reg keys HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Motorola UCAShell UCAClient SignalLossBeep dword 0 SignalLossLog dword 0 0 No Beep 1 Beep for signal loss 0 No Log 1 Log of signal loss Battery Charging Indications Charge in progress Charge complete Charge error Battery icon in charging state Battery icon fully charged Charge error message CA50 Modes of Operation 4 13 Table 4 5 CA50 Display Screen Indications Continued Display Status No AC power Battery icon Other Do not disturb Status bar icon and desktop text Using an Earbud You can use a mono earbud for audio communication when using an audio enabled application To use an earbud plug the earbud 2 5mm jack into the mono audio connector on the side of the CA50 Plugging an earbud into the jack mutes the speaker Figure 4 8 Mono Earbud Connection 4 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Wireless Security Protocols for the CA50 CA50 wireless security is based on underlying Fusion support At each CA50 release a subset of voice friendly security modes are validated for use with CA50 voice Currently the CA50 supports the following security protocols The most secure are listed first e WPA2 AES see note 1 e WPA TKIP see note 1 e WEP 128 see note 3 e WEP 40 e Open see note 2 WPA2 AES
45. lt META HTT P Equiv code128 Content enabled gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 redun dancy Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 other 128 Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv code 128 minle ngth Content 30 gt lt META HTTP Equiv code128 maxle ngth Content 30 gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 isbt12 8 Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 ean1 28 Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv code39 Content enabled gt Table C 1 Symbology Property Code39 VerifyCheckDigit Code39 ReportCheckDigit Code39 Redundancy Code39 MinLength Code39 MaxLength Code39 FullASCIl Code39 ConvertToCode32 Code39 concatenation Custom Meta Tags Continued Description The Code39 VerifyCheckDigi t META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 verifycheckdigit property The Code39 ReportCheckDi git META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 reportcheckdigit property The Code39 Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 redundancy property The Code39 MinLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 min length property The Code39 MaxLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 max length property The Code39 FullASCII META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 fullascii property The Code39 ConvertToCode 32 META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 converttocode3 2 propert
46. options Application Wav LASER WAV soft key for users to set the ring tone for incoming calls id RightSoftKey value SetRing gt input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name SETRING SETRING is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAClient to set the ring tone on the device to the tone specified in the options property options Application Wav LASER WAV Options is formatted as follows ToneFilename This refers to the tone file that is present on the device id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value SetRing Text to display over the soft key specified in id J 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name PHNPLACECALL options 1 192 168 0 22 1720 012345 value Expert gt lt input type Command name PHONEHANGUP options id RightSoftKey value HangUp gt This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to make a phone call input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pres
47. saaasaaa sana aa asana aa knna aa G nkka an kknnn an ksnananksnnanns 15 3 SON aa AA ADA R 15 4 Appendix A Specifications Teeincal SOCC MC ANOINS saa AR AA NAA AA A 1 CA50 Accessory Specifications A 4 Appendix B Accessories OVVIE aa AA AA EEEE o kad B 1 Accessories Summary 111 a B 2 Eig t Slot CASO Charging Cradle aaa aaah NA LAGDAAN B 3 o c PR AHA MAP PP B 3 Battery Charging WIGICAONS suiriri iaa aa a a B 4 Charging Temperature ccccccccseeeecceeeeeeececeeesecceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeaeeeesseaeeeeseaeeeeesaaees B 4 FU CA GUL AA E E E B 4 Single Slot CA50 Charging Cradle with Spare Battery Charger B 5 OD zan NAA AA AA AA B 5 Charging the Battery a B 6 Charging the Spare Battery aa B 6 Battery Charging Indications a B 7 Charging Temperature 11 B 7 BP CONNECT ANG B 7 Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger aa B 8 Spare mGA APA B 8 Battery Charging Indications a B 9 Charging WS INA AU G AA AA An B 9 EE DANGI S mamam ADAN AA B 9 FOU mama AA LANAO EE AN NANANA NANANA NAA B 10 Lanyard WI CIID cscaccpaaaeteasannasnenneaseysamnsasencmaganeswonnssaseesaenaesananaionnoaeretacenenaapnaceenteaceetarend B 11 Attaching and Removing the Lanyard ccccccceceeceeceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaneeesaeeess B 11 BE AA B 12 COMMUNICATIO
48. string string string string string ExtUsrID firstName lastName userName RoleToken locExtID UCA Server Optional APIs 11 9 public string userStatus public string userPhExtn Groups are listed by Rank public UserGroupInfo aUserGroups public class UserGroupInfo public UserGroupInfo public string GroupToken public int Rank public bool IsSelectable public string GroupName Userinfo Class Members Table 11 1 Userlnfo Class Members Class Member Description ExtUsrID User login ID firstName User first name lastName User last name userName User display name Format last name first initial RoleToken Token representing user role e g Manager Sales FrontEnd etc This data is found in the B_ Roles table locExtiD Location ID store number userStatus User status e g Active Suspended Disabled This data is found in the S_UserStatus Type table userPhExtn User phone extension if user is logged into server If not available the value is NA 11 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UserGrouplnfo Class Members Table 11 2 UserGroupinfo Class Members Class Member Description GroupToken Token for the department This data is found in the B_Groups table Rank Group rank Used for presenting multiple groups to a user A rank of 1 displays first in a list IsSelectable Indicates whether or not a group can be selected in a list p
49. 0 cccescsesssnesesnessstessesessecssssnsnssnsnssnesssnesssnesesssnssssnsisensiseneesseeeseeeeeeees 5 1 10 2 10 2 10 12 E 1 Launching Business Applications u s aasam ssiaamaaiaaaamanaaaaaanamaaaaasasan ARAY 10 2 12 2 Employee Identity Validation Login Bar Codes and PIN cccccccccccccsccccsssssccesescnessssssenstesvesssstsecssassseasenieeessconee 4 3 11 5 11 40 D 15 E 14 AA casenectiresoure sensor anid E NE E ETE ES 10 5 Troubleshooting Error Codes c c cccccscssscscscsesesesesesesssesessesescsesesasasasesssssassssesesssasesssssasasssiesasasesasacsssssssesatanasacaesesssciesananecees 14 4 14 6 14 13 PBX Integration H 323 SIP SCOP aaa 4 37 4 38 6 48 9 13 9 41 13 10 Q MOTOROLA Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 USA 1 800 927 9626 http www motorola com enterprisemobility MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the U S Patent and Trademark Office All other product or service names are the property of their registered owners Motorola Inc 2009 72E 93914 02 Revision A November 2009
50. 16 57341 000204ms CAudioAPI SetVolumes SpeakerVollndex 3 ReceiverVollndex 3 05 03 2007 05 44 16 57435 000094ms CVolPPhone InitPhone InitData SERVERIP 192 168 0 2 LOCALIP 192 168 0 8 NAME Anna Carter EXT 221 PIN 1234 GATEKEEPER Standard MicAtten 25 RcvAtten 80 Recv Ione Application wav ringtone basic wav 05 03 2007 05 44 18 58921 001486ms CAgent SetComState wtmode 0 ch 3 05 03 2007 05 44 18 58923 000002ms CAgent ActivateWindow ACTIVATED 05 03 2007 05 44 18 58934 000011ms new readnotify requestID 1 notifoending 0 cancelpending 0 05 03 2007 05 44 18 58936 000002ms new readnotify requestidt 3 result 0 05 03 2007 05 44 23 64002 005065ms CVoIPWT VoIPWT Callback WTRX Text Event Channel 3 text lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt WTID Text Abigail Jones gt 05 03 2007 05 44 23 64004 000002ms CVoIPWT ProcessWndMessages WTRX Text Msg text lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt WTID Text Abigail Jones gt rx sync id 52308533 expecting sync id 52308533 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 11 05 03 2007 05 44 32 08158 009690ms CVoIPWT VoIPWT Callback WTRX Stop Event Channel 3 ID 0 05 03 2007 05 44 51 26711 018553ms CAgent ProcessWndMessages WM_KILLFOCUS active window 1 05 03 2007 05 44 51 26719 000008ms cancel readnotify requestID 3 notifpending 1 cancelpending 0 05 03 2007 05 44 51 26730 000011ms read cancelled 05 03 2007 05 4
51. 17 e Descriptions of phone book Web service methods page 7 19 e Menu states page 7 22 e Key attribute definitions page 7 23 7 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide XML Profile Overview The XML profile is a file used to configure the CA50 The XML profile can be modified by a developer to reflect a customer s desired CA50 device settings Generally the XML profile is loaded from the UCA server to the CA50 This loading occurs after the CA50 login into the UCA server J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual 3 For XML samples see Base XML Profile Sample on page 7 25 and Completed User XML Profile Sample on page 7 27 Delivery of the XML Profile to the CA50 There are two methods of delivery of the XML profile to the CA50 at login e Recommended method The CA50 receives its XML profile from the UCA server during the login process e Alternate method The XML profile resides on the CA50 in the form of an XML file This method requires the use of a registry key for the client to find the location of the XML file on the CA50 The registry key is as follows HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Motorola UCAClient Params LocalPr
52. 2 4 9 WebConsole aaa 9 2 9 7 walkie talkie profile elements 7 4 wall mount bracket AA B 2 wall mount brackets B 13 B 15 warm boot 4 8 4 17 10 7 12 6 14 6 warm boot to access CA menu 4 18 warranty ACCESSOMIES a na nanana aana jii CADO OEVICE acii ama og ee RTE ee a jii UCA server wawa Kaka a aaa jii Web Console a 6 5 WebConsole delete utility 9 52 9 53 Device User Accounts 9 18 Hnd Utility sea aiara Kan AKNG oe mar 9 52 OO naaa NAA NGA de ee eo a ana eee ane PAWANG 9 3 OVEIVIEW 2 cc eens 9 2 Password 9 10 9 23 phone walkie talkie 0 000 9 7 Profile Management 9 26 Roles and Groups 9 30 System Management 9 37 Index 11 System Status AA 9 5 lee CR PAA AAP PAA 9 47 utilities delete PP 9 52 ii PE 9 52 lag e161 PAA APA sn we RA 9 55 wiping device eee 14 3 X XML profile AA AA 7 9 AUGI AA AA 7 4 debuglog a 7 12 desktop ccc eee ee 7 7 device Config 0 cece eee 7 7 downloadfiles 0 00 cece eee eee 7 6 menu states cee es 12 metricslog aaa GaA aes GA we MS 7 11 phone paham DAGA ANA KANA wean borane ra 7 4 MOONS mangan KGG ba La a eo 7 16 O AA 7 4 walkie talkie 2 0 2 0 eee eee 7 4 xml profi
53. 3 8 9 Review the required settings for this exercise page D 3 Set up the static IP on the server hardware page D 4 Install the UCA server software page D 4 Validate the successful server installation on the laptop page D 5 Create an XML profile page D 6 Populate the UCA server database page D 11 Create a login bar code page D 15 Set up an RF network page D 16 Use MSP to create CA50 Rapid Deployment bar codes page D 76 10 Deploy CA50s page D 78 Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 3 Step 1 Required Site Settings for this Exercise Wireless Network Site Settings e Wireless ESSID UCA e Wireless Encryption None open CA50 and UCA Server Settings e UCA Server Static IP Address 192 168 0 253 Store ID 0002 e CA50 User Names User1 and User2 e External UserID Bar Code 1001 for User1 and 1002 User2 e CA50 User Role Shoe Sales They sell shoes on the showroom floor e CA50 User Group Footwear e Phone Extensions for Group 10 to 13 e Walkie Talkie Channel Channel 3 Only User Backlight Setting Level 3 Installshield SA Password SQLisGreat01 Installshield SQL Database Login ID Motorola02 Installshield SQL Database Password UCAisGreat02 Base XML Profile to Create Footwear xml e PBX Not required PBX is not used in this exercise Business Application Settings e Business Web Application URL http 192 168 0 253 Footwea
54. 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCA KeyCheck This application can be used to test the keys on the device To ensure all CA50 keys are functioning properly 1 On the CA Menu scroll to select Programs gt UCA KeyCheck 2 The application executes and the KeyChk screen displays with the version and instructions for exiting the program KewChk 1 0 Press and Release Lef Soft Key 3 times To Emit 3 To verify each key on the device is operating correctly press the keys listed below to display the appropriate key data NOTE For each key press three sets of information are displayed and the corresponding key code is in the last two lines Example For Walkie Talkie key the correct key code is 193 as shown below Key Chk Key Up 40 Key Down 193 Key Up 193 e Press and release the Down arrow key Key Down 40 and Key Up 40 displays e Press and release the Up arrow key Key Down 38 and Key Up 38 displays e Press and release Scan Select key Key Down 13 WM CHAR 13 and Key Up 13 displays e Press and release left soft key Key Down 37 and Key Up 37 displays e Press and release right soft key Key Down 39 and Key Up 39 displays e Press and release the Volume Up key Key Down 175 and Key Up 175 displays e Press and release the Volume Down key Key Down 174 and Key Up 174 displays e Press and release the Mute key Key Down 173 and Key Up 173 displays e Press and release the side
55. Application key Key Down 194 and Key Up 194 displays e Press and release the front Walkie Talkie key Key Down 193 and Key Up 193 displays 4 To exit the application press and release the left soft key three times CA50 Modes of Operation 4 25 Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCA NLedTest This application can be used to test the green and red LEDs and the vibrator motor on the device To test the LEDs and vibrator motor on the CA50 device 1 9 10 11 12 On the CA Menu scroll to select Programs gt UCA NLedTest Te Programs CA KewCheck US MLedTest UZA ScanXmit The application executes and the main NLed screen displays MLed 1 0 GREEN LED RED LED IBRATOR On the main NLed screen scroll to GREEN LED and press Scan Select to display the GREEN screen Scroll to ON and press Scan Select The green LED turns on Scroll to OFF and press Scan Select The green LED turns off Scroll to BLINK and press Scan Select The green LED blinks on and off five times then turns off Press the right soft key to go back to the main NLed screen On the main NLed screen scroll to RED LED and press Scan Select to display the RED screen RED LED ON OFF ELINK Scroll to ON and press Scan Select The red LED turns on Scroll to OFF and press Scan Select The red LED turns off Scroll to BLINK and press Scan Select The red LED blinks on and off five times the
56. At any time press the right soft key to stop recording AudSamp File LASER wu ai Record When recording stops scroll down to Play and press Scan Select to play the recording See Troubleshooting the CA50 Device on page 14 11 for information about audio problems and solutions 4 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCA Sys Info The UCA Sys Info application can be used to test a variety of situations e Mem screen If the system is sluggish the memory screen displays whether or not resources are low 26500 TOTAL RAM 12020 AVAIL RAM 29120 AVAIL VIRT Mewt Exit e Battscreens Three battery screens display battery status including power source temperature and instantaneous voltage and current draws If charging issues develop these screens display an over temperature condition i Batts 59 mik 4 081 Inst i Inst ma O Inst mA 2 Avg m 35 Deg T 35 Deg ext Exit e IP screen Displays the IP of the network adaptors including USB if the cable is attached The USB IP is 192 168 55 101 If the WLAN device has an IP of 0 0 0 0 it is not connected to an AP If there is no IP address at all for the WLAN adaptor there is a problem communicating with the radio IF 33 0 0 0 0 192 165 55 101 Hext Exit e MAC screen Displays the MAC address of the network adaptors The USB MAC is all zeros The WLAN adaptor MAC is i
57. Business applications can be launched by associating the application URL to the selection of a menu item in the base profile or by associating the application URL to an action taken from the desktop like scanning a bar code In the default sample profiles installed on the server see the desktop element and the application menu elements for examples of both These examples can be modified to reference the URL of any CA50 Web application For more details see Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Automating the Launch of the UCA Client Application For details see page 12 2 Employee Identity Validation For details see PIN Input Figure 4 5 on page 4 3 10 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Request Format The first line of the Request is the Request Line A Request Line consists of the request method GET or POST the absolute URI being requested and the HTTP version The Request Line is terminated by a CRLF Requests use the GET method when form data is not being submitted to the server The GET or the POST method is used to submit form data The method element of the form selector decides whether or not the form data uses the GET or POST method The UCA client application browser uses the POST method when the method element is not contained in the form selector The Request Line is followed by several header fields Header fields have the format name value pair The following examples show th
58. CA50 accessories provide a variety of product support capabilities Accessories include USB cable cradles spare battery charger wall mounts lanyard soft case and earbud See Table B 7 for a full list of accessories and descriptions 1 For a complete checklist make al nG elas ane i as activities required to implement J NOTE a CA50 solution see the l lopment and Deployment Checklist on pag 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual B 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Accessories Summary Table B 1lists the accessories available for the CA50 Table B 1 CA50 Accessories Accessory Description Page Cradles Eight slot CA50 charger with power Eight slot cradle for charging up to eight CA50 devices supply and DC line cord mounting simultaneously bracket sold separately Eight slot battery charger with Eight slot battery charger for charging up to eight CA50 power supply and DC line cord batteries simultaneously mounting bracket sold separately Single slot CA50 and spare battery Single slot cradle for charging one CA50 with battery charger with power supply and DC installed and one spare battery simultaneously line cord Battery Accessories Eight slot battery charger with Eight slot battery charger for charging up to eight CA50 power supply and DC line cord batteries simultaneously mounti
59. CA50 keystroke to send a packet to the UCA server When a CA50 user logs into the UCA server it provides all the information needed to configure the UCA client application and all peripheral components that reside on the device The UCA client application also receives static menus that include the walkie talkie channel options user preference selection options etc For details see Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration When the phone book is previously viewed from the CA50 any portion of the static phone book viewed from the CA50 and only this portion of the phone book is cached on the CASO If the UCA server is temporarily not accessible the CA50 can access the cached phone book information CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide The static menus can also refer to dynamic menus that are downloaded from the UCA server on demand via Web service calls The UCA client application is designed to get almost all of its information from the UCA server An exception to this rule is staging information required at the site deployment such as Store Number UCA server IP address and Language This staging information is loaded into the CA50 by scanning MSP generated Rapid Deployment bar codes The UCA client application uses these values to connect the CA50 to the UCA server and go through the logon process When the user is logged in the server sends the client profile data containing the user s device configuration any personal
60. CCUR Beasties sled AA 6 54 SSL Secure Socket Layer a 6 54 Directory Level Password Protection for Sensitive Web Services 6 57 Encryption Decryption of the UCA Server Configuration Files 6 57 Encryption of Passwords Stored in the UCA Database aa 6 57 CA50 Capabilities with an Offline UCA Server u a 6 58 Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration S AA AAAH PAA AR 7 1 KME PONG ONG JON AGANG ANAK AA AA AG 7 2 Delivery of the XML Profile to the CA50 Uu 7 2 XML Profile Layout AA AO 7 3 Uoer PONE GC CUON maan AGA AA 7 4 User Profile Elements 1 a 7 4 AC MENUS AA 7 13 Menu Elemen serine AA AA E 15 Changing the Ring Tone for the UCAClient Application 777 7 aaaaaan 7 16 Modifying Phone Book Menu Behavior a 7 17 Descriptions of Phone Book Web Service Methods cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 7 19 Menu SACS AA AA AA AA AA PA EHE 7 22 KEY Attribute DefNMUONS amamaa NANA NAAGNAS sates 7 23 Setting up Walkie Talkie Channels in the Base Profile ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 24 Base XML Profile Sample aa 7 25 Completed User XML Profile Sample 22 aii 7 27 Chapter 8 XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration NG NG AA ANA AA AA AA NA 8 1 Profile and Menu Contents 8 1 ThE O
61. Call parked on 150 Pickup Ok Figure 4 40 Park Display On a logged in device other than the device on which the call was parked No Extension Available to Park When no extensions are available to park a voice unicast call the display shows an All extensions taken message Press the right soft key Back to return to the Call Options menu Figure 4 37 to try again or select another option see Transferring a Call on page 4 46 and Hold on page 4 53 4 50 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Retrieving a Parked Call Retrieving a Parked Call from any Extension To retrieve a parked voice unicast call from the desktop ail 3 10 52 MT First name L x123 Menu Phn Bk Figure 4 41 Desktop Display 1 On the Desktop Figure 4 41 press the left soft key Menu to display the Desktop menu Figure 4 42 Desktop Menu 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to Parked Calls and press Scan Select S The Pick menu displays This menu lists all parked extensions Extension numbers vary based on numbers assigned by a store administrator wall Pick mT 150 151 Back Figure 4 43 Call Pick Menu 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to an extension in the list and press Scan Select S When selected the parked call on the extension unparks and the Active Call displays aIl 10 54 Om Smith T 0 01 Options End Figure 4 44 Active Call Display J NOTE
62. Click the User Defined button e Select Stage CA50 for the bundle e Click the Next button e Deselect any bar code configuration you do not wish to use e Click the Finish button Refer to MSP documentation to print RD bar codes from the staging profile called Stage the CA50 Refer to Appendix F Rapid Deployment to use Rapid Deployment on the CA50 Auto launching the UCA Client Application The CA50 can be programmed to automatically launch directly into the UCA client application with no user intervention by selecting reboot and setting the type of reboot to Warm as directed in bullet 15 under Creating an MSP bundle J NOTE For auto launch to take effect the entire staging process through and including Creating an MSP staging profile must be completed When the type of reboot is set to Warm auto launch into the UCA client application is activated in the following conditions e after scanning RD bar codes e after performing a warm boot e after performing a cold boot e after removing inserting a battery Staging and Localization If the CA50 device is staged using MSP versions prior to MSP 3 2 1 the language option does not appear in the UCA settings and the CA50 device does not receive language information during the staging process The CA50 login screen displays in English only After the device logs in all display switch to the language set during the installation of UCA server software Staging and Deploying CA5
63. DDr ON aa AN AA AA AA AA 8 2 AML Profile LAYOUT maa ABG TAGAK AA NAA 8 3 XML Profile Profile Section 12 2 2Z2X22 2 aaa 8 3 XML Profile Menu Section Uu 8 3 XML Profile Profile Section oo eee cece eccecceeceecece eee eceecucaecaeeaeceeceeseeaeseeceeseeaeeaeeneensanees 8 4 Create New Profile 2 0 0 0 cccccccccccecececcccececececucececaccecececeeceueauaesusesscaeaeacauauaenstscsvavavavass 8 4 Table of Contents PRONE eo NS as seca ets cite saes EE sakes sas sue ane sae aati cua E aneaeeeeencnsiiee 8 6 Walkie Talkie Settings ccccccccccccccssseeceseeeeceeceeeeeeesseeeeeeeseaseeesseeaeeeesseeseeeseaaeeees 8 7 Download Files Settings a 8 10 DEeklop CUNG saa AA E E NA 8 11 Volume Settings 1 112110 aa 8 12 Memic S Logging aman a EAE ANA EE 8 13 DEVICE SEUNS naaa rE a e EA aa AA GA PAA RE 8 14 CINESE INS a E N 8 15 Aler CUMIN S coireanna ea E E E 8 16 SS MEN ear E E E AA AA AA AA 8 21 Add Menu Elements xsanccacconseceseccsnteaanrsssaneeennsecscuncnaaebecannceanctanentmenesneioensoanesctannsiancte 8 22 Add a Static Menu Element ccccceeccccceseceeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeceeaesecesaeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeetsaaess 8 23 Add a Dynamic Menu Element ccccccccssceccseeeceeeeeceeeeceueeeceesessseeseusesseseeseneess 8 24 Add a Client Command Menu Element cccccceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeseeseeeeeeeseeeees 8 25 Add a Server Action Menu Element
64. Developer amp User Guide RemoveDeviceUser This method removes a device user from the UCA system The user is removed from the B_USER table in the UCA database int RemoveDeviceUser string sStoreNumber string sUser string ipAddr ret UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber User s store number sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when address logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UpdateDeviceUser UCA Server Optional APIs 11 33 This method updates device user information in the UCA server system The user s information is updated in the B USER table in the UCA database int UpdateDeviceUser User nfo newUserlnfo string ipAddr ret UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters Userlnfo Userlnfo class that describes the user described above ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when address logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 34 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide SetDeviceUserPIN This method sets a device user PIN in the UCA
65. During installation of UCA server software the User Interface prompts the administrator to select a Language ID from a list of supported languages for the application Prior to installation the Windows 2003 Operating System should be configured for the appropriate locale The installation administrator must update the database with the appropriate changes using the install scripts to support localization Table 15 1 Localization System Settings System Variables Description isLiveProfile isUserPreference Path where the resource files are False False stored Default Value C Program files Motorola UCA Server Resource Files System Language LanguagelD Locale selected during installation False False Default Value en US Table 15 2 Language Culture Names System Resource Path Language Culture Name Language fr FR French France it IT Italian de DE German es ES Spanish ko KR Korean ja JP Japanese en US English Staging Staging is the installation step for the CA50 device There are separate BSP images for each locale with all the necessary font and culture settings See Staging and Localization on page 12 6 for more information about staging System Language LanguagelD also known as the language culture name is a string Table 15 2 lists the supported language culture names and their corresponding languages Based upon the value of the System Language LanguagelD the appropriate resource file is applied and t
66. Hold and Transfer are available via soft keys When the call ends the device returns to the desktop or prior business application screen see Sample Business Application on page 4 54 To make a voice unicast call 1 Browse the phone book to find the person to call see Browsing the Phone Book on page 4 42 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and press Select on the extension name or department to call A voice unicast call connects see Voice Unicast Calls on page 4 36 Receiving a Voice Unicast Call The device can receive a call on any screen By default a voice unicast call overrides all other device operations For information about voice unicast calls while in business application see Sample Business Application on page 4 54 When a call comes in a ring tone sounds and green LED blinks On an incoming call the caller ID displays hs 10 52 On Abruzzo R Answer Ignore Figure 4 24 Incoming Call Display Press the left soft key to answer the call or press the right soft key to ignore the call and return to the prior screen When the call is answered the active call screen displays all 7 10 52 MT Abruzzo R 0 01 Options End Figure 4 25 Active Call Display During the call press the left soft key to display options such as Hold and Transfer For information about voice unicast calls while in business application see Sample Business Application on page 4 54 4 46 C
67. Menus amp bharu Sias Manu Creation Figure 8 27 Add Menu 3 Click the plus sign to the left of menus to expand the tree 8 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Select the newly added menu item under Menus Menu11 to display Main Menu UCA Profile Builder New Menu Menus amp Meru States E Merwe Piai bieri Menu Tilla Menu States Benu Hamz Figure 8 23 New Added Menu 5 Type a menu title e g Options in the text box under Main Menu 6 Type a menu name e g AppCallActive in the text box under Main Menu Henus Meru States E Manut Hiari Meru Menu Meru Tille pions Menu States es Meru Name AppCalctive Figure 8 29 Enter Menu Name Add Menu Elements There are four types of menu elements 1 Static menu element Refers to one more static menu in the profile 2 Dynamic menu element This is a menu generated dynamically either in the device itself or from external source through a web request 3 Client command Refers to a command executed when a menu item is selected XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 23 4 Server action Refers to a special action taken by executing the URI specified on the UCA server Hain ben Add Static Manu Element Add Dynamic Menu Bement Add Chent Command Add Servar Action Remove Figure 8 30 Menu Elements Add a Static Menu Element To delete any menu select the menu to delete right c
68. Mode phone call or running any business application The device keys can be configured to take certain actions when the device is in desktop state Scan Button URL suto If a value is supplied in the URL attribute and the corresponding key is pressed the browser loads that URL Up Button URL Default URL Down Button URL Defaut URL Front PTT Button URL Default URL Side PTT Button URL Default URL Auto Launch URL Default URL New Profile Creation Figure 8 13 Desktop Settings Table 8 4 Desktop Settings Field Description Scan Button URL Business Application URL to launch when a bar code is scanned from the desktop Up Button URL Business Application URL to launch when the Up arrow key is pressed from the desktop Down Button URL Business Application URL to launch when the Down arrow key is pressed from the desktop Front PTT Button URL Business Application URL to launch when the front Walkie Talkie FPTT key is pressed from the desktop Side PTT Button URL Business Application URL to launch when the side Walkie Talkie SPTT key is pressed from the desktop Auto Launch URL Business Application URL to launch as soon as the user logs into the UCAclient without any user action 8 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Volume Settings The volume settings define the default values for the audio paths headset microphone speaker and receiver The default values are used for the first ti
69. Note that when enabled scanning a bar code to exit the UCA client application works only when the user is logged in Enable Notification Checking this enables notifications unchecking this disables notifications Notification On Active Call Check to enable notifications while on a phone call uncheck to disable Cache TimeToLive Ignored currently not implemented Notification Msg Timeout The time in seconds for a notification message to display Press And Hold Time Ignored currently not implemented Alert Settings Use the Alert Settings section to configure various alerts on the device for various events It defines the type of indication to provide in terms of the following e Tone played e Visible indicator lighting up LED in different colors and or blinking the LEDs e Vibrate Indicator For example The NotifCallActive setting controls the kind of alert provided when a notification is sent during an active call This defines the kind of tone to play whether the LED blinks or not which LED blinks and how fast This also controls if the device vibrates and how fast UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Wineele Indication Visble Indicator Hane Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 19 Alert Settings XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 17 Choose the setting and select the options in the corresponding alert details section of the window Click Help for detailed descriptions of each alert typ
70. On e On with Keypress Yes No 4 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description Scanner Press Scan Select to modify the setting below press Up Down keys to scroll options list Scnr Name Displays the name given to the device Reader Params Displays Reader Type Aim Type Aim Duration Aim Mode Beam Width Beam Timer Redun Security Level Note Not all Reader Parameter settings can be modified Interface Params Displays Interface Type Enbl Stl Time Pwr Stl Time Scan Params Displays ID Type Scan Type Local Feed Dcd Beep Time Dcd Beep Freq Dcd LED Time Dcd WAV File Start Beep Time Start Beep Freq Start LED Time Start WAV File Inter Beep Time Inter Beep Freq Inter LED Time Inter WAV File Fatl Beep Time Fatl Beep Freq Fatl LED Time Fatl WAV File NFatl Beep Time NFatl Beep Freq NFatl LED Time NFatl WAV File Act Beep Time Act Beep Freq Act LED Time Act WAV File CA50 Modes of Operation 4 29 Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description Network Press Scan Select to modify the setting below press Up Down to scroll options list e Network Status Displays Active Profile and IP Address e Manage Profiles Add or manage existing profiles Add To add a profile you must create test bar codes using a third party tool for Profile Name and SSID as well as other fields that require data input e Option
71. Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserlD of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required rolelnfo Reference to a rolelnfo class see Table 11 7 on page 11 23 WS Status UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful When successful rolelnfo is populated with the specified role information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Device Messaging Web Service In the default installation the Device Messaging Web Service is located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA ServerManagement DeviceMessaging asmx This Web service can be used by external programs to send an asynchronous message to a logged in CA50 device user Device Messaging Web Service Methods SendNotification This method sends an asynchronous message to a CA50 device Int SendNotification string sStoreNumber NotifDest destinfo DynamicNotifParams notifinfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store Number destinfo Destination information class that describes where the message is sent notifInfo Notification information provides details about the notification ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS c
72. Passwords Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above er C zuide Upgrading the Demo Version to Production To upgrade the Demo version of the UCA server software to the Production version 1 Start the UCA Server Software for the CA50 CD 2 From the CD main menu double click the Motorola UCA Server 2 0 5 exe The Welcome window displays Motorola Installation Wizard E3 UCA Server Software 2 0 Thank you for choosing Motorola for your enterprise mobility solution This installation wizard will upgrade your current UCA Server 2 0 installation from Demo to Production Version To continue click next InstallShield Figure 6 43 Welcome 3 Click Next on the Welcome window The License Agreement displays Motorola Installation Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully MOTOROLA INC END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Motorola is willing to license its Software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this License Agreement Agreement IMPORTANT READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCTS BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON BELOW YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AG
73. Pool 107777 13 10 Configuring Additional Phonebook Entries mawa nana nananana nnnnnnnaaaaksssnananann 13 10 Chapter 14 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages ONG NEN AA AN AA AA AA NA AA 14 1 Maintaining the UCA Server Uu 14 2 scheduled Data WaINtEN ANCE icccincceesnaecenctenscortancaeseccmsnteanaacectensnndeadecxnedenntenldnceneeeds 14 2 Keeping System Data and Configuration Up to Date X a 14 3 Maintaining the CASO sm AA ANN AA AA AA Aa 14 3 Cleaning and or Disinfecting a 14 3 PK co le 21 0s Ide AA AA AA AA AA 14 4 UCA Server Installation Uninstall 0 20 2 2 kaaa 14 4 xil CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide ORC CIEN AA AA 14 6 GASO DEVIC AA AA 14 11 UCA Server System Error Code Number Index U 1007777 14 13 Client Generated Error Messages a 14 13 UCA Server System Error Code Number Ranges u 101117777 14 16 aenea EOIS eona AA Aa bA 14 16 UGA Database IONS ama Da AA AABANG NENA AGE 14 17 aen lE AN AN AA AA 14 18 UCA Database Errors 14 34 Chapter 15 Localization Overview UU AA 15 1 UCA Server Localization 20 eee eee cece cecceceeceeceeceeceeaeceeceeceaecaecaeeuecuecesaesaeceeceeseeaestecesetans 15 2 CA50 Device Localization 11 117272QXQXQXQXX 15 3 Business Application Localization 0
74. SQL Database Server Login IMPORTANT Microsoft Strong Password Guidelines for SQL Server 2005 authentication AN Strong passwords are not readily guessed by a person and are not easily hacked using a computer program Strong passwords cannot use prohibited conditions or terms including a blank or NULL condition Password Admin Administrator sa sysadmin Password criteria is a minimum of 8 ASCII characters 9 Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays Motorola Installation Wizard UCA Cien Langue Install tod Figure 6 26 UCA Client Language Window 10 Select a language from the Language ID drop down list This is the language to display on the CA50 device at login Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install UCA Server Version 2 0 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder AA C Program Files Motorola UCA Server f estination Folder InstallShield Figure 6 27 Installation Destination Window 11 Choose the destination directory in which to install the UCA server software The default directory is C Program Files Motorola UCA Server 6 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 12 Click
75. Service Methods cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 11 40 Customizing the Console Login Process 11 43 UCA Server Optional API Samples 0 aa 11 44 UCA Messaging Sample a aanam ants 0 encase caves La SANA NAA KA AA AG 11 44 UCA Phone Extension Sample amanda ADARNA LAAN 11 46 Table of Contents NG Chapter 12 Staging and Deploying CA50s OV GIO AA HA 12 1 Staging and Deploying CA5OS a 12 2 Rapid Deployment Bar COGS rierien AG AYA 12 2 UCA settings xml File for Configuring the UCA Client Application 12 2 staging Frocess Tor a CASO AA AP 12 4 Auto launching the UCA Client Application cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 12 6 gno and PO CAI ZION sa E E 12 6 OS UCA Client Application Upgrades Pushed from MSP Provision 12 7 Minimizing Network Traffic from the MSP Agent a 12 7 Chapter 13 Site Installation Guidelines QU eee E E AA AA tence 13 1 Site Installation Guidelines Overview 1 11 13 2 Maximum Number of CA50s Deployed Per Site a 13 2 Wireless Network Optimization 13 2 Decrease Roam Times Through a Channel Mask ccccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesees 13 3 Battery Management sasicesacecivandesivcnsaanisubects tani leitddhuniveeneoniaeceeneigncustdeatenseseteinenreausrnes 13 6 UCA Server Requirements
76. State ID 7 Name DesktopCallOnHold LSKey Options M L DeskCallOnHold RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 8 Name AppCallOnHold LSKey Options M L AppCallOnHold RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt MenuStates gt lt Profile gt lt Menus gt lt l XML Profile for Configuration 7 29 Menu Entry values are formatted as follows Entry Text Opt1 Opt2 data where Entry Text Displays as the menu item to be selected Opt1 Is Mor S for M enu or S pecial option Opt2 Is S or L for S erver or L ocal data with Opti and Opt2 is as follows M L Menu Name Specifies the name of another locally stored menu M S Menu xmI URI 7 Specifies the name of dynamic menu and Web service to retrieve the dynamic menu and is then cached locally under the label menu xml S L Command options Specifies an agent recognized action with possible options S S URL URL to send to browser This could also be handled as S L GoToURL URL 5 lt Menu ID 1 name FrontMenu title Menu gt lt entry 1D 1 valuez Applications M I1 Applications 5 lt entry ID 2 value WT Channels M L FrontWTChannels gt lt entry ID 3 value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt lt entry ID 4 value Parked calls M L CallPick gt lt entry ID 5 value Key lock S L KeyLock gt lt entry ID 6 value Do N
77. TP Equiv i20f5 convertto property Content enabled gt META Tag is an action ean13 False disables the lt METAHTTP Equiv ean13 tag used to set the i20f5 content parameter gt property Content enabled gt converttoean13 property lt META HTT P Equiv i20f5 convertto ean13 Content true gt l20f5 Redundancy Discrete 2 of 5 D20f5 The D2of5 META Tagis lt METAHTTP Equiv D2o0f5 Enabled enables lt META HT TP Equiv D2of5 an action tag used to content parameter gt the decoder Content enabled gt enable or disable the Disabled disables D2of 5 decoder the decoder D20f5 Redundancy The D2of5 Redundancy lt META HTTP Equiv D2o0f5 True enables the lt META HTTP Equiv D2of5 META Tag is an action redundancy property redundancy tag used to set the content parameter 5 False disables the Content true gt D2of5 redundancy property property D20f5 MinLength Sets the minimum lt META HTTP Equiv D20f15 nn O to 55 lt META HTTP Equiv D2o0f5 number of characters to minlength minlength Content 30 gt nn content parameter gt D2o0f5 MaxLength Sets the maximum lt META HTTP Equiv D2o0f5 nn O to 55 lt META HTTP Equiv D2of5 number of characters to maxlength maxlength Content 30 gt nn content parameter gt Codabar Codabar The Codabar META Tag lt META Enabled enables lt META is an action tag used to HTTP Equiv Codabar the decoder HTTP Equiv Coda
78. Tags Parameters Symbology Property Description E13 Co ET E3 Example MSI MSI msi ReportCheckDigit msi MinLength META msi MaxLength META msi CheckDigitScheme msi checkdigits The msi META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the msi decoder By default enabled The msi ReportCheckDigit META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi reportcheckdigit property The msi MinLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi min length property The msi MaxLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi max length property The msi CheckDigitScheme META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi CheckDigitScheme property The msi checkdigits META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi checkdigits property lt META HTTP Equiv msi content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv msi reportchec kdigit content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv msi minlength content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv msi maxlength content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi CheckDigit Scheme content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv msi checkdigits content parameter gt Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables reporting of the check digit False disables reporting of the check digit nn 0 to 55 nn O to 55 msi chkdgt mod 11 10 1st check digit is MOD 11 2nd is MOD 10 msi chkdgt
79. Templates and Associations The user profile templates define access rights and privileges for various associates who use the CA50 Privileges are related to an associate s role and the primary association of a profile template is based on role Developing Custom Business Applications optional To provide associates with additional capabilities such as price checking item location task management etc custom Web applications can be developed for the CA50 to access over the network Sample price lookup applications are provided as examples in the UCA server install J NOTE For sample business applications see Appendix Business Applications Supplement Identifying Site Specific Settings As each site is deployed there are settings in the DB that are specific to the network structure at the site This includes the UCA server address or host name PBX address and URLs for any business applications used by the CA50 Depending upon the network characteristics there are some network timeout settings that may need to be adjusted For more information see the Base XML Profile Sample on page 7 25 WebServiceResponse Timeout CacheTimeToLive BadRFSampleThreshhold GoodRFSampleThreshhold and MinSignalStrength Configuring Site User Lists with Role Group Assignments If the built in Device User Authentication is used the tables must be seeded with the users at the site Since the UCA login process depends upon a role and group for the associate lo
80. UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Reconfigure the UCA Server The reconfiguration updates the UCA Server IP Address Store ID PBX IP Address PBX Port Number IIS Port Number and cleans the transient information present in database tables along with the UCA Users and Phone Extension table J NOTE t is not necessary to supply all fields for reconfiguration Reconfigure any one of the parameters or all the parameters UCA Backup amp Restore C Backup Restore Reconfigure Database details UCA database credentials IF Address UCA OB Username Sa Password UCA OB Password Reconfigure details Server IP Address 192 168 7 23 WS Port Number 8080 Store ID OOo Cleanup Phone Extentions PEs IP Address 192 168 7 54 Cleanup Temp Tables PBs Port E070 Cleanup Device Users C Reconfigure Figure H 4 Reconfigure the UCA Server To reconfigure the UCA Server 1 Select the Reconfigure radio button 2 Server Information Store ID Server IP Address PBX IP Address PBX Port and IIS Port Number and Cleanup fields are available for the reconfigure process 3 Any of the specific information server IP PBX IP etc can be configured separately 4 Click Reconfigure to initiate the operation 5 A message box indicates that the reconfigure operation is successful Appendix Business Applications Supplement Introduction This chapter provides examples and tips
81. When a parked call is not picked up within the time configured in the PBX the PBX may transfer the call back to the originating device 4 Press the right soft key to End the call CA50 Modes of Operation 4 51 Retrieving a Parked Call from an Extension Within a Group Department To retrieve a parked voice unicast call from the desktop ail 3 10 52 MT First name L x123 Menu Phn Bk Figure 4 45 Desktop Display 1 On the Desktop Figure 4 45 press the left soft key Menu gt Options to display the Call Options menu WT channels Key lock Parked Calls Figure 4 46 Desktop Menu 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to Pickup and press Scan Select S The Dept s menu displays il Dept s CT Bath Garden Back Figure 4 47 Dept s Menu J NOTE Only Groups with parked calls show in the Dept s menu For example if calls are parked only in the Bath Group Bath is the only Group to display If calls are parked in both the Bath and Garden Groups both Groups display 3 On the Dept s menu press the Up or Down keys to scroll to the appropriate Group Department and press Scan Select S The Pick menu displays This menu lists all parked extensions within the Group selected from the Dept s menu Figure 4 47 Extension numbers vary based on numbers assigned by a store administrator wal Pick MI 149 150 151 Back Figure 4 48 Call Pick Menu 4 52 CA50 UCA Client amp Se
82. address but listens to different channels on different ports If the increment type is set to IP address the device subscribes to multiple multicast addresses for the different channels For example if the base Multicast IP address is 239 192 2 2 and the channel increment type is set to IP address the device subscribes to IP address 239 192 2 3 for Channel 1 239 192 2 4 for Channel 2 etc The device sends the WT messages to different multicast addresses for different channels but listens to different channels on the same port base port DownloadFiles The UCAClient has the capability to download files from an http server to the CA50 device This is useful when downloading custom wav files to be used with notification or business applications Information about the files to download can be provided in the profile xml as follows lt DownloadFiles DownloadAtStartUp Y gt lt File ATTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HITPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt DownloadFiles gt Attributes e DownloadAtStartUp Y Select Y to download the files at user logon e HTTPURL Source file location and name e PathOnDevice Destination path on the CA50 device The path on the CA50 device where the files are downloaded is Application Download e OverWrite N Select Y to overwrite the existing file on the CA50 device if applicable Ex
83. ae AN eae 4 27 business applications 1 2 system info ee ees 4 29 business apps 0 eee eee eee 10 2 UCA client app 0 0 4 19 client desktop link defaultscan 6 48 6 56 UCA key check 0 0a ee eee a 4 24 considerations 000 cee eee eee 4 15 UGA LED TEST cscs oie a a a da dans 4 25 4 26 default Scan u un aaaea 7 7 UCA SyS MIO 524 2 dea Bee 4 22 4 23 demo solution 0 00 e eee eee E 14 UG ARINO ara eS a dog art Sree a desc eee E 4 27 deviceconfig element 7 8 enabled code types C 2 R engine eee eee C 1 Indications 00 00 ee eee 4 10 4 11 4 12 rapid deployment 4 19 F 1 Le ona peers etter ee eos re a 4 2 4 3 6 4 RD See rapid deployment le AA 4 4 rebooting max power save a aaa 3 9 COA NOON paa AG AA AN es ee ee 4 17 mode o caia adea aena 4 5 4 31 4 33 4 35 7 5 ODON sedia eei e a PARA 3 12 non scan mode 2 cece ee 4 5 re accessing the CAmenu 4 18 rapid deployment 000 ee eee F 1 warm boot a 4 17 RD bar codes 0 0a E 11 RECEIVED aa drt nri se ae are amp ee aa GA 3 2 4 9 scan select key 3 2 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 17 4 19 removing battery anaana cee eee 3 5 scannerdebuglevel 14 8 14 9 retrieve call scansamp app 4 19 14 11 from any exte
84. attempt log in again User is already logged in Respond Yes to close current user session and continue log in Already logged in log in process here instead displays Respond No to return to log in screen Client does not turn on Lithium ion battery not Charge or replace the lithium ion battery in the device charged Lithium ion battery not Ensure battery Is installed properly See nserting and Removing installed properly the Battery on page 4 System crash Perform a warm boot If the device still does not turn on perform a cold boot See Resetting the CA50 on page 17 Rechargeable Ambient battery charging Move the cradle and device to another location with ambient lithium ion battery did temperature was too high temperatures between 0 C and 35 C See Charging Temperature not charge or too low on page 7 Charge timer expired If a battery repeatedly causes a timer expiration when charging because the battery from a dead or very low state take battery out of service and continuously charged for replace it with a new battery more than 4 5 hours Expiration of the timer can be determined if the ambient temperature is within 0 C to 35 C accompanied by a blinking red LED and an insert charge fault icon on the display Usable battery life may be expended Battery failed Replace battery If the device still does not operate perform a warm boot then a cold boot See Resetting the CA50
85. be immersed in or soaked with liquid To clean the device a cloth or wipe moistened with alcohol is recommended To disinfect the device standard sterilization wipes may be used Cleaning and or Disinfecting Wipes are the recommended methodology for cleaning the CA50 to avoid infiltration of liquid into the IP40 sealed housing Cleaning the CA50 with a damp disinfecting wipe and allowing it to open air dry will not damage the unit Prolonged soaking with a liquid agent may cause internal damage The following agents have been tested and approved e Sodium Hypochlorite e Alkyl dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride e Ammonium Chloride e Hydrogen Peroxide e lsopropanol Phosphoric Acid e isopropanol 14 4 CAb0 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Troubleshooting UCA Server Installation Uninstall Table 14 1 Troubleshooting UCA Server Install Uninstall Symptom Cannot load server software HTTP 404 Error Not Found when navigating to the Console Login page Waiting for Server Response Error Retry 10 9 8 7 seconds displays on a CA50 with connectivity bars in the upper left display corner Checking for updates CA50 reboots or the message displays every 15 seconds During install Error 27506 displays password validation failed The password does not meet Windows policy requirements because it is not complex enough Reinstalling on a target machine that had a previous version of the
86. but the user is logged out The MSP policy can only function properly if the CA50 MSP agent is enabled Refer to the latest MSP documentation on how to create a policy with the universal condition and how to activate the policy MSP Setup on the CA50 for MSP Provisioning Perform the following steps to perform periodic check ins based on a universal condition 1 Creating the universal condition for the UCAClient application e Ina Web browser go to http server ip msp web to log in to an MSP server e Select the Library tab e Select the Conditions tab e Click the Create button e Select Universal condition xml for the condition type e Enter a name for the condition such as UCALoggedOff e Select the Next button e Enter a description for the condition such as condition for UCA e Select Constraint based on the registry key or value existence for the Constraint Type e Select Test for the existence of the selected item for the Test Condition e Select HKEY LOCAL MACHINE for the Registry Base Key e Enter Software Motorola UCAClient LoggedOff for the Registry Key or Value Name In this case it is a registry key because of the after LoggedOff e Click the Finish button 2 Policies with the universal condition for the UCAClient application Any policies created with this condition cause the MSP client to only perform a policy when a user is logged out The UCAClient application removes the universal condition registry key defined above
87. client See the NT Event log for more details Device Management Table 14 10 Device Management Errors Error Code Description 51092 Could not retrieve the required client version for this version of UCA server from the database 51093 An Exception occurred Could not retrieve the required client version for this version of UCA server from the database 51101 A data layer exception occurred during device registration 51105 Device registration update failed during device registration 51107 A new device could not be registered 51108 An exception occurred during device registration Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 19 Table 14 10 Device Management Errors Continued Error Code Description 51131 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get the assigned store number for a given MAC address 51162 Could not retrieve the minimum client version for this version of UCA server from the database 51163 An Exception occurred Could not retrieve the minimum client version for this version of UCA server from the database 51201 A data layer exception occurred Device info not updated 51205 Device update failed because of data layer error Refer to the NT Event Log for more info 51207 Device does not exist in the database Update failed 51208 An exception occurred Device update failed Refer to the NT Event Log for more info 51231 No devices found in the dat
88. complete restore as described in Restore of a backed up UCA database and reconfiguration Configuration replication restores profiles and the UCA database The administrator configured groups roles and profiles on one UCA server can be replicated and imported to UCA servers in other locations H 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Provide Database Credentials For all three operations Backup Restore and Reconfigure provide the details of the database server IP address and SA password IP address IP address of the database server Since backup and restore runs on the same host as the UCA server the default value of local host need not be changed SA Password Database System admin password provided during installation See nstalling UCA Server Software on page 6 10 for password information UCA Backup amp Restore Backup Restore Reconfigure Database details UCS database credentials IP Address UCAS DE Username f Backup directory Backup Dir CAUCA Backup Figure H 1 UCA Backup and Restore Backup the UCA Server The backup archives the UCA database and profile files profile files reside in C Program Files Motorola UCA Server Profiles xml UCA Backup amp Restore Backup O Restore O Reconfigure Database details UCA database credentials IF Address UCA DE Username oOo Backup directory Backup Dir CAUCA Backup Backup Figure H 2 Bac
89. components in the CA50 solution The following components are optional to implement the CA50 solution e IP PBX optional not sold by Motorola e Accessories various such as spare batteries Quick Startup Guide Overview For a table listing the most commonly requested topics in this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on page 1 5 and the back cover of the manual J NOTE The Quick Startup Guide on page 1 5 is designed to be removed from the manual for easy reference Overview 1 5 Quick Startup Guide Introduction to CA50 Solution ccc ANNIE ARE SEALS nmam 1 1 1 2 Wealkie Talkie ccccccscscscssscccecscscsssssesesssesesscscscsssesesesssesasscassssssssesesescacscssacsesesesecececscaeees 3 2 4 31 4 34 4 56 5 1 6 4 9 7 13 7 14 37 E 1 AA 4 34 alng a cece ese ee 5 1 6 4 9 14 9 7 14 18 14 17 4 36 E 1 e PO OO Gente ern E ea nN mn wT Pent TOE nn nr AA E A ee Nat 13 7 13 10 4 36 4 42 e Making Receiving Transferring Calls cccccccccscscscscsesesssesessssvasessesesssssesessvasasasesassssssesavavasasasasisissesavavasacesseseieessecacacatataeess 4 45 4 46 BUSINESS Applications IKE Price KOKO aasa NANANA PAENG ANAN DDS NG AA NAAN GAAN 4 54 6 5 11 2 13 10 E 1 NEE OM ted E eee top AEE E E EAE E AE E EAE E 1 2 11 26 11 44 Components in GASO Solution o 2cicsacccestoesedszcecosssnsvs heenssnivccdsdonestadedssoenbssesse aaieas banag makaaasa pdp paanan 1 4 AGA Prace tO NA aS E E NAA AA nT A ep Ga 1 1 1 2 Developmen ta
90. contents of the value attribute with each spin box mask digit replaced with a numeric digit that the user keyed in An explanation and possible values for each attribute are explained below type This is the standard HTML type attribute for HTML input elements id This is the standard HTML id attribute for HTML input elements The contents of the value for this attribute must be spin box name This is the standard HTML name attribute for HTML input elements SpinBoxLabel The contents of this attribute represents the label for the spin box The content for this attribute is up to the Business Application developer There is no label if this attribute is not detected for the spin box input element SpinBoxLabelPos The contents of this attribute represents the spin box label position The spin box label can be on the line before the same line or after the spin box label Possible values for the SpinBoxLablePos attribute can be either beforespinbox sameasspinbox or afterspinbox e The beforespinbox value inserts the spin box label on the line before the spin box e The sameasspinbox value inserts the spin box label on the same line as the spin box which means that there is less space for the spin box label e The afterspinbox value inserts the spin box label on the line after the spin box e The default position for the label is the same line as the spin box if the SpinBoxLabelPos attribute is not detected in the spin box input ele
91. device on Device off Select Sleep mode from the CA Menu Note Menu items are configurable via the server application The sleep mode feature may not apply to all environments JV Note When in sleep mode CA50 power consumption is significantly reduced and can remain out of a charger for approximately 48 hours before requiring a recharge Placing the CA50 into sleep mode prevents the occurrence of communications e g OS upgrades phone book updates etc If the device is in sleep mode and placed in the cradle the device wakes up and logs off the user Mute microphone Press the Mute key Note The microphone can only be muted while on a voice call Unmute microphone Press the Mute key Note The microphone can only be muted while on a voice call CA50 Modes of Operation 4 9 Table 4 2 CA50 Key Functionality Device Actions and Features Continued Key Action Feature Description Mute speaker Unmute speaker if muted Scan a bar code Volume Increase receiver Volume Decrease receiver Volume Increase speaker Volume Decrease speaker CA Menu access FEATURES Connectors ActiveSync Charge Contacts 2 Earbud Communication Receiver LED Microphone Speaker Scan Window Press the Mute key Note The speaker can only be muted when the user is not on a voice call Press the Mute key Press the Scan Select S key Note Usually used to scan a bar code except when in a menu list or on a tumb
92. displays See Login to the UCA Server System on page 9 3 for login information Figure 6 65 WebConsole GUI Login IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Admin Password can be changed on the UCA server console from System Management gt Console Users gt Console User Detail gt Edit Console User Passwords Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above UCA Server 6 41 23 The final dialog of the installation displays Motorola Installation Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing UCA Server Version 2 0 on your computer AA Td would like to view the README file Installshield Figure 6 66 nstallShield Wizard Complete 24 To view the Readme document leave the box checked and click Finish To end the installation without viewing the Readme document uncheck the box and click Finish 25 After installing and launching the UCA server software it is strongly re
93. eee eee 3 2 4 9 4 15 scan select key 0 00 cee eee eee 4 9 SCANNING siske de een ever ees e eam Bae wae 4 16 database 00e eves 11 32 11 34 11 36 database tables B ConsoleUser 11 37 B GrOUpS 222sccsesenene ce 11 10 11 15 11 18 DAE ee Gore ee on KA 11 19 11 20 11 31 B PNONGEN naaa a et eine ew ald eae eww 11 16 B ROES 2 26 6 4 504 Ha oe AA oe 11 9 11 22 11 23 E A dene ae yee ates 11 24 11 30 11 37 B SystemSettings 000 ee eee 11 6 5 vaca eter AREE 11 11 11 29 11 32 ieee ea oan eas 11 33 11 34 11 36 B User table 11 5 S PhoneExtType aaa 11 15 S SystemVariables 11 6 S UserStatusType 11 9 11 30 11 37 T DebugTrace 6 49 6 50 6 51 date time settings AA 4 29 debuglog profile elements 7 12 delete entries in UCA database 9 52 UCA database 6 42 CTY ace cent ie KA Oh ow A he ee ee 9 52 delete utility server GUI 9 52 9 53 demo solution 0 000 e eee eee 6 2 6 5 configure RF network 0000 eae E 5 employee login bar code E 14 OVEIVIEW 0 00 E 1 E 2 E 17 RD bar codes 0 0 c eee eee E 11 required hardware E 2 SKU bar codes 0 cece eee E 17 deployment 0 00 c eee eee 11 1 12 1 deployment
94. end user Memory 64MB SDRAM 32MB Strata Flash Interface Communications Server Symbol MSP RD Client Airbeam Symbol CA50 Full Speed USB 1 1 Client A 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table A 1 CA50 Client Specifications Continued Item Description User Environment Operating Temperature 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C IP Rating IP40 Charging Temperature 32 F to 95 F 0 C to 35 C See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed charging information Humidity 5 90 non condensing Drop Specification 3 ft drop to concrete 6 drops per 6 sides over operating temperature range 4 ft drop to concrete 6 drops per 6 sides at ambient temperature Electrostatic Discharge ESD 4kVdc direct discharge 8kVdc indirect discharge Sealing IP40 Wireless LAN Data and Voice Communications Antenna Internal Audio Walkie talkie Speaker receiver microphone earbud jack software support for G 729 Voice unicast Speaker receiver microphone earbud jack software support for G 711 u law and G 711 A law Data Rates Supported 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps Operating Channels 1 32 Walkie talkie Security WPA TKIP Open WEP 40 WEP 128 Voice Communication Integrated Voice over IP ready PBX walkie talkie IEEE 802 11a b g direct sequence wireless LAN Supports voice unicast calls and multicast walkie talkie func
95. entry ID 1 value Backlight M L Backlight gt lt entry ID 2 value Backlight timer M L BacklightTimer gt 7 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide lt entry ID 3 value Ring tone M L RingTone gt lt entry ID 4 value AEC for Headset M L AECForHeadset gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 7 lt entry ID 1 name RingTone title Ring Tone gt value Basic S L SetRing Application Wav ringtone basic wav gt lt entry ID 2 value Steeldrum S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone steeldrum wav gt centry ID 3 value Atmosphere S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone atmosphere wav gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 8 name DeskCallActive title Options gt lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt entry ID 6 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 9 lt entry ID 1 2entry ID lt entry ID 3 name AppCallActive value HangUp S L PhoneHangUp gt value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt value Hold S L PhoneHold gt value Park M L CallPark gt value Applications M L Applications gt value Settings M L Settings gt title 0Options gt value HangUp S L PhoneHangUp gt value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt value Hold S L PhoneHold gt value Park M L CallPark gt value Settings M L Settings gt lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 10 title 0OnCall gt lt entry ID 1
96. exist in the database Database level exception generated while removing group data Table 14 20 Error Code Roles Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 31 Roles Errors Description 61031 61034 61035 61064 61065 61091 61094 61095 61132 61134 61135 61161 61164 61165 61192 61194 61195 Table 14 21 Error Code 61532 61533 The specified role already exists in the database A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add a role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to add a role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get role info Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to get role information Refer to the NT Event Log for more details The specified role does not exist in the database A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update role info Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to update role information Refer to the NT Event Log for more details The specified role does not exist in the database A data layer exception occurred while attempting to remove a role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to remove a role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details There are no roles defined in the databa
97. find the right working range for the bar codes being scanned Angle Scanning angle is important for promoting quick decodes When laser beams reflect directly back into the scanner from the bar code this specular reflection can blind the scanner To avoid this scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce directly back But don t scan at too sharp an angle the scanner needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan to make a successful decode Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within Hold the CA50 farther away for larger symbols Move the CA50 closer for symbols with bars that are close together NOTE Scanning procedures depend on the application and CA50 configuration An application may use different scanning procedures from the one listed above 4 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Scanning 1 Ensure that a scan enabled application is loaded on the CA50 2 Aim the scan window at the bar code Figure 4 10 Laser Scanning 3 Press the Scan key Ensure the red scan beam covers the entire bar code A single green LED blink by default to indicate the bar code was decoded successfully Correct Incorrect Figure 4 11 Laser Scanner Aiming Pattern CA50 Modes of Operation 4 17 Resetting the CA50 There are two reset functions warm boot and cold boot Perform a warm boot first If the device still does not respond perform a cold boot Neither a warm n
98. for Server Setup and Vl M GING G Ga NGA GAAN NANANA ANNA 9 2 14 2 E a o E a E E Oe UD I ee ere E E E eee E eee 9 4 6 13 e Populate Database with User Site Specific Information face foes cccccccasdetazveze astecesseuee cesnsescdiecededeslstsserinedecl Aa 2 3 CASU Capaniities Win UGA SENGT aseeni E AA 6 58 imporing SETS and BATI oreren T E E etarees 9 13 9 25 roubleshooting Error COU cccsccscctcesesce gence cedcecacincshetosisgeccedadeacte toycaus AALAGA ad 14 4 14 6 14 18 e Alternate Administrative Mechanism to Manage Customer Data T 11 5 11 14 11 18 11 22 11 29 11 36 Business Applications cc ccssssseseseeseseeseseeseseesssesussssussescesessessssessssassacansseansasaseseaveseeeseacaneneaneneaes 5 1 10 2 10 2 10 12 E 1 Launching Business Applications oo ccccscesececsesessacsesesesscsesesesassssesavassesesassssssavassssssesassssatasasasiesasassesssasasiesavacacsesesacacssseeeeeeseeeen 10 2 12 2 Employee Identity Validation Login Bar Codes and PIN 2 aaa mamana 4 3 11 5 11 40 D 15 E 14 pla AA AA ce E E A ERS 10 5 Troublesrooting Error CodeS AN 14 4 14 6 14 13 PBX mtem at l ersen a AA a AA AD 4 36 4 38 6 48 9 13 9 41 13 10 1 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 2 Development and Deployment Checklist Overview The Development and Deployment Checklist identifies all the significant steps required to generate
99. form to be submitted when the user scans a bar name Price value gt code label The id attribute s value must be ScanData and the type attribute must be submit or button The value for the value attribute is the bar code label scanned when the form is submitted The name value pair is as follows Price xxxxx where xxxxx is the bar code label scanned lt input type submit id LeftSoftKey This input element allow a form to be submitted when the user presses the name SoftKey value Prev gt left soft key on the CA50 device The id attribute s value must be LeftSoftKey and the type attribute must be submit or button The value for the value attribute is the label for the left soft key on the device Keep in mind that keys defined by the Web application take precedence over the keys defined in the lt MenuStates gt area of the XML profile Note The name attribute s value must be the same as the value for the name attribute of the RightSoftKey when both are on a page of the business application lt input type button id RightSoftKey This input element allows a form to be submitted when the user presses the name SoftKey value Next gt right soft key on the CA50 device The id attribute s value must be RightSoftKey and the type attribute must be submit or button The value for the value attribute is the label for the right soft key on the device Keep in mind that keys defined by the Web applicati
100. gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 7 name Settings title Settings gt centry ID 3 value Ring tone M L RingTone gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 7 name RingTone title Ring Tone gt lt entry ID 1 value Basic S L SetRing Application Wav ringtone basic wav gt lt entry ID 2 value Steeldrum S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone steeldrum wav gt lt entry ID 3 value Atmosphere S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone atmosphere wav gt lt Menu gt lt Menus gt See Menu Elements on page 7 15 for an explanation of value attributes in the Ring tone menu above In this example the value attribute for the third entry in the Ring tone menu is Atmosphere S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone atmosphere wav Therefore Atmosphere displays as the third option in the Ring tone menu If selected a special local option is selected The special local option is the command SetRing to Application Wav Ring tone atmosphere wav A customer could add more ring tones to this menu using the same format and providing the ring tone wave file is on the device Step 2 Changing the Ring tone on the CA50 via the UCAClient application The ring tone selection can be seen via the Menu gt Settings gt Ring tone menu selection Once the atmosphere wav file is selected as the ring tone the user hears that sound when an incoming phone call occurs XML Profile for Configuration 7 17 Modifying Phone Book Menu Behavior Th
101. help build the XML profile for a user The user can modify certain settings on the device such as backlight phone ring and volume settings as personal preferences These preferences are recorded and applied when the user logs into the UCA server J NOTE The client settings in System Settings represent the default values for users before they are changed during device operation For additional information see page 7 1 in Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration system Management system Settings gt System Setting Detail System Settings Edit 1 System Setting Detail Setting Client Backlight Battery Timeout Description How quickly does the backlight timeout while on battery Value 5 Is Live Profile True Is User Preference True Is live profile is a setting that is added to a base profile at login Is user preference is a setting that can be controlled by the UCA user Help Text Figure 9 39 Client Settings View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 41 Phone Settings Phone settings are used for PBX and phone system settings used with the UCA server Settings like Phone Gateway IP Port Type etc can also be viewed and configured system Management system Settings gt System Setting Detail System Settings Edit a System Setting Detail Setting Phone Gateway IPAddress Description IP Address for the Phone gateway Value 10 10 10 2 Is Live Profile True Is User Preference False
102. idle time hours before a device is considered in an unknown state Language ID of the localized UCA Client read only Diagnostic trace logging This setting controls how much detail is written to the trace log table T DebugTrace All log entries of the specified level and greater are logged Any log entries with lower priority levels are not logged Possible Values 0 Debug 1 Flow 2 Status 3 Warning 4 Error Logging levels of 0 and 1 result in large amounts of logging data saved in the database These levels are not recommended for normal system operation They should be used with caution and only in cases where an issue was reported and is being monitored and investigated by Motorola The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect 6 52 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 6 2 System Settings Continued Setting Description System Login MACAuthOnly System Login Token GetPrimaryGroup System Login Token GetUserlD System Login Token GetUserPW System Login UserIDInputMethod System Maintenance DB CallParkExt DaysBetween System Maintenance DB CallParkExt File Aging System Maintenance DB CallParkExt RecordAging System Maintenance DB DaysBetween System Maintenance DB DebugTrace DaysBetween System Maintenance DB DebugTrace FileAging System Maint
103. information is ignored the possibility of data or material damage may AN occur WARNING This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal injury may occur 1 IMPORTANT This symbol indicates that an important step is required to complete a task correctly Related Documents and Software The following documents provide more information about the CA50 e CA50 Quick Start Guide p n 72 71770 xx e CA50 Regulatory Guide p n 72 96711 xx e CA50 Cradles Regulatory Guide p n 72 96712 xx e Latest ActiveSync software available at http Awww microsoft com For the latest version of this guide and all guides go to http www motorola com enterprisemobility manuals Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support for your region Contact information is available at http www motorola com enterprisemobility contactsupport When contacting Enterprise Mobility support please have the following information available e Serial number of the unit e Model number or product name e Software type and version number Motorola responds to calls by e mail telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipm
104. is selected all the extensions associated with that particular group will be displayed Phone Extension Range Based Phone Book The basic concept of the range based phone book track is dividing a long list of extensions into dynamic ranges rather than groups When a range is selected from the list then all the extensions in that range are displayed As an example a store may have 100 extensions in use that range from 100 to 500 and are fairly evenly distributed To break up this list of 100 extensions you could divide this into 5 lists of 20 extensions that would be reasonably easy to navigate So the ranges for this might look like the following 100 180 180 260 260 340 340 420 420 500 7 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Phone Book Web Service The behavior of each of the phone book entry points can be modified by changing the parameters included in the URL for each menu entry The phone book Web service methods and their parameters are summarized in Table 7 1 J NOTE StoreLocation in the URL represents the store ID This is replaced by the actual store ID in System Settings when the XML is sent to the device during login Table 7 1 Web Service Methods Summary Web Service Method sMenuType sStoreNumber sGroup sListType sSortlype sRangeStart sRangeEnd X X X X The phone book web service is accessible at this URL gt lt http UCAlnstallMachine Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx Common
105. it begins building the XML profile to send back to the client The server uses the user s role and primary group to determine which base profile to use to build the user profile This relationship tying the user s role and group to a specific base profile is defined by creating a profile association through the UCA server Web Console The base profiles are located in the following directory in the default installation Program Files Motorola UCA Server Profiles The profiles can be configured on the UCA Server Console gt System Settings gt System Profile Path Once the base profile is chosen the server begins modifying the base profile with data specific to the user that is logging in The server assigns a phone extension to the user based upon his or her primary group and writes it to the profile The server collects any user preferences specific to the user and writes it to the profile The resulting profile which was built from a base profile is sent returned to the CA50 device The client processes the XML profile and configures the CA50 device When the configuration is complete the client displays the desktop At the desktop the user has several options Among them are options to launch a business application place a phone call change walkie talkie channels enter Do not disturb mode or set preferences UCA Server 6 7 UCA Server Requirements and Setup Minimum Server Hardware Requirements J NOTE Server hardwa
106. lt form gt lt body gt Sample HTML Code Enlarge Image Size Mwindowsce B X File Zoom Tools Help SCAN HEST Figure l 8 Enlarge Image lt body gt lt form name formi method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx id formli gt lt text align center style font 20px Verdana width 88px border 0px gt X lt text gt lt text align center gt lt b gt SCAN NEXT lt b gt lt text gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type submit id LeftSoftKey value Exit gt lt input name RightSoftKey type button id RightSoftKey value gt lt form gt lt body gt 1 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Enlarging Special Characters Sample HTML Code Enlarge Special Character Size S Windowsce GX File Zoom Tools Help Ferraro Rocher 02 Figure l 9 Enlarge Special Character lt body gt lt form name form1 method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx id form1 gt lt text align center gt Ferraro Rocher lt text gt lt text align center style font 20px Verdana width 88px border 0px sspound amp nbsp 02 lt text gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type submit id LeftSoftKey value Exit gt lt input name RightSoftKey type button id RightSoftKey value gt lt form gt lt body gt J NOTE The HTML code used for the CA50
107. metrics notification log entry Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77541 Exception occurred while adding metrics entry data Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77542 Input file had no valid CSV records Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77551 Exception occurred while getting all metrics entry types Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77561 Exception occurred while getting all metrics entry modifiers Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77611 Exception occurred while getting recent calls by user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 39 Groups Table 14 35 Group Errors Error Code Description 78511 Exception occurred while adding a group Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 78521 Exception occurred while getting a group Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 78531 Exception occurred while updating a group Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 78541 Exception occurred while removing a group Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Roles Table 14 36 Role Errors Error Code Description 79011 Exception occurred while adding a device user role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79021 Exception occurred while getting a device user role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79031 Exception occurred while updating a device user role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79041 Exception occur
108. multicast address which must be used to receive Walkie Talkie WT messages Table 8 1 Walkie Talkie Multicast Settings Field Description IP Address The multicast IP address is used to send receive the WT messages to all the devices in the same subnet All the devices that need to listen and talk to other devices must subscribe to the same multicast IP address If the increment type is set to IP address the device subscribes to multiple multicast addresses for the different channels For example See Figure 8 8 the base multicast IP address is 239 192 2 2 If the channel increment type is set to IP address the device subscribes to IP address 239 192 2 3 for Channel 1 239 192 2 4 for Channel 2 etc Port The base port on which the device receives text messages All the other WT voice message channels listen on port numbers relative to this port If the increment type is set to Port the device listens on the port number next to the base port number for Channel 1 For example See Figure 8 8 the base port is 5000 If the channel increment type is set to port the device listens on port 5001 for Channel 1 port 5003 for Channel 3 etc The device subscribes to only one Multicast IP address The device sends the WT messages to the base multicast address but listens to different channels on different ports Channel increment Defines how the WT channels are incremented relative to the base multicast address or base port Walkie Talkie
109. of messages that can be sent to a CA50 from the server e Text message the device displays text to the user e Text message with device based audio the device displays text and plays the specified audio file wav file preloaded onto the device For additional information on messaging see pages 77 26 and 11 44 Walkie Talkie Multicast Functionality Walkie talkie communication is a one to many multicast half duplex group communication mode that utilizes the wireless infrastructure of the facility to communicate within the four walls of the facility For example an associate carrying a CA50 can press the Walkie Talkie key and instantaneously communicate to a group associates carrying CA50s While the first associate talks the remaining associates carrying CA50s cannot respond until the first associate releases the Walkie Talkie key For additional information on walkie talkie communications see page 4 37 Voice Call Unicast Functionality A voice unicast call is a one to one full duplex communication mode that utilizes the wireless infrastructure of the facility to communicate within the four walls of the facility For example an associate carrying a CA50 can select another associate to call from a phone book and carry ona full duplex two way conversation with the second associate When a CA50 communicates via a voice call without a PBX there is support for the following voice call functionality e Initiating a voic
110. on page 17 Device removed from Insert device in cradle The battery fully charges in less than three cradle while battery was hours charging Cannot see characters Device not powered on Press any key to wake the device on display During data Device disconnected from Contact technical support or the help desk to see if the network communication no server during infrastructure is functioning properly For example device may data transmitted or communication have lost or did not obtain an IP address transmitted data was incomplete Incorrect configuration See the system administrator CA50 does not emit Volume setting is low or Adjust the volume If this still does not solve the problem contact sound turned off the help desk Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 7 Table 14 2 Troubleshooting the CA50 Client Continued Problem Cause Solution CA50 shuts off Battery is not inserted Insert the battery properly See nserting and Removing the Battery properly on page 4 Battery is depleted Replace the battery CA50 keeps powering The device battery is low Recharge the battery down to protect memory contents The CA50 does not Scanning application is Load a scanning application on the device See the system accept scan input not loaded administrator Unreadable bar code Ensure the symbol is not defaced Distance between exit Place the device within proper scann
111. or other device user P2P 1 extension port DTMF string Example lt entry ID 1 value 172 S L PHNTRANSFERCALL 1 1 92 168 7 172 5060 gt PHONEMUTE Mute an active call PhoneMute Example lt entry ID 9 value PhoneMute S L PHONEMUTE gt Table J 1 Command Name QUIETMODE POWEROFF REBOOT ABOUT SETBKLTLVL SETBKLTTIMEOUT EXITCLIENT DOWNLOADFILES DELETEALLDOWNLOADED FILES Profile Commands and Usage Continued Description Put the device in Do not disturb mode See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about Do not disturb mode Power off the device Reboot Cold boot the device Display UCAClient About screen Set backlight level Set backlight timeout value Exit the UCAClient and go to the Shell menu Initiate the download of files mentioned in the profile section lt DownloadFiles gt See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 more information Delete all files on the device in the download location Application Download See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 more information J 3 Commands and Uses Usage in Profile As Part of Menus QuietMode lt Y N gt Example lt entry ID 5 value Do Not Disturb S L QUIETMODE Y gt POWEROFF Example lt entry ID 5 value Power Off S L POWEROFF gt REBOOT Example lt entry ID 9 value Reboot S L REBOOT gt ABOUT Example lt entry ID 9 value About S L ABOUT gt SetBkItLvl
112. parameter that doesn t have a value i e ProductBarcode The client software appends the scanned bar code data to the end of the URL if the last character of the URL is Otherwise it does not include the bar code data and loads the page specified by the URL Number of extensions to ask for when the first extension fails to register Number of retries to register with the same extension Interval between successive retries Device side path and filename for the default client ring tone for incoming phone calls Default receiver volume on the client Values 0 6 Default speaker volume on the client Values 0 6 Unicast Call Packet Rate 0 40 in steps of 10 Call Park by Group feature Call Park functionality is enabled on the PBX Feature Access Code for Call Park on the PBX Feature Access Code for Call Pick on the PBX IP address for the phone gateway used for PBX communications The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect Table 6 2 System Settings Continued Setting UCA Server 6 49 Description Phone Gateway Port Phone Gateway Protocol Type Phone Gateway SCCP Device Type Phone Peer2Peer Enable Phone Peer2Peer Port Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRangeSize Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize Phonebook RecentCalls Interval Phonebook SelectableGroups ShowaA
113. prepare the following for each site Identify site specific settings such as UCA server address PBX address etc Configure a user list with Role and Group assignments for the site Configure a phone extension pool for the site Configure additional phone book entries for the site Site Installation Guidelines 13 9 Planning and Preparation Activities Developing a List of Roles To develop a list of company wide roles use associate titles The most important aspect of a role is selecting a profile template that allows each role to a range of privileges For example some associates might have access to business applications where other associates may not Developing a List of Groups To develop a list of company wide groups or departments use phone extension pools and additional phone book entries The groups drive how a phone extension gets assigned when an associate logs in It is then used to organize the phone book to facilitate looking up various associates Planning Walkie Talkie Channels and Addresses Plan walkie talkie channel allocations and multicast addresses ports for the walkie talkie channels Walkie talkie channels use multicast packets and this requires a plan when using multicast addresses to route the multicast packets Normally channels are allocated on the same multicast address with incrementing port numbers J NOTE The UCA server and the UCA client application reserve the first port for asynchronous communi
114. server To upgrade the CA50 OS UCA client application or other software components use MSP Provision functionality One copy of the MSP 3 x server software stage and provision functionality only and its license certificate is provided free with the purchase of a UCA server software license e MSP 3 x license fees per CA50 are free of charge e CAb50Ss are automatically registered with an MSP server upon initial staging automated process no user intervention required e CA50s are automatically device licensed enabled for stage and provision capabilities out of box automated process no user intervention required e Number of CA50s supported per MSP server no software constraint limitations are imposed J NOTE f desired an MSP Software Support extended warranty agreement must be purchased separately and in addition to any desired CA50 Server Software Support extended warranty agreement J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual 12 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Staging and Deploying CA50s Rapid Deployment Bar Codes Rapid Deployment bar codes generated by MSP include staging information such as wireless network
115. server is offline a CA50 operates in the following ways e Voice unicast calls Function without server support e Walkie talkie communication Function without server support e Messaging and paging Not supported until the server is online e Wireless bar code scanning Not supported until the server is online sf NOTE Forthe CA50 to make voice calls while the server is down or offline one phone book request from the CA50 to the UCA server had to be accessed from the server prior to the server going down The CA50 reverts to the phone data provided by the last phone book request When the phone book was previously viewed on the CA50 any portion of the phone book viewed on the CA50 and only this portion of the phone book is cached on the CASO If the UCA server is temporarily not accessible the CA50 can access the cached phone book information 2 This assumes the business application resides on the UCA server If it resides on a different addressable Web server in the enterprise the business application functions properly Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Overview This chapter defines what a profile is and what settings are included in the profile Valuable topics in this chapter include e XML Profile Overview page 7 2 e Delivery of the XML profile page 7 2 e XML profile layout page 7 3 e User profile section page 7 4 e Static menus section page 7 13 e Modifying phone book menu behavior page 7
116. settings are persistent e The device is ready for use Rapid Deployment Rapid Deployment Window Options Table F 1 Rapid Deployment Options Window Option Description F 3 Press the CA50 left soft key to display the default Options menu all RD CH Search network About RD Options pn RD ill Scan bar codes to deploy device Back Scroll up and down the list and select an option e Search Network Searches the current adapter wireless network and performs actions based on the number of profiles established in the UCA server For example if only one store profile was defined in the UCA server the network is searched profile data downloads to the device and triggers the deployment process If multiple department profiles were defined in the UCA server the network is searched and a profile list displays Select a profile from the list to download that department profile data to the device which triggers the deployment process wall RD CI wal RD Downloading UCA floor profile UCA backroom UCA roaming Reset Single Profile Multiple Profiles e About RD Displays information about Rapid Deployment all RD CN Search network Press the CA50 right soft key to go back to the previous window Reset al RD Cancels an operation or window and return to the start window UCA floor UCA backroom UCA roaming Exit Closes the application and returns to the CA Menu
117. system allows customer calls to a retailer to be forwarded directly to a CA5O In addition this enables associates using a CA50 to call traditional land line phones through the IP PBX assuming the land line extension was added to the UCA server dynamically managed phone book J NOTE 1 The CA50 user interface provides no means for a user to dial an extension via numeric keys Instead dialing all CA50 calls including those to an IP PBX accessible standard land line phone extension must occur via the UCA server dynamically managed phone book 2 The CA50 cannot be configured for mixed voice call use modes The CA50 site solution only allows voice calls to be made through either direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call capabilities standard non PBX calls or through a PBX but not both within a store implementation The H 323 PBX mode and standard non PBX call mode are exclusive IMPORTANT f the PBX goes offline calls to and or from land lines via the PBX will not work The UCA system AN can be configured to work in direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call or PBX mode If the UCA system is configured to use a PBX and the PBX goes down CA50 devices can not make or receive phone calls This includes CA50 to CA50 calls The UCA server dynamically managed phone book downloaded at the initiation of each voice call displays only logged in users Additional phone book entries see Additional Phonebook Entries on page 9 14 those not UCA based e g a wired land li
118. the CA50 client is IS Ab tos scan lanl wal Codes KOI details about the parameters contained within the RD bar codes see Staging and Deploying CA50s on page 12 2 J NOTE 1 Foracomplete checklist ee al mg waaah ang a da activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the lopment and Deployment Checklist on pag 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual Accessing the Rapid Deployment Client When the CA50 powers on for the first time out of box the CA Menu see CA Menu on pag o 3 12 The default highlighted selection on the CA Menu at the first power on is Rapid bana see F re EN Scanning Rapid Deployment Bar Codes To stage a CA50 over a wireless connection 1 e we A server a IS oe and ready to deploy data to the UCA client See L 2 Ensure the CA50 Geter IS ua di pee ying Batteries on page 3 8 3 Power on the CA50 see P erinc 1 On the CASO H naa o vment on bage 3 1 1 ail CA Menu cil Programs Settings System info Figure F 1 CA Menu Window 4 To select and launch the Rapid Deployment option from the CA Menu use the Up and Down keys to highlight the Rapid Deployment application press the Select S key to launch the application F 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide When the Rapid Deployment application launches the Scan window displays Figure F 2 Scan Window
119. the device to vibrate at certain intervals or content indicatortoken gt indefinitely for the life of the business application page There are set of indicator tokens that allows the Web developer to choose the color and the blink rate for the LED These tokens are as follows indictortoken possible values SlowVibrate Device vibrates once every second MedVibrate Device vibrates once every 2 second FastVibrate Device vibrates once every 1 10 second VibrateOn Devices vibrates 10 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide HTML Elements Contained in the Body Element The proprietary HTML elements contained in the body are all custom input elements Input elements are not rendered even if they are of type text due to the dimensions of the display The UCA client application behaves as though the custom input tags are visible and clickable by a user Each custom input tag must be within a form element All input fields that are not of type submit or button and the input field that was activated are sent to the server using the value of the action attribute and the value of the method attribute The form data is sent as GET or POST based on the value of the method attribute POST is used if the method attribute is not contained in the form element Table 10 2 HTML Elements Contained in the Body Element Element Description lt input type type submit id ScanData This input element allows a
120. to the CA Menu For additional information about the CA Menu see CA Menu on page 3 12 ail CA Menu am Rapid Deployment PL X XX XXX Programs CE X XX XX selungs PM XX XX X System info Figure 3 6 Motorola Splash Screen and CA Menu J NOTE Use Rapid Deployment bar codes to initially stage and deploy the CA50 by setting the wireless network configuration and enter the UCA server IP address For information about configuring the CA50 using Rapid Deployment see Chapter 12 Staging and Deploying CA50s and Appendix F Rapid Deployment 3 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA Menu The CA Menu is the factory programmed start menu that allows access to the Rapid Deployment client device settings system information such as OS version reboot options and sleep mode power off The CA Menu displays when any of the events below are encountered e First boot up of the device out of box e Rebooting the device without UCA server details loaded for example the UCA server IP address e Rebooting the device and manually pushing override keys that allow access to the CA Menu J NOTE The CA Menu displays out of box and when reconfiguring the device essentially whenever the CA50 is not running its UCA client application From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight a menu option Press the Scan Select S key to launch an opti
121. token link in DB to next step in Process authentication process Figure 11 1 Client Server UCA Authentication Process Flow 11 7 11 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Device User Authentication Web Service In the default installation the Device User Authentication Web Service is located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA Client Authentication Authentication asmx This Web service is used in the authentication process of a CA50 device user Authentication Web Service Methods GetUserData This method retrieves user information from the UCA system The user s information is updated in the Userlnfo class passed to the method int GetUserData string sStoreNumber string sUser string ipAddr ref Userinfo userinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber User s store number sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required Userlnfo A reference to a Userlnfo class that describes the user described above WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful When successful Userlnfo is populated with the specified user s information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log Related Classes public class UserInfo public public public public public public public UserInfo string
122. uninstall 14 4 U UCA client app 4 17 4 19 4 31 4 36 eas eos 2 AA 5 1 6 6 10 2 12 2 12 6 UCA server security See server UCA server Web Console See server UCA SysInfo app 0 cc eee 4 5 UCA SysInfo app on CA50 device 4 22 4 23 unicast call and launching business apps 4 56 and walkie talkie communication 4 31 4 34 4 36 answering a voice call 4 45 browsing phone book 4 42 communication setup and maintenance 6 4 demo solution a 6 5 tunctionally seci oh whe see Pa AA NG aad ae 6 58 Indications 00 eee eee 4 10 4 11 4 12 making a voice call 020005 4 45 microphone 000 eee eee ees 3 2 4 9 mute mode ee ee 4 5 Om calLICON 26660 cedars eee aes Rowdee ees 4 5 OVEIVIEW 2 4 36 parking a call cee eee 4 47 RCCCIVED maa adb 4 ow eu one eee MAAN aNG 4 9 retrieving a parked call 4 50 SOUNO e kaarte Geena oe a ree See BG Ea AG panot 4 9 speaker eee 3 2 4 9 Index 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Standard 0 ce ee 4 37 SS a erate ohh ee a ed wn ead BAGA en AA 4 53 technical spec 2 ee A 2 transferring a call 4 46 CAGE makan ABEAAAAAHAA BI caine NAIA DAA 3 10 voice call functionality 1 3 WebConsole 000 eee ee eee 9 2 9
123. workers change shifts and days enterprises can enable employees to select any available CA50 and a simple log in configures the device on the fly with the right profile for that associate In addition to the CA50 mobile device the CA50 solution includes a UCA server The UCA server software uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the CA5Os Other sections in this chapter include e A list of the components in the CA50 system See Components in the CA50 Solution on page 1 4 e A list of CA50 functionality See CA50 Features on page 1 2 e A table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual See the Quick Startup Guide on page 1 5 and on the last page of the manual J NOTE For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 1 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Features The CA50 is a Voice over IP VoIP enabled wireless scanner It converges voice bar code scanning and data capabilities into a single device Table 1 1 lists CA50 features Table 1 1 CA50 Features Feature Wireless Bar Code Scanning Wireless Messaging Paging WLAN based Walkie Talkie Communications WLAN Voice Calls from CA50 to CA50 WLAN Voice Calls through an IP PBX Benefit Enables productivity enhancing on the spot applications such as price v
124. 00000003 PhoneDebugLevel dword 00000003 ScannerDebugLevel dword 00000003 AgentDebugLevel dword 00000003 BrowserDebugLevel dword 00000003 LogFileLocation NUcaClientLog txt The LoggingEnabled parameter value informs the UCAClient application to completely disable logging so no log file is generated This parameter is the only mechanism to completely disable logging on the UCAClient application The LogFileLocation parameter value informs the UCAClient application the path and the name of the log file The WTTDebugLevel is the logging level for logic that is exercised to interface with the VolP Walkie Talkie subsystem component The PhoneDebugLevel is the logging level for logic that is exercised to interface with the VolP Phone subsystem component The ScannerDebugLevel is the logging level for logic that is exercised to interface with the Scanner subsystem component Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 9 The AgentDebugLevel is the logging level for logic that is exercised to interface with the Agent part of the UCAClient application Basically the Agent part is logic that controls the desktop window menus the user profile and logic that communicates with each module that is responsible for interfacing to a particular subsystem component The BrowserDebugLevel is the logging level for logic that is exercised to process business applications The logging level for each of these can be one of five val
125. 0s 12 7 OS UCA Client Application Upgrades Pushed from MSP Provision When using MSP to provision multiple CA50s in close proximity with a new operating system saturation of the Access Point on the network must be taken into account Devices need to be in an area of excellent RF coverage so additional infrastructure may need to be installed to enable the best coverage and data rate possible In addition the CA50 should be in its charging cradle and must be powered on When not on AC power AirBeam OSUpdate checks battery capacity before updating the partitions Battery capacity below 75 results in an Insufficient Power message MSP Provision functionality can be initiated either manually by scanning Rapid Deployment bar codes or automatically using an Over the Air command By default from the factory the CA50 MSP agent is not enabled The MSP agent running on the CA50 provides a means to automate the updating of CA50 software among other features To enable the MSP agent running on the CA50 generate the appropriate Rapid Deployment bar code s For details about how to generate Rapid Deployment bar codes refer to the MSP user manual Minimizing Network Traffic from the MSP Agent To minimize the network traffic from CA50s checking for software updates on the MSP server generate an MSP policy that enables the CA50 to check for MSP downloads also called MSP jobs only when no user is logged onto the device UCA client application is running
126. 128 min length property The Code128 MaxLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 max length property The Code128 ISBT128 META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 isbt128 property The Code128 EAN128 META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 ean128 property The Code39 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the code39 decoder By default enabled lt META HT TP Equiv code128 content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 redun dancy content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 other 128 content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv code128 minle ngth content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv code128 maxle ngth content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv code1 28 isbt12 8 content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code128 ean1 28 content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv code39 content parameter gt Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables the property False disables the property True enables the other non EAN or ISBT 128 subtype False disables the other non EAN or ISBT 128 subtype nn 0 to 55 nn O to 55 True enables the ISBT128 subtype False disables the ISBT128 subtype True enables the EAN128 subtype False disables the EAN128 subtype Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder
127. 13 AuthenticateUserPassword This function attempts to authenticate a CA50 device user and password int AuthenticateUserPassword string sStoreNumber string sUser string sPassword string ipAddr ref AuthenticateResponse AuthResp ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSSitatus Parameters sStoreNumber User store number sUser User login ID sPassword User password ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required AuthResp Result of authentication attempt See CA50 Device User Authentication Process on page 11 5 WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful If successful AuthResp is populated with the result of the authentication attempt If the return value is 0 check WSStatus for the error code and description Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Phone Extension Web Service In the default installation the Phone Extension Management Web Service is located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA ServerManagement PhoneExtensionManagement asmx This Web service can be used by external programs to modify the phone extension data in the UCA database Phone Extension Web Service Methods This function adds a phone extension that can be used by a CA50 device the extensions are added to the B PhoneExt table
128. 2 1 the appropriate language for the CA50 device must be chosen For additional details about staging and localization see page D 16 IMPORTANT When installing MSP 3 2 1 the UCA settings screen includes a Language drop down list Select the appropriate language to localize the CA50 device The language selected must match the language selected when installing UCA server software If the language selections do not match the language selected during UCA server software installation is the default language on the CA50 device at login The CA50 device should operate in the same location as the UCA server J NOTE All numerical data and currency symbols are in English Currency symbols are not used in core UCA functionality The business Web application developer should set up the appropriate currency formats when writing applications such as Price Lookup Business Application Localization Localization of business applications is the responsibility of the integrator and or developer The Web pages in business applications should include UTF 8 encoding to support European languages supported by the CA50 device The following meta tag should be included in all Web pages to ensure UTF 8 encoding lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset UTF 8 gt J NOTE For sample business applications see Appendix Business Applications Supplement 15 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Installation
129. 2 System Settings Continued Setting UCA Server 6 51 Description Phone Gateway Port Phone Gateway Protocol Type Phone Gateway SCCP Device Type Phone Peer2Peer Enable Phone Peer2Peer Port Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRangeSize Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize Phonebook RecentCalls Interval Phonebook SelectableGroups ShowaAll System AllowDynamicWhenStaticFails System DefaultLocation System Device Activity Threshold System Language LanguagelD System Logging Level Port for the phone gateway used for PBX communications The protocol and type of gateway with which the phone client attempts to communicate Device Type set to 7960 Enable direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls for CA50 devices Device phone calls do not utilize a PBX if this is enabled The port on which to make direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls The starting number of ranges to attempt to break a list into Maximum number of extensions to display as a single menu before breaking into ranges multiple menus The maximum number of extensions to put in a range Age in hours of past calls to consider as a recent call Determines whether or not the user associated with multiple groups appears in each department Determines whether or not to allow for a dynamic ext if the static fails to register Default external location ID to use on this server In many cases this would be a store number The length of
130. 29 User Management Errors Error Code Description 75011 Exception occurred while adding a device user to the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75021 Exception occurred while getting a device user from the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75031 Exception occurred while removing a device user from the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75041 Exception occurred while updating a device user in the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75051 Exception occurred while updating a device user login time in the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75061 Exception occurred while adding device user group in cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75071 Exception occurred while getting all groups for a device user from cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75081 Exception occurred while removing all groups for a device user from cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75101 Exception occurred while updating a device user Do not disturb status in the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 37 Table 14 29 User Management Errors Continued Error Code Description 75111 Exception occurred while updating a device user s activity timestamp in the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75121 Exception occurred while getting device user ID from c
131. 4 52 27831 001101ms cancel readnotify requestID 1 notifpending 0 cancelpending 0 CA50 Device The CA50 contains several diagnostic applications that can be used to troubleshoot the CA50 device Table 14 5 includes possible problems and the applications to use to help troubleshoot Table 14 5 Troubleshooting the CA50 Device Problem Solution The red laser beam does not emit when Use ScanSamp to test the scanner as follows the Scan key is pressed to scan bar codes From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and select Programs gt ScanSamp Aim the scan window at a bar code and press Scan Select e f the red scan beam emits and decoded bar code data displays on the device the business application used for scanning may be faulty e f the red scan beam does not emit and the bar code is not decoded there may be a problem with the device Voice is inaudible Use the Audio Test App to test the CA50 speaker receiver and microphone as follows From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select to select Programs gt Audio Test App and ensure Output is set to Soeaker press Scan Select to toggle Output from Handset to Speaker e Select Programs gt Audio Test Apps Play Audios Play to test the speaker and receiver e Select Programs gt Audio Test Apps Record Audio gt Record to test the speaker receiver and microphone If sound is audible the business application used for audio may be faulty
132. 50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide firewalls 0 0 cc ee ee ee 6 47 functionality device registration 6 4 login process aa a a 6 4 user profile delivery 6 4 voice communication setup console for server setup 6 4 metrics collection 6 4 textcommands 000 6 4 unicast calls 0 0 0 ee eee 6 4 voice CalIS 2 ee eee 6 4 walkie talkie communication 6 4 UI a sh eee ace tise donque Scag LAN sara at ap boas Gate 9 2 installation demo version 00 cee ee ees 6 20 prerequisites 0 0c eee eee 6 9 procedure cee ee ees 6 10 DOCS AA 6 9 production version 6 11 software 2 6 es 6 8 upgrade demo to production 6 30 upgrading software revisions 6 31 maintenance aa 14 2 requirements cee eee eee ee 6 7 security SOUND 3 64594 05 E baat E ee eb 6 7 El PA AA jii Web Console WebConsole aa 9 2 service information 0 00 cee eee eee xxi settings backlight aa 4 27 certificates nananana aaa ee ee 4 29 dale lm sei aa dea ei aes Boon be aed B 4 29 ALBANO 4 29 SCANNED soo os acteeey Ss ees wee Se maDL ee Se 4 28 system properties 4 29 signal strength 4 5 4 22 single slot USB serial cradle CHAIN mana pna E MANG Am DULA RON
133. 5138 Could not remove the user s assigned group 55140 Error occurred while getting a user s logged on status 55162 An exception occurred while updating a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55163 A data layer exception occurred while updating a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55164 Group not specified for the user 55165 The specified user was not found in the UCA database 55166 User update failed 55167 Could not update the users associated group information 55191 Error occurred while attempting to get information about the user 55192 An exception occurred while authenticating a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55194 A data layer error occurred while attempting to get information about the user 55195 An error occurred while reading the login system variable 55196 A data layer exception occurred during user authentication Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 27 Table 14 16 User Authentication Errors Continued Error Code Description 55231 An error occurred while attempting to get information about the user 55232 An exception occurred during the login process Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55234 An error occurred while reading the login system variable 55261 A data layer exception occurred during user authentication with password 55263 The PIN supplied is invalid 55264 The specified user was not found in the UCA database 55265 An exception occurr
134. 53294 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of recently assigned UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53295 An exception occurred while attempting to get a list of recently assigned UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53301 Error occurred while parsing a phone extension CSV file 53304 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to import a phone extension CSV file Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53305 An exception occurred while attempting to import a phone extension CSV file Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53331 A data layer exception occurred while cleaning phone extension assignment Records Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 25 Table 14 15 Phone Extension Management Errors Continued Error Code Description 93332 53333 53334 93335 53361 53364 53365 53394 5339 53411 53412 53421 53421 53424 53425 53431 53434 53435 An exception occurred while cleaning phone extension assignment Records Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while getting the list of all phone extension assignments during phone extension maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while removing an extension assignment during phone extension maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more detail
135. 7 Average Charge Time A battery nominally take three hours to charge at ambient temperatures of 30 C or below Charging at temperatures between 30 C and 35 C results in longer charge times of three to six hours J NOTE Units do not charge at ambient temperatures above 35 C or below 0 C 3 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Charging Batteries Before using the CA50 for the first time charge the battery using a cradle until the green charge status LED lights See Table 4 3 on page 4 10 for charge status indications For information about the accessories available for the device see Appendix B Accessories J NOTE The CA50 does not have an internal battery back up If the battery is removed or replaced the device cold boots To charge batteries use one of the following cradles e Single Slot CA50 Charging Cradle with Spare Battery Charger on page B 5 e Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger on page B 8 Charging the Battery in a CA50 To charge the battery in a CA50 1 Connect the charging accessory to the appropriate power source See Appendix B Accessories for setup information 2 Insert the CA50 into a cradle The CA50 begins charging The charge status LED is solid red while charging then turns solid green when fully charged See Table 4 3 on page 4 10 for charging indications For charging times see Average Charge Time on page 3 7 Charging Spare Batteries Use one of the following accessori
136. 7 when scanning 00 cee eee eens 4 54 uninstall UCA server software 6 42 UNDACKINO aag e kab wacacn a 408 Svea aM KA em PERENE 3 1 up arrow key waaa nat be NKAAN BKA MA HE G WAG 3 2 4 7 upgrading demo version UCA server software 6 30 upgrading software revisions 6 31 ECA nk a a AG E Na a es B 12 user management methods adddeviceuser 11 29 removedeviceuser 11 32 setdeviceuserpin 11 34 updatedeviceuser 11 33 user profile elements 7 4 7 16 using earbud ee 4 13 V voice call answering a voice call 4 45 answering call while in a business app 4 55 browsing phone book 4 42 communication setup and maintenance 6 4 demo solution a 6 5 functionality saa cme d dene oka mGA 1 3 6 58 OIG se ae shag E ees a es gee 4 46 4 47 4 50 Indications 000 eee eee 4 10 4 11 4 12 launching business apps while in call 4 56 making a call 0 20 0 ce eee eee eee 4 45 microphone a 3 2 4 9 mute mode ccc ee 4 5 OMCANICON AA 4 5 OVEIVIEW 2 a 4 36 EI se Sderot adr ene te oe wee aa era aed 2k 4 47 parking acall 0 0 00 eee eee ee 4 47 receiver 4 9 retrieving a parked call 4 50 retrieving parked 4 50 SOUN AA 4 9 speaker
137. 9 37 System Management Tab View Click the System Management tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the view The System Management tab has three views e System Settings Figure 9 37 e Console Users Figure e Tools Figure Each view provides the ability to view and edit UCA System server settings System Settings System Settings provides the ability to view and edit UCA System server settings System Settings are divided into four categories e Client see Client Settings on page 9 40 e Phone see Phone Settings on page 9 41 e Phonebook see Phonebook Settings on page 9 41 e System see High Level System Settings on page 9 42 J NOTE For alist of all system management settings see page 6 48 CAUTION Only fully trained and certified UCA Administrators should view and or configure values within System AN Settings 9 38 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide To view configure System Settings e Click the System Settings tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the tab view System Management system Settings System Settings Console Users Tools Returned 76 results Find Setting Client Backlight Battery Timeout 5 True True Client Backlight Level 4 True True Client Desktop Link Defaukican http 92 168 7 138Motorola CA amples UCAS amplespp2idetaut aspxfitem True False Client New PhoneRegRetry aunt 3 True False Client Phone Ring Applicati
138. 9 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Click Edit The Edit Phone Extension window displays Phone and Walkie T alkie Phone Extension Pool gt Phone Extension Detail gt Edit Phone Extension Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Phone Extension Details Phone Extension Group Bath v PBX Password Soccccccccccccces Confirm PBX Password eecccccccccccccen Extension Type Static UCA Ext v Phone Book Description Kevin Smith Owner External ID 10027318 Always Shown Oves No Save Cancel Figure 9 12 Edit Phone Extension Window 5 Click Edit The SCCP Edit Phone Extension window displays Phone Extension Pool Phone Extension Detail Edit Phone Extension Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Phone Extension Details Phone Extension 211 Group Electrical PRX Password Confirm PBS Password seeesseneeeneanani Extension Type Dynamic ICA Ext Cancel Figure 9 13 SCCP Edit Phone Extension Window 6 Any field except Phone Extension can be updated in this window Enter required changes 7 Click Save to save the edits or Cancel to terminate the session UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 13 Phone Extension Import File Format Use this option to load data in bulk instead of creating users and phone extens
139. A Found in the S PhoneExtType table phnMAC The MAC address used for SCCP ohninvalid The extension is either a valid SCCP extension or it is not valid phnInvalidReason The reason for why the extension is not valid RemoveExtension This method removes a phone extension from the UCA system The extensions are removed from the B PhoneExt table int RemoveExtension string locExtID string sPhnExt string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters locExtID Store number sPhnExt Phone extension number joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserlD of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values 11 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UpdateExtension This method updates phone extension information in the UCA system The extension information is updated in the the B_PhoneExt table in the UCA database int UpdateExtension PhoneExtInfo phExtinfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters phExtInfo Phone extension info class that describes the phone extension ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when ad
140. A B 6 single slot CA50 charging cradle B 5 single slot cradle 0 0 eee eee eee B 2 a a heres Siegler ghee anh he 1 3 4 37 4 38 4 40 sleep mode 3 9 3 10 3 13 4 8 Spake oe Bai Pdea ae kn Scie wy anal Pear han ea eee 4 18 4 30 10 6 soft KEYS maawa ada DANG AA wel ares ates 3 2 4 7 software server a na ee es B 2 spare batteries 3 4 3 8 B 2 spare battery charger B 2 B 5 B 8 SOU aa ANNA AKMA eee DNA AYRA ue ea eee B 8 speaker maka a AD ee a 3 2 4 9 staging amp localization 12 6 standard calls 00 0a 4 37 start MENU zx ama bank aha hh GN GA 3 12 4 4 4 18 starting CA50 6 aa 3 11 4 2 static menu code sample aa 7 13 modifying phone book menu 7 17 OVEIVIEW 2 7 15 phone book web service methods 7 19 status ICONS aaa mna hha aha NO Seek oh 4 5 4 6 SUSPENG aata nA om KAALAMAN hee 3 9 3 10 3 13 REENE AA DANE NAE NAT ARA ADA 4 18 4 30 10 6 symbologies enable disable 0 A AA C 1 system INTO seser AKA 6 eee ate NA MAL eee 4 29 system management client settings 0 0 00 e eee eee 9 40 configure system settings 9 42 high level system settings 9 42 phone settings AA 9 41 system settings 0 0 0 0 0c 9 37 system properties settings 4 29 system settings
141. A Select key when a menu is activated a Scan key to scan bar codes when notin a menu This key can be programmed to scan the bar code and post the data to the server when the device is in desktop mode The URL to post the data can be modified updated in the System Settings tab of the UCA server console The developer can only reprogram this key for business applications when the device is in the desktop mode The Scan key launches the scan engine and posts decoded data to a server defined URL By default it posts to the sample item lookup application This default applies system wide with the possible exception of within a business application where developers can override the default Press the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously to perform warm and cold boots Walkie Talkie key by default The developer cannot override the functionality in a business application The key can be defined as a hotlink from the UCA Client See Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Walkie Talkie key by default The developer cannot override the functionality in a business application The key can be defined as a hotlink from the UCA Client See Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Always scroll but are server configurable for the desktop only When in desktop mode these keys can be configured to launch a business application Up Increases speaker or receiver volume depending on the state of the device Down Decreases speaker or receiver v
142. A50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Transferring a Call When a user is on a voice unicast call and needs to transfer the call to another extension use the phone book to look up extensions and transfer the call as shown below To transfer a voice unicast call 1 Onan active call Active Call window displays all 10 52 NT Abruzzo R 0 01 Options End Figure 4 26 Active Call Display 2 On the Active Call display press the left soft key to display the Call Options menu ail N Call CHIN Hold Transfer Back Figure 4 27 Call Options Display 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to Transfer and press Select to display the Phone Book menu all 4 Trsf CI Extensions Last names Departments Back Figure 4 23 Phone Book Display 4 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to any of the phone book options Extensions Last names or Departments Each option allows the user to choose a target to which the call can be transferred see Browsing the Phone Book on page 4 42 In this example Extensions is chosen Press Select to display the top level list of all extensions ranges in the phone book ail 4 Trsf C HIN 001 025 026 050 051 075 Back Figure 4 29 Extensions Range Display 5 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to the appropriate extensions range and press Select to display the list of all currently logged in extensions all Trsf S
143. AA 7 23 key check on CA50 device 4 24 key on CA50 NOUN ao a paaa DL oes ees a BAN KABA een 3 3 keys on CA50 device ON aaa 4 8 down arrow 0 3 2 4 7 front application 3 2 4 7 MU aaa mNE MED pack nA MA ate 3 3 4 7 mute microphone aaa 4 8 mute speaker aa aaa 4 9 quiet mode AA 3 3 scan select 20 0c eee eee ee 3 2 4 7 4 9 side application 0 000 3 3 4 7 AA 3 2 4 7 unicast CANS aaa baka Wk Paa ae nen 4 8 unmute microphone eee 4 8 unmute speaker cee eee 4 9 US NOW sagana KAGAD Ere 3 2 4 7 e e1 XeC CA 4 8 VOLUME 3 2 2a Da mara a0 bad KG NG aoe oye 4 7 4 9 walkie talkie 3 2 3 3 4 7 4 8 L ANG aaa d os ean ne PAA FREN bA KAN KAGAD AA KA B 2 laser scanning See data capture launching business applications 10 3 LED test on CA50 device 4 25 4 26 LEDS mwaaa KANAN AGA KAW ae ae NGA AA 3 2 4 9 4 10 decode ccc 0 aaa 4 16 listen only channel walkie talkie 4 32 7 5 listen talk channel walkie talkie 4 32 7 5 lithium ion battery 0 ce eee 3 1 localization staging a 6 nw 6 BAKA hb Roe HERR Oe DOs ees 12 6 OOG paw etecdua PAA 7 12 14 8 CASO registry eee 14 8 diSabl lt a0 064e0e4 cence e0eeb eae ecaeas 14 10 example nananana cc ee eee 14 10 settings agentdebugle
144. Active FT 10007310 Abigail Jones Abbyd Sales Active FT 1100 Steve Nielsen Steve Nielsen Sales Active T 1101 Luther Nelson Luther Nelson Sales Active DO 1102 Fred Smith Fred Smith Sales Active PU 1103 Nick Fischer Nick Fischer Sales Active D 1104 George Lloyd George Lloyd Sales Active T 1106 Chris Smith Chris Smith Sales Active O 1107 Greg Davis Greg Davis Sales Active O 1108 Bryan Green Bryan Green Sales Active T 1109 Mike Donovan Mike Donovan Sales Active D 1110 David Krause David Krause Sales Active CO 1111 Laura Thompson Laura Thompson Sales Active Figure 9 59 Device User Accounts tab 2 The mport screen displays Select File Please choose a valid file csv extension only to upload File Browse Figure 9 60 3 Click Browse and use the Choose file dialog to select the CSV file to import 4 Click Import to initiate the import process 5 A results screen displays to summarize the import 6 Click Back to select a different file or Exit to go back to the list page 9 56 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 10 CA50 Business Application Development Overview This chapter provides guidance for developing Web applications that reside on a Web server and are accessed by the CA50 UCA client application Valuable topics in this chapter include e Business application overview page 10 2 e CA50 Web application developer guide page 10 3 e Launching a
145. Active Call window press the left soft key Options to display the Call Options menu ail 10 52 On Abruzzo R 0 01 Options End Figure 4 32 Active Call Display 2 On the Call Options menu press the Up or Down keys to scroll to Park and press Select wll N Call NUT Transfer Hold Back Figure 4 33 Call Options Display 4 48 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 The system selects an available extension on which to park the call and the Park window displays the extension Press the right soft key Ok to accept the extension and park the call all 3 Park CI Call parked Ok Figure 4 34 Park Display On the device on which the call was parked J NOTE When the user selects Ok the device display returns to the desktop or the prior business application After three seconds of no user action the device display also returns to the desktop or the prior business application 4 Amessage transmits to all other users to inform them that a call is parked on an extension The user can press the left soft key to pick up the call or the right soft key to dismiss the message 10 10 Call parked on 150 Pickup Ok Figure 4 35 Park Display On a logged in device other than the device on which the call was parked Parking a Call on any Available Extension Within a Group Department To park a voice unicast call on any available extension within a group
146. CA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide AddConsoleUser This method adds a UCA Management Console user to the UCA system The user is added into the B_USER table in the UCA database int AddConsoleUser ConsoleUserlnfo userinfo string sPassword string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters ConsoleUserlnfo ConsoleUserlnfo class that describes the user sPassword User password ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus if the address should not be logged UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log Related Classes public class ConsoleUserInfo public ConsoleUserInfo public public public public public public public public string string string string string ExtUsrID firstName lastName RoleToken userstatus DateTime dateCreated DateTime dateModified DateTime dateLastLogin UCA Server Optional APIs 11 37 ConsoleUserlnfo Class Members Table 11 13 ConsoleUserlnfo Class Members Class Member Description ExtUsrID User login ID firstName User first name lastName User last name Role Token Token representing user role Admin Manager This data is found in the B_ Roles table userStatus User status e g Active Suspended Disabled This data is found in the S UserStatusType table
147. CA WS gt lt XMLURL gt lt URL URL http 192 168 0 220 Motorola UCA Client GetUser aspx gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt cfg type Time value 12 07 2007 13 09 04 gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt XMLURL gt lt string gt UCA Server 6 47 5 Within the XML search for a link that resembles http Some IP Address Motorola UCA Client GetUser aspx This link is in bold type in this and the previous step to illustrate its location within the URL This link is passed back to the CA50 during device registration to tell the device the URL used for login 6 Launch another instance of the IE browser and copy and paste the link into the browser to display a page that says Scan barcode to log In 7 Enter a sample user ID that came with the installation sample data For example type 10007310 and press the Enter key The browser should now display a blank page 8 Right click on the blank page and choose View Source 9 A big block of XML displays approximately 7K of text data the XML profile created by UCA server for user 10007310 10 This information verifies a CA50 can log in to the UCA server Configuring Firewalls The CA50 uses network communication to interact with the server and it is important to properly configure firewalls running on the server or on the network between the UCA server and the CA50 Table 6 1 identifies what needs to be opened or allowed in pertinent firewalls Table 6 1 Firewall Settings Process Name Process Ex
148. CA server 1 Insert the battery into the CA50 New units from the factory boot directly to the CA Menu V 2 Launch the Rapid Deployment client from the CA Menu For step by step instructions see Rapid Deployment on page F 1 3 Scan the 16 Rapid Deployment bar codes for the CA50 Demo Solution listed below Scan these bar codes in the order they are listed 1 2 NOTE f the device does not boot to the CA Menu see Accessing the CA Menu on page 4 18 3 4 5 E 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 6 7 8 9 10 11 Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 13 12 13 14 5 1 1 6 4 When all bar codes have been scanned the Your Device is Ready to Use message displays on the CA50 Press the right soft key to select OK wal Staging LI Your Device is Ready to Use Figure E 8 Staging Window E 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide 5 From the CA Menu use the Up and Down keys to scroll and select Warm Boot to boot the CA50 J NOTE To automate the warm boot of the device and automatically launch the UCA client application see page 12 2 6 The device CA50 is ready to use when the Scan bar code to log in displays wall MTL Scan bar code to log in Exit Figure E 9 Login Prompt Step 7 Scan Employee Login Bar Code Scan an employee user login bar code to log in to the UCA s
149. CA50s Deployed Per Site The number of CA50s that can be deployed within a site is dependent on the site installation specifics e Number of access points within the store e Mode and rate of activity of CA50 usage e Voice unicast calls e Walkie talkie communication e Bar code scanning e Messaging paging e Server hardware specifics e Wired network infrastructure capability e Other devices competing for network bandwidth Wireless Network Optimization Maximizing Battery Life via Wireless Optimizations For recommendations see Table 3 1 on page 3 9 For recommendations on optimizing for walkie talkie communication see page 4 37 Site Installation Guidelines 13 3 Decrease Roam Times Through a Channel Mask To decrease roam times the CA50 ships from the factory with a channel mask implemented The channel mask limits the scanned RF channels to a subset of the total available channels By default the CA50 ships with a channel mask enabling the use of only channels 1 6 and 11 Total Available Channels Table 13 7 lists the available 802 11 a b g channels and the frequencies not limited by regional constraints J NOTE This table lists all available channels and does not specify which channels may be illegal to use based on regional national laws Table 13 1 Channel Availability Channel Frequency o_o 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 O CO NI OD OF A WY N 2452 O 2457 h as
150. Channel Settings 4 UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile WakieT akie Selirge Enable wake Take C Enable Sean Made Multicast Settings Wakie Talkie IP Address E 18222 In the Miudtiosst mods the IF address and Port are used bor mulicast Naren waketakieconmunicaliorre a well as the Pait movement method Selling Charmelinciemerkz Pot causes the z harm k lo be nctemented based on diferent pole what Qhennelncement IP is incremerted based on IP add Walkie Takie Channel 5elings Channel Number Channel Type Chamel Hame Listers rip Shor Broadeadt Lister Ody Cisl Raquel Cesta Sales Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 9 Walkie Talkie Channel Settings There are four types of Walkie Talkie channels 1 Default The channel assigned to the user on login the user can talk and hear on this channel 2 Listen Talk Channel Users can listen and talk on Listen Talk channels 3 Listen Only Channel Users can listen to but cannot talk on Listen Only channels Users cannot manually select and enter single channel mode on Listen Only channels XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 9 4 SCO Single Channel Only By default users cannot hear anything on this channel This is a reserve channel for single channel mode A user must select this channel manually to access it Selecting this channel puts a user in Single Channel mode When selected in Single Channel mode users can talk and listen on
151. Click Edit The Edit Console User window displays System Management Console Users gt Console User Detail gt Console User Edit System Settings Console Users 1 General Console User Details User ID aide First Name Last Name Role Administrator can access everything Status Active v Save Cancel Figure 9 47 Edit User Window 4 Enter the console user information to change in the appropriate text boxes 9 46 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 5 Click Save to save the edits or Click Cancel to terminate the session Editing a Console User Password To edit a console user s password in the UCA server 1 Click the System Management tab gt Console Users tab 2 Click the User ld to edit from the list of console users in the User ID column The Console User Detail window displays System Management Console Users gt Console User Detail System Settings Console Users a ta Fapaovad 1 Console User Detail User ID admin First Name Admin Last Name Role Admin Status A Date Created 6 21 2007 4 29 00 PM Date Modified 14 2000 12 00 00 4M Last Login 8 27 2007 10 12 00 AM Figure 9 48 Console User Detail Window UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 47 3 Click Edit Password The Edit Console User Password window displays System Management Console Users gt Console User Detail gt Edit Co
152. Client Backlight Battery Timeout 6 48 Client Backlight Level 6 48 Client Desktop Link DefaultScan 6 48 Client NewPhoneRegRetryCount 6 48 Client Phone Ring a 6 48 Client PhoneRegRetryCount 6 48 Client PhoneRegRetryInterval 6 48 Client Volume Receiver 6 48 Client Volume Speaker 6 48 Phone Call UnicastPacketRate 6 48 Phone Gateway CallPark ByGroup Enable 6 48 Phone Gateway CallPark Enable 6 48 Phone Gateway FAC CallPark 6 48 Phone Gateway FAC CallPick 6 48 Phone Gateway IPAddress 6 48 Phone Gateway Port 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phone Gateway Protocol Type 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phone Gateway Type 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phone Peer2Peer Enable 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phone Peer2Peer Port 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount AA PE 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRangeSize MAA AP 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize Lea Sauk pA a Geet dh Paa a eas 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phonebook RecentCalls Interval Sie de PP es 6 49 6 50 6 51 Phonebook SelectableGroups ShowAll AA PA Meee a aia 6 49 6 50 6 51 System AllowDynamicWhenStaticFails ee ee ee eee ee 6 49 6 50 6 51 System DefaultLocation 6 49 6 50 6 51 System Device ActivityThreshold 6 49 6 50 6 51 System Language Lan
153. Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web AN Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above a After a successful login the System Status view of the UCA Web Console displays as shown in Figure 9 2 on page 9 4 This verifies that an administrator can login and view the status of the system IMPORTANT f the UCA Web Console does not display the default Web page may be stopped To start it do the AN following Go to Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Internet Information Services IIS Manager Click on the next to the computer name under Internet Information Services Expand the folder named Websites If the default Web site is stopped right click on it and select Start Start the UCA Web Console see step 1 below 6 46 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Validate a CA50 Can Log In to the UCA Server Simulate a CA50 login to the UCA server Internet Explorer can be used to simulate a CA50 login verifying that th
154. Create System Settings Console Users 1 General Console User Details User ID First Name Last Name Role Administrator can access everything Status Active v Save Cancel Figure 9 45 Create User Window 2 Enter in the user s User ID first and last name in the appropriate text boxes 3 Select a role from the drop down list menu 4 Select a status from the drop down list menu 5 Click Save to store the user or Click Cancel to terminate the session J NOTE The UCA server supports two roles Administrator and Manager Administrator has full permissions and can perform all actions available through the UCA Console Manager has limited permissions and can only view System Status and add edit and remove CA50 device users UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface Editing Console User Information To edit console user information in the UCA server 1 Click the System Management tab gt Console Users tab 2 Click the User ID to edit from the list of users in the User ID column The Console User Detail window displays System Management Console Users gt Console User Detail System Settings Console Users Tools 1 Console User Detail User ID admin First Hame Admin Last Name Admin Role Admin Status A Date Created 3 2 2009 1 23 00 PM Date Modified 32312009 7 17 00 PM Last Login 32312009 6 34 00 PM Figure 9 46 Console User Detail Window 3
155. D MOTOROLA o CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 72E 93914 02 Revision A November 2009 CA50 Client UCA Server Developer Guide 2008 2009 by Motorola Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Motorola This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Motorola grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program ina network without written permission from Motorola The user agrees to maintain Motorola s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to incl
156. EMENT MOTOROLA IS NOT WILLING TO LICENSE THE PRODUCTS TO YOU OU SHOULD CLICK ON THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON TO DISCONTINUE THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCESS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS DU MAY WITHIN 15 DAYS RETURN THIS ENTIRE PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION ERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE ENTIRE PRODUCT IF YOU HAVE NOT PHYSICALLY RECEIVED A PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND iF Definitions 9 accept the terms of the license agreement do not accept the terms of the license agreement Instalei lt Back Ne Coca Figure 6 3 License Agreement 5 Read the license agreement and click Yes to accept and continue the installation The Customer Information window displays with the current user name and company Change if necessary ee Motorola Installation Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Associate Name Company Name Company Name Serial Number from UCA Server Installation CD Install this application for O Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me Symbol Associate fasta lt Back Neo PCa Figure 6 4 Customer Information 6 Enter the serial number that appears on the back of the UCA installation CD sleeve UCA Server 6 13 7 Click Next The SQL Server 2005 Information window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Please enter SQL Server 2005 information WARNING A strong password con
157. End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 8 Name AppCallOnHold LSKey Options M L AppCallOnHold RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt MenuStates gt lt Profile gt XML Profile for Configuration 7 27 Completed User XML Profile Sample lt xml version 1 0 encoding ut 8 gt lt XMLProfile gt lt Profile gt lt User ID from DB Name from DB StoreID from DB gt lt Role TD 0 Name from DB gt Group ID 0 Name from DB gt lt User gt lt Audio gt lt Volume type Speaker Value 0 gt lt Volume type Receiver Value 0 gt lt Volume type Mic Value 5 gt lt Volume type HeadsetMic Value 5 gt lt Audio gt lt Phone Enable Y Ext from DB CallerID from DB ExtPwd 0 MAC from DB gt lt Gateway IP from DB Port from DB Type from DB Protocol from DB DeviceType from DB PacketRate from DB FACCallPark from DB FACCallPick from DB gt lt Phone gt lt WTT Enable Y AllowScanMode N gt lt Multicast ITP 239 192 2 2 Port 5000 Channel Tncrement Port gt lt ChList gt lt Ch ID 1 type LO Name Store Broadcast SName 1 gt lt Ch ID 3 type SCO Name Sales SName 3 gt lt Ch ID 4 type LO Name Ouick Link SName 4 gt lt Ch ID 5 type Def Name Front End SName 5 gt lt ChList gt lt WTT gt lt DownloadFiles Do
158. Equiv rss1 4 Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv rsslim Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv rssexp Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv webcode Content enabled gt C 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Configuring Symbologies During the Login Process If the default login process of the UCA server is used symbologies can be configured by embedding the appropriate META tags in the file scanner symbologies config located in C Inetopub wwwroot Motorola UCA Client The configuration in these META tags are applied to the device when the user logs in The administrator should ensure that the meta tags included in this file are valid and formatted correctly A user login error on the device results if the format is not correct Configuring Symbologies in a Business Application Every business application Web page can include META tags to configure the symbologies vV Example NOTE When the symbology is configured it remains until the user warm boots or cold boots the device To change the minimum length of symbology 2 of 5 to 10 use the following meta tag in the html file in the header section lt META HTTP Equiv i20f5 minlength Content 10 gt NOTE For sample business applications see Appendix Business Applications Supplement V Appendix D Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup Overview This deployment example is a step b
159. Extension Pool View Phone and WT Phone Extension Pool Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries Returned 69 results Find Extension Extension Group Static Owner External ID Extension Type Phonebook Description SCCP MAC X 265 Seasonal Dynamic UCA Ext O X 266 Seasonal Dynamic UCA Ext GA 267 Seasonal Dynamic UCA Ext O X 28 Seasonal Dynamic UCA Ext m X 269 Seasonal Dynamic UCA Ext m X 340 Managers 10057315 Static UCA Ext SM YM X 241 Managers 10087312 Static UCA Ext ASM UU X 7001 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext E 7002 Electrical 1104 Static UCA Ext Joe Smith 111111111111 1234 Figure 9 7 Phone Extension Pool View non SCCP UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 9 Creating a UCA Phone Extension To create a phone extension in the UCA server 1 Click the Phone and Walkie Talkie tab gt Phone Extension Pool tab gt Create The Create Phone Extension window displays Phone and WT Phone Extension Pool gt Create Phone Extension Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Phone Extension Details Phone Extension Group Managers PBX Password Confirm PBX Password Extension Type Dynamic UCA Ext w Figure 9 8 Create Phone Extension Window 2 For SCCP only an additional parameter is required the SCCP MAC address This mandatory field is applicable for SCCP only The Mac Ad
160. Extensions asmx Business Application Extensions Methods UpdateUCAUserSession This method is used to keep the user s UCA server session alive The UCA server monitors user activity as it applies to the UCA server For example the UCA server recognizes a UCA phone book lookup as user activity A phone book lookup updates the user s activity in the server and keeps the user s session alive If the UCA server does not see user activity for a period of time it logs off the user A business application is a completely separate application that may not even reside on the UCA server If a user only accesses a business application and never accesses the UCA server after login it is possible for the UCA server to log off the user due to lack of activity The Update UCAUserSession method when called from a business application updates the user s session in the UCA database int UpdateUCAUserSession string sStoreNumber string sUser ret UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store or location number sUser User ID WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to NT Event log GetDeviceUserFromIP This method is used to lookup a CA50 device user User ID using the device s IP address as the key int GetDeviceUserFromIP string sStoreNumber string sip Addr ref string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus CA50 Business Applicat
161. Haremitiorejuakieakiscomnmunicalionrs as wel as the Pait reremen melhod Selling Charmelmeremert Pol causes channels lo bs nctemented based on diferent pails where as Chanel liement Pail Qhennelncement 1P is incrarerted based an IP sddiesses Walke Takie Charmel 5elings Lister Ordy Shor Bioedeadk Listen Oriy Cunt Hagussl Dalai Salas SCO Front End Cancel 4 Back Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 7 Enable Walkie Talkie 1 Check the Enable Walkie Talkie mode to enable the Walkie Talkie communication Un check the Enable Walkie Talkie mode to disable the Walkie Talkie communication 2 In Scan mode the device listens on Listen Talk channels and Listen Only channels Check the Enable Scan mode check box to have the device scan listen on the channels marked in the profile as Listen Talk and Listen Only Multicast Settings UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Waku Talkie Inthe Multicast mode the IP address and Port are used ko mullicast Nanaman walkis takiscommunicaliong a5 wel as the moremenl method Selling Charnnelmeiemert Pol causes channels lo bs nctemented based on diferent pails where 85 Channelncemenis IP is incremerted based on IP addresses Listen Orly Shore Binadeat Listen Orly Cus Request Dalai Salas SCO Front Ered 4 Back Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 8 Multicast Settings 8 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Multicast settings specify the
162. Headsaet 11 samasama asana aaaimakaamaaamamanamasaaasaasasan gf 3 2 4 7 4 13 CA50 Configuration Staging Deploying Reboot Device Access the CA M NnU wicccccccces esses COA 3 12 4 17 4 18 Device Staging and Deployment USING MSP cc cccscececcscscssesesesecececsessscseseseseececsesesssesesasanacecsesesees 3 12 4 19 12 1 12 2 D 16 F 1 XML Profile Configures CA50 when Downloaded from Server cccseceecec es ANA 7 1 D 6 Battery Management RecommendatlonS nananana an 3 6 3 9 4 4 A 1 B 8 B 12 Determining Version Information OS Client et nanana AA AA 4 7 4 29 Aa enn ae 5 1 6 2 D 1 Installing Uninstalling Server Software ss le 6 10 6 42 6 45 e Server Hardware Software Requirements e AA ANAN AA BP a 6 7 e Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance Aamin 6 45 Web Console for Server Setup and Maintenance 4 cena eae 9 7 14 2 Login and PassWO0nd ama maana s A A 9 4 6 13 e Populate Database with User Site Specific Information Baa css O 2 3 e CA50 Capabilities with UGA Serer xxxxxx aaa Go fl 6 58 e Importing Users and Extension naasa MN sasa 9 13 9 25 raupleshootng EIT CODES a ash sere AA E AE R ae eeusans tad 14 4 14 6 14 18 e Alternate Administrative Mechanism to Manage Customer Data a 11 5 11 14 11 18 11 22 11 29 11 36 Business Applications 2 0 0
163. Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 17 Device Settings Table 8 7 Device Settings Field Description AC Backlight On Key Press Press key to turn on the backlight device is in the cradle AC Backlight Timeout Sets the time in seconds that the backlight stays on device is in the cradle AC Power Check Interval Sets the time in seconds that the device uses to check if it is in the cradle Min Signal Strength Sets the minimum RF signal strength to be connected the numbers are negative the larger the negative number the weaker the signal e g 70 is weaker than 60 RF SampleTime Sets the time in seconds for the RF signal strength sampling Good RF SampleThreshold Sets the number of times the RF sample signal strength must be above the minimum signal strength before the bad sample count is reset Bad RF SampleThreshold Sets the number of times the RF sample signal strength must be below the minimum signal strength before the Network Connection Lost message displays Notif Msg Vibrate Cycle Count The number of times the device should vibrate on receipt of notification message XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 15 Table 8 7 Device Settings Continued Field Description Notif Msg Visible Cycle Count The number of times the device should show visible indication on receipt of notification message Enable Backlight Check the check box to enable the device backlight on the device Uncheck the check box to disable the backli
164. ITIIITiIitiiitiititt Figure 6 34 ASP NET 2 0 Ajax Extensions 1 0 UCA Server 6 27 Media Relay EERRREEE Figure 6 35 Media Relay Motorola UCA Diagnostics Tool 7 CJ Please wait while Windows con igures Motorola UCA Diagnostics gs e1 T pA 7 rr OO of JU Motorola UCA Server Backup amp Restore Figure 6 37 UCA Server Backup 8 Restore I Motorola UCA Server Profile Builder saan oe a ee ee bod kaa kag bal bag Figure 6 38 UCA Server Profile Builder 15 Click Yes to start the console or click No naa Figure 6 39 Start Web Console 6 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 16 The final dialog of the installation displays Motorola Installation Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing UCA Server Version 2 0 on your computer AA Td would like to view the README file InstallShield lt Back fl rini M cancel Figure 6 40 nstallShield Wizard Complete 17 To view the Readme document leave the box checked and click Finish To end the installation without viewing the Readme document uncheck the box and click Finish 18 After installing and launching the UCA server software it is strongly recommended to validate that the server was successfully installed and is performing properly For details see Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 Ll Of x UCA Server Software
165. META Tag is an action ancy content parameter gt False disables the ancy Content true gt tag used to set the property code11 redundancy property Code11 ReportCheckDigit The lt META True Enables lt META Code11 ReportCheckDi HTTP Equiv code11 reportc reporting of the HTT P Equiv code11 reportc git META Tag is an heckdigit check digit heckdigit Content true gt action tag used to set content parameter gt False disables the code11 reporting of the reportcheckdigit check digit property Table C 1 Symbology Property Trioptic Code 39 Trioptic39 Trioptic39 Redundancy GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Webcode Webcode Code11 CheckDigitCount Custom Meta Tags Continued Description The Code11 CheckDigitCou nt META Tag is an action tag used to set the code11 checkdigitcount property The Trioptic39 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the Trioptic39 decoder By default disabled The Trioptic39 Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the Trioptic39 redundancy property The Rss14 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the Rss14 decoder By default disabled The RssLim META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the RssLim decoder By default disabled The Rssexp META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the Rssexp decoder By default disabled
166. Menus amp Meru States E Menuz Dynamos Menu Eleman Options AppCaichve Heru Tile Dynamic Mer Mew Slates Figure 8 34 First Name URI XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration Add a Client Command Menu Element 1 Right click the main menu Options AppCallActive and select Add Client Command 2 Select the new Client Command item Client Command4 Menus 5 Meru States E Menus Cher Command Options ppl alctive Menu The Cent Command Transfer FrslName iin meri Figure 8 35 Add a Client Command Menu Element 3 Enter a Menu Title e g About in the text box under Client Command 4 Select a Client Command e g About from the Command drop down list under Client Command Menus amp hMeru Slates E Menuz Cieri Command Ophons Appl facie Tranter Figure 8 36 Client Command 8 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Add a Server Action Menu Element 1 Right click the main menu Options AppCallActive and select Add Server Action from the options listed 2 Select the new Server Action item Server Actions UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu Menus 5 Meru States E Manus Jerver Actor Options Appl at clive Merw Tile Servar Aelion5 Tanger FraMams URI About Save Acts Manu Shstes Figure 8 37 Add a Server Action Menu Element 3 Type a Menu Title e g Price Check in the text box under Server Action 4 Type a valid URI in th
167. Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oek O d a Alh Foes 6 O 5G Address E C Program Files MotorolalUICA Server Manuals Readme htm UEa iw a UCA Server Software Contents e Description e Device Compatibility e Release Notes e Components e Installation and Software Compatibility Description The UCA Server Software includes a Console for Server Setup and Maintenance demo application and Development amp Integration Tool kit 1 The UCA server uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the following functionality Figure 6 41 UCA Server Software Readme UCA Server 6 29 19 If Yes is clicked to start the Web Console now the following Web Console window displays See Login to the UCA Server System on page 9 3 for login information UCA Evaluation Edition Not for Resale or Production Use 2050 AA Figure 6 42 UCA Login IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web AN Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Admin Password can be changed on the UCA server console from System Management gt Console Users gt Console User Detail gt Edit Console User
168. N SETOD NANG ANN AA a a EA aE a erei i B 12 Wall Mount Brackets cccccccccccccececccececceceueceneuceceaceueeenenueneneaneneaeeneaeeneansneunsneneaneats B 13 Table of Contents xiii KI I023 6 0TA BOCKE eienenn AA AA AN EA E AN B 13 Ree 230 OT BACK Cl aaa AA AANGAL NA he B 15 Appendix C Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies NENE napana AA AA AA a C 1 Enabling Disabling Symbologies C 1 SUPO ed COGS TYDES tak T AA A C 2 Enabled Code Types u 1 a C 2 COMMON VIO OCIS AA AA AA C 3 Configuring Symbologies During the Login Process C 12 Configuring Symbologies in a Business Application X a C 12 Appendix D Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup OVEIVIOW a D 1 JURE OF sipa O PENOY D 2 Step 1 Required Site Settings for this Exercise X a D 3 Wireless Network Site Settings a D 3 CA50 and UCA Server Settings a D 3 BUSINESS Application Settings aaa ANAN AA D 3 Step 2 Setup Static IP on Server Hardware a D 4 Step o Install UCA Server SON Ware gaia cienccnssnectdsdencetscsanceraceasiancecdsieaneecceatnansdnsanentenaene D 4 Step 4 Validate Successful Server Installation ON Laptop 00 2 mmsssassnnaaawana D 5 Step 5 Create an XML Profile Called Footwear xm1 cccccseseeceeeseeeeeeceeeeeeee
169. Newman Sales Active F 1142 Stewart Zurcher Stewart Zurcher Sales Active F 1143 Lindsay Johnston Lindsay Johnston Sales Active I gt IN Ww Selected List Selected tems Remove from Delete List Figure 9 58 Entries to Delete J NOTE To remove an entry from the selected delete list click the entry in the Selected Item List box and click Remove from Delete List 5 Click Delete to delete all selected entries 6 Aconfirmation dialogue displays to verify the delete 7 Click Yes to delete the selected entries UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 55 Import Utility The Import Utility allows some of the lists to be imported via CSV files instead of manually entering the data To import from a CSV file 1 On the Device User Accounts tab click Import Device User Accounts All Users Recent Users All Users Create Add To List For Delete Returned 162 results Find First Name External UserID First Name Last Name Common Name Role Status IT 10027318 Kevin Smith Kevin Smith Sales Active T 10037317 John Doe John Doe Sales Active 10047316 Jane Doe Jane Doe Sales Active FT 10057315 Bill Gordon Bill Gordon Manager Active TF 10067314 Victoria OConnor Victoria OConnor FrontEnd Active IT 10017319 Anna Carter Anna Carter Sales Active T 10077313 John H Du Hart I v John H Du Hart I v FrontEnd Active D 1105 Robert Davidson Robert Davidson Sales
170. Next to continue The Start Copying Files window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files Current Settings UCA Server v2 0 Destination Directory C Program Files Motorola UCA Server Database instance UCA AA Client Lanugage Englishfen US fasta Beck News O Figure 6 28 Start Copying Files Window J NOTE Ensure that the settings match the summary and client The installation process may take some time to complete Command windows flashing is typical during the installation process 13 Click Back to change settings or click Next to proceed with the installation The InstallShield begins to extract files and the install runs without further intervention Extracting Files Extracting File setuphprogram files4microsoft sql To Directory co SbbS094f 3e2f4bd4be01 520 SE00000 Figure 6 29 Extracting Files IMPORTANT This installation requires Internet Information Services IIS If IIS is not installed on the host AN machine the installation aborts 14 The SQL Server 2005 Express is installed Figure 6 30 to Figure 6 39 display in sequence as the install proceeds Framework is already loaded and the computer processor speed During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process
171. Note Exiting the application prior to scanning all required bar codes discards any scanned data collected up to that point Errors J NOTE f the UCA client application cannot connect to the server it continues to retry until you cancel exit the application If failure to connect to the server persists see the MSP Administrator F 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Appendix G ActiveSync Overview To communicate with host computer devices install Microsoft ActiveSync on the host computer Use ActiveSync to manually update data on the CA50 client and synchronize information on the client with information on the host computer Changes made on the client or host computer appear in both places after synchronization ActiveSync software e Allows working with client compatible host applications on the host computer ActiveSync replicates data from the client so the host application can view enter and modify data on the client e Synchronizes files between the client and host computer converting the files to the correct format e Uploads and downloads data to the client from the host computer Synchronization is a one step procedure that ensures the data is always safe and up to date e Copies rather than synchronizes files between the client and host computer e Controls when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode e g set to synchronize continually w
172. On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to delete all the files downloaded previously to the folder application download on the device options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value DeleteFiles Text to display over the soft key specified in id J 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Commands Usage in Notification Messages The SendNotification API is used to notify the CA50 device user of any information in text format This can also be extended to a complex work flow application In this context commands can be used in the notification to execute a command on the device This section describes how commands can be embedded in Notification messages The SendNotification Web service can be used by external programs to send an asynchronous message to a logged in CA50 device user This Web service allows users to customize the left soft key and right soft key One of the parameters for the SendNotification Notiflnfo has the properties LSKey and RSKey which can be used to assign custom action Example notiflnfo LSKey notiflnfo RSKey See Device Messaging Web Service on page 11 26 for details and instructions for using the Web service UCA Client commands can be assigned to these parameters Example notifInfo LSKey WTScan S L SETSCANMODE no
173. P Equiv upce0 preambl e Content PREAMBLE COU NTRY AND SYSTEM CHA RS gt Table C 1 Symbology Property upce0 ConvertToupca UPC E1 UPC e1 upce1 ReportCheckDigit upce1 preamble upce1 ConvertToupca UPC A UPC A Custom Meta Tags Continued Description The upce0 ConvertToupca META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce0 converttoupca property The upce1 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the upcE1 decoder By default disabled The upce 1 ReportCheckDigit META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce1 reportcheckdigit property The upce1 preamble META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce1 preamble property The upce1 ConvertToupca META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce1 converttoupca property The upca META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the upcA decoder By default enabled Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies Custom Tags lt META HT TP Equiv upce0 convertt oupca content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce1 content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce 1 reportch eckdigit content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce 1 preambl e content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv upce1 convertt oupca content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv upca content parameter gt Parameters True enables conversion of UPC EO bar codes t
174. Parameters sMenuType Specifies if this is a call or transfer menu Valid Values call or transfer sStoreNumber Specifies the Store ID sGroup Group Token to filter by sListType This controls whether to list all extensions only UCA extensions or only additional phone book entries External Valid Values All UCA or External J NOTE Not all methods support all three options sSortType This controls how the list is sorted and consequently how the entries appear Valid Values Name FirstName LastName Number MostRecentl NOTE Not all methods support all options The name options use the group name the user s first last common name or the phone book description The number options use the group number or the phone extension XML Profile for Configuration 7 19 Descriptions of Phone Book Web Service Methods GetMenuGroupList This method returns a list of all groups that have phone book entries in them The entries in the returned menu will retrieve a list of all the extensions in the selected group All of the parameters are propagated to the entries The URL used for the entries is derived from the system setting System Webservice CallManager URI Parameters sListType All supported All UCA or External sSortType Name FirstName LastName or Number MA NOTE The group list is sorted by either group number or group name based on the sort choice one of the name sorts or the number sort The sort type is pas
175. REEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT MOTOROLA IS NOT WILLING TO LICENSE THE PRODUCTS TO YOU DU SHOULD CLICK ON THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON TO DISCONTINUE THE ERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE ENTIRE PRODUCT IF YOU HAVE NOT PHYSICALLY RECEIVED A PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND 1 Definitions 9 accept the terms of the license agreement do not accept the terms of the license agreement InstallShield Figure 6 44 License Agreement UCA Server 6 31 4 Read the license agreement and click Yes to accept and continue the installation The Customer Information window displays with the current user name and company Change if necessary Motorola Installation Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Company Name AA Company Name Serial Number from UCA Server Installation CD Install this application for O Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me Symbol Associate InstallShield Figure 6 45 Customer Information 5 Enter a valid serial number and click Next to begin the upgrade process J NOTE This process takes some time to complete Upgrading Software Revisions from Revision A to Revision B IMPORTANT Before starting an upgrade back up the older version of the UCA database e g version 1 4 x x A The Backup utility
176. Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 21 GetGrouplnfo This method retrieves group information from the UCA system public int GetGrouplnfo string sStoreNumber string sGroupToken string ipAddr string sUser ref PhoneExtinfo group nfo ret UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store number sGroup Token Group ID Identifier for the Group joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required group nfo Reference to a grouplnfo class see Table 11 6 on page 11 19 WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful When successful grouplnfo is populated with the specified group information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Role Management Web Service Methods In the default installation the Role Management Web Service is located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA ServerManagement RoleManagement asmx This Web service can be used by external programs to modify the UCA role data in the UCA database AddRole This method adds a role into UCA system The roles are added into the B Roles table int AddRole string sStoreNumber Rolelnfo rolel
177. S During the UCA login processes these Web services are called to authenticate the user s credentials against the user data found in the UCA database The system can be configured to call a custom authentication Web service that authenticates against an entirely different database if needed The server management and maintenance Web services are located in the Motorola UCA ServerManagement directory under IIS These Web services can be used to populate the UCA server database with key information such as device users phone extensions etc External programs can be developed that utilize the functionality found in these Web services as an alternative or in addition to using the UCA server Web Console in some cases For example if a customer finds over time that they need more CA5Os in a given department e g Lumber these new devices most likely need phone extensions If the number of CA50s in Lumber exceeds the number of phone extensions that were allocated to the Lumber group in the UCA server more phone extensions need to be assigned to Lumber The assignment of these new phone extensions to the Lumber group in the UCA server database can be accomplished by using the Web Console phone extension GUI functionality or by creating an external program that uses the AddExtension function found in the Phone Extension Management Web service The messaging Web services are located in the Motorola UCA ServerManagement directory under IIS This Web se
178. SP To completely update a CA50 device up to three sets of Rapid Deployment bar codes may need scanning When Rapid Development is complete cold boot the CA50 to boot up into the UCA client application at which time the device communicates to the server and receives the login screen Charge the battery before or after it is installed Use one of the spare battery chargers to charge the battery out of the CA50 or one of the CA50 device chargers to charge the battery installed in the CA5O Inserting and Removing the Battery Inserting the Battery Before using the CA50 insert the lithium ion battery provided with the device 1 Insert the battery bottom first into the battery compartment in the back of the device 2 Press the battery down into the battery compartment until the battery release latch snaps into place Battery Release Latch Figure 3 3 nserting the Battery J NOTE Position the battery correctly with the battery charging contacts pointing towards the bottom of the CA50 Getting Started 3 5 Removing the Battery 1 Hold the device on its side and lift the release latch to disengage the battery from the device Figure 3 4 Lift Release Latch 2 Insert a finger nail into the indent on the bottom of the battery and push downward The battery should eject Battery Indent Figure 3 5 Push Battery Indent J NOTE In the event of a tight battery fit the battery may not drop out of the well as pictured
179. System Notif MCChannel Port 6 53 System Notif MediaRelay DefaultAudioEncoding ma AY 6 53 System Notif MediaRelay IPAddress 6 53 System Notif MediaRelay Port 6 53 System Profile Path 6 53 System Profile Schema Path 6 53 System Profile Template Path 6 53 System Profile Workspace Path 6 53 System Resource Path 6 53 System Tools Stage 6 53 System UCAServer IPAddress 6 53 System Webservice CallManager URI 6 53 System Webservice CallPark URI 6 53 WT Base MCAddress 6 53 WT Base Port aaa 6 53 WT ChannellncrementMethod 6 53 system status ej AP 9 6 server status aa 9 5 T T DebugTrace table 6 49 6 50 6 51 technical specifications A 1 Accessories 1 aaa A 4 temperature battery 3 7 14 6 OOS AA AAP 9 47 troubleshooting CA50 client 0 0a 14 6 CA50 device diagnostic apps 14 11 NOCD WS eae arate a sack carte ae PA wee a AA 14 8 park retrieve call caller terminates park 4 52 calls parked by devices other than the CA50 Aa APA 4 52 parked call timeout 4 52 two devices attempt to pick up same parked call AA wage eae 4 52 server installation operation 14 4 UCA server install
180. T Event Log for more details 58365 A data layer exception occurred while getting parameter info for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 29 Table 14 17 Notification Errors Continued Error Code Description 58366 58391 58397 58398 Metrics An exception occurred while getting parameter info for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Unsupported route Type for Sending asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event log for more details Table 14 18 Metrics Errors Error Code 59032 59033 59034 59035 59062 59063 59064 59065 59093 59094 59095 59102 59103 59104 59105 59133 59134 59135 Description Error occurred while logging an incoming call Error identifying the user during logging of incoming call A data layer exception occurred while logging an incoming call Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging an incoming call Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while logging an out going call Error identifying the user during logging of an out going call A data layer exception occurred while l
181. TP Equiv Codabar maxle ngth content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv codabar notise diting content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv codabar clsiedi ting content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce0 content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv upce0 reportch eckdigit content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv upce0 preambl e content parameter gt Parameters True enables the property False disables the property nn O to 55 nn O to 55 True enables the property False disables the property True enables the property False disables the property Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables reporting of the check digit False disables reporting of the check digit PREAMBLE NON E no preamble PREAMBLE SYST EM CHAR system character preamble PREAMBLE COU NTRY AND SYST EM CHARS both system and country code preamble Example lt META HTTP Equiv Codabar redun dancy Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv Codabar minle ngth Content 30 gt 0 gt lt META HTT P Equiv Codabar maxle ngth Content 30 gt lt META HT TP Equiv codabar notise diting Content true gt lt META HTT P Equiv codabar clsiedi ting Content true gt lt META HTTP Equivz upce0 Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce0 reportch eckdigit Content true gt lt META HT T
182. The UCA server is an in store server required at every facility location to manage the CA5Os in AN each facility NOTE The demo solution reference implementations and associated source code are provided as an installation option on the UCA server Installshield The Developer Guide provides guidelines on how to modify the demo solution and reference implementations No application development support is provided with the installation of this software J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual J NOTE The CA5O Server Software ships with Motorola s standard 90 day software warranty During the warranty period Motorola will replace damaged or defective media Telephone and e mail access are also provided for the sole purpose of reporting a non conformance issue and for Motorola to verify the existence of the issue and determination of the conditions under which the issue may recur For enhanced support over the standard warranty including full access to technical support resources and rights to download entitled software releases Motorola recommends purchasing a CA50 Server Software Support agreement To maintain MSP support beyond the 90 day warranty period Moto
183. UCA Client phonebook asmx GetMenuGroupList sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType All amp amp sSortType Name gt lt entry ID 4 value First Names M S Range023 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType FirstName gt lt Menu gt XML Profile for Configuration 7 15 lt Menu ID 14 name DeskCallOnHold title Options gt lt entry ID 1 value HangUp 57 Phonenangup gt lt entry ID 2 value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value UnHold S L PhoneResume gt lt entry ID 4 value Applications M L Applications gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 15 name AppCallOnHold title Options gt lt entry ID 1 value HangUp S L PhoneHangup gt lt entry ID 2 value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value UnHold S L PhoneResume gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 16 name AECForHeadset title AEC HS gt entry ID 1 value Enable S L SetAEC 1 gt lt entry ID 2 value Disable S L SetAEC 0 gt lt Menu gt lt Menus gt Menu Elements There can be any number of lt Menu gt elements contained in the lt Menus gt element Each lt Menu gt can contain any number of lt entry gt elements Each lt Menu gt element should be assigned sequential IDs The lt Menu gt element name is th
184. URI gt This custom tag allows scanner data to be passed back up to the UCA server Return Values Data The data decoded by the scanner or imaging device Source The source device and human readable decoder type of the decoded bar code or symbol Type Hex value representing the decoder type Time The time at which the decode occurred hh mm ss Length The length of the decoded bar code or symbol Retrieval tags return information by replacing the text s within the content parameter of the meta tag Each s represents 1 return value if there are less than the maximum return values allowed for with s place holders the return values are supplied in sequence for that for the amount supplied For example lt meta http equiv scannernavigate content PriceLookup htm label s source s typ e s time s length s gt lt meta http equiv device content suspend gt This custom tag causes the device to suspend sleep once the business application page is received and parsed lt meta http equiv Symbology name content This custom tag enables disables symbologies which are not Properties gt enabled by default This tag can also set modify the properties of the symbologies Parameters Symbology Name Any of the symbologies supported by CA 50 Refer to page Scanner symbologies section Ex Code128 Codabar Code11 etc Properties properties specific to symbologies Ex Enable Disable minlength
185. Verdana width 88px border 0px gt lt b gt SCAN lt b gt lt text gt lt text align center style font 14pe Verdana width 88px border 0px gt lt b gt CAGE lt b gt lt text gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type Submit id LeftSoftKey value Exit gt lt input name RightSoftKey type button id RightSoftKey value 5 lt form gt lt body gt Sample Code 2 lt body gt lt form name form1 method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx id form1 gt lt text align center gt lt b gt Pull lt b gt lt text gt lt text align center style font 20px Verdana width 88px border 0px gt 02 lt text gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type submit id LeftSoftKey value Exit gt lt input name RightSottKey type button id RightSottKey value gt lt form gt lt body gt Sample Business Applications 11 Sample HTML Code Add Image m windowscE E x File Zoom Tools Help SCAN HEAT Figure l 7 Add Image lt body gt lt form name form1 method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx id form1 gt lt text align center gt lt img src tick2 jpg gt lt br gt lt b gt SCAN NEXT lt b gt lt text gt lt input name LeftSoftKey type submit id LeftSoftKey value Exit gt lt input name RightSoftKey type button id RightSoftKey value 5
186. abase 51232 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get the list of known devices Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 51262 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a device s AC status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 51263 The specified device was not found in the database AC Status update failed 51292 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a device s activity by user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 51293 Device not found Update of device activity failed 51294 Invalid location specified Update of device activity failed 51295 Device not associated with a user Update of device activity failed 51302 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a devices activity by IP Address See the NT Event log for more details 51303 Device not found Update of device activity failed 51304 Invalid Store ID specified Update of device activity failed XML Profile Table 14 11 XML Profile Errors Error Code Description 32031 Exception occurred while building profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 32032 Exception occurred while releasing and removing user phone extension due to profile build failure Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 32033 Malformed XML in profile template Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 32034 Cannot build profile without user s primary group being specified Refer to the NT Event Log for more
187. abase see page 9 25 Additional Phonebook Entries The Additional Phonebook Entries view displays the Phone Extension Group and Description of all additional phone extensions created in the UCA server These phone extensions are part of the PBX System used at the location Phone and VYalkie Talkie Additional Phonebook Entries Phone Extension Status Add To List For Delete ind Returned 20 results Phone Number Lumber Desk 258 Lumber Desk 259 Service Desk 1 Service Desk 2 Break Room Contractor Desk HR Office 353 er Training Room F 4 Oo O O O O o Oo oO Oo g 239 o oO Oo Oo o O o a Fi Fa S Ma agin Overhead Paging Figure 9 14 Additional Phonebook Entries View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface Creating an Additional Phone Extension To create an additional phone extension in the UCA server 1 Click the Phone and Walkie Talkie tab gt Additional Phonebook Entries tab gt Create The Additional Phonebook Entry Create window displays Phone and Walkie Talkie Additional Phonebook Entries gt Additional Phonebook Entry Create Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Additional Phonebook Entry Details Phone Extension Group Managers Phonebook Description Figure 9 15 Additional Phonebook Entry Create Window 2 Enter a Phone Extension and Phonebook Description in the appropriate text bo
188. access to certain communication functionality Be consistent Through the run of the application always define the same soft key right or left for the application and the other for the communication options The lt MenuStates gt to look at are those related to an application running AppNoCall and AppCallActive There are two other application related menu states AppQuietMode and AppCallOnHold but it is not recommended that the soft key functionality be changed for these states Pick one key for access to the communications options in the XML profile and leave the other for the business application to use If the business application is very simple does not need to define either of the soft keys define the lt MenuState gt key definitions as you wish maybe optimized for easy access to the phone book If you want the users to have access to more complex Web based business applications during a phone call then look at the DesktopCallActive and AppCallActive lt MenuStates gt Again pick one soft key for access to the communications options in the XML profile and leave the other soft key for the business application to use CA50 Business Application Development 10 13 Example 1 No Soft Keys Defined by the Web Application The simplest screen is one in which the Web application defines no keys An example of this is shown below in Figure 10 7 with the HTML for that page following Though the Web application defines no keys th
189. accessed by a CA50 From the menu a user selects one of the business applications for operation Only one business application can be run at a time on the CA50 For example in a price lookup business application the CA50 device scans and decodes bar code information and transmits to the UCA server for processing The server information associated with the bar code is then sent to the CA50 for display and use by the store associate Transmission of the data between the CA50 and UCA server occurs over the wireless infrastructure of the facility J NOTE After loading the UCA server software sample CA50 business applications can be found in the following directory Program Files Motorola UCA Server Development Toolkit J NOTE 1 Foracomplete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual Business Application Development Environment Developers familiar with standard Web site development methodologies are capable of business application development for the CA50 Business applications for the CA50 can be thought of as Web sites Any server side programming languages that are used in standard Web site development such as C JSP etc can be used to develop CA50 business applications The only requir
190. ace with the UCA database or any other UCA modules Profile and Menu Contents The UCA XML profile contains two sections Profile and Menu The Profile sections contain the details for phone settings Walkie Talkie settings and settings related to the CA50 device and the UCA client In addition this section contains a Menu States section which defines the menu options in each operational state of the UCA client The Menus section contains the list of menu options that display on the CA50 device when the user logs in to the device 8 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Theory of Operation Profile Builder allows a user to create and modify UCA XML profiles This includes a Menus section of the profile constituting menus and menu states The user can refer to the menus section during profile creation and profile modification Creation of UCA XML profiles using the Profile Builder application involves the following steps 1 Create Menus section XML files constituting Menu States and Menus information 2 Create a UCA XML profile by specifying other information and refer an existing Menus section XML file to the new profile UCA XML profiles in Profile Builder contain some parameters with values in the UCA database The values are configured by the user using the UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface and cannot be changed using Profile Builder As a safeguard Profile Builder protects these fields from mo
191. ache by IP address Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75131 Exception occurred while getting All Console Users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75141 Exception occurred while getting device user ID from cache by device ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75151 Exception occurred while getting a device user s IP address from cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75161 Exception occurred while adding a device user s preference to the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75171 Exception occurred while getting a device user s preference from the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75181 Exception occurred while removing a device user s preference from the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75191 Exception occurred while updating a device user s preference in the cache Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75211 Exception occurred while getting All Console Users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75221 Exception occurred while getting a device user s preference from the cache by the system variable token Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 75241 Exception occurred while getting device user ID from cache by phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Walkie Talkie Table 14 30 Wajlkie Talkie Errors Error Code Description 75511 Exception occurred while adding a walkie talkie channel Refer to the NI Event Log for mor
192. aintenance 14 22 50000 50999 Phone Book 14 18 51000 51999 Device Management 14 23 52000 52999 Console Status 14 22 53000 53999 Phone Extension Management 14 23 54000 54499 System Settings 14 35 54500 54999 Error Message Processing n a 55000 55999 User Authentication 14 36 56000 56999 User Management 14 36 57000 57999 XML Profile 14 37 58000 58999 Notification 14 38 59000 59999 Metrics 14 38 60000 60499 Walkie talkie 14 37 60500 60999 Groups 14 39 61000 61499 Roles 14 39 61500 61999 Server Logging 14 31 62000 62999 Console Users 14 32 72500 72999 Console Status Data 14 33 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 17 UCA Database Errors Table 14 8 UCA Database Error Ranges Error Code Range Error Type 70000 70499 Phone Book 14 34 70500 70999 Criteria Selection n a 71000 71499 Data Provider n a 71500 71999 DB Test n a 72000 72499 Device 14 34 73000 73499 Phone Extension 14 34 73500 73999 System Settings 14 35 74000 73999 DB Connection n a 74500 74499 User Authentication 14 36 75000 75499 User Management 14 36 75500 75999 Walkie talkie 14 37 76000 76499 XML Profile 14 37 76500 76999 Error Message 14 38 7 000 77499 Notifications 14 38 77500 77999 Metrics 14 38 78000 78499 Logging n a 78500 78999 Groups 14 39 79000 79499 Roles 14 39 79500 79599 Console Users Data 14 39 89500 89599 Server Files 14 40 95000 96000 UCA Server Mainten
193. all optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Related Classes public class NotifDest public NotifDest string sDestID string eDestType MRSType eMRSType NotifDest Class Members Table 11 8 NotifDest Class Members Class Member UCA Server Optional APIs 11 27 Description sDestID eDestType eMRSType Destination ID UserlD IP address and group This works with DestinationType If eDestType is User this param should be set to the UserID of the person to which the message is sent If eDestType is group this parameter is set to the where the message is sent group name Destination Type For example User IP address etc Use emun DestTypes as follows public enum DestTypes Role Group User DevicelD DevicelPAddr WTChannel All public class DynamicNotifParams public DynamicNotifParams string Text string tone string VisibleIndicator string VibrateIndicator string AdditionalAttribs string rskey string lskey Type of Media Relay Service to use IPBLUE MRS for IP Blue Media Relay Service CA50 MRS for internal purpose OTHER MRS is currently not supported Use the CA50 MRS when the message length is longer than 140 characters public enum MRSType CA50 MRS TPBLUE MRS OTHER MRS 11 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide DynamicNotifPar
194. alue 3 gt lt cfg type RFSampleTime value 10 gt lt cfg type MinSignalStrength value 77 gt lt cfg type ACPowerCheckInterval value 5 gt lt cfg type NotifMsgTimeout value 60 gt lt cfg type BatteryIconBeepEnable value 1 gt lt cfg type DefaultLowBattWavFile value Application Wav AFFIRMATIVEFEEDBACK WAV gt lt cfg type BatteryBeepInterval value 60 gt lt cfg tyoez language value Trom DB gt lt cfg type PhoneRegRetryCount value Trom DB gt lt cfg types PhoneRregRetryInterval valuez from DB gt lt cfg type NewPhoneRegRetryCount value from DB gt lt cfg type NotifMsgVibrateCycleCount value 2 gt lt cfg type NotifMsgVisibleCycleCount value 2 gt lt cfg type AECForHeadset value N gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt Alerts gt sAlert Event NotifNoCall tone VisibleIndicator VibrateIndicator gt lt Alert Event NotifCallActive tone Application Wav NewMsg wav volume 5 Visibleindicator gt sAlert EHvent RcvCaliNoCall teone from DB VisibleIndicator Vibratelndicator gt lt Alert Event RcvwWTTNoCall tone Application Wav wt wav gt lt Alert Event PTTNoCall tone Application Wav wt wav gt lt Alert Event AppAlertCallActive AllowTone N AllowVisibleIndicator Y AllowVibrateIndicator Y gt lt Alert Event AppAlertDND AllowTone N AllowVisibleIndicator Y AllowVibrateIndicator Y gt lt Alert
195. alue to to disable exiting the UCA client application by bar code scanning Note that when enabled scanning a bar code to exit the UCA client application works only when the user is logged in e Parameters that affect connectivity over an RF network The XML profile parameters below establish the CA50 s set points for quantifying an acceptable unacceptable RF connection for communicating with the UCA server based on RF signal strength and recheck intervals When these conditions are not met the UCA client application un registers the extension associated with making receiving voice calls disables the scanner locks the keys and displays a Network Connection Lost message Once these RF conditions are met again the UCA client application re establishes communication with the UCA server and re enables all lost functionality J NOTE The Factory Default settings for these parameters should satisfy most implementation requirements Modifying these parameters can negatively impact the performance of the system e BadRFSampleThreshhold is the number of times the RF sample signal strength must be below the minimum signal strength before the Network Connection Lost message displays e GoodRFSampleThreshhold is the number of times in a row the RF sample signal strength must be above the minimum signal strength before the bad sample count is reset e RFSampleTime is the amount of time in seconds between sampling the RF signal strength J NOTE f Ba
196. amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType FirstName gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 14 name DeskCallOnHold title Options gt centry ID 1 value HangUp S L PhoneHangup gt lt entry ID 2 value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value UnHold S L PhoneResume gt lt entry ID 4 value Applications M L Applications gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 15 name AppCallOnHold title Options gt lt entry ID 1 value HangUp S L PhoneHangup gt lt entry ID 2 value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value UnHold S L PhoneResume gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 16 name AECForHeadset title AEC HS gt entry ID 1 value Enable S L SetAEC 1 gt lt entry ID 2 value Disable S L SetAEC 0 gt lt Menu gt lt Menus gt lt XMLProfile gt 7 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 8 XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration Overview Profile Builder is a standalone does not interface with the UCA database or any other UCA modules Windows application installed with UCA software This application provides an administrator user interface used to create new UCA XML profiles and to modify existing UCA XML profiles This application is available as a separate installable and can install on any Windows 2003 SE server or Windows XP machine J NOTE Profile Builder does not interf
197. ample Usage lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Response wav Path0OnDevice Overwritez N gt Source http server somecompany com Response wav Destination Application Download lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Wav Response wav PathOnDevice Wav Overwrite N gt Source http server somecompany com Wav Response wav Destination Application Download Wav XML Profile for Configuration 7 7 To download the configured files at a later time after user logon Create a menu option to allow the user to download files upon user command Example lt Menu ID 4 name Applications title Applns 5 lt entry ID 1 value Download Files S L DOWNLOADFILES gt lt entry ID 3 value Price Check S S http server somecompany com Sample aspx gt lt Menu gt The Download files option displays on the Application menu When the option is selected the files are downloaded onto the device Desktop The Desktop element specifies actions that occur from the desktop while idle These settings allow overrides of certain key actions If a value is supplied in the URL attribute and the corresponding key is pressed the browser loads that URL The various supported types are e DefaultScan occurs when a bar code is scanned from the desktop e UpHotLink occurs when Up is pressed from the desktop e DownHotLink occurs when Down is pressed from the desktop e FPTTHotLink occurs when the f
198. ams Class Members Table 11 9 DynamicNotifParams Class Members Class Member Description Text Text to be displayed on the device tone Path on the device for the tone to be played Visiblelndicator Led color and blink rate Visible Indicator Values e REDSLOWBLINK e REDMEDBLINK e REDFASTBLINK e REDON e GREENSLOWBLINK e GREENMEDBLINK e GREENFASTBLINK e GREENON Vibratelndicator Vibrate action Vibrate Indicator Values e SLOWVIBRATE e MEDVIBRATE e FASTVIBRATE e VIBRATEON VisibleCycleCount The number of times the device should vibrate on receipt of notification message If it is passed as null the value is picked form the XML profile NotifMsgVibrateCycleCount VibrateCycleCount The number of times the device should show visible indication on receipt of notification message If it is passed as null the value is picked form the XML profile NotifMsgVisibleCycleCount Iskey Action associated with left soft key Ex lt add key LSKey value Ack S S http 192 168 7 138 HRA A aspx requestinfo 1100 23 gt For more information see Menu Elements on page 7 15 rskey Action associated with right soft key Ex lt add key RSKey value Dismiss S S http 192 168 7 138 HRA N aspx requestinfo 1100 23 I5 For more information see Menu Elements on page 7 15 UCA Server Optional APIs 11 29 User Management Web Service In the default installation the UserManagement Web Service is located at http UCAInstallMac
199. an anakan 10 16 Chapter 11 UCA Server Optional APIs ONE INN AA AA NA NAA 11 1 UCA Server Optional APIS Overview aa 11 2 Location of Optional APIs and Web Messaging Service ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 Alternate Mechanism for Login and Authentication 11 3 Alternative Mechanism for Server Management and Maintenance of Customer Data a 11 4 Mechanism for Sending Text Messages to the Device 7 000002m00sssaaaausssan 11 4 CA50 Device User Authentication Process a 11 5 POCS EF ION suinte RDR E E E E E E EEE EE 11 5 UCA Authentication Process Diagram a 11 7 Device User Authentication Web Service aa 11 8 Authentication Web Service Methods a 11 8 Phone Extension Web Servie saaan AN a 11 14 Phone Extension Web Service Methods aa 11 14 Group Management Web Service Methods cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeneeeesanees 11 18 Role Management Web Service Methods a 11 22 Device Messaging Web Service aa 11 26 Device Messaging Web Service Methods a 11 26 User Management Web Service aaa 11 29 User Management Web Service Methods a 11 29 Console User Authentication Web Service X a 11 40 Console User Authentication Web
200. ance n a 14 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide General Errors Phone Book Table 14 9 Phone Book Errors Error Code Description 50032 Exception occurred while getting the list of groups to be used for the phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 50061 Exception occurred while getting the list of extensions to be used for the phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 50101 Exception occurred while creating the ranges of extensions to be used for the phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 50131 Exception occurred while creating a list of extensions for a given range to be used for the phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 50134 Unsupported phone book sort option specified See the product documentation for supported sort options 50161 Exception occurred while getting the list of extensions for the recent call phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 50193 Exception occurred while creating and sorting extensions into ranges for the phone book See the NT Event log for more details 50221 Exception occurred while updating the Call Parked Location in the UCA database See the NT Event log for more details 50223 Error Invalid Store Number 50224 Error Invalid User ID 50226 UpdateCallParkedLocations Could not update Parked Location in UCA Server 50251 Exception occurred while creating the list of Parked Locations for use in the
201. and PTT metrics The other metrics types are asynchronous and are sent up when either an outgoing or incoming phone call disconnects 7 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 10 DebugLog 11 The DebugLog element controls what types of log messages are recorded in the local lt xx debug gt log file for more information see page 14 8 Logging can be enabled for one or more categories and each can be set to a different level The levels in order of no messages to the most messages are Off no log messages Info device and server IP address Error information messages and errors Warn information error and warning messages and Debug all messages Note that there are log messages for start up logic even if all categories are set to Off The UCAClient reg file needs to be modified to turn off startup logging The LoggingEnabled parameter under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Motorola UCAClient Params key must be set to zero to completely disable logging MenuStates The MenuStates element controls what default soft key labels should be displayed and what their default actions should be for various states of the CA50 The values for the State attributes are discussed in Static Menus Section on page 7 13 as they are very closely related to menu entries XML Profile for Configuration fe Ilo Static Menus Section A sample static menu set is shown in the following example lt Menus
202. and deploy a CA50 solution in a production environment To enable easy demonstration of the CA50 a self contained pre build Demo Solution is included on the UCA server Installshield For details seepage E 7 Steps in the Development and Deployment Checklist Table 2 1 Checklist Server Development and CA50 Deployment Steps Demo Solution Application Step Checklist for Server Development and CA50 Deployment Integrator Developer y v 2 Business Application for CA50 Generate optional NA 3 CA50 Device Settings Optimize Settings NA NA 4 UCA Server Files and Databases Populate with Site User Specific Info NA NA Wireless Infrastructure Optimize for CA50 ra 6 IP PBX Integration Optional Optional Optional NA 7 CA50S Site Deployment HU NA J NOTE When using the Demo Solution no user development is required for this step a 4 J NOTE To simplify CA50 deployment bar codes to configure the Ca50 are included in Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo 2 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Overview of the CA50 Solution e Overview of the System 0 0 1 1 e Components in the CA50 Solution 1 4 e Walkie Talkie 0 0 cece eee 1 3 4 31 e Voice Calls eee 1 3 4 36 e Business Applications like Price Check 1 2 10 2 e Messaging Paging AA 1 3 11 26 11 44 e Self Contained Pre build Demo
203. ase numeric and non alphanumeric is REQUIRED Login ID ucaadmin AA Password Cancel Figure 6 51 SQL Database Server Login IMPORTANT Microsoft Strong Password Guidelines for SQL Server 2005 authentication AN Strong passwords are not readily guessed by a person and are not easily hacked using a computer program Strong passwords cannot use prohibited conditions or terms including a blank or NULL condition Password Admin Administrator sa sysadmin Password criteria is a minimum of 8 ASCII characters 14 Enter a database user account details Do not enter user names like UCA SA Motorola Installation Wizard Select the directory which contains UCA Database Please enter the directory which contains UCADBBackup BAK file O Destination Folder C UCA Backup Figure 6 52 Database User Account Details 6 36 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 15 Browse to the folder to which backup zip file has been extracted Choose Folder TG bana 1 Cy Documents and Settings Figure 6 53 Backup Folder 16 Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays Motorola Installation Wizard installi Figure 6 54 UCA Client Language Window UCA Server 6 37 17 Select a language from the Language ID drop down list This is the language to display on the CA50 device at login Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays
204. aser emits the lower left of screen displays Acquiring and the red LED remains on until the data is acquired or the laser times out Scan bar code 4 View scan data on the display On a good decode the green LED lights for approximately 3 seconds and the scan data displays Use the down arrow to scroll through the information See Troubleshooting the CA50 Device on page 14 11 for information about scanning and laser problems and solutions 4 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description Audio Test App Audio Test allows the user to play and record sounds and select the output type Speaker or handset This application can also be used to test the audio play logic for the speaker and the receiver and can also test the audio record using the microphone Select Play Audio to choose a sound file to play from various sources e g network Platform folder Application folder etc To play and record sounds 1 On the CA Menu scroll to select Programs gt Audio Test App The application executes and displays the AudSamp screen 2 Scroll to Output Handset and press Scan Select The output option toggles from to Handset to Speaker ail 4udSamp ib Record Audio Qutput Speaker PEt 3 Scroll up to Play Audio and press Scan Select to display the AudSamp Play screen al 4udSamp ig File exclam way 4 Press Scan Select to select
205. ast Communication Walkie talkie communication is initiated and controlled by the UCA client application running on the CA50 This feature operates in speaker phone mode as well as with an earbud walkie talkie communication is initiated by pressing a key on the CA50 at which time the device sounds a tone to prompt the user that voice communication can begin The user is also prompted with an alert tone indicating an incoming communication Speaker and earbud volume is controlled by the keys on the client device and can be adjusted at any time except while ona voice unicast call see Voice Unicast Calls on page 4 36 Walkie talkie functionality supports up to 32 separate channels that are prioritized by channel number where 1 is the highest priority and 32 is the lowest The UCA server and UCA client application can associate channels with functional names such as emergency department etc but the implementation below the UCA client application only supports channel numbers when processing calls Once the CA50 device has successfully logged in the UCA server is not required for the CA50 to function properly in walkie talkie mode If the CA50 loses its login information the CA50 requires an up and running UCA server to log in again to enable walkie talkie functionality For additional information see CA50 Capabilities with an Offline UCA Server on page 6 58 The following basic functionality is present in walkie talkie mode J NOTE For a
206. at least one non alphanumeric character e g or 9 Change the installer suggested hostname to a DNS reachable hostname or the IP address of the server J NOTE The installer suggests the hostname of the computer as the default DNS reachable hostname This value populates into sample data in the database and other sample files by the installer This is used as part of URLs delivered to the CA50 to be used to access different services on the server The default value that the installer presents should be changed if a CA50 would not be able to resolve the address via DNS This can also be the static IP address of the server to avoid or work around any DNS resolution issues M A NG 10 Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays Motorola Installation Wizard UCA Cien Langue Installs to Figure 6 6 UCA Client Language Window 11 Select a language from the Language ID drop down list This is the language to display on the CA50 device at login Click Next to continue The UCA Client Language window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install UCA Server Version 2 0 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder AA C Program Files Motorola UCA Server f e
207. ath Both of these maintenance items has a FileAging setting This setting controls how many automatic export files for this item are left in the export folder after it exports the current set of records All of these maintenance items have a DaysBetween setting This controls how often the maintenance item runs This is a threshold that is checked when the overall maintenance runs according to System Maintenance DB DaysBetween If the overall maintenance schedule is longer than one day then any item set to more frequenily than the overall schedule only runs according to the overall schedule All of these maintenance items also have a RecordAging setting This setting controls how long a record is allowed to remain in the database before it is purged and optionally exported J NOTE Devices and Local Users are recommended to be a relatively long interval while Debug Trace is recommended to be set at daily Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 3 Keeping System Data and Configuration Up to Date Due to the change that a particular location is likely to undergo there is a need to keep the system data and system configuration up to date This varies from adding removing moving and renaming phone extensions to changing device users new hires and employees that leave the company to changing the PBX There are several mechanisms available to keep this data up to date e Manual changes via the UCA Web Console e Importing a list o
208. atible but not software enabled supported A future software release will enable WMM support Chapter Descriptions Table 1 2 lists the topics covered in this guide Table 1 2 Guide to Chapters Chapter Description Chapter 1 Overview Provides a general overview of UCA server functionality and CA50 operation components and features Chapter 2 Develooment and Deployment Checklist Identifies all the significant steps required to generate and deploy a CA50 solution in a production environment Chapter 3 Getting Started Provides information about installing removing the battery charging the battery sleep mode and powering the CA50 on Chapter 4 CA50 Modes of Operation Provides information about using the CA50 post deployment Chapter 5 UCA Client Application on the CA50 Provides information about how to set up the CA50 client to connect and communicate with the UCA server Chapter 6 UCA Server Provides information about the UCA server software core server components Web based console for server setup and maintenance Demo Solution and Development and Integration Tool Kit and the UCA server database and includes a theory of operation Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Defines what a profile is and what settings are included in the profile In addition the manual outlines how to develop and customize a profile for a CA50 Table 1 2 Guide to Chapters Continued Chapter About This Guide XIX Descript
209. ation the user must return to the desktop by selecting Back in order to access the menu or phone book or e Customize the Business Application Soft Keys Application developers can include links to communication related options within the soft key functionality Example 1 A business application screen displays with the soft key options from the desktop the soft key options function the same as on the desktop all 3 10 52 CHIN Menu Phn Bk Figure 4 57 Business Application Use Desktop Soft Keys Example 2 A business application screen displays The soft key Options function displays a menu and the soft key Back function navigates to the previous screen and can exit the application all 3 10 52 T Options Back Figure 4 58 Business Application Use an Options Menu The Options menu contains a link to additional business application functionality e g Item locator and links to the phone book and the walkie talkie channel menu ail 3 10 52 NIT Item locator Phone book WT channels Options Back Figure 4 59 Options Menu Use an Options Menu 4 58 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 5 UCA Client Application on the CA50 UCA Client Application Overview The UCA client application which resides and runs on the CA50 is the ONLY interface from the CA50 to the UCA server The UCA client application is an integral part of th
210. ation Digarga na hiig A serve mame2ompar com Dismiss way ApplcshonDceerosda Naway Hew Profila Cnsakion Figure 8 12 Download Files Settings Table 8 3 Download File Settings Field Description HTTP URL Enter the source file path location and name Path On Device Enter the destination path on the CA50 device The path on the device is the location to which files are downloaded The path on the device is Application Download Overwrite Check this check box to overwrite the existing file on the CA50 device if it exists Download At StartUp Check this check box to download the files soon after the user logs in XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 11 Desktop Settings When there are no active calls and there is no business application running on the device the device state is Desktop In this state actions occur from the desktop However overriding is allowed for some actions when the device is in Desktop mode If a value is supplied in the URL attribute and the corresponding key is pressed in Desktop mode the browser loads that URL Set URL values for different keys key functions When on the desktop pressing any of these keys invokes the corresponding URL The URLs can be used to point to business applications M UCA Profile Builder New Profile Profile Menus Help Desktop Settings ee Desktop state refers to the state of device when the user is not on Button Mappings in Desktop
211. ation and bar codes required to configure and demonstrate walkie talkie communication voice calls and price lookup functionality Additionally to enable targeted custom demonstrations instructions are provided on how to modify the Demo Solution to enable the login of new users For developers the Demo Solution is a bundling of capabilities such as a price lookup reference implementation business application voice call and walkie talkie functionality provided via the UCA client application and sample UCA server implementation including user data In addition the demo solution includes a mini database of SKUs to enable price lookup which is not part of the UCA server software J NOTE Server hardware is not available from Motorola and must be purchased separately NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement V a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual E 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Outline of Steps to Perform To get the CA50 Demo Solution running perform the following steps 1 Review the list of hardware requirements to run the Demo Solution page E 2 2 Setup the static IP on the server hardware page E 4 3 Install the UCA server software page E 4 4 Validat
212. ature methods and return values of the UCA Authentication Web Service 2 Change the Web config Web reference to point to the new Authentication Web Service 3 Modify the system settings login tokens to point to the new aspx pages Motorola provides an example Authentication Web Service with method stubs that can be used as a starting point for a customer or integrator who wishes create their own To change the Web config to use a different Authentication Web Service find the following section in the Web config file lt applicationSettings gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt setting name UCACommon_localhost_Authentication serializeAs String gt lt value gt http localhost Motorola UCA Client Authentication Authentication asmx lt value gt lt setting gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt applicationSettings gt In the default installation Web config is located in c Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA Client Change the lt value gt tag above to point to the new Authentication Web Service and the UCA server calls the new Authentication Web Service during the UCA Authentication Process This setting may be encrypted for security purposes See UCA Server Security on page 6 54 for more information UCA Server Optional APIs UCA Authentication Process Diagram te esol Authentication Web Service Call passes Registration Hana Wab Service MAC and store number Web Service es ete RegisterDevice Au
213. atus PM 1132 Jeff Thiesen Jeff Thiesen Sales Active 1133 Todd Sweeney Todd Sweeney Sales Active O 1134 Paul Morris Paul Morris Sales Active PP 1135 Clark Yost Clark Yost Sales Active a 1136 Chip Kelley Chip Kelley Sales Active O 1137 Jill Neumann Jill Neumann Sales Active O 1138 Rob Palmer Rob Palmer Sales Active O 1139 Heidi Ingles Heidi Ingles Sales Active O 1140 Karla McPharlin Karla McPharlin Sales Active O Ha Sarah Newman Sarah Newman Sales Active O 1142 Stewart Zurcher Stewart Zurcher Sales Active O 1143 Lindsay Johnston Lindsay Johnston Sales Active 123 Selected List Selected Items Remove from Delete List Figure 9 57 Selections to Delete 3 Click Add to List For Delete 4 Each entry checked for deletion displays in the Selected Item List box on the bottom of the tab view Device User Accounts All Users Recent Users All Users Returned 52 results Find First Name v External UserID First Hame Last Name Common Name Role Status 1132 Jeff Thiesen Jeff Thiesen Sales Active Idi Todd Sweeney Todd Sweeney Sales Active Fj 1134 Paul Morris Paul Morris Sales Active fF 1135 Clark Yost Clark Yost Sales Active O 1136 Chip Kelley Chip Kelley Sales Active CI 1137 Jill Neumann Jill Neumann Sales Active F 1138 Rob Palmer Rob Palmer Sales Active O 1139 Heidi Ingles Heidi Ingles Sales Active C 1140 Karla McPharlin Karla McPharlin Sales Active O 1181 Sarah Newman Sarah
214. backlight level on the device Values range value Set Bkilt 5 from levels 0 4 Values set this way remain set until they are manually reset or a cold boot is performed input type Commana Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name SETBKLTLVL SETBKLTLVL is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient set the backlight level on the device to the value mentioned in the options parameter options 4 Options is formatted as follows BackLight Level This value can range from 0 4 0 is no backlight 4 is for the brightest id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Set Bkit Text to display over the soft key specified in id lt input type Command id RightSoftKey This input element allows business application developers to define a name SETBKLT TIMEOUT options 1 soft key for users to set the backlight timer of the device Value specified value Bkit Time 5 is in seconds input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name SETBKLT TIMEOUT SETBKLT TIMEOUT is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to set the backlight timer on the
215. bar enable or disable the content parameter gt Disabled disables Content enabled gt Codabar decoder By the decoder default enabled C 8 Table C 1 Symbology Property Codabar Redundancy Codabar MinLength Codabar MaxLength Codabar NotisEditing Codabar ClsiEditing UPC E0 UPC E0 upce0 ReportCheckDigit upce0 preamble Custom Meta Tags Continued Description The Codabar Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the Codabar redundancy property The Codabar MinLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the Codabar min length property The Codabar MaxLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the Codabar max length property The Codabar NotisEditing META Tag is an action tag used to set the codabar not is editing property The Codabar ClsiEditing META Tag is an action tag used to set the codabar clsiediting property The upce0 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the upce0 decoder By default enabled The upce0 ReportCheckDigit META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce0 reportcheckdigit property The upce0 preamble META Tag is an action tag used to set the upce0 preamble property CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Custom Tags lt META HTT P Equiv Codabar redun dancy content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv Codabar minle ngth content parameter gt lt META HT
216. base Errors page 14 34 J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist KAHOL al mg Pana ane iss ces ano activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the L ent and Deployment Checklist on page 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual 14 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Maintaining the UCA Server Maintaining an installed UCA server requires e Scheduled data maintenance e Keeping system data and configuration up to date Scheduled Data Maintenance There are some data maintenance tasks that the UCA server periodically performs It exports and purges debug trace data and metrics data It also purges recent user records device records and phone extension status records The UCA Maintenance Service manages this maintenance It can run every day at the configured hour system setting System Maintenance DB Hour It can be configured to skip days according to the system setting System Maintenance DB DaysBetween Each area of maintenance has its own set of system settings e System Maintenance DB DebugTrace e System Maintenance DB Metrics e System Maintenance DB Devices e System Maintenance DB LocalUser e System Maintenance DB PhoneExt e System Maintenance DB CallParkExt Only the DebugTrace and Metrics generate export files The files are written into the folder specified by System Maintenance DB Export P
217. blem still persists report problem to help desk or technical support UnRegistration failed A registration to a PBX server or to a gatekeeper or direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call registration failed Check PBX gatekeeper user profile and UCA server settings If problem still persists report problem to help desk or technical support Menu Related Errors Bad or no menu data from An error occurred attempting to obtain a menu from the host Try again Server The response is not recognized Starting Up Error Error Starting Up This message displays when the user presses the left soft key Log while attempting to connect to the UCA server Note If the device cannot connect to the network or find the UCA server during the login attempt an error message displays a beep sounds and a red LED blinks A countdown error screen appears When the countdown is complete an automatic retry is attempted If the left soft key Log is pressed from the countdown screen a Log screen displays with a log of the attempted network connection error Automatic retry is disabled while in the Log screen From the Log screen a user can press the right soft key to go Back to the error screen and restart automatic retry or press right soft key to Cancel and put the device into sleep mode Table 14 6 Client Generated Error Messages Continued Error Set Server Communication Related Error Browser Related Errors Ma
218. box A Group ID can be a department name or abbreviation for a like group J NOTE Ensure you use a unique string of characters that does not include spaces The Group D is the key used internally to refer to this specific group 3 Enter a name in the Name text box Name is a user friendly group name that displays to the user if the user is given a group choice at login 4 Enter group number information in the Group Number text box The Group Number is used in certain situations to sort the list This identifier might be a department number used within a company 5 Click Save to store the group or Cancel to terminate the session 9 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Editing a Group To edit a group in the UCA server 1 Click the Roles and Groups tab gt Groups tab 2 Click the group to edit from the list of UCA groups in the Group ID column see Figure 9 29 on page 9 30 The Group Detail window displays Roles and Groups Groups gt Group Detail Groups i Group Detail Group ID Managers Hame Managers Group Humber 02 Figure 9 31 Group Detail Window 3 Click Edit The Edit Group window displays Roles and Groups Groups gt Group Detail gt Edit Group Groups Roles 1 Group Details Group ID must be unique Name Managers Group Humber 02 Save Cancel Figure 9 32 Edit Group Window UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 33
219. business application page 10 3 e Automating the launch of a business application page 10 3 e Employee identity validation page 10 3 e Request format page 10 4 e Response format page 10 4 e HTML elements page 10 5 e Best practices and considerations for CA50 development page 10 12 e Data collection page 10 12 e Access to communication options and the Web application page 10 12 e Business application extensions Web service page 10 76 J NOTE For additional sample business applications see Appendix I Business Applications Supplement 10 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Business Application Overview Business applications are third party developed custom applications for use with a CA50 A business application can control the following CA50 features and functions e scanner e display e LEDs e play audio files e vibrator motor Third party business applications cannot run directly on the CA50 Instead they are developed for hosted by and run on the UCA server or another addressable Web server in the enterprise The UCA client application allows a user access to server based third party business applications via an HTTP 1 1 compliant Web browser A user can interact with the business application via the CA Menu option which accesses the Web browser Business applications can be hosted on the UCA server or other addressable Web servers in the enterprise Multiple business applications can be
220. business application and is not on a phone call This left soft key allows the user to make a phone call or do other communication functions that are not part of the Web application ail 10 52 Scan an Item Figure 10 2 One Soft Key Defined HTML for Web Application Defining One Soft Key lt html xmilns http www w3 org 1999 xhtml gt lt head gt lt title gt Sample Scanner App lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt form id form2 runat server gt lt input type text id ScanData size 20 name item value gt lt input type submit name btn id RightSoftKey value Exit 7 lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt CA50 Business Application Development 10 15 Example 3 Both Soft Keys Defined by the Web Application Figure 10 3 and the HTML that follows shows a Web page where both keys are defined by the Web application In most cases this would not be a good idea If the user wanted to change walkie talkie channels at this moment he or she could not In this case the Web application is expecting a Yes No response The Yes No response is expected in a short amount of time so it is not a problem that the user cannot get to the UCA client application features at that moment Using the lt font gt HTML tag the font can be changed and or the size increased or decreased HTML tag lt b gt can be used to make the text bold wl 10 52 a User Already logged in Conti
221. cast mode the IF address and Port are used for multicast transmissions Wwalkie talkiecommunications as well as the increment method Setting Channellncrement Port causes the channels to be incremented based on different ports where as Channellacrement IP ts incremented based on IF addresses Channel Increment Port Y Walkie Talkie Channel Settings Channel Number Channel Tupe Channel Name Channel Details Listen Only Store Broadcast Channel Number 3 gt Listen Only Cust Request Add 7 Sco Front End Channel Type Default 7 Remove Channel Name Footwear Help C Program FilesiMotorolat OTA ServeriProfilesi Footwear xml Figure D 4 Add Channel Details 5 Click Apply to save the channel settings Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 9 6 Go to the Menus and Sub menus tab and expand the menus tree Right click on Appins Applications menu and select Add Server Action oh UCA Profile Builder Footwear Profile Menus Help Desktop Audio Volume Settings Metrics and Log Device Settings Client Settings Alerts Menus Menu States 4 t Choose New Menus Bronze Menus Main Menu Menu SalesMenu Menu Title Appins Options S ales4pphenu Menu Name Applications Add Static Menu Element Add Dynamic Menu Element Add Client Command Ring Tone Add Server Action Options De Remave OnCall Desk Quiet Specifies a URL to open in UCA Cl
222. cations Low battery Blinking battery icon Audio Indications Notification Indications Audio indications for notification messages on the device are configurable through the profile as well from the messaging API See SendNotification on page 11 26 The enable disable of the low battery beep and the beep interval are controlled by registry keys HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE Software Motorola UCAShell UCAClient BatterylconBeepEnable dword 1 0 Do not beep 1 beep on low batt BatteryBeepInterval dword 3C time in seconds for the low battery sound to beep 4 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Screen Indications Table 4 5 CA50 Display Screen Indications Event Display Status Walkie Talkie Indications Start walkie talkie communication transmit Start walkie talkie communication receive No display No display Voice Unicast Call Indications Receive a call Make a call Busy Low battery Scanning Indications Active scanning laser on Successful decode Network Indications Connecting to network server Connected to UCA server Connection failure No connection lost connection Lost Connection Caller ID Outbound caller ID Outbound caller ID The low battery image blinks No display Application dependent no display by default Connecting message UCA client application Error message Error message Device can be configured to Beep or log the loss of connection
223. cations from the server to the UCA clients This means that Channel 1 on a device is not the first port in the range It is recommended to start the port ranges on a 0 For example the multicast channels start on address 239 192 2 2 port 5000 This means that the reserved server communications channel is on port 5000 This means that walkie talkie channel 1 is on port 5001 channel 2 is on 5002 and so forth Planning User Authentication Device Users and Console Users The UCA server defaults to using the built in Device User Authentication and Console User Authentication via Web Services that access the UCA database These authentication services can be redirected to alternate user authentication Web Services If the built in user authentication is used the user can be maintained via the Console or the User Management Web Service If it is desired to use an external authentication database for either device users or console users custom authentication Web Services can be developed based on the UCA Sample Authentication and UCA Console Sample Authentication reference implementations supplied in the UCA server Install Because they are separate authentication Web Services the Device Users and Console Users can be independently redirected For detailed information about the these optional APIs see the following sections e CA50 Device User Authentication Process on page 11 5 e Device User Authentication Web Service on page 11 8 e User Management W
224. ceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful If the return value is 0 check WSStatus for the error code and description Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 42 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide LoginConsoleUser This function attempts to authenticate a UCA console user and password If authenticated the console user s records in the UCA database are updated int LoginConsoleUser string sUser string sPassword string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser User login ID sPassword User password ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful If the return value is 0 check WSStatus for the error code and description Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 43 Customizing the Console Login Process The default UCA Console User Authentication Web Service can be replaced by an Authentication Web Service written by a customer or integrator To replace the default UCA Console User Authentication Web Service with a customized Authentication Web Service 1 Create a Console User Authentication Web Service that matches the signature methods and return values of the UCA Console User Auth
225. ceiving walkie talkie communication 4 34 retrieving parked voice call 4 50 SANDO pea a bert been ee a eee 4 37 transferring a voice call 4 46 walkie talkie 0 0 eee 4 31 certificate settings 0 0 ee eee eee 4 29 channel modes 0000e eee aee 4 33 7 5 channel settings walkie talkie 4 32 7 4 channels walkie talkie 000 eae 4 33 charge contacts ee eee eee 4 9 charging not via activesync G 1 single slot cradle 000 eee eee B 6 temperature A 2 A 4 A 5 charging battery 3 4 3 7 3 8 MAA AA AA 4 10 4 12 14 6 aa adan a ee ee WANG AE NATAN B 2 B 3 B 4 MA PAA PA B 5 B 7 B 8 B 9 charging battery in device 3 8 charging indications 4 10 4 12 B 4 B 7 B 9 charging temperature 3 7 14 6 A 2 A 4 A 5 cleaning disinfecting the CA50 14 3 code types ca nA AE kA NAA AMAHANEDL caneanees C 2 cold boot 3 8 4 8 4 17 10 7 12 6 commands and HTML usage J 4 commands and usage DOOS 2444456 ba GA AG ore ko J 2 communication EEDS co bida pipe PahAh Gam boa on KW 3 2 4 9 microphone a 3 2 4 9 FCCCIVED saa hada ADAN NANA oe ben eres ou 4 9 SCANNING naaagnas ba aaah matang 3 2 4 9 4 15 speaker aa 3 2 4 9 communication setup comm
226. commended to validate that the server was successfully installed and is performing properly For details see Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 UCA Server Software Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Osx O NA Al Pseach geravortes 6 O YB Address c Program Files MotorolalUCA Server Manuals Readme htm Eco Links UCA Server Software Contents e Description e Device Compatibility e Release Notes e Components e Installation and Software Compatibility Description The UCA Server Software includes a Console for Server Setup and Maintenance demo application and Development amp Integration Tool kit 1 The UCA server uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the following functionality Figure 6 67 UCA Server Software Readme 6 42 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Uninstalling UCA Server Software Two options exist for uninstalling the UCA server e Option A Reload the same version of the UCA server software on a machine This requires a complete uninstall Actions 1 2 and 3 below must be performed e Option B Upgrade the UCA server software to a newer version This requires only Action 1 To uninstall the UCA server software up to three actions may be required Actions 1 and 2 include the removal or modification from the Add or Remove Programs window of the two p
227. creates a file called UCA Backup DDMMYYYYHHMMSS zip See UCA Backup amp Restore on page H 1 for detailed back up information To upgrade to a new revision of the UCA server software 1 Back up the existing version of the UCA database using the backup and restore utility This utility creates a file called UCA Backup DDMMYYYYHHMMSS zip which contains UCA database and user profiles backup 2 Extract the zipped contents of the backed up UCA database to any local folder on the PC hard drive e g C Temp 3 Uninstall the old version of UCA server software from the computer see Uninstalling UCA Server Software on page 6 42 4 Start the UCA Server Software for the CA50 CD 6 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 5 From the CD main menu double click the Motorola UCA Server 2 0 5 upgrade exe to begin the upgrade InstallShield Wizard ag UCA Server Version 2 0 Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard Nai mich al cake you Ucugh ihe ogra setup process Please Extracting UCA Server Version 2 0 msi ara Figure 6 46 nstall UCA Server Software 6 This may take several minutes before the Welcome window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Fa AA UCA Server Software v2 0 Thank you for choosing Motorola for your enterprise mobility solution This installation wizard will guide you through the steps necessary to setup the Motorola UCA Server Softwareon your computer To continue c
228. csseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeens l 13 Appendix J Commands and Command Usage Introduction APA ANG J 1 Commands Usage in Profiles Hassan J 2 Commands Usage in Business Applications HTML Pages c cccccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeees J 4 Commands Usage in Notification Messages J 14 Index Tell Us What You Think Quick Startup XVI CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide About This Guide Overview This guide provides information for developers and integrators who are writing deploying and maintaining applications for the UCA server and client V NOTE Screens and windows pictured in this guide are samples and can differ from actual screens J NOTE 1 Foracomplete checklist pase al ne NG NAA ang paa Aa activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a able BAN me most O requested topics within this manual see the C on 5 and C Startup Guide on the last page of the manual xvill CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Configurations Table 1 1 CA50 Configurations Model Features CA5090 QUOLF5KV11R 1 pack 802 11b g a radio Note Upon initial release the CA50 hardware is WMM compatible but not software enabled supported A future software release will enable WMM support CA5090 0U0LF5KV18R 8 pack 802 11b g a radio Note Upon initial release the CA50 hardware is WMM comp
229. ctive value Y gt lt cfg type CacheTimeToLive value 60 gt lt cfg type LogoutBarcode value UcaLogout gt lt cfg type UcaExitBarcode value UcaClientExit gt lt cfg type BadRFSampleThreshhold value 3 gt lt cfg type GoodRFSampleThreshhold value 3 gt lt cfg type RFSampleTime value 10 gt lt cfg type MinSignalStrength value 77 gt lt cfg type ACPowerCheckInterval value 5 gt lt cfg type NotifMsgTimeout value 60 gt lt cfg type BatterylIconBeepEnable value 1 gt lt cfg type DefaultLowBattWavFile value Application Wav AFFIRMATIVEFEEDBACK WAV gt lt cfg type BatteryBeepInterval value 60 gt lt cfg type Language value from DB gt lt cfg type PhoneRegRetryCount value trom DB gt lt cfg type PhoneRegRetryInterval value from DB gt lt cfg type NewPhoneRegRetryCount value from DB gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt Alerts gt lt Alert Event NotifNoCall tone Visible Indicator Vibrate Indicator gt lt Alert Event NotifCallActive tone Application Wav NewMsg wav volume 5 VisibleIndicator gt lt Alert Event RevCallNoCall tone from DB VisibleIndicator VibrateIndicator gt lt Alert Event RcvwWTTNoCall tone Application Wav wt wav gt lt Alert Event PTTNoCall tone Application Wav wt wav gt lt Alert Event AppAlertCallActive AllowTone N AllowVisibleIndicator yY AllowVibrateIndicator Y gt lt Alert Event
230. ctly into the UCA client application with no user intervention Provides information for planning and preparing the UCA server and CA50 client for proper customer deployment This includes planning preparing and maintaining a customer site environment to organize phone book groups identify phone extensions walkie talkie channels etc Provides instructions on cleaning and storing the device and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during device operation Provides information about the functionality of localized versions of the UCA client software on the CA50 device Provides technical specifications for the CA50 client and cradles Provides descriptions and features of the CA50 accessories Provides information for enabling and disabling symbologies on the CA50 A step by step exercise for the installation of a UCA server its configuration and the deployment of CA50s XX CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 1 2 Guide to Chapters Continued Chapter Description Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo Provides information about the CA50 Demo Solution which includes all the documentation and bar codes required to configure and demonstrate walkie talkie communication voice calls and price lookup functionality Appendix F Rapid Deployment Provides information about using Rapid Deployment bar codes to download software to CA5Os Appendix G ActiveSync Provides info
231. dRFSampleThreshhold is set to 3 GoodRFSample Threshhold is set to 3 and RFSampleTime is set to 10 seconds the earliest a Network Connection Lost message can display is after 3 bad samples in succession 3 10 seconds 30 seconds An addition time delay to display the message occurs if a few good samples are interspersed with bad samples e MinSignalStrength is the minimum RF signal strength that is considered to be connected Note that the numbers are negative and the larger the negative number the weaker the signal E g 70 is weaker than 60 e ACPowerCheckinterval is the time in seconds between tests to see if the device is in a cradle e NotifMsgTimeout is the time in seconds for a notification message to display e Low battery indicator XML Profile for Configuration 7 9 BatterylconBeepEnable is the parameter used to enable or disable the low battery indicator tone Value 0 disable Value 1 enable DefaultLowBattWavFile is used to indicate what sound wav file to play when the battery goes below threshold level BatteryBeep nterval sets the time interval in seconds between the beeps PBX connectivity parameters PhoneRegistrationRetryCount specifies the number of registration retries for the same number The value can be zero or any positive number When the value is zero there is no retry When the value is a number greater than zero the number of retries equals the value of the number J NOTE This parameter d
232. dateCreated Date Time the user was created dateModified Date Time the user was last modified dateLastLogin Date Time of last login RemoveConsoleUser This method removes a console user from the UCA system The user is removed from the B_ConsoleUser table in the UCA database int RemoveConsoleUser string sUser string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when address logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 38 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UpdateConsoleUser This method updates a console user s information in the UCA server system int UpdateConsoleUser ConsoleUserInfo newUserinfo string ipAddr ret UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters newUserInfo ConsoleUserlnfo class that describes the user see Table 11 13 on page 11 37 ipAddr IP address of the source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when address logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log GetConsoleUserData This method retrieves a console user s information from the UCA system The user s
233. delete utility allows entries in the UCA server database to be deleted on all main tab views in the UCA server WebConsole GUI except System Status The utility provides two methods for deleting table entries in the UCA server database e Delete one entry at a time e Delete multiple entries Deleting a Single Entry This method allows a single deletion of an entry in a view To delete a single entry on a tab view 1 Click the appropriate tab on the WebConsole GUI window to display the view 2 Select the item in the list to delete by clicking on the item ID or the underlined item in the first column The item Detail window displays UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 53 3 On the Detail window click Delete Roles and Groups Groups gt Group Detail Groups 1 Group Detail Group ID Managers Name Managers Group Number 02 Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 4re you sure you wish to delete this Figure 9 55 Detail Window 4 Click OK in the Are you sure you want to delete this message box to delete the entry from the database Deleting Multiple Entries This method includes an Aad to List for Delete Utility that allows entries in a tab view to be added to a list of entries to delete To delete multiple entries on a tab view 1 Click the appropriate tab on the WebConsole GUI window to display the view Device User Accounts All Users Recent Users All U
234. detailed overview of walkie talkie functionality see Walkie Talkie Multicast Functionality on page 1 3 e A list of channels is provided to the UCA client when a user logs in For details about how to set channels see XML Profile for Configuration on page 7 1 e Only one voice at a time can be transmitted half duplex on a channel i e the device hears only one channel at a time there is no channel mixing e In Normal mode or Scan mode the channel with the highest priority plays e In Single Channel mode only the voice on the selected channel is heard All other channels are filtered e Walkie talkie communication has a lower priority than voice unicast calls e Walkie talkie communication cannot interrupt a voice unicast call e The voice unicast call overrides walkie talkie communication e When a voice unicast call interrupts walkie talkie communication the device returns to monitoring walkie talkie traffic after the voice unicast call ends RF Network Optimization for Walkie Talkie Communication e The recommended RF switch wireless switch AP configuration is for a DTIM interval of 200 ms e Must arrange propagation of CA50 multicast packets to the entire coverage area e Simplest case single subnet e Configure the multicast queue length at the AP large enough to accommodate the walkie talkie communication load e Turn off multicast mask e Lower required data rates e Recommend 1 MBps and 2 MBps as the req
235. device to the value mentioned in the options parameter options 4 Options is formatted as follows BackLight Timer in seconds 0 is always ON id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Bkit Time Text to display over the soft key specified in id J 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name EXITCLIENT options 1 value ExitUCA gt lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name DOWNLOADFILES options value DwldFiles gt This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to exit the UCAClient and go to Shell menu input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name EXITCLIENT EXITCLIENT is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to exit itself options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value ExitUCA Text to display over the soft key specified in id This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to in
236. device screen displays supports many special characters symbols such as the currency pound symbol shown in Figure l 9 Note Like pound we can have other symbols as well Sample Business Applications LED Settings HTML Business Application Sample HTML Tag lt meta http equiv visibleindicator content GreenFastBlink gt LED Values Table l 2 Business Application LEDs 1 13 EI Description RedSlowBlink Red LED blinks once every second RedMedBlink Red LED blinks once every 1 2 second RedFastBlink Red LED blinks once every 1 10 second RedOn Red LED remains on GreenSlowBlink Green LED blinks once every second GreenMedBlink Green LED blinks once every 1 2 second GreenFastBlink Green LED blinks once every 1 10 second GreenOn Green LED remains on AmberSlowBlink Amber LED blinks once every second AmberMedBlink Amber LED blinks once every 1 2 second AmberFastBlink Amber LED blinks once every 1 10 second AmberOn Amber LED remains on 1 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Appendix J Commands and Command Usage Introduction This chapter describes the commands available to developers and integrators which can be executed on the CA50 device The chapter explains how the commands can be used in the profile business applications and notification messages J 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Commands Usage in Profiles P
237. dification and the field values are displayed in Profile Builder as Auto values The profiles created in Profile Builder are used by the UCA server Upon user login to the CA50 device the UCA server transfers the appropriate profile for the user to the CA50 device Before transferring the profile to the device the UCA server substitutes all Auto values in the profile with the database values XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 3 XML Profile Layout The XMLProfile has two components e Profile e Menus XML Profile Profile Section The Profile portion contains User Profile Elements for UCA client configuration settings The Profile portion is organized into the following categories elements e Phone Settings page 8 6 e Walkie Talkie Settings page 8 7 e Desktop Settings page 8 11 e Volume Settings page 8 12 e Metrics amp Logging page 8 13 e Device Settings page 8 14 e Client Settings page 8 15 e Alert Settings page 8 16 XML Profile Menu Section The Menus portion defines the static menu that the UCA client displays These menus provide the entry points to business applications and dynamic menu pages such as the phone book The Menus portion is organized as a list of menus Based on what is defined in the Menu States different menus are assigned to left soft key and right soft key on the device for a particular state For example In DesktopNoCall state the SalesMenu menu may be assigned f
238. display is less than the specified threshold in the system setting Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRangeSize it is not broken into ranges Instead all extensions are returned e t does not make ranges that contain more extensions than the number specified in the system setting Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize e f there are enough extensions to break into ranges it does not form fewer ranges than specified in the system setting Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount GetMenuExtListByRange This method returns a list of all extensions in the selected range The entries in the returned menu either place a new call or transfer an existing call Parameters sListType UCA sSortType Name FirstName LastName or Number Return Values The method returns a valid XML menu structure If there are no extensions in the selected range then it returns an empty menu that the client properly handles XML Profile for Configuration 7 21 GetRecentCallList This method returns a list of the user s recent calls both incoming and outgoing The entries in the returned menu will either place a new call or transfer an existing call Parameters sListType All sSortType MostRecent Return Values The method returns a valid XML menu structure If there are no extensions in the user s call history then it will return an empty menu that the client will properly handle Remarks Since this is the user s call history in order to use this phone book option phone metrics
239. dress is a unique identifier that provides the mappings between an extension and a Mac Address in the PBX system The Mac Address mentioned in the console is the same address that is entered in the PBX table corresponding to the extension Phone Extension Pool Create Phone Extension Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Phone Extension Details Phone Extension Group Managers PE Password Confirm PBX Password eee Dp Dynamic UCA Ext gt SCCP MAC Figure 9 9 Create Phone Extension Window SCCP 9 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 Enter a Phone Extension and PBX Password and in the appropriate text boxes The PBX password option is at the discretion of the UCA server Administrator J NOTE The PBX password depends on PBX configuration Some PBXs are configured to require a password during the phone extension assignment process Use this field to supply the PBX password in such cases The Static Owner External ID Phonebook Description and Always Show properties only apply to Static UCA Extension types see Figure 9 12 When the extension type is static the phone extension only gets handed out when a user logs in with a matching External ID The Always Show property determines if this extension always gets displayed in the phone book regardless of whether the assigned user is logged in This might be used if the user has voice mail or a call fo
240. dress logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 17 GetExtensionlnfo This method retrieves phone extension information from the UCA system The extension information is populated into the PhoneExtInfo class passed to the method public int GetExtensionInfo string locExtlD string sPhnExt string ipAddr string sUser ref PhoneExtinfo phExtinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters locExtID storeNumber sPhnExt Phone extension ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required PhoneExtInfo Reference to a PhoneExtInfo class described above WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful When successful phExtInfo is populated with the specified extension information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Group Management Web Service Methods In the default installation the Group Management Web Service is located at
241. dulation scheme 1 co 1 wo 5 8 81 10 See Step 8 RF Network on page D 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Changing the Channel Mask To change the channel mask 1 Create a new reg key with the desired frequencies of the channels to scan Name the reg key channelmask reg 2 Put this reg key into the CA50 Application folder For information about doing this in a deployment see page 12 1 3 Cold boot the CA50 for the new mask to take effect Sample suggested channelmask reg format REGEDIT4 2 R 4 Channel Mask 1 6 11 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask 2412 2437 2462 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm PW JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask 2412 2437 2462 Battery Management Maximizing Battery Life via Wireless Optimizations For recommendations see Table 3 1 on page 3 9 For recommendations on optimizing for walkie talkie communication see page 4 37 Site Installation Guidelines 13 7 UCA Server Requirements To set up the UCA server prepare the information listed in each category below for each store environment Phone Information The information below is required to present a phone book on the device that contains UCA users and callable non UCA phones and phone services e Phone extensions at a site that are available for assignment to a CA50 e Group Departments to which each UCA phone extension belongs e Non UCA phones in th
242. e Step 8 RF Network Two options exist for using an RF network e Option A Use your existing RF network e Option B Set up a simple RF network using a WS2000 For details see Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo Step 5 Configure the RF Hardware on page E 5 The CA50 scans for access point transmissions on the RF channels specified for the country in which it is used In the Americas when the 802 11b g radio is enabled the CA50 defaults to scanning the three non overlapping radio channels 1 6 and 11 which correspond to frequencies 2412 Mhz 2437 Mhz and 2462 Mhz respectively When the 802 11a radio is enabled the CA50 scans for access points on all the country appropriate channels in the 5 0Ghz range To designate specific channels to scan a channel mask can be applied using the following registry keys where Freg1 Freq2 and Freq3 correspond to standard 802 11 channel frequencies in Mhz HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask Freql Freq2 Freq HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm PW JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask Freql Freq2 Freg3 In the following example the frequencies refer to 802 11a channels 36 40 44 and 48 The registry keys limit scanning to these channels HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask z 5180 5200 5220 5240 HKY LOCAL MACHINE Comm PW JEDI10_1 PARMS ChannelMask 2 5180 5200 5220 5240 Step 9 Use MSP 3 1 to Prepare CA50 Devices for Use J NOTE Load MSP soft
243. e RevCallNoCall The setting defines the alert behavior when a phone call is received These attributes are applied as is for visible and vibrate indicators The tone is selected from the database the value cannot be set for this attribute UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile RevCallHoCal RewCalNoTadl FATT Hoca FPTTMoCall HMoblHaCal NobiCalbcive Appleton Visble Indicator Mong Hew Profis Creation Figure 8 20 RcvCal NoCall RevWTTNoCall The setting defines the alert behavior when receiving Walkie Talkie audio data while not on an active call The only applicable attribute is tone The tone attribute applies as is UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Rev T TNoCall Tore Wibeele Indication Hore Wiible Indicator Hor Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 21 RcvWTTNOoCall 8 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide PTTNoCall The setting defines the alert behavior when either Walkie Talkie key is pressed when not on an active call The only applicable attribute is tone UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Alert Sallinga Aleit PTTHoCal Reva oal Row TTMoCall Tore PTTNoCall MoblHoCal VWibcaleImdiosion Hors MohiTalEcive Bie stadt Vieble Indicator Hor Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 22 PT TNoCall NotifNoCall The setting defines the alert behavior when a notification message is received not on a phone call UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile MolifM
244. e Table 11 14 UCA Messaging Sample Application Screen Fields Field Description Store Number The default store number is 0002 User User ID of a logged in CA50 device user This field can be blank if sending the message to all users Message Message text to display on the device Audio File Path of the wav file to play on the device Leave this field blank if audio is not applicable User Password Valid user name and password Windows login for the user of the UCA server machine The optional API is located in a protected directory on the machine 11 46 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 11 14 UCA Messaging Sample Application Screen Fields Continued Field Description Visible Indicator Lights color and blink rate to display Vibrate Indicator Vibrate type UCA Phone Extension Sample The compiled application is installed when Developer Install is selected at installation If Developer Install is installed the location of the UCA Phone Extension Sample API is http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA Samples UCAPhoneExtension default aspx This sample uses the PhoneExtensionManagement Web Service and allows the developer to add a dynamically assigned UCA phone extension into the UCA database When Developer Install is selected at installation the sample source code for this API can be found in the directory Program Files Motorola UCA Server DevelopmentToolkit PhoneExtensions
245. e The menu items drop down list includes the previously added main menus 8 For each key if applicable select a Command and enter a Title 9 Repeat step 3 through step 8 as needed to add the required menu states AppCallActive AppNoCall AppQuietMode AppCallOnHold DesktopCallActive DesktopNoCall DesktopQuietMode and DesktopCallOnHold 10 Save the XML file Chapter 9 UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface Overview This chapter provides information about the UCA server WebConsole GUI and how to use it for UCA server configuration and setup Valuable topics in this chapter include e UCA Server WebConsole Interface Overview page 9 2 e Login to the UCA server system page 9 3 e System Status tab view page 9 5 e Phone and Walkie talkie tab view page 9 7 e Phone extension import file format page 9 73 e Deleting phone extensions page 9 17 e Device User Accounts tab view page 9 78 e Deleting a user page 9 24 e Profile Management tab view page 9 26 e Create an associated base profile page 9 27 e Edit an associated base profile page 9 28 e Delete an associated base profile page 9 29 e Roles and Groups tab view page 9 30 e System Management tab view page 9 37 e UCA server WevConsole GUI utilities page 9 52 e Import utility page 9 55 9 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server WebConsole Interface Overview The UCA server WebConsole Interface is a Graph
246. e To convey the status of the authentication attempt and the next step in the overall UCA Authentication Process the AuthenticateMAC method returns a class object AuthenticateResponse that contains the member variables authenticated boolean continueOn boolean token string Used to get a URL from the UCA DB The DeviceRegistration method evaluates the return values from AuthenticateMAC in the following ways Example 1 Authentication Fails Process Ends authenticated false continueOn false token string Return values in this example indicate that the device is not authenticated and the UCA Authentication Process should not continue The device failed authentication at the MAC level and the process ends Example 2 Authentication Successful Process Ends authenticated true continueOn false token string Return values in this example indicate that the device is authenticated and the overall UCA Authentication Process is complete The device passed MAC authentication This is sufficient and the process ends 11 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Example 3 Authentication Requires Additional Information Process Continues authenticated false continueOn true token string GetUserlD Return values in this example indicate that the UCA Authentication Process is not over The token string GetUserlD represents the next step in the UCA Authentication Process This
247. e system is set up properly for CA50 access 1 Launch another instance of the IE browser and point the browser to the following case sensitive URL http localhost Motorola UCA Client DeviceManagement asmx op DeviceRegistration If the simulated CA50 login passes the screen shown in Figure 6 70 appears an actual login using a CA50 should also be successful 2 Execute the DeviceRegistration Web Service using the following values DeviceManagement Click here for 4 complete list of operations DeviceRegistration Registers a UC4 Device with the UC4 Server Test To test the operation using the HTTP POST protocol click the Invoke button Parameter sStoreNumber 0002 sIPAddress 192 168 0 32 sSerialNumber 12345678 sMAC 10 20 30 40 50 70 sDeviceType UZA sClientversion 1 04 Invoke Figure 6 70 Device Management CA50 Login sStoreNumber 0002 e slPAddress 192 168 0 32 e sserialNumber 12345678 e sMAC 10 20 30 40 50 70 e sDeviceType UCA e sClientVersion 1 04 J NOTE The value for sClientVersion should match the client level required by your version of the UCA server This info can be found on the System Status view in the UCA Console Look for the value assigned to UCAClient Minimum Compatibility 3 Click Invoke 4 A page with XML displays information that resembles but is not identical to the following lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt cstring xmlns http Motorola com U
248. e CA50 solution and provides all the following functionality on the CA50 e Interface for Communication between the CA50 and the UCA Server e Walkie Talkie Functionality e Voice Call Functionality e Web Browser for running Business Applications e Employee Identity Validation e Scanning employee login bar code e Entering employee unique PIN The UCA client application which resides and runs on the CA50 generates the user interface displayed on the device and is the sole means for end users to access the CA50 device functionality such as business applications messages pages and Voice over IP functionality Out of box the UCA client application supports voice communication both voice unicast calls and walkie talkie communication and arbitrates voice and business application priorities The UCA client application shipped from the factory is the only application that can run on the CA50 Third party applications cannot be loaded directly onto the CA50 Instead the UCA client application allows a user access to server based third party business applications via an HTTP 1 1 compliant Web browser A user can interact with the business application via the CA Menu option which accesses the Web browser Business applications can be hosted on the UCA server or other addressable Web servers in the enterprise The CA50 client server architecture is designed to allow the UCA server to control the client behavior on the device without requiring each
249. e NA AA ADA AA AAO AA paasa 6 1 UCA Server Overview a 6 2 SEN FP UNIGHON GUY irra AA AA binelvauntnemaasaueteiey nesutauaamren elussartecronins 6 4 Device Registration Kama Na AGANG 6 4 LOGIN PIOCESO magana AA 6 4 User Profile Delivery 6 4 Voice Communication Setup and Maintenance 7 2 00000mmmasasasasnnunaaaassssssananann 6 4 DEMO O UON carnea e PA 6 5 Business Application and Associated Database 00220000mansasananasananasasananaas 6 5 Development Toolkit with Sample Source Code u 1 70777masaaa aaa 6 5 vili CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Required Development Tools a 6 5 Theory KAG CIA 6 6 UCA Server Requirements and Setup 2 aaa 6 7 Minimum Server Hardware Requirements 10 a 6 7 Server Software Requirements aa 6 7 UCA aaa 6 9 Installation Prerequisites a 6 9 Installing UCA Server Software aa 6 10 Uninstalling UCA Server Software a 6 42 Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance 6 45 Validate Proper Launch and Login to the UCA Server Web Console 6 45 Validate a CA50 Can Log In to the UCA Server u 20 naannnannanaaaannnnnnaaaaanansnanaaann 6 46 Configuring Bala HUA 6 47 ACER GS a e PA 6 48 UCA SEE
250. e Server Software Requirements on page 6 7 6 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Installing UCA Server Software There are three different versions of the UCA server software installation e Production version Basic UCA server software version without Demo data Production version is meant to be installed on a unit where there was no prior version of UCA installed If an attempt is made to install the production version on the server where prior version of UCA server is installed a warning message appears instruction the user to un install any prior versions of UCA server before installing this version If the production version detects the demo version version 2 0 of UCA server then it upgrades the demo version to production version It will not change the database or any of the demo data e Demo version Contains demo data in addition to the basic installation and is for evaluation purposes only The Demo version can be upgraded to a production version by using the production version install Demo version is same as production version with additional sample data and sample applications Sample data includes sample phone extensions users groups etc Demo version helps with understanding the UCA server usage e Upgrade version Upgrades the prior version of UCA server software 1 4 x x Upgrade version is meant for upgrade from Rev A 1 4 to Rev B 2 0 In this case one has to take the backup of R
251. e The Selectable and Permanent Group Lists must be enclosed in quotes since the groups in the lists are comma separated e The group token is used in the group lists e The user status is typically A active Other options are D disabled and S suspended e tis recommended to start with the sample import file found in the Development Toolkit folder J NOTE For information on how to import phone extensions into the UCA database see page 9 13 9 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Profile Management Tab View Click the Profile Management tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the view Profile Management provides the ability to associate a base XML profile template to a Role and or Group entity The base XML profile is a file that contains configuration settings to set up a UCA user when they first login to the UCA server When a user logs into the server the login value is compared to a Role and or Group entity The Role and or Group entity is then used to associate a base XML profile template for that user The UCA server uses this base profile as a starting point to build a complete unique user profile XML file that is sent back to the UCA client application To view associated base profiles to a Role entity in the UCA server click the Profile Management tab gt Profile Associations Profile Management Profile Associations Profile Associations Add To List For Delete Templa
252. e UCA server These settings from the UCA settings xml are defined as follows The SSL Secured Socket Layer entry is used to enable or disable the use of SSL for Web Service calls and communication to and from the Web server A value of 1 enables the use of SSL and a value of 0 disables the use of SSL This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The IgnoreSSLCerErrors informs the WININET layer whether or not to ignore SSL PCT based certificates errors when using SSL for Web service calls or communication to and from the Web server This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The HTTPPort entry is the port used for WebService or Web server communication when SSL is not enabled This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg Staging and Deploying CA50s 12 3 The HTTPSPort entry is the port that is used for the WebService or Web server communication when SSL is enabled This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The LogOffService entry contains the name of the Web service that provides the Log Off operation This name should not change but a new value can be stored here if for any reason the Web service name changes for the Log Off operation This Web service operation is used when the CA50 client application is informed to log off the user This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The NewExtensionService entry contains the name of the Web service that provides the request new phone extension operation This name should not change but a ne
253. e UCA server software installation process are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above 18 The final dialog of the installation displays Motorola Installation Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing UCA Server Version 2 0 on your computer CAA Td would like to view the README file lt Back Finish Figure 6 19 nstallShield Wizard Complete UCA Server 6 19 19 To view the Readme document leave the box checked and click Finish To end the installation without viewing the Readme document uncheck the box and click Finish 20 After installing and launching the UCA server software it is strongly recommended to validate that the server was successfully installed and is performing properly For details see Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 UCA Server Software Microsoft Internet Explorer Torx File Edt View Favorites Tools Help G Back iz A Search K Favorites 6 O a G Address ja C Program Files Motorola UCA Server ManualstReadme htm Go Links gt UCA Server Software Contents e Description e Device Compatibility e Release Notes e Components e Installation and Software Compatibility Description The UCA Server Software includes a Console for Server Setup and Maintenance demo application and Developmen
254. e call to another CA50 via a UCA server dynamically managed phone book e Receiving a voice call from another CA50 e Placing a voice call on hold and then resuming the call off hold e Transferring a voice call to another extension in the absence of PBX call transfer is supported only in SIP mode For additional information on voice calls see page 4 36 If an IP PBX is integrated into the CA50 system there is support for the following additional features e Initiating a voice call to a traditional land line phone via a UCA server dynamically managed phone book e Receiving a switch board routed phone call from a customer e Receiving a voice call from an in building land line e Transferring a voice call to another extension or a PSTN number via PBX using dynamically managed phone book For additional information on IP PBX see page 4 36 e Parking a voice call on the PBX for pick up by another user using CA50 menu options For additional information on IP PBX see page 4 36 1 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Components in the CA50 Solution The following components are required to implement the CA50 solution e Mobile device CA5090 e UCA client application for more details see page 5 1 e Software e UCA server software for more details see page 6 7 e MSP 3 x software stage and provision provided free with the purchase of UCA server software e Charging accessories e Wireless network sold separately from
255. e details XML Profile Table 14 31 XML Profile Errors Error Code Description 76011 Exception occurred while getting profile association for specified Role 76021 Exception occurred while getting All Console Users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 76031 Exception occurred while getting a base profile association by its ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 38 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 31 XML Profile Errors Continued Error Code Description 76041 Exception occurred while updating a base profile association by its ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 76051 Exception occurred while removing a base profile association by its ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 76061 Exception occurred while getting all base profile associations Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error Message Table 14 32 Error Message Errors Error Code Description 76511 Exception occurred while getting system error message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Notifications Table 14 33 Notifications Errors Error Code Description 77011 Exception occurred while getting the entire notification routing table Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Metrics Table 14 34 Metrics Errors Error Code Description 77511 Exception occurred while adding a metrics entry Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 77521 Exception occurred while adding a
256. e following steps Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and select IIS Admin Service Select the General tab on the IIS Admin Properties window and ensure Startup Type Automatic and Service Status Started Goto Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and select World Wide Web Publishing Service Select the General tab on the World Wide Web Publishing Properties window and ensure Startup Type Automatic and Service Status Started e Optional Server Applications to Install e Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express enables direct viewing of the database without using the Console for Server Setup and Maintenance Installation Software e UCA Server Components Loaded by the Installation Software e Web Applications e Web pages e SOAP Web services e REST Web services e Windows Services e Various Utility Applications e Additional Software Loaded by the Installation Software e SQL Server 2005 Express e NET Framework 2 0 UCA Server 6 9 UCA Server Installation The UCA server installation process performs the following steps 1 N o 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The UCA server must be set to a static IP address or a DNS resolvable host name to allow communication from CA50 devices Sets up eight Web applications Client UCAConsole ServerManagement UCASampleAuth UCASampleApp UCASam
257. e for the SpinBoxControl displayed on the CA50 device an additional attribute must be included in the HTML element for SpinBoxControl Also see Sample HTML Code Add Spin Boxes Post Quantity to Server on page I 9 spinboxD fault Example lt input type Submit id spinbox name x SpinBoxLabel xyz SpinBoxLabelPos beforespinbox ShowArrows no SpinBoxLine 2 SpinBoxMaskDigit value 2 spinboxDefault 22 07 09 LeftBtnLbl next RightBtnLbl cancel gt Code Samples for HTML Pages in Business Applications Enlarging Fonts in a Menu List In this example the following four items display in the CA50 Menu list e Work Stock e Move Cages Manage Cages e Mange Aisle Given that the fonts are enlarged two menu items appear at time Pressing the Down arrow key moves down the list one item at a time S WindowscE Ox File Zoom Tools Help S WindowscE EEx WG am Windowsce DEX File Zoom Tools Help File Zoom Tools Help we id SS O EM iss ff Move Cages Manage Lage Work Stack Manage Cage Options Exit Manage Aisle Figure l 1 Moving Down the Large Font Menu List CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Sample HTML Code lt body gt lt form method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx gt lt select type select style font 14px Verdana width 88px border 0px name menu id menu runat server size 3
258. e initial connection Request and a typical form submission Request HTTP Command GET URI Server GetUser apsx sStoreNo 0002 amp sIPAddress 111 111 111 1111 amp sSerialNo 00000000 amp SMAC 11AA1314151 6 amp sDeviceType Motorola UCA amp sClientVersion 1 01 HTTP 1 1 lt CF gt lt LF gt User Agent UCAClient Host 111 111 111 111 lt CR gt lt LF gt Connection Keep Alive lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt J NOTE The SerialNo name value pair is not fully implemented at this time and the SerialNo value is invalid HTTP Command POST URI Server GetUser apsx HTTP Version HTTP 1 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt Accept E K Content Type application x www form uriencoded charset utf 8 lt CR gt lt LF gt IPAddress 111 111 111 111 lt CR gt lt LF gt SerialNo 12345678 lt CR gt lt LF gt MAC 11AA13141516 lt CR gt lt LF gt PlatformInfo Motorola WinCE lt CR gt lt LF gt Host 111 111 111 111 lt CR gt lt LF gt User Agent htmlayout 3 1 UCAClient Windows CE lt CR gt lt LF gt Content Length 84 Connection Keep Alive lt CR lt LF gt Cache Control no cache lt CR gt lt LF gt Form Data username 10007310 J NOTE The SerialNo name value pair is not fully implemented at this time and the SerialNo value is invalid Motorola s additional HTTP headers provided by the UCA client application browser are defined as follows IPAddress IP address of the device SerialNo As mentioned earlier this name value pair is currently no
259. e log Continue Cancel Figure 9 52 Purge Debug Trace Log Window 2 Select Continue to purge the trace log 3 Select Cancel to return to the Jools tab UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface Exporting and Purging the Debug Trace Log To export and purge the debug trace logs found in the UCA server 1 Click the System Management tab gt Tools tab gt Export Purge The Export Purge Debug Trace Log window displays system Management Tools gt Export and Purge Debug Trace Logs System Settings Console Users You are about to export and pruge the debug trace log Continue Cancel Figure 9 53 Export Purge Debug Trace Log Window 2 Select Continue to export and purge the trace log 3 Select Cancel to return to the Tools tab 9 52 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server WebConsole GUI Utilities Find Utility All tab views on the UCA server WebConsole GUI except System Status provide a Find Utility to help locate specific entries Figure 9 54 Find Utility Tool Bar To find an entry on a tab view 1 Type an entry to find in the Find text box 2 Select an option from the pull down menu This selection identifies the what type of item was entered in step 1 above e g First Name Last Name Phone Extension etc 3 Click Find to begin the search 4 Search results display in the current window Click Reset to clear the text box Delete Utility The
260. e program store and object store memory allocations System Info UUID Universal Unique Identifier of CA50 device OS Version xx xx XXXX CE core version number OEM Name xxx Motorola OEM Version x xx xx Build revision for CA50 software 4 30 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description BL xx xX XXXX PM xx xXx XXXX Display Battery Info Misc DLL EXE Versions Sleep Mode Cold Boot Warm Boot Monitor code version Power micro version Display specifications such as type resolution colors BBP and adaptor version information Display power source battery type and battery charge Hardware information such as clock speeds and flash ID Version information for all drivers and executables on the device that respond to the GetVersionInfo API Suspend the device see Sleep Mode on page 3 13 J Note When in sleep mode CA50 power consumption is significantly reduced and can remain out of a charger for approximately 48 hours before requiring a recharge Placing the CA50 into sleep mode prevents the occurrence of communications e g OS upgrades phone book updates etc If the device is in sleep mode and placed in the cradle the device wakes up and logs off the user Cold boot the device see Resetting the CA50 on page 4 17 Warm boot the device see Resetting the CA50 on page 4 17 CA50 Modes of Operation 4 31 Walkie Talkie Multic
261. e right soft key is defined as Cancel This key is defined by the UCA client application itself When the Cancel soft key is pressed the UCA client application handles the action and not the browser or the Web application As part of meta tags data the code93 symbology is enabled and the maxlength is set to 30 wall 10 52 Scan bar code to log in Cancel Figure 10 1 No Soft Keys Defined HTML for Web Application Defining No Soft Keys lt html xmlilns http www w3 org 1999 xhtml gt lt head gt lt title gt UCA User Login lt title gt lt META HTTP Equiv code93 Content enable gt lt META HTTP Equiv code93 maxlength Content 30 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt form name formi method post action GetUser aspx id form1 gt lt b gt Scan bar code lt b gt lt br gt lt b gt to log in lt b gt lt input type text id ScanData size 15 name userName value runat server gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt 10 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Example 2 One Soft Key Defined by the Web Application See Figure 10 2 and the HTML that follows for a Web page that defines the right soft key as an Exit key This allows the Web application to quit and the UCA client application displays the desktop screen The left soft key Options was defined in the XML profile In this example the client state is AppNoCall The user is running a
262. e sample phone book menu as it appears in the PhoneBook menu ID 3 and TransferPhoneBook menu ID 13 show the basic capabilities of the built in phone book Web service These phone book menus are for placing new calls and transferring existing calls respectively In general they probably parallel each other but they can also be different to allow access to different extensions whether making or transferring a call These phone book menus can be easily modified by adding and or removing menu entries There are three basic behavior tracks for the phone book e Group based GetMenuGroupList amp GetMenuExtListByGroup e Phone extension range based GetMenuExtRanges amp GetMenuExtListByRange e Recent call list GetRecentCallList These tracks are all intended to make it easier to find a single desired extension out of a list of potentially hundreds of extensions The group based track is a method of breaking up the list into a predefined hierarchy The range based track is a method of dynamically breaking up the list into a hierarchy that changes as people log in and out The recent call list is intended to show the extensions that are likely to be of most interest based upon call history Group Based Phone Book When bringing up the phone book via the group based methods the basic concept is organizing the phone book by the UCA server defined groups Thus you start with a list of all groups with extensions associated to them After a group
263. e settings 8 6 volume settings 000 eee eee 8 12 walkie talkie settings 8 7 profile commands and usage J 2 profile management creating an associated base profile 9 27 deleting an associated base profile 9 29 editing an associated base profile 9 28 profile roaming eee ee eee 4 29 profiles base XML sample 00005 7 25 completed user XML sample 7 27 elements QIENS cee naaa a Bana dred ep Aime 7 9 MUN AA 7 4 debuglog cece eee eee 7 12 roles desktop 0 ce eee 7 7 ClealinG APA 9 34 device Config 0c cece eee ees 7 7 deleting x paaa de edna sed GANA AMANG KAG 9 36 downloadfiles 0 00 cee eee 7 6 COMNG atuccee deeuene APA PAA 9 35 menustates 00 000 7 12 OVEIVIEW a 9 33 metricslog Kana odd wed ey ee 7 11 enoi e i s t cay nag pee O ee 7 4 S DES o EA E E E E E E EE aoe 7 4 walkie talkie aaa 14 S_PhoneExtType table 11 15 AMONG kwan maam eo eae eed NA KA 7 16 S SystemVariables table 11 6 programs S UserStatusType table 11 9 11 30 11 37 IOGAN an ee p AA Aa 4 27 scan select key 00 cee eee eee 3 2 4 7 audio test 0 00 ee eee 4 20 4 21 scanner scansamp app 000000 4 19 14 11 business app 0 cee eee 4 54 SOUS igre care mAh dare adie
264. e store that can be called by a CA50 e Group Departments to which each non UCA phone belong e Special dial strings that may be needed by the users as phone book entries i e paging e Associates using CA50s that need the ability to call other sites Operations Information e Groups Departments present at this site e Active roles at this site e g Manager Sales Front End etc e Store number Walkie Talkie Information e Walkie talkie channels and their definitions at this site IT Information e P addresses and range of ports to use at this site for the multicast IP traffic used by the walkie talkie functionality e IP address or domain name and port of the PBX e IP address or domain name of the UCA server 13 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Stages of Planning and Preparation Pre deployment Activities First Site There are several integration steps to take before deploying the first site 1 2 3 Develop a company wide list of all Roles Develop a company wide list of all Groups Departments Plan walkie talkie channel allocations and multicast addresses ports for the walkie talkie channels Plan user authentication Device Users and Console Users Plan PBX integration Develop User Profile templates and associations Develop custom business application s This is optional Deployment Activities Per Site Prior to deploying each UCA system at a site
265. e term by which the menu is referred to from another menu entry The title is the display name in the title bar at the top of the CA50 display Menu entries should be listed in the order they are to display their IDs should also be sequential The value is interpreted as follows Entry Text Opt1 Opt2 data where Entry Text is what gets displayed as the menu item to be selected Opti is M or S meaning M enu or S pecial option Opt2 is S or L meaning S erver or L ocal data depends upon Opti and Opt2 as follows M L Menu Name Specifies name of another locally stored static menu M S Menu xml URI specifies name of dynamic menu and Web service URI to retrieve this dynamic menu which is cached locally S L Command options specifies an agent recognized action with possible options S S URL URL to open with the UCA client application browser JV NOTE URIs or URLs with GET parameters need to use the amp amp instead of just the amp due to XML processing 7 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Changing the Ring Tone for the UCAClient Application Step 1 Setting up the User Profile The user profile contains a menu for ring tone options To access ring tone options go to Menu gt Settings gt Ring tone The portion of the Ring tone menu in the profile is listed as follows lt Menus gt lt Menw ID 1 name FrontMenu title Menu gt lt entry ID 6 value Settings M L Settings
266. e text box under Server Action UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu Menus 5 Meru States Heit Server Aion ae Options AppCalihctive Meru Tile PiiseCheck URI hitp M182 1687 138 U Figure 8 38 Enter Menu Title 5 Click Save and proceed to Add Menu States when finished adding menus J NOTE Use the sample profile provided under C Program files Motorola UCA Server Profiles and modify it to suit requirements rather than creating a new menu XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 27 Add Menu States Menu states define the operational state of the UCA client and the left and right soft key actions in that state The actions can be either a reference to a menu or an execution of a command There are eight menu states AppCallActive Call is active and an application is running AppNoCall Application is running but no active call AppQuietMode Application is running device is in a DND Do not disturb mode AppCallOnHold Application is running and the call is on hold DesktopCallActive Call is active and is engaged DesktopNoCall In Desktop mode not engaged in an active call and no application is running DesktopQuietMode In DND mode and no application is running DesktopCallOnHold Call is on hold The menu state defines what is associated with the left soft key and right soft key The soft keys can be associated with menus or commands Add Menu States 1 Run the UCA Profile Builder appl
267. e that the UCA server was loaded successfully page E 5 5 Configure the RF hardware wireless switch and Access Point page E 5 6 Scan the provided RD bar codes to deploy CA50s page E 11 7 Scan employee login bar codes page E 14 8 Ready to demonstrate the CA50 voice and scanning functionality page E 17 9 Optional Modify the Demo Solution by adding a user page E 18 Step 1 Hardware Required to Run the Demo Solution The following hardware is recommended for implementing the CA50 Demo Solution setup e Computer to load UCA server software not available from Motorola e Hardware requirements for details see UCA Server Requirements and Setup on page 6 7 e OS requirements for details see UCA Server Requirements and Setup on page 6 7 UCA server software CD e Wireless infrastructure e WS 2000 SME WWR kit e WS 2000 SME WWR wireless switch with built in DHCP server e WS2000 firmware version 2 2 3 or higher is recommended e WSAP 5110 100 WW Access Point e 50 24000 060 WS power supply e Ethernet cables quantity 2 e CA50 mobile devices CA5090 OQUOLF5KV11R quantity 2 8 slot CA50 charging cradle CHS5000 8000CR e CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer Guide p n 73E 93914 xx Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 3 Demo Solution System Diagram IMPORTANT For this setup the static IP address of the laptop should be set to 192 168 0 253 before installing the AN UCA server software The Demo Solut
268. e them If these database files are not found the UCA uninstall successfully removed them UCA Server 6 45 Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance This section describes how to verify the installation and configuration of the UCA server Validate Proper Launch and Login to the UCA Server Web Console To login to the UCA server see Login to the UCA Server System on page 9 3 for more information 1 Launch the UCA server Web Console by double clicking the Web Console for Server Setup and Maintenance icon on the server desktop Or Launch the IE browser and point the browser to one of the following URLs e When logging in to the UCA server software locally software is loaded on the computer being used and the following URL is applicable http localhost Motorola UCA Client DeviceManagement asmx op DeviceRegistration Or e For remote login to the UCA server software use the following URL and substitute the server IP address into the portion of the lt server IP address gt URL shown below For example replace lt server IP address gt with 192 168 0 253 use your relevant server IP address http lt server IP Address gt Motorola UCA Client DeviceManagement asmx op DeviceRegistration 2 Login to the UCA server and Web Console as the administrator use the short cut UCA Server Web Console on the desktop e Default Username admin e Default Password admin IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web
269. eb Service on page 11 29 e Console User Authentication Web Service on page 11 40 Built In Authentication Web Service Built In Management Web Service Device Users UCA Client Authentication Authentication asmx UCA Server Management UserManagement asmx Console Users UCA Server Management Authentication ManagementAuthentication asmx UCA Server Management UserManagement asmx 13 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Planning PBX Integration The CA50 must be assigned a phone extension This requires the UCA server to be seeded with extensions that can be assigned to users at login time In addition the UCA server must be seeded with all phone numbers that an associate would need to call from a CA50 Prepping the phone extension pool and additional phone book entries is a multi step process 1 Identify all extensions that are currently in use for desk phones wall phones etc 2 Identify available extensions new or unused that can be placed into the phone extension pool 3 Adjust call coverage groups and call rollover groups to include the extensions in the pool 4 Associate the phone extensions in the pool with the appropriate groups for assignment when an associate logs in and for display in the phone book J NOTE An external application can be developed to use the Phone Extension Web Service to update the UCA server as part of the customer s process for maintaining the PBX Developing User Profile
270. ecececcccccececececcacacececeneacateceneaeacsteneneaeetenentaeacsneneneaeanes E 16 XIV CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 8 Ready to Demonstrate the CA50 Voice and Scanning Functionality E 17 Price Lookup SKUs for the Demo Solution Aa E 17 Step 9 Modifying the Demo Solution Creating New Users ccccsecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees E 18 Appendix F Rapid Deployment Ba E E A ET S A ears dts os E E oo sess oes state P A O F 1 Accessing the Rapid Deployment Client F 1 Scanning Rapid Deployment Bar Codes aa F 1 Rapid Deployment Window Options aa F 3 EN OIO mka NANANA AN AA E F 3 Appendix G ActiveSync OVC paaa aa AA AN G 1 Installing ActiveSync cccccccccccccceeeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeceeeaeeeeceeessseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseessseaeeeesseeeeeeeas G 2 Selling Up ahn AcliveSyne CONNECIION saa AG AA G 2 Connecting to the CASO ssaciinctnerinsdsireavnncnsdansiunseinadetavincwineutindewnehdatavanuntcertiuxnciebdrsunsl G 3 Downloading Data using an ActiveSync Connection ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees G 3 Appendix H UCA Server Backup and Restore VOA TB AC CSO Aa AA AA AA AA H 1 KEY PCG S redana AALAGA AA LA SAAN H 1 Provide Database Credentials XX a H 2 Backup the UCA SEMEN ccdsseccndenceseiactandesmeniccavensedt einir D E DE EAEE ia Ea H 2 Restore the UCA Server u a H 3
271. ect the Certificates Snap in e Click Add e Select Computer account and click Next e Select the Local Computer radio button and click Finish e Click Close on the underlying Add Snap in Dialog e Click OK e Expand the Certificates tree and select Trusted Root Certification Authorities e Right click on Certificates All Tasks gt Import e Use the wizard and import the previously exported certificate 6 56 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Modify the Web configs and App configs Some of the UCA server config files contain Web references that must be modified to reflect the change when using SSL If the web config files are encrypted they must be unencrypted before editing See Encryption Decryption of the UCA Server Configuration Files on page 6 57 for details A Web reference in config files resembles the following lt value gt http localhost Motorola UCA Client Authentication Authentication asmx lt value gt Change Web references as follows e Change all references of http to https e Use the domain name or server IP address specified when creating the certificate in the Web reference links Modify config files as follows Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA Client web config Inetoub wwwroot Motorola UCA UCAConsole web config Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA Samples UCAMessaging web config Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA Samples UCAPhoneExtensions web config Inetoub wwwroot Motorola UCA ServerManagem
272. ecutable Port Direction Direction IIS inetinfo exe and or w3wp exe B Incoming IP Blue MediaRelay MediaRelay exe 4747 Incoming 6 48 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide System Settings Table 6 2 lists the system settings for CA50 Client Server software See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 for additional information about System Settings and their values J NOTE To enter these settings into the Web Console see page 9 37 Table 6 2 System Settings Setting Description Client Backlight Battery Timeout Client Backlight Level Client Desktop Link DefaultScan Client NewPhoneRegRetryCount Client PhoneRegRetryCount Client PhoneRegRetry Interval Client Phone Ring Client Volume Receiver Client Volume Speaker Phone Call UnicastPacketRate Phone Gateway CallPark ByGroup Enable Phone Gateway CallPark Enable Phone Gateway FAC CallPark Phone Gateway FAC CallPick Phone Gateway IPAddress In minutes how quickly the backlight times out while on battery Default backlight level on the device Values are 0 4 Default Desktop URL for bar code input This setting allows the client to launch a customer business application with a bar code scanned while the user is at the client desktop The sample data included references the UCASampleApp2 Note that this URL must be in the form of an http get request There must be a separating the Web page name from the parameters The URL must also end with a
273. ed in id This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users mute the line during an active call input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHONEMUTE PHONEMUTE is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to Mute during an active call options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Mute Text to display over the soft key specified in id Commands and Uses J 9 Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey This input element allows business application developers to define a name QUIETMODE options soft key for users to put the device in Do not disturb mode value DND gt See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about WT channels and modes input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name QUIETMODE QUIETMODE is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to set the Do not disturb mode on options This command does not take any parameters id
274. ed in users The connection loss can occur under the following circumstances e Temporary network related issues In this case the connection loss is transient e Prolonged network issues e P PBX is down CA50 Modes of Operation 4 39 No Phone Error Message A No Phone error message displays on the CA50 under the following circumstances e A lost connection between the CA50 and IP PBX e The phone subsystem gets an unexpected extension from the IP PBX For example the IP PBX returns an extension based on the SCCP MAC address e When the phone subsystem is not able to register an extension with the IP PBX This can occur due to an e incorrect IP address e incorrect port of PBX e invalid extension e incorrect password e No free extension is available to be assigned Typically when the contact list returns to the CA50 the extension number displays along with the user name For users with no phone extensions only the user name displays Importing and Creating Extensions For details see page 9 13 and page 11 14 4 40 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Voice Unicast Call Functionality PBX Calls vs Direct CA50 to CA50 IP Based Calls Table 4 7 PBX Calls versus Standard Non PBSX Calls Function Place Call Receive Call Call Hold H 323 e Caller CA50 gets a call progress tone from PBX Caller CA50 displays the outgoing caller ID Called CA50 plays a ring tone locally
275. ed while attempting to validate the PIN Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55291 No users found in the UCA database 55294 A data layer exception occurred while getting the list of users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55295 An exception occurred while getting the list of users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55332 An exception occurred during device authentication Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55334 A data layer exception occurred during user authentication with password 55362 The specified user was not found and the PIN was not updated 55363 A data layer exception occurred while updating a user PIN Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55364 An exception occurred while updating a user s PIN Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55393 A data layer exception occurred while importing a user CSV file Refer to the NT Event log for more details 55394 An exception occurred while importing a user CSV file Refer to the NT Event log for more details 55395 User data format error The user data in the file is not formatted properly Notification Table 14 17 Notification Errors Error Code Description 58035 A data layer exception occurred while getting routing info for a asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58036 An exception occurred while getting routing info for a asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58065 A data layer exceptio
276. efer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while updating login status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while updating login status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while logging a user logging out Could not add a metrics entry Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while logging a logout Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging a user logging out Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while purging device metrics from the database Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while purging device metrics from the database Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while exporting metrics from the database to a file Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging metrics and determining call info Refer to the NT Event log for more details Table 14 19 Groups Errors Error Code Description 60531 60532 60562 60591 60592 60602 60603 The specified group already exists in the database Database level exception generated while adding a group Database level exception generated while getting group data The specified group does not exist in the database Database level exception generated while updating group data The specified group does not
277. egotiating the network connection On this screen the user can press the right soft key to Cancel connection negotiation and put the device into sleep mode wal CNN v 0 902 Negotiating network Cancel Figure 4 2 Network Negotiation Screen CA50 Modes of Operation 4 3 2 The device connects to the UCA server On this screen press the right soft key to Cancel the connection and to put the device into sleep mode wal CHIN v 0 902 Connecting to server Cancel UCA client application version Figure 4 3 Server Connection Screen 3 Upon successful login the UCA client application can display a login prompt The login prompt is server configurable see Login Options on page 4 22 J NOTE f the device cannot connect to the network or find the UCA server during the login attempt an error message displays a beep sounds and a red LED blinks A countdown error screen appears When the countdown is complete an automatic retry is attempted If the Log key is pressed from the countdown screen a Log screen displays with a log of the attempted network connection error Automatic retry is disabled while in the Log screen From the Log screen a user can press the right soft key to go Back to the error screen and restart automatic retry or press right soft key to Cancel and put the device into sleep mode Employee Identity Validation Scanning a Login Bar Code and entering a PIN For an employee to log
278. ement is that the output generated by the server HTML tags and sent to the CA50 must be compatible with the tags supported by the UCA client application For additional information on the UCA client application see UCA Client Application Overview on page 5 1 CA50 Business Application Development 10 3 CA50 Web Application Developer Guide This section provides a functional description of the operation of the browser and the customized tags To work with the UCA client application browser the responses generated by the Web server adhere to the HTML specification to the greatest extent possible Due to the small display on the CA50 client many HTML tags are not applicable For example a graphical submit button would use most of the rendering window for the browser In addition the UCA client application does not have a pointing device and has limited physical buttons or keys Therefore proprietary HTML element attributes were designed and implemented to submit form data based on scanner data or physical buttons as input tag There are also some proprietary HTML meta tags that provide additional functionality The UCA server installation includes a few sample CA50 Web applications In the default installation the source can be found in the following directories Program Flles Motorola UCA Server Development Toolkit Sample Lookup and Program Flles Motorola UCA Server Development Toolkit Sample Lookup2 Launching a Business Application
279. enance DB DebugTrace RecordAging System Maintenance DB Devices DaysBetween System Maintenance DB Devices RecordAging System Maintenance DB Export Path System Maintenance DB Hour System Maintenance DB LocalUser DaysBetween System Maintenance DB LocalUser RecordAging System Maintenance DB Metrics DaysBetween System Maintenance DB Metrics FileAging System Maintenance DB Metrics RecordAging MAC Authorization is the only login option available If enabled device MAC addresses are used to authenticate all devices and User ID s and PW are not used in the UCA Authentication Process Login Page URL for device user to select primary group Login page URL for device user to enter User ID Login Page URL for device user to enter User PW PIN Device Side User ID Input Method Scanner or Tumbler Number of days between Call Park records cleaning Number of exported metrics log files to leave on the disk Number of days to allow Call Park records to remain in the DB Number of days between DB maintenance Number of days between Debug Trace table cleaning Number of exported debug trace log files to leave on UCA server hard disk If this is set to zero no debug trace logs are saved Number of days to allow debug trace records to remain in the DB This is the minimum number of days of debug trace data that is retained in the DB Number of days between Device table cleaning Number of days to allow device records
280. ent amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 2 Business Application for CA50 Generate a 2 2 Step 3 CA50 Device Settings Optimize Settings aa 2 2 Step 4 UCA Server Files and Databases Populate with Site User RENATO aa AA ANG 2 3 Step 5 Wireless Infrastructure Optimize for CASO a 2 3 Step 6 IP PBX Integration Optional XQX aa 2 3 Step 7 Deploy CA50 Solution a 2 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started USS AA AA E 3 1 Unpackind ING CAT paa AABANGAN DAGA NANO NANANA AA 3 1 CAO Front BaCk VICWS i amar N NEGA KAAGAD RONA NASAAN NANANA Nian eiii 3 2 CAO IE NENG AA AI AA AA E 3 3 Pee Oana mie ASNO aa NAA AA AA aba 3 4 Inserting and Removing the Battery asanaaaaaawanaa asana anakan nananana nsssnannsnan 3 4 Balen MONNA O e AA NA AA NAA 3 6 HEN aaa a AA AA mint 3 6 Sili Age O CA AA 3 6 Battery Safety Guidelines 3 6 Charging TEMPE UO actrees taencecie E E E 3 7 Average Charge Time cccccccccsseccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeceeeeceeseeeeeeeeseeeeceeeseeeeeeesseeeeetsaseeees 3 7 Chatging BONOS aaa AABANG PANA ANAK ANAN AA 3 8 Charging the Battery in a CASO Uu 3 8 Charging Spare Batteries 3 8 Charging IKA 0121C AA AA 3 8 Battery Management Recommendations cccceeeececeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeseneeeesaaees 3 9 Powering On the CA50 Pre deployment
281. ent if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If you purchased your Enterprise Mobility Solutions product from a Motorola business partner please contact that business partner for support xxii CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 1 Overview Overview The CA50 is a compact mobile device for in building use that combines bar code scan capability with WLAN voice and data communications It offers mobile phone style voice communications walkie talkie and voice calls wireless bar code scanning messaging paging and data application support for information retrieval CA50 voice capabilities greatly improve the accessibility of your workforce mobile workers are never more than a phone call away The built in bar code scanner and display allow the CA50 to be used for a virtually unlimited number of business applications such as price lookup The CA50 is easy to use and increases worker productivity and availability while reducing errors and improving customer service and satisfaction The familiar and intuitive mobile phone style user experience virtually eliminates the need for training Small and light enough to wear on a lanyard or apron or slip in a pocket this device is the one device all your mobile associates should carry The CA50 can be deployed either as a personal or shared device In environments where
282. ent web config Program Files Motorola UCA Server UCAMaintenanceService UCAMaintWindowsService exe config Modify System Settings The following system settings must be modified to use https rather than http e Client Desktop Link DefaultScan e System Login Token GetUserID e System Webservice CallManager URI e System Webservice CallPark URI Modify User Profiles All links specified in the user profiles must be modified to use https rather than http Enable SSL for the UCA Web Site 1 In IS Manager right click on the default Web site UCA 2 Select Properties 3 Select the Directory Security tab 4 Inthe Secure Communications Control Section choose Edit 5 Select Require Secure Channel 6 Select Require 128 bit encryption 7 Click OK J NOTE SSL must to be enabled on the UCA client application in order to communicate with the UCA server after enabling it on the server See Chapter 5 UCA Client Application on the CA50 for the UCA client application settings details UCA Server 6 57 Directory Level Password Protection for Sensitive Web Services Some of the methods actions available through the UCA Optional API Web Services are worthy of additional protection This additional protection is provided by requiring a user name and password to execute the methods The virtual directory that contains these Web Services is protected by Windows Basic authentication In order to execute these methods from an external program
283. entication Web Service 2 Change the UCAConsole Web config Web reference to point to the new Console User Authentication Web Service Motorola provides an example Console User Authentication Web Service SampleConsoleAuth with method stubs that can be used as a starting point for a customer or integrator creating a customized version To change the Web config to use a different Authentication Web Service find the following section in the Web config file lt applicationSettings gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt setting name UCACommon ConsoleAuthService ManagementAuthentication serializeAs String gt lt value gt http localhost Motorola UCA ServerManagement Authentication ManagementAuthentication asmx lt value gt lt setting gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt applicationSettings gt Change the lt value gt tag above to point to the new Authentication Web Service The UCA server calls the new Authentication Web Service during the UCA Console Login Process In the default install the UCAConsole Web config is located in the following directory C lnetoub wwwroot Motorola UCA UCAConsole 11 44 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server Optional API Samples Two sample programs that demonstrate using the UCA server optional APIs are provided e UCA Messaging Sample Uses the optional API to send asynchronous messages to all or individual users e UCA Phone Extension E
284. enu When selected files are downloaded onto the CA50device Delete Downloaded Files A menu option can be provided to allow the CA50 device user to delete all downloaded files in the folder Application Download Example lt Menu ID 4 name Applications title Applns gt lt entry ID 1 value Download Files S L DOWNLOADFILES gt lt entry ID 2 value Delete Files S L DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFILES gt lt entry ID 3 value Price Check SiS http server somecompany com Sample aspx gt lt Menu gt The Delete Files menu option displays on the Application menu When select all files the Application Download directory are deleted Adding User Information to the HTTP Header User ID User Group and User Role information can be added to the HTTP header All HTTP requests Originating from the UCAClient contain the information shown below in the HTTP header example All information is available only after user login Example HTTP Header GET Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp Sample aspx HTTP 1 1 Accept IPAddress 192 168 1 138 SerialNo 8106000 MAC 0015709BF1CC PlatformInfo SYMBOL WinCE UserID 1100 UserGroup Bath UserRole Sales User Agent htmlayout 3 2 Windows CE UcaClient Host symbol rvf2jb1t Connection Keep Alive Cookie ASP NET_Sessionld 3c20tt45zw34nw45mcs01a45 Sample Business Applications 1 7 Assigning a Default Value to the SpinBoxControl To specify a default valu
285. enus available on the CA Menu when the device is powered on Use the left and right soft keys on the device to highlight menu options and press the Scan Select S key to launch the highlighted option Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Menu Description Rapid Deployment Prior to use the CA50 device must be configured The Rapid Deployment client facilitates software downloads to the CA50 client For detailed information about the Rapid Deployment Client see Appendix F Rapid Deployment Programs Note There are several out of box programs on the CA50 when the device is powered on The programs listed below are highlights UCA Client Application Invokes the UCA client application which attempts to connect to the UCA server ScanSamp ScanSamp scan sample application prompts the user to scan a bar code and the scanned data displays Scroll up and down to display all available data Press Scan Select again to scan another bar code or press the right soft key to exit and return to the previous window Example of scanned data displayed Data 65830923843078 Type 0x32 Source SCN UPCA Time 00 00 22 This application can also be used to test the laser if it does not emit when the Scan Select is pressed To scan a bar code 1 On the CA Menu select Programs gt ScanSamp 2 Press Scan Select to launch the ScanSamp test application Scan bar code waiting Exit 3 Aim the scan window at a bar code and press Scan Select The l
286. er amp User Guide Mounting Instructions J NOTE Connect an approved power supply to the cradle prior to attaching the cradle to the wall mount bracket See Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger on page B 8 for power supply information 1 Slide the two bracket mounting tabs into the receptacles on the bottom of the cradle as shown Ensure the screw hole in the bracket flange aligns with the screw hole in the cradle Mounting Mounting tab tab Figure B 11 nsert Bracket into Cradle 2 Screw the 5 Phillips screw supplied into the bracket flange and tighten until the cradle is securely attached to the bracket Figure B 12 Attach Flange with Screw Accessories B 15 3 Use four screws to mount the bracket to a wall Ensure to use additional wall mounting hardware as needed for safe mounting to the wall type Figure B 13 Mount to Wall KT 102375 01R Bracket The KT 102375 01R bracket mounts one CHS5000 8000CR eight slot CA50 charger or two SAC5000 8000CR eight slot spare battery chargers to a wall Use the wall mount brackets as a template to mark the locations of the four mounting screws Included Hardware e Two KT 102375 01R Mounting Bracket e One black 5 Phillips round head thread cutting screw J NOTE Use the 5 Phillips round head screw supplied in mounting bracket kit to attach the eight slot spare battery charger to the mounting bracket This screw is not intended for mounting the bracket on a wal
287. er Information Window 4 Perform step 7 on page 6 13 through step 17 on page 6 18 to complete the installation 5 Enter a strong password to use for SQL server authentication J NOTE The password entered in this field is the system administrator sa password The sa account in SQL Server 2005 has full access and read write permissions to all DB instances It is used during the installation process and for future upgrades This password should be recorded and retained in a safe location by the integrator or customer IMPORTANT Microsoft Strong Password Guidelines for SQL Server 2005 authentication AN Strong passwords are not readily guessed by a person and are not easily hacked using a computer program Strong passwords cannot use prohibited conditions or terms including a blank or NULL condition Password Admin Administrator sa sysadmin of the user currently logged onto the machine the machine name A strong password must be more than 8 characters in length and satisfy at least three of the following four criteria it must contain at least one number and must contain at least one non alphanumeric character e g or 1 IMPORTANT A strong password cannot be the following terms associated with the installation computer the name 6 Change the installer suggested hostname to a DNS reachable hostname or the IP address of the server J NOTE The installer suggests the hostname of the computer as the default DNS
288. er software page 6 42 Validating successful server installation and performance page 6 45 Configuring firewalls page 6 47 System settings page 6 48 UCA server security page 6 54 CA50 capabilities with an offline UCA server page 6 58 6 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server Overview The UCA server software includes the core server components a Web based console for server setup and maintenance Demo Solution and Development and Integration Tool Kit The UCA server uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the following functionality e Device registration e Login process e User Profile Delivery e Voice Communication Setup and Management e Voice unicast calls e Walkie talkie communication e Delivery of text and command to a device e Metrics collection e Console for server setup and maintenance The CA50 Demo Solution allows a user to easily showcase all major CA50 UCA server functionality e Walkie talkie communication e Voice unicast calls without a PBX e Price lookup business application UCA Server 6 3 For additional information about the CA50 Demo Solution see Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo The Development and Integration Tools enable software developers to extend the standard Motorola provided server functionality The tools includes documentation reference implementations and sample source code IMPORTANT
289. erification and inventory check Enables more rapid response to customer request for assistance enables better management of employees through wireless distribution of tasks and real time acknowledgement of completion Instant employee accessibility through a call to a group of workers simultaneously improves productivity and customer service elimination of annoying pages and associated long response times Enables employees to place or receive a call anywhere in the enterprise to or from another CA50 carrying associate improved accessibility for customers and managers ability to obtain needed information more rapidly for on the spot decisions PBX integration allows inbound customer calls to be forwarded directly to the right employee in the right department Also associates can call traditional land line phones through the PBX NA NOTE CA5090 0U0LF5KV11R 1 pack 802 11b g a and CA5090 OUOLF5KV18R 8 pack 802 11b g a radios Bar Code Scanning Functionality Third party business applications can utilize the CA50 1 Dimensional bar code scanner to scan bar codes such as UPC An example of a third party business application is price lookup For additional information on business applications see Chapter 10 CA50 Business Application Development Overview 1 3 Messaging Paging Functionality CA50 development and integration tools offer an optional server API that provides methods by which an application developer can generate various types
290. erver These bar codes correspond to a sampling of user data pre loaded into the UCA server databases In some cases a PIN is required If a PIN exists it is shown below the login bar code For information about employee identity authentication when entering PINs see Employee Identity Validation Scanning a Login Bar Code and entering a PIN on page 4 3 1005 7315 Managers Bill Gordon Managers Manager SM Ext 340 PIN Code 98765 1000 7310 Abigail Jones Garden Seasonal Sales Dept Head Pin Code None required Sales Associates Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 15 1001 7319 Anna Carter Garden Seasonal Sales New Hire Pin Code None required 1002 7318 Kevin Smith Bath Electrical Sales Dept Head Pin Code None required 1003 7317 John Doe Lumber Bath Sales Pin Code None required 1004 7316 Jane Doe Electrical Lumber Sales Pin Code None required E 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Front End Associates 1006 7314 Joan Walker Cashier Front End Dept Head Pin Code None required 1007 7313 Dave Miles Lot Front End New Hire Pin Code None required Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 17 Step 8 Ready to Demonstrate the CA50 Voice and Scanning Functionality Upon scanning the log in bar code the CA50 is ready to be used to demonstrate any of the following functionality Employee Identity Validat
291. erver Developer amp User Guide Setting the HTML Page Title Each business application page can display its own title on the first line of the display on the CA50 device In this example the developer must include the following meta tag in the business application Meta tag lt meta http equiv Title content Appl gt Appl displays in the first line 1 IMPORTANT The length of Title is limited to a maximum of nine characters Adding a Timer to Visible and Vibrate Indicators To set the timer for Visible and Vibrate indicators in a business application use the following properties e Control the On duration for LED and Vibrate e Control the Off duration for LED and Vibrate e Control the number of cycles the two features run through By specifying the appropriate On Off duration and cycle count the timer can be set on these indicators The following meta tags are provided for setting the timer for Visible and Vibrate indicators lt meta http equiv visibleindicator content TYPE GREEN STATEZBLINK ONDUR 100 OF PDUR 5007CYCLECNT 10 gt lt meta http equiv vibrateindicator Coricencz TYPE VIBRATE STATE BLINK ONDUR 500 0OFFDUR 100 CYCLECNT 10 7 5 Table l 1 Visible Vibrate Indicator Attributes Attribute Visible Indicator Allowed Values Vibrate Indicator Allowed Values TYPE Red Green or Amber Vibrate STATE On Off or Blink On Off or Blink On LED is always on On Vibrate is always on Off LED is alway
292. es XML Profile for Configuration 7 23 Key Attribute Definitions The key attribute definitions are listed below See Figure 3 1 on page 3 2 for key callouts e LSKey Left soft key e RSKey Right soft key e LPHKey Left soft key push and hold not implemented e RPHKey Right soft key push and hold not implemented e FPTTKey Front Walkie Talkie key e SPTTKey Side Walkie Talkie key Menu state attribute values that can be tied to keys are essentially menu entries There are a few additional options that apply to specific attributes Options that apply to specific attributes are listed below e default Perform default key action J NOTE This is a valid option only for Walkie Talkie keys e none or No action when the key is activated J NOTE This is a valid option for any key e Label Opt1 Opt2 data Label is shown as the soft key label on screen When the soft key is pressed the specified action occurs J NOTE This format is required for left and right soft keys e Label Opt1 Opt2 data The specified action occurs when the key is activated J NOTE This format is used for push and hold not implemented and Walkie Talkie keys where the label is optional since it is not displayed 7 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Setting up Walkie Talkie Channels in the Base Profile Setting up walkie talkie channels involves creating or modifying two areas in the base profile the WTT sect
293. es bpaSales xml EET 1 ea ES Look In E Profiles a CE fe a Schemas Sources E bpaFrontEnd sml bpaManager xml bpaSales xml UCA Profile Builder Figa b d Profile Menus Help My Recent Documents par 2 NG Dezkko p pa hy Documents a Bay My Computer p oe My Network File name bpas ales sml E Fl Ces Files of type ML Files xml Cancel KA na Ready a Ba Figure D 1 UCA Server Log in Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 7 2 Save bpaSales xml as Footwear xml Keep Footwear xml in the same directory as bpaSales xml Do not delete bpaSales xml It is used by other applications eth i i 5 4 UCA Profile Builder bpaSales Save As EI Profile Menus Help Save in o Profiles ki mo HR Phone Settings walkie Talkie Settings Desk a Schemas Gi Sources E bpaFrontEnd xml bpaManager xml bpaSales xml Phone Details My Recent Enable Phone Ig Da Extension auto E Caller ID auto Desktop Extension Password Po MAC Address auto a My Documents r Me Computer k i Ai Mu Network File name Footwear Places Save as lupe KML Files xml C Program FilesiMotorolatUcA ServeriProfilesibpasales xml Figure D 2 UCA Server Profile Save 3 Goto the Walkie Talkie Settings tab select the check box for channel number 3 and click Remove to delete iy UCA Prof
294. es to charge a spare battery e Single Slot CA50 Charging Cradle with Spare Battery Charger on page B 5 e Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger on page B 8 To charge a spare battery 1 Connect the spare battery charging accessory to the appropriate power source 2 Insert the spare battery into the accessory spare battery charging slot with the charging contacts facing down contacting the charging pins in the cradle The battery begins charging The charge LED on the cradle lights to show the charge status For charging times see Average Charge Time on page 3 7 Charging Temperature See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed information Getting Started 3 9 Battery Management Recommendations Table 3 1 includes recommendations to maximize the CA50 run time per battery charge J NOTE Ensure batteries are fully charged before use Table 3 1 Battery Management CA50 Usage Battery Management Recommendation Out of Box no Access Point association Wireless Profile Creation associated to Access Point Optimizing User Settings When Not in Use Associate the CA50 device to an Access Point as quickly as possible Out of box the CA50 lacks network details and is not associated with an Access Point In this state the internal radio behaves as though the device is in CAM mode utilizing maximum radio power until it is associated with an Access Point The device should not remain in this max power usage mode for an ex
295. esaeeeess D 6 Step 6 Populate the UCA Server Database with 2 Users D 11 Step 7 Generate Employee Login Bar Codes cccccccsseeeececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeessaeeeees D 15 US eA BA CAN D 16 Step 9 Use MSP 3 1 to Prepare CA50 Devices for USE cc eeeecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeees D 16 Create RD Bar Codes for the CASO u a D 17 Step 10 BI ee AG NAA ea Eia D 18 Deploy CA50s at the Site Location a D 18 Validate that the CA50 was Deployed Properly a D 18 Employee Logs in to the UCA Server Uu D 18 Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo ONE ON ea ANAL ANA ANAN AA NANA E 1 OUI OF SICDS OPEN aaa AA a AN kA E 2 Step 1 Hardware Required to Run the Demo Solution XQXX a E 2 Demo Solution System Diagram ccccccccseececeeceeeeeeeseeeeceesseeeeeeeesseeeeeesaeseeeseaaeeees E 3 Step 2 Setup Static IP on Server Hardware 2 X aa E 4 Step 3 Install UCA ServerDemo Software 2 X aa E 4 Step 4 Validate Successful Server Installation ON Laptop cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees E 5 Step 5 Config r Ihe RF Hardware da ANA ANNA E 5 Step 6 Scan Rapid Deployment Bar Codes to Deploy CASOS ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeees E 11 Step 7 Scan Employee Login Bar Code a E 14 MELEE E 3A E 14 IOS ASSOCII AA NANG E E E AA AA E 14 Front End Associates c ccccccc
296. ess into the portion of the lt server IP address gt URL shown below For example replace lt server IP address gt with 192 168 0 253 use your relevant server IP address http lt server IP address gt Motorola UCA UCAConsole Login aspx 3 The following window displays Address http localhost Motorola UCA UcaConsole Login aspx v Go Lin gt ks Username Password 2007 Motorola Inc All rights reserved Figure 9 1 WebConsole GUI Login 9 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Enter the Username and Password set for you by the UCA Administrator IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Password be changed after the initial login See Editing a Console User Password on page 9 46 for more information Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above 5 Click Log In 6 The System Status tab displays showing the Server Status view system Status Server Status Server Status De
297. ess application screen To answer a voice unicast call from a business application 1 While in the business application the device rings and the green LED blinks indicating an incoming call alil 3 10 52 Om 15 95 Pedestal sink white Exit Figure 4 52 Business Application Item Lookup 2 The caller ID displays ally 10 52 NT Abruzzo R Answer Ignore Figure 4 53 Caller ID 3 Press the right soft key to dismiss the call and return to the prior business application screen Or Press the left soft key to answer the call The active call screen displays atl 4 10 52 Gl 515 95 Pedestal sink white Options End Figure 4 54 Active Call Screen By default call control soft keys display Options and End Soft key options are server configurable For more information about answering a voice unicast call see Receiving a Voice Unicast Call on page 4 45 4 56 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Launching the Sample Business Application While in a Voice Unicast Call While on an active voice unicast call a user may be required to access a business application to acquire information for the call J NOTE The steps that follow assume that the user was not previously in a business application To access the sample business application while on an active voice unicast call 1 On the Active Call screen go to Options gt Applications gt Sample b
298. ev A before installing the upgrade package Procedure is as outlined below Creat a backup of Rev A database e It generates an archive file e Unzip the archive in some known location Install upgrade version of UCA server Install package would prompt for Database backup Point to the location where the zip file was un archived J NOTE Before installing the upgrade version see page 6 42 Option B Upgrade the UCA server software to a newer version This requires only Action 1 UCA server software is available on a CD The UCA server software bundle ships with two components e UCA server installation CD e UCA server Entitlement Certificate documents the number of servers on which UCA server software may be loaded See Table 14 1 on page 14 4 for UCA server install uninstall troubleshooting IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 10 to 25 minutes depending on whether or not NET AN Framework is already loaded During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process stopped UCA Server 6 11 Installing Production Version To install the Production version of the UCA server software 1 Start the UCA Server Software for the CA50 CD From the CD main menu click nstall UCA Server Software for the CA50 f Microsoft Net 2 0 Framework is not installed on the host machine the following window displays Install Micros
299. example create XML profile 0 00000 e D 6 deploy CA50S ce es D 18 generate employee login barcode D 15 generate RD bar codes D 16 OVEIVIEW 22 D 1 D 2 populate server with 2 users D 11 required settings 20 00 c eee eee D 3 deployment parameters 000005 12 2 desktop profile elements 7 7 development toolkit aa 6 5 device config profile elements 7 7 device maintenance AA 14 3 Index 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide device ON 1 a 4 8 device user accounts AUSES aasa ricardi tera GANG Ooo So eeeees 9 19 creating new users 2 cee eee 9 20 deleting users 9 24 editusers 6k AA 9 21 editing user passwords 9 23 import files ses wa ka che a te KANG WA a risen KA 9 25 recent users ww aa 9 18 disinfecting the CA50 aaa 14 3 ekek PP PAA 3 2 display icons battery strength 4 6 communication aaa 4 5 sample screen ee 4 5 signal strength a a 4 5 TUG aaeeea hano ha Kho NG haw 4 5 down arrow key 0 00 eee eee ee eee 3 2 4 7 downloadfiles profile elements 7 6 E earbud AA 3 3 4 9 4 13 B 2 eight slot battery charger B 2 B 8 eight slot CA50 charging cradle
300. f new phone extensions or device users via the UCA Web Console e Third party applications that use the UCA server optional APIs Manual Changes via the UCA Web Console The UCA Web Console allows any necessary piece of data to be manually configured Since the UCA Web Console is a manual process this is most suitable for infrequently changing items This is also intended as a user friendly way to understand what the various settings accomplish See Chapter 9 UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface for more details Importing a List of New Phone Extensions or Device Users via the UCA Web Console Since initial setup of a server requires the entry of phone extensions and device users a CSV import tool is provided See Edit Phone Extension Window on page 12 and All Users View on page 19 for more details Third Party Applications That Use the UCA Server Optional APIs The UCA server optional APIs are provided as a means to automate or allow alternate user interfaces to be developed to maintain the UCA system data See Chapter 11 UCA Server Optional APIs for more details This allows maintenance of related UCA data to be updated when the normal business process changes how the facility is arranged be it phone extensions groups or associates Maintaining the CA50 The degree of protection for the CA50 is specified by an ingress protection rating of IP 40 which is sufficient for retail applications but does not allow for the unit to
301. fault Web site UCA Generate a certificate with a common name of the IP address or domain name of the UCA server The IP address or domain name is important and is used in later steps UCA Server 6 55 Make this Certificate Trusted by the Server By default this certificate is not trusted To enable trust install the certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities Store Export the certificate to a file e In I S Manager right click on the default Web site e Select Properties e Select the Directory Security tab e Inthe Secure Communications Section choose View Certificate e The certificate you created applied with SelfSSL should show and have a red x through it indicating not trusted e Go to the Details tab and choose copy to file e Follow the wizard and choose do not export private key DER encoding and create file Get the certificate into the Store e In Internet Explorer choose Tools gt Internet Options e Select the Content tab e Goto Certificates e In the Certificates dialog go to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab e Click Import e Browse to the exported certificate created in the previous step e Select the exported certificate and import it into the store Give ASP NET programs access to this certificate e Click on the Windows Start button e Select Aun e Type mmc Microsoft Management Console e In mmc choose File gt Add Remove Snap in e Click Add e Sel
302. for writing business applications for the CA50 device 1 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Adding a Menu Option In this example the developer can provide an option to exit the UCAClient on the device and return to the CA50 menu shell To accomplish this the developer must add an additional menu in the profile To add a menu to the profile use the following code structure lt Menu ID 1 name SalesMenu tithe Menu gt lt entry ID 1 value Applications M L Applications gt lt entry ID 2 value WT Channels M L SaleswrChannels gt lt entry ID 3 value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt lt entry ID 4 value Parked calls M L CallPick gt lt entry ID 5 value Key lock S L KeyLock gt lt entry ID 6 value Do Not Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt lt entry ID 7 value Settings M L Settings gt lt entry ID 8 value Log Off S L LogOffConfirm gt lt entry ID 9 value Power Off S L PowerOff 5 lt entry ID 10 value About S L About gt lt entry ID 11 value Exit S L ExitClient gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 2 name SalesAppMenu title Options gt lt entry ID 1 value WT Channels M L SaleswTChannels gt lt entry ID 2 value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value Parked calls M L CallPick gt lt entry ID 4 value Do Not Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt lt entry ID 5 value Log Off S L LogOffConfirm 5 lt entry ID 6 value Exit S L Exi
303. from http support symbol com support product softwaredownloads do Creating an MSP bundle In a Web browser go to hitp server ip msp web to log in to an MSP server Select the Bundles tab Click the Create button Enter StageCA50 for the Name Enter Stage CA50 for the Description Click the Next button Click the Add Step button Select the user defined package type Select the latest Universal package type for Ex Universal 1 1 for the package type Click the Add Bundle Step button Click the Add Step button Click the Content Setting button Select Agent 30 EnableAgen830 Click the Add Bundle Step button Select Add Step Click the Reboot button Select Warm for Type of Reboot see Auto launching the UCA Client Application for additional information Click the Add Bundle Step button Click the Finish button Creating an MSP staging profile In a Web browser go to hitp server ip msp web to log in to an MSP server Select the Staging tab Select the Create tab Enter StageTheCA50 in the Name field 12 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide e Click the Next button e Select the appropriate Network Access Setting for your environment where this network access setting must be configured to persist across a cold boot e Select the appropriate Relay Server for your environment e Select the UCA Client Setup UCA setting xml for the additional setting e Click the Next button e
304. ge 8kVdc indirect discharge Table A 3 Eight Slot Charging Cradle Specifications Feature Dimensions Weight Power Typical Wall Power Storage Temperature Charging Temperature Humidity Drop Electrostatic Discharge ESD Description 4 96 in L x 5 47 in W x 2 36 in H 12 60 cm L x 13 90 cm W x 6 00 cm H 10 1 oz 12V 27W 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C 32 F to 95 F 0 C to 35 C See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed charging information 5 to 95 non condensing 6 drops 1 per side 30 0 in 76 2 cm drops to vinyl tiled concrete at room temperature 4kVdc direct discharge 8kVdc indirect discharge Specifications A 5 Table A 4 Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger Specifications Feature Description Dimensions 4 95 in L x 5 50 in W x 2 36 in H 12 56 cm L x 13 96 cm W x 5 99 cm H Weight 10 2 oz 286 g Power 12V Typical Wall Power 20W Storage Temperature 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 F to 95 F 0 C to 35 C See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed charging information Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Drop 6 drops 1 per side 30 0 in 76 2 cm drops to vinyl tiled concrete at room temperature Electrostatic Discharge ESD 4kVdc direct discharge 8kVdc indirect discharge A 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Appendix B Accessories Overview
305. gging in an audit should be performed of the users at that site either in the built authentication tables or in the external authentication database that was integrated Configuring a Site Phone Extension Pool Phone extension setups and needs may vary from site to site An audit is required to determine exactly how the PBX at the site is configured Make any required adjustments to the phone extension pool and appropriately seed the phone extension pool Configuring Additional Phonebook Entries Similar to the phone extension pool additional phone book entries must be evaluated at each site to account for the variations at each site Chapter 14 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages Overview This chapter includes instructions on cleaning the device and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during device operation Valuable topics in this chapter include e Maintaining the UCA Server page 14 2 e Scheduled Data Maintenance page 14 2 e Keeping System Data and Configuration Up to Date page 14 3 e Maintaining the CA50 page 14 3 e Troubleshooting UCA Server Installation Uninstall page 14 4 e Troubleshooting CA50 Client page 14 6 e Troubleshooting CA50 Device page 14 11 e UCA Server System Error Code Number Index page 14 13 e UCA Server System Error Code Number Ranges page 14 16 e General Errors page 14 16 e UCA Database Errors page 14 17 e General Errors page 14 18 e UCA Data
306. ght on the device when on battery power regardless of the values of other parameters such as Enable Backlight On Key Press Backlight On Key Press Check the check box to turn the device backlight on when a key is pressed on battery power Enable Beep On Low Battery Check the check box to enable the beep when the battery is low function Enable Backlight On Notif Msg Check the check box to enable the backlight when a notification is delivered AEC For Headset Check this box to enable echo cancellation for the headset mode By default echo cancellation is disabled This parameter is applied only to the headset mode and it is enabled for the handset at all the times Battery Beep Interval Sets the time interval seconds between beeps when the battery is low Default Low Battery Wav File Sound file that plays when the battery goes below the threshold level Client Settings Use the Client Settings to set the clock and configure other operational parameters such as timeouts UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Chert Conligutalon Time Fama middie HH MM SS wpm Enable Hotiicaion Notification Dn Active Call ah Menu Timeo Sec a Cache TimeT olive tb Pop Ema Timeout Sec Moliestion bing Tineoul Sg ah Silent bode mecul Sec CNDT mec Sec Press And Hold Tima TI WebService Response meou Sec 20 ET PAX Regstralion Parsmeters WebSernace PopupT me Sc 2 Fee Coun gh Logout Barcode UcaLogou
307. gs should NOT be used Also JavaScript is NOT supported Proprietary HTML Elements Motorola developed proprietary HTML elements to be used in business applications The elements in Table 10 1 below are within the lt head gt element the elements in Table 10 2 on page 10 8 are within the lt body gt section 10 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide HTML Elements Contained in the Head Element Table 10 1 HTML Elements Contained in the Head Element Element Description lt meta http equiv ExitBusApp content yes gt This meta tag causes the business application to exit and the UCA client application goes back to the UCA client application desktop This means the user is still logged in and has access to the menus walkie talkie or phone calls lt meta http equiv Scanner content parameter gt Parameters enabled Enables the scanner disabled Disables the scanner autoenter Automatically appends a carriage return to the end of any bar codes scanned autotab automatically appends a tab to the end of any bar codes scanned This meta tag allows the business application developer to enable or disable the scanner as well as append a carriage return or tab to the end of the scanned label Note The enable and disable parameters are only necessary when the business application developer wishes to use the custom scannernavigate meta tag lt meta http equiv scannernavigate content
308. gt lt Menu ID 1 name FrontMenu title Menu gt lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt entry ID 6 lt entry ID 7 lt entry ID 8 lt entry ID 9 value Applications M L Applications gt value WT Channels M L FrontWTChannels gt value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt value Parked calls M L CallPick gt value Key lock S L KeyLock gt value Do Not Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt value Settings M L Settings gt valuez Log Off S L LogOffConfirm gt value Power Off S L PowerOft gt centry ID 10 value About S L About gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 2 name FrontAppMenu title Options gt lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt entry ID 6 value WT Channels M L FrontWTChannels gt value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt value Parked calls M L CallPick gt value Do Not Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt value Log Off S L LogOffConfirm gt value Power Off S L PowerOff 5 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 3 lt entry ID 1 value Extensions M S Range022 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asm x GetMenuExtRanges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType N umber gt name PhoneBook title Phn Bk gt lt entry ID 2 values last Names M S Range024 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client Ph
309. guagelD 6 49 6 50 6 51 System Logging Level 6 49 6 50 6 51 System Login MACAuthOnly 6 52 System Login Token GetPrimaryGroup 6 52 System Login Token GetUserlD 6 52 System Login Token GetUserPW 6 52 System Login UserlDInputMethod 6 52 System Maintenance DB CallParkExt DaysBetween LEGEND PA oe DAWA ee RA NATAN 6 52 System Maintenance DB CallParkExt FileAging eG RG oe Ba AE aw aren aed See 6 52 System Maintenance DB CallParkExt RecordAging pao He Aaa hehe MA 6 52 System Maintenance DB DaysBetween 6 52 System Maintenance DB DebugT race DaysBetween aaa APAD BP AW BOL AG GD WALA Ah ar tan 6 52 System Maintenance DB DebugT race FileAging ee ee ee ee ee 6 52 System Maintenance DB DebugTrace RecordAging Sega ti he steatsne a ras BANGLA gs wh a a a aes a gran 6 52 System Maintenance DB Export Path 6 52 System Maintenance DB HOour 6 52 System Maintenance DB LocalUser DaysBetween MAA PA APA 6 52 System Maintenance DB LocalUser RecordAging sees se ce ta A PAA eve ee NS 6 52 System Maintenance DB Metrics DaysBetween MA PAPA eee 6 52 System Maintenance DB Metrics FileAging 6 52 System Maintenance DB Metrics RecordAging bake Beach bere ag are eee 6 52 System Maintenance Session PollPeriod 6 53 System Maintenance Session Timeout 6 53 System Notif CA50MediaRelay Port 6 53 System Notif MCChannel Address 6 53
310. gure 9 5 Phone Extension Status View 9 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Phone Extension Pool The Phone Extension Pool view displays the pool of extensions defined in the UCA server that are assignable to a CA50 The view includes phone Extension Group Static Owner External ID Extension Type and Phonebook Description of all phone extensions in the UCA server For SCCP protocol the phone extension pool view see Figure 9 6 Red cross indicates that extension is non SCCP see Figure 9 7 Phone and WT Phone Extension Pool Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries Add To List For Delete Returned 67 results Find Extension S Extension Group Static Owner External ID Extension Type Phonebook Description O 200 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext O 201 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext F 202 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext O 203 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext O 204 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext Fj 205 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext 206 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext F 207 Bath Dynamic UCA Ext O 209 Bath 10027318 Static UCA Ext Kevin Smith OO 210 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext OO 211 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext OO 212 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext F 213 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext O 214 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext EF 215 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext O 216 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext E 217 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext oO 218 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext O 219 Electrical Dynamic UCA Ext O 220 Garden Dynamic UCA Ext 1234 Figure 9 6 Phone
311. hannel to channel 2 Base XML Profile Sample A sample user profile portion is shown in the following example lt Profile gt lt User ID from DB Name from DB lt Role ID 0 Name from DB gt Group LD 0 Name from DB gt StorelD from DB gt lt User gt lt Audio gt lt Volume type Speaker Value 0 gt lt Volume type Recelver Value 0 gt lt Volume type Mic Value 5 gt lt Volume type HeadsetMic Value 5 gt lt Audio gt Ext from DB CallerID from DB ExtPwd 0 Port from DB FACCallPark from DB lt Phone Enable yY lt Gateway IP from DB PacketRate from DB lt Phone gt lt WTT Enable Y Type from DB AllowScanModez N s Protocol from DB FACCallPick from DB gt XML Profile for Configuration 7 25 MAC from DB gt DeviceType from DB lt Multicast IP 239 192 2 2 Port 5000 ChannelIncrement Port gt lt ChList gt lt Ch ID 1 type LO Name Store Broadcast SName 1 gt lt Ch ID 3 type SCO Name Sales SName 3 gt lt Ch ID 4 type LO Name Quick Link SName 4 gt lt Ch ID 5 type Def Name Front End SName 5 gt lt ChList gt lt WTT gt lt DownloadFiles DownloadAtStartUp Y gt lt File HTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N s lt File HTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt DownloadFiles gt lt Desktop gt lt Lin
312. hat the settings in the profile take precedence over the message settings J NOTE The alerts for this event functions only if the NotifAllowOnCallActive refer to device config NotifAllowOnCallActive is set to Yes e AppAlertCallActive When the device is running an application and an active call is in progress this setting defines the receiving a notification alert behavior The allowed values for tone visible and vibrate indicators are boolean values whether or not the alerts are allowed in that state If the tone visible and or vibrate indicator is allowed the behavior of these alerts follows the same rules as NotifCallActive e The device checks if any of the alerts attributes tone visible and vibrate are enabled e Ifthe alert attributes are enabled the attribute behavior applicable for NotifCallActive apply The NotifCallActive attribute values appear in AppAlertCallActive but are disabled XML Profile for Configuration 7 11 e AppAlertCallActive alert has three configurable options e AllowTone e AllowVisiblelndicator e AllowVibratelndicator e All three attributes are Boolean Permissible values are Y or N J NOTE Attributes defined for NotifNoCall NotifCallActive and AppAlertCallActive apply only when the client setting Enable Notification is set to Yes If this attribute is set to No the notification is not sent to the device and none of the defined attributes will apply Visible Indicator attribute p
313. he appropriate language transmits to the CA50 device Translations include conversions of Error messages and hard coded data sent to the device from server J NOTE 1 Should the system administrator enter a Language Culture Name not listed in Table 15 2 the Language Culture Name defaults to English en US NOTE 2 Language system variable once changed can t translate back the already existing groups or roles Appendix A Specifications Technical Specifications Table A 1 summarizes the intended operating environment and technical hardware specifications of the device J NOTE 1 Foracomplete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual Table A 1 CA50 Client Specifications Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 4 37 in Lx 1 69 in W x 1 01 in D 111 mm x 43 mm x 25 6 mm Weight includes battery 3 75 0z 105 g Display Monochrome display 96 x 64 pixel dimension Backlight LED backlight Battery Rechargeable Lithium lon 3 7V 920mAh Notification Vibrate text audible alert visual LEDs Performance Characteristics Operating System Server Microsoft Windows 2003 with NET Framework 2 0 Symbol CA50 Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 Core not accessible to developer or
314. he appropriate text boxes add and or delete Selectable and Permanent assignments as needed 5 Click Save to save the edits or Cancel to terminate the session UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 23 Editing User Password A password is used during a user login to the UCA server Password requirements are at the discretion of the UCA server Administrator If a password is not assigned to a user the user is not prompted to enter a password during the login process on a device To edit a user s password in the UCA server 1 Click the Device User Accounts tab gt All Users tab 2 Click the external user ID to edit from the list of users in the External UserID column see Figure 9 19 on page 9 19 The UCA User detail window displays Device User Accounts All Users gt UCA User Recent Users All Users Peat 1 User Detail First Name Kevin Last Name Smith Common Name Kevin Smith External UserID 10027318 Role Sales Status A 2 Selectable Groups No selectable groups are currently defined for this user 3 Permenent Groups Details Figure 9 23 UCA User Window 9 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 Click Edit Password The Edit UCA User Password window displays Device User Accounts All Users gt UCA User gt Edit UCA User Password Recent Users All Users 1 General User Details Common Hame External UserID Password
315. he cursor to the next number to modify Continue until the appropriate IP address displays Note You must enter all 12 digits for an IP address For example the IP address 10 1 14 128 should be entered as 010001014128 2 When the IP address is complete press the Scan Select key to start pinging 3 During the Ping operation the following screen displays all Ping 157 235 20 246 18mS 19mS axe BIO Shing Time Outs TO Stop Exit 4 Press the left soft key Stop to suspend current Ping activity On the Stop status screen press the left soft key again to reset the counters and continue pinging fi bing IP address SF ping currentpingresponse timeinmilliseconds average response time in milliseconds totalpingresponses received Rx MG all Ping average response time in milliseconds minimumpingresponse 30 mS Avg timeinmilliseconds AMn 285 Mx maximum ping response time in Totalpingresponses 1021Rx OTO milliseconds received Rx Continue i ping Time Outs TO 5 Press the right soft key to exit the Ping application Airbeam Client For detailed information about the AirBEAM Client refer to Airbeam documentation Settings Backlight Settings Press Scan Select to modify the setting below press Up Down keys to scroll options list e Disable Enable Backlight e Brightness Level of the display Dimmest Dim Bright Brighter Brightest e Backlight Timeout 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec Always
316. he customer must change the URL in the web config to point to his own Web service See Customizing the Console Login Process on page 11 43 for more information on updating Web config C Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA UCAConsole web config lt applicationSettings gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt setting name UCACommon ConsoleAuthService ManagementAuthentication serializeAs String gt lt value gt http localhost Motorola UCA ServerManagement Authentication ManagementAuthentication asmx lt value gt lt setting gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt applicationSettings gt 11 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Alternative Mechanism for Server Management and Maintenance of Customer Data Programmers can use the UCA server optional APIs to port existing customer database s into the UCA server s database rather than using the Web Console to enter user data such as phone book extensions user information groups and roles This simplifies and speeds the entry and maintenance of data in the UCA server by leveraging the same API used by the Web Console to interface to the UCA server s databases Mechanism for Sending Text Messages to the Device You must use a Web service to send text messages from the UCA server to the CA50 Asynchronous Messaging Mechanism See CA50 Features on page 1 2 for an overview of the CA50 text messaging capabilities Phone Extension To enter phone extensi
317. he functionality above For developers the demo solution is a bundling of capabilities such as a price lookup reference implementation business application and sample server configuration The demo solution exposes developers to the following concepts e User login e Defining groups and roles through the UCA WebConsole Server Interface e Setting up a phone book with extensions through the UCA WebConsole Server Interface e Dynamically assigning new phone extensions to users as they login e Asynchronous text messaging Business Application and Associated Database Sample item lookup price check is available through a demo item lookup database For detailed information about the Demo Solution see Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo For sample business applications see Appendix Business Applications Supplement Development Toolkit with Sample Source Code The Development Toolkit is installed in a default location in the following folder Program Files Motorola UCA Server DevelopmenttToolkit The toolkit includes various samples comprised of source code with solution project files for Visual Studio 2005 e Sample Business Applications Sample Lookup and Sample Lookup 2 e UCA Messaging Sample see page 11 44 e UCA Phone Extension Sample see page 11 46 e Sample Device User Authentication Web Service see page 11 8 e Sample Console User Authentication Web Service see page 11 40 e Sample CSV device user and phone extension i
318. hile the client is connected to the host computer or set to only synchronize on command e Selects the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized J NOTE The CA50 cannot be charged over an ActiveSync connection J NOTE The CA50 supports a USB client connection only J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual G 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Installing ActiveSync If ActiveSync is not already installed on the host computer download the latest version of the software from the Microsoft Web site at htip www microsoft com Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the ActiveSync software J NOTE Microsoft recommends installing ActiveSync on the host computer before connecting the client Setting Up an ActiveSync Connection 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Microsoft ActiveSync on the host computer The ActiveSync window displays Microsoft ActiveSync a O led File View Tools Help z BA SYNC Schedule ra Explore Ha na arb areh BG ml No partnerships Hot connected Hide Details Information Type Stat
319. hine Motorola UCA ServerManagement UserManagement asmx This Web service can be used by external programs to modify UCA user records in the UCA database User Management Web Service Methods AddDeviceUser This method adds a device user to the UCA system The user is added into the B_User table in the UCA database int AddDeviceUser Userlnfo userinfo string SPIN string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters userInfo Userlnfo class that describes the user sPIN User PIN lpAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus if the address should not be logged UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 30 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Related Classes public class UserInfo public UserInfo public string ExtUsrID public string firstName public string lastName public string userName public string RoleToken public string locExtID public string userStatus public string userPhExtn Groups are listed by Rank public UserGroupInfo aUserGroups public class UserGroupInfo public UserGroupInfo public string GroupToken public int Rank public bool IsSelectable public string GroupName Userlnfo Class Members Table 11 10 Userlnfo Class Members Class Member Description ExtUsrID User l
320. hown IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above D 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 5 Create an XML Profile Called Footwear xml A base XML profile is needed to build the baseline settings for CA50 users When a CA50 user logs in to the UCA server the UCA server searches the database for the user Role and or Group information and selects which base XML profile to use The UCA server then fills in the remainder of the base XML profile settings from internal databases and files and sends back to the CA50 the completed base XML profile This information is processed by the CA50 client to setup the CA50 For this exercise the base XML profile is Footwear xml and the two users User1 and User2 use this XML profile when they log in to the UCA server To start 1 Use the Profile Builder and open c Program Files Motorola UCA Server Profil
321. ical User Interface GUI for UCA server configuration and setup The GUI allows an administrator to view create edit and delete settings and entries in the UCA server The interface is segmented into the following sections e System Status e Device User Accounts e Phone and Walkie Talkie e Profile Management e Roles and Groups e System Management J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 3 Login to the UCA Server System To login to the UCA server system 1 Ensure the UCA server installation was completed successfully For more information see Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 2 Launch the UCA server WebConsole by double clicking the UCA server Web Console icon on the server desktop or Launch the IE browser and point the browser to one of the following URLs e When logging in to the UCA server software locally software is loaded on the computer being used and the following URL is applicable http localhost Motorola UCA UCAConsole Login aspx or e For remote login to the UCA server software use the following URL and substitute the server IP addr
322. ication and select Menus gt New The Menus amp Menu States window displays UCA Profile Builder New Menu o N 2 OL a SI NS Menus 5 Meru States Figure 8 39 Add Menu States Menus amp Menu States 2 Highlight Menu States 3 Right click Menu States and select Add Menu States gt AppCallActive UCA Profile Builder New Menu Profle Menus Help Hems Wene States Menus Options appCalictive Tiaraler FestiName About ProeCheck snu Skate r iarain AppHoCal SapQuiet Mode Sap CsliOrHold DaskhopZallAdive Desktopu DeskbopQuistttode Deskbopil litnHold Menu Crestion Figure 8 40 Menu States 8 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Click the plus sign to the left of Menu States to expand the tree 5 Select the newly added menu item under Menu States AppCallActive to display the details for the menu state UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu Prohile Menus Help Menus amp Meru States E Mait ApoCaliciwa Ophons ppl achive Tranter L5 Key Hane Figure 8 41 Menu States Details 6 Select an LS Key left soft key and or RS Key right soft key operative item from the drop down lists UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu E Menus ApaCalvelve Ophons 4ppCelitctve LS Kep Meru An Figure 8 42 Select Soft Key 7 For each key select a menu item from the drop down list if applicabl
323. ice is located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA ServerManagement Authentication ManagementAuthentication asmx Console User Authentication Web Service Methods GetUserData This method retrieves user information from the UCA system The user s information is updated in the ConsoleUserlnfo class passed to the method int GetUserData string sUser string ipAddr ref ConsoleUserlnfo userinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required Userlnfo A reference to a ConsoleUserlnfo class that describes the user described above WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful When successful Userlnfo is populated with the specified user s information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 41 AuthenticateUserPassword This function attempts to authenticate a UCA console user and password It only checks the validity of the username and password pair int AuthenticateUserPassword string sUser string sPassword string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser User login ID sPassword User password ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when address logging is not required UCAWebServi
324. ied Role not defined in database 57105 Invalid group specified Group not defined in database 57106 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57107 An exception occurred while attempting to add a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57134 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57135 An exception occurred while attempting to get a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57161 A similar base profile or a association exists 57162 Attempted to update a profile that does not exist 57164 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57165 An exception occurred while attempting to update a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57202 Attempted to remove a profile that does not exist 57204 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to remove a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 21 Table 14 11 XML Profile Errors Continued Error Code Description 57205 An exception occurred while attempting to remove a profile Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57234 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of all profile associations Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57235 An exce
325. ient browser Backlight Backlight Bklgt Tmr BacklightT imer C Program FilesyMoatorolatUcA ServeriProfilesi Footwear xml Figure D 5 Add Server Action 7 Anew sub menu ServerAction1 appears under the Appins menu Select the sub menu and edit the menu title to Footwear and for the URI provide the link as http 192 168 0 253 Footwear Footwear aspx This points to the Footwear Business Application MUCA Profile Builder Footwear of x Profile Menus Help Desktop Audio Volume Settings Metrics and Log Device Settings Client Settings Alerts Menus Menu States 4 Choose New Menus Browse El Menus Server Action AF Menu Saleshenu Menu Title Footwear H Options Sales4ophMenu i Phn Bk Phonebook URI Jootwear Footwear aspa Appln Applications Price Check PriceCheck Server Action WT Channels 5 ales T Channels Settings Settings Ring Tone RingTone Options DeskCallActve Options AppCal Active OnCall DeskJuiet Backlight Backlight EI H H F F F H Help C Program FilesyMotorola UTA Server Protiles Footwear xml Figure D 6 ServerAction1 D 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 8 Expand the WT Channels SalesWTChannel menu Select My WT Settings and change the menu title to Footwear iy UCA Profile Builder Footwear Profile Menus Help Desktop Audio Volume Settings Metrics and Log Device Settings Clie
326. ile Builder Footwear Profile Menus Help Phone Settings Walkie T alkie Settings Desktop Audio Yolume Settings Metrics and Log Device Settings Client Settings Alerts hi a M Enable Walkie Takie Enable Scan Mode Multicast Settings Walkie Talkie IF Address 2381 9222 In the Multicast mode the IF address and Port are used for multicast transmissions Wwalkie talkiecommunications as well as the Port s5000 Increment method Setting Channellncrement z Port causes the channels to be incremented based on different ports where as Channel Increment Por Channellncrement 1P is incremented based on IP addresses Walkie Talkie Channel Settings Channel Number Channel Tupe Channel Name Listen Only Store Broadcast Listen Only Cust Request Default Sales SCO Front End Help C Program Files Motorolaj ucd Server Profiles Footwear xml Figure D 3 Channel Number Check D 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide 4 Click Add to add the channel details Enter the information Channel Number 3 Channel type Default Channel Name Footwear iy UCA Profile Builder Footwear elles Profile Menus Help Phone Settings Walkie T alkie Settings Desktop Audio Yolume Settings Metrics and Log Device Settings Client Settings Alerts hi t M Enable Walkie Takie Enable Scan Mode Multicast Settings IP Address 2381 i 2 2 Port E000 Walkie Talkie ln the Multi
327. in options when the specified key is pressed optiong2 1 192 168 0 22 1720 012345 Dialing string DTMF supported format Options is formatted as follows PBX 0 or P2P 1 extension port DTMF string Where all s must be present even if it is PBX and there is no port or if there is no DTMF string Extension IP address or an actual extension on the PBX Port for P2P DTMF string id RightSoftkey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftkey and LeftSoftKey value Expert Text to display over the softkey specified in id 10 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Best Practices and Considerations for CA50 Development There are special considerations to take into account when designing Web pages for the CA50 that might not occur when developing Web pages for desktops or other Motorola mobile devices This section addresses CA50 Web page design for data collection and access to the phone and Web based business applications Data Collection Because of the CA50 display size and the number of keys on the device the following is recommended e Collect one piece of user input data per Web page e Collect scanner data in a hidden input tag with one scanner input tag per Web page e The spin box input element should be the only input element on a form when it is desired to use the spin box input element e The select element for a form element ca
328. in Figure 3 5 Should this occur releasing the battery latch adequately and pushing the battery indent lifts the battery slightly out of the well so that it can be gripped and pulled out 3 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Battery Information Only genuine Motorola batteries p n 82 831 72 01 should be used with CA50 devices and charging accessories Taiwan Recycling EPA Environmental Protection Administration requires dry battery producing or importing firms in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act are required to indicate the recycling marks on the batteries used in sales giveaway or promotion Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal Battery Facts Motorola rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry However there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement Many factors affect the actual life cycle of a battery pack such as heat cold harsh environmental conditions and severe drops When batteries are stored over six 6 months some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur Store batteries at half of full charge in a dry cool place removed from the equipment to prevent loss of capacity rusting of metallic parts and electrolyte leakage When storing batteries for one year or longer the charge level should be verified at least once a
329. in the device Charges one spare battery Setup Battery Charge LED Spare Charge LED Cradle P ower Figure B 2 Single Slot Cradle Power Connection B 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Charging the Battery Connect the cradle to power Insert the CA50 into the device slot to begin charging Charge Status LED Figure B 3 Battery Charging Charging the Spare Battery Spare Battery Spare Battery Charging LED Figure B 4 Spare Battery Charging Accessories B 7 Battery Charging Indications The single slot cradle charges the device battery and a spare battery simultaneously The device charge LED indicates the status of the battery charging in the device See Table 4 3 on page 4 10 for charging status indications The spare battery charging LED on the cradle indicates the status of the spare battery charging in the cradle See Table B 2 for charging status indications The battery fully charges in approximately three hours Spare Battery Charging Indications Table B 2 Spare Battery Charging Indications Spare Battery LED on cradle Indication Solid Red Spare battery is charging Solid Green Spare battery is fully charged Blinking Red Charging error Off No battery inserted Cradle Power Solid Green Power on Off Power off Charging Temperature See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed information RF Connectivity When a CASO i
330. in to the UCA server scan an employee login bar code and optionally enter a PIN For additional details see page D 15 and E 14 J NOTE The Employee Identity Validation process is controlled by the UCA server application For details see page 5 1 1 When the device is logged off a log in prompt screen displays wall CHIN Scan bar code to log in Exit Figure 4 4 Login Prompt 2 Press the Scan Select key to scan the appropriate login bar code Upon a successful login a decode beep sounds and the green LED blinks 3 If a PIN is required to continue the PIN input screen displays wall CH Next Back Figure 4 5 PIN Input J NOTE PIN entry can be used to enhance security and assist in employee identity validation For a sample implementation see page E 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Press the Up and Down keys to increment numbers in the current number field 5 Press the left soft key to advance to the Next number field and press the Up and Down keys to increment numbers in the current number field 6 Repeat until the correct PIN is entered in each number field 7 Upon successful login the desktop displays Hl 3 10 52 NTO First name L x123 Menu Phn Bk Figure 4 6 Successful Login Desktop Logoff Options There are several log off options e Scan logoff bar code Scan a specified bar code to log off This logoff method only works
331. information Store Number and UCA server IP address When Rapid Deployment completes the device configuration process the device has a valid network configuration and the UCA client application communicates with a UCA server CA50 Parameters Required to Generate RD Bar Codes Before generating Rapid Deployment bar codes using MSP the CA50 deployment parameters that follow must be defined These deployment parameters to set are stored in the UCA settings xml object e UCA Server IP address e Store Number e SSL True False e Ignore SSL Certificate Errors True False e HTTP Port e HTTPS Port e Persist Settings True False e Web Service Path Default Path Specified e Logoff Service Path Default Path Specified e New Phone Service Name Default Path Specified e Session Check Service Name Default Path Specified e Language English specified as default available from MSP 3 2 1 onwards For details about how to access and launch the CA50 Rapid Deployment client see Table 4 6 on page 4 19 and Appendix F Rapid Deployment UCA settings xml File for Configuring the UCA Client Application UCA settings xml is an MSP settings profile that allows the user to configure the UCA client application on the CA5O Its settings consist of the server IP address the store number SSL configuration and a few Web service settings The user can use these settings to generate RD bar codes so the UCA client application is able to communicate with th
332. information is updated in the ConsoleUserlnfo class passed to the method int GetConsoleUserData string sUser string ipAddr ref ConsoleUserlnfo userinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required Userlnfo A reference to a ConsoleUserlnfo class that describes the user WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful When successful Userlnfo is populated with the specified user s information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 39 SetConsoleUserPassword This method sets a console user s password in the UCA server system Int SetConsoleUserPassword string sUser string sPassword string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sUser Reference to a user s login ID sPassword User password joAddr IP address of the source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 40 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Console User Authentication Web Service In the default installation the Console User Authentication Web Serv
333. ing range window and bar code is incorrect Removing Invalid Entries from Add Remove Programs Device is not programmed Program the device to accept the type of bar code scanned for the bar code type Device is not programmed If the device does not beep on a good decode set the application to generate a beep to generate a beep on good decode Battery is low If the scanner stops emitting a laser beam upon pressing the Scan key check the battery level When the battery is low the scanner shuts off before the device low battery condition notification Note If the scanner is still not reading symbols contact the distributor or the Motorola Global Customer Interaction Center If a program is uninstalled and the corresponding entry in the Add or Remove Programs listing was not removed The listing may be manually removed from the Add or Remove Programs applet 1 Click Start Run and type regedit exe 2 Navigate to HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Uninstall 3 Each subkey represents an installed program 4 To determine which program that each key represents click the key and then view the DisplayName value data in the right pane 5 Select the subkey to be deleted 6 Right click on the subkey and choose Delete 7 Close Registry Editor 14 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA HOME Environment Variable Not Visible After installing the UCA Server l
334. ingle slot CA50 charging cradle B 5 single slot cradle B 2 spare battery 3 4 3 8 B 6 B 8 temperature 3 7 14 6 A 2 A 4 A 5 UNA SY n Pma E LG tees 3 7 inserting AA AA 3 4 installing a charged battery 3 11 4 2 lithium ion aaa 3 1 low battery indicator beep 4 11 7 8 EMONG maso hha pka wanes ere ee oe 3 5 spare battery kit eee B 2 GDC kad maana Ba NP seh AG PAPA AA A 1 strength anann dnd dpe dan Hb ace Hh oa ew 4 6 system WMO sem bab eee Bobo ere ak dak 4 30 system settings ees 6 48 troubleshooting 14 6 14 7 battery charging temperature 0 0a A 4 battery management eee 13 6 device notin use 1 ke aa 3 9 optimizing user device settings 3 9 OUt Of DOX Aa 3 9 wireless profile creation 3 9 beep low battery indicator beep 4 11 booting the device 3 8 3 11 4 4 4 8 aaa A ee A 4 17 10 7 12 6 14 6 F 2 DUGIG saaan eee ook ee ee Gee ere eee oe NG XX business applications 1 2 4 54 6 5 mia AG AA BA E ES 10 2 13 9 E 1 DENG sits dete ALAGA ANDA be NG NING hh AA 10 2 employee identity validation 4 3 D 15 E 14 flashing LEDS a a BO once en NA 10 7 launching KAKA mGA amp ok EN ANG NAA 10 3 playing audio 11 2 11 44 sample c
335. int AddExtension PhoneExtInfo phExtinfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters phExtInfo Phone extension info class that describes the phone extension ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass if do not wish to have the address logged sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log Related Classes public class PhoneExtInfo public PhoneExtInfo string phnExtPhoneNumber string phnDesc string phnOwnerID string phnRangeToken string locExtID bool phnIsAlwaysShown string phnExtensionPassword string phnExtType public string phnMAC public bool phnInvalid public string phninvalidReason UCA Server Optional APIs 11 15 phoneExtInfo Class Members Table 11 5 phoneExtlnfo Class Members Class Member Description phnExtPhoneNumber Phone extension number phnDesc Textual description of the phone extension phnOwnerlD UserlD or MAC for static UCA assignment phnRange Token Token for department Found in the B Groups table locExtID Store number phnIsAlwaysShown Always show in phone book regardless of login status phnExtensionPassword PB X registration password phnExtType Extension type UCA Dynamic UCA Static Non UC
336. intenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 15 Error Message Waiting for Server Response System Problems Retrying Error XXXXX System Problems Return UCA Error XXXXX Waiting For Web Server Response Description This message displays when a server request call was made and a programmable timeout occurred The client is still active but it is waiting for a response from the server before continuing XXXXX is either an HTTP error in the range 400 599 ora WININET error in the range 12000 12999 Retrying indicates that the error was not severe enough to give up and the client is retrying the HTTP post or get request Return UCA indicates that the error is too severe and the user should return the device to the help desk This error code is directed at the support team to try to resolve the issue client server or network related This message is displayed when an HTTP Get or Post request is made and a programmable timeout occurs before a response is received from the Web Server 14 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UCA Server System Error Code Number Ranges General Errors Table 14 7 General Error Ranges Error Code Range Error Type 30000 30999 Phone Book 14 18 31000 31999 Device Management 14 18 32000 32999 XML Profile 14 37 33000 33999 User Management 14 36 34000 34999 Login Authentication 14 21 35000 37000 DB M
337. internally to refer to this specific role 3 Enter a name in the Name text box Name is a user friendly role name that displays to the user if necessary 4 Enter role number information in the Role Number text box The Role Number is used in certain situations to sort the list 5 Click Save to store the group or Cancel to terminate the session UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 35 Editing a Role To edit a role in the UCA server 1 Click the Roles and Groups tab gt Role tab 2 Click the role to edit from the list of UCA roles in the Role ID column see Figure 9 33 on page 9 33 The Role Detail window displays Roles and Groups Roles gt Role Detail Groups 1 Role Detail Role ID Hame Role Humber Figure 9 35 Role Detail Window 3 Click Edit The Edit Role window displays Roles and Groups Roles gt Role Detail gt Edit Role Groups 1 Role Details Role ID must be unique Hame Role Humber Figure 9 36 Edit Role Window 9 36 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Enter the role information to change in the appropriate text boxes Any field except Role D can be updated in this window 5 Click Save to save the edits or Cancel to terminate the session Deleting a Role See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting entries in the UCA server UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface
338. ion Chapter 8 XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration Chapter 9 UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface Chapter 10 CA50 Business Application Development Chapter 11 UCA Server Optional APIs Chapter 12 Staging and Deploying CA50s Chapter 13 Site Installation Guidelines Chapter 14 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages Chapter 15 Localization Appendix A Specifications Appendix B Accessories Appendix C Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies Appendix D Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup Provides information about the Profile Builder application which provides a user interface for an administrator to create new UCA XML profiles and modify existing UCA XML profiles Provides information about the UCA server WebConsole GUI and how to use it for UCA server configuration and setup Provides guidance for developing Web applications that reside on a Web server and are accessed by the CA50 UCA client application Outlines how to use the optional APIs that are installed with the UCA server These APIs are utilized to extend the standard Motorola provided UCA server functionality In addition the APIs enable integration of the server into the existing store processes Describes client server features that allow packaging applications and procedures for deploying applications onto the CA5O client Describes how to program the CA50 to automatically launch dire
339. ion Scanning Employee Login Bar Code and entering PIN for details see page 4 3 Walkie talkie communication via the UCA client application for details see page 4 31 Voice call communication via the UCA client application for details see page 4 36 Price lookup via a business application scan any SKU below for details see page 10 2 Price Lookup SKUs for the Demo Solution The SKUs below correspond to pre populated retail items in the mini SKU database This SKU database is provided for demo purposes and is not a part of or related to the UCA server software o 7 71662 HIN 0 4 50 Power Strip 2pk 994496 102312 0 79 1 Brush 0o 50505 72368 3 529 99 Shower Massgr 3 34489 20000 3 59 41 GFCI Dplx Cvr 7 31452 02842 6 569 00 Dump Cart Scan the SKUs to perform a price lookup E 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 9 Modifying the Demo Solution Creating New Users To create a new user for the Demo Solution using the UCA server Web Console GUI see Step 6 Populate the UCA Server Database with 2 Users on page D 11 1 CAUTION Ensure to create unique external user IDs for new users to avoid duplicating users in the system In addition bar codes must also be created for new users to login J NOTE To delete users created in the Demo Solution see Delete Utility on page 9 52 Appendix F Rapid Deployment Overview The Rapid Deployment RD client on
340. ion Development 10 17 Parameters sStoreNumber Store or location number slpAddr IP address of the CA50 device sUser A reference to string that contains the UCA User ID when successful WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 and sUser contains the UCA User ID when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to NT Event log 10 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 11 UCA Server Optional APIs Overview This chapter outlines how to use the optional APIs that are installed with the UCA server Valuable topics in this chapter include e UCA server optional APIs overview page 11 2 e CA50 device user authentication process page 17 5 e Device user authentication Web service page 11 8 e Phone extension Web service page 11 14 e Phone extension Web service methods page 11 14 e Group management Web service methods page 11 18 e Role management Web service methods page 11 22 e Device messaging Web service page 11 26 e User management Web service page 11 29 e Console user authentication Web service page 11 40 e Console user authentication Web service methods page 11 40 e Customizing the console login process page 11 43 e UCA server optional APIs samples page 11 44 e UCA messaging sample page 11 44 e UCA phone extension sample page 11 46 11 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Serve
341. ion and the menu section The WTT section below defines 3 channels 1 2 and 3 The values in this section are used to configure the VoIP subsystem with mulitcast address port allowed channels and types etc lt WTT Enable Y AllowScanMode N gt lt Multicast IP 239 192 2 2 Port 5000 ChannelIncrement Port gt lt ChList gt lt Ch ID 1 type LO Name Store Broadcast SName 1 gt lt Ch ID 2 type Def Name Sales SName 1 gt lt Ch ID 3 type SCO Name Front End SName 1 gt lt ChList gt lt WTT gt The menu excerpt section below create the UI displayed on the device that enables the user to switch between the channels defined above The menu XML below creates a selectable menu entry labeled WT Channels Then WT channels is selected from a menu a sub menu displays with two selectable items in the sub menu My WT Settings and Front End lt Menu ID 5 name SalesWTChannels title WT Channels gt lt entry ID 1 value My WT Settings S L SetChannel 2 Normal gt lt entry ID 2 value Front EndSettings S L SetChannel 3 Single gt lt Menu gt When Front End is chosen from the menu the CA50 client instructs the VoIP subsystem to se the WT channel to channel 3 mote match to CH ID 3 in the WTT section When My WT Settings is chosen by the user the CA50 client instructs the VoIP subsystem to set the WT c
342. ion includes all the bar codes to set up and demonstrate three CA50s working with the hardware called out in Figure E 1 below AP WS2000 P IP 192 168 0 1 an ESSID UCA T Encryption Open f DTIM 2 Laptop XP Pro SP2 IIS Loaded and Enabled IP 192 168 0 253 No Firewalls CA50s DHCP IPs 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 101 192 168 0 102 Note The static IP addresses shown in this system diagram are required to use the RD bar codes provided with the Demo Solution on page E 11 Figure E 1 nfrastructure E 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 2 Setup Static IP on Server Hardware UCA Server Static IP Address 192 168 0 253 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To do this in Windows 2003 1 Goto Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections and click on Local Area Connection 2 Inthe Local Area Connection Status window select Properties 3 Inthe Local Area Connection Properties window highlight the Internet Protocol TCP IP option and click Properties 4 Select the Use the following IP address button and enter the values above Important Notes e The CA50 device must know where the UCA server IP address is for configuration via Rapid Deployment bar codes For this to occur set the UCA server hardware to the UCA server static IP address above 192 168 0 253 e Ensure you can ping this IP address through your wireless network using another mobile device or wireless lapt
343. ions one at a time via the UCA server s Web Console Bulk loading of phone extensions and CA50 users into the UCA database is enabled To create and import user data see page 9 25 The phone extension import feature uses a comma separated value CSV format that must include a header line as follows locExtID ohnExtPhoneNumber phnRange Token petID ohnExtensionPassword phnDesc phnisAlwaysShown p hnOwnerlD Sample Import Lines Sample import lines are as follows 0002 7000 Lumber N Lumber Desk Y 9 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Sample import line notes e f the location ID string has leading zeros in the database leading zeros must be included in the import file If the file is edited using Microsoft Excel the field must be manually formatted to text within Excel e Between items a space is optional The sample above shows items with and without spaces e The Range Token must match the configured group tokens e If itis desired to use a comma in the description it must be enclosed in quotes e The petID must include an N D or S e N Additional Phonebook Entries non UCA e D Dynamically assigned UCA extensions in the Phone Extension Pool e S Statically assigned UCA extensions in the Phone Extension Pool e The single import option imports extensions for the Phone Extension Pool and the Additional Phonebook Entries J NOTE For information on how to import CA50 users into the UCA dat
344. irm that the PC meets the OS and software requirements see Server Software Requirements on page 6 7 e Load UCA server software on the PC see Installing UCA Server Software on page 6 10 e During the UCA server installation process use the following login information SA password SQLisGreat0O1 for additional information see page 6 13 Step 10 UCA database login ID Motorola02 for additional information see page 6 13 Step 15 UCA database password UCAisGreat02 for additional information see page 6 15 Step 15 IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on whether or not NET AN Framework is already loaded and the computer processor speed During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process stopped Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 5 Step 4 Validate Successful Server Installation on Laptop To verify the installation and configuration of the UCA server software follow the process documented in Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 When performing the validation process use the default Web Console user login information Launch the UCA server web console from the desktop shortcut e Default User ID admin Password admin 1 IMPORTANT Ensure to enter all settings called out on page 6 45 exactly as s
345. is the most secure in addition it is typically slightly faster than WPA TKIP due to improvements in the protocol WPA TKIP provides a good balance between security and roam times It can also serve as stand in for WPA2 AES for advanced debugging WPA TKIP can be decrypted with a full wireless snooper capture while WPA2 AES cannot J NOTE 1The use of an authentication server is not recommended for voice NOTE 2Recommended for diagnosis and fast roaming NOTE 3Consider if it meets security needs WEP is a natural fast roamer CA50 Modes of Operation 4 15 Data Capture The CAb0 offers laser scanning for 1D bar codes Figure 4 9 Scan Window Laser Scanning The CA50 has an integrated laser scanner with the following features Reads a variety of bar code symbologies including the most popular linear postal and 1D code types Intuitive aiming for easy point and shoot operation Scanning Considerations Typically scanning is a simple matter of aim scan and decode and a few quick trial efforts master it However consider the following to optimize scanning performance V Range Any scanning device decodes well over a particular working range minimum and maximum distances from the bar code This range varies according to bar code density and scanning device optics Scanning within range brings quick and constant decodes scanning too close or too far away prevents decodes Move the scanner closer and further away to
346. itiate a download of files mentioned in the profile xml associated with the user See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 more information input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name DOWNLOADFILES DOWNLOADFILES is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to download files as mentioned in the profile xml associated with the user options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value DwldFiles Text to display over the soft key specified in id Commands and Uses J 13 Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey This input element allows business application developers to define a name DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFILES soft key for users to delete all the files downloaded previously to the options value DeleteFiles gt folder application download on the device See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 more information input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFILES DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDPFILES is a key word for the browser
347. k Up the UCA Server UCA Server Backup and Restore H 3 To backup the UCA server 1 Provide the database credentials see Provide Database Credentials on page H 2 2 Click Browse and choose the directory location for the backup archive The default location is CAUCA Backup 3 Click Backup to begin backing up the UCA database and profiles 4 Amessage box appears and indicates that the backup operation was successful Restore the UCA Server The Restore process restores the UCA database and the profiles from the backup taken using the backup process J NOTE f the version of the archived configuration of the UCA server does not match the target server the application displays a message and shuts down A UCA Backup amp Restore Backup CG Restore Reconfigure Database details UCA database credentials Sa Password UCA DB Password Backup file Backup File C tmp Backupl Figure H 3 Restore the UCA Server To restore the UCA database and profiles 1 Provide the database credentials sa login see Provide Database Credentials on page H 2 2 Provide the UCA Database login credentials provided during the installation Refer to section 6 12 of CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 Choose the backup archive by clicking Browse 4 Click Restore to begin restoring the UCA database and profiles 5 A message box appears and indicates that the restore operation was successful H 4 CA50
348. k type DefaultScan URL from DB gt lt Link type UpHotLink URL gt lt Link type DownHotLink URL gt lt Link type FPTTHotLink URL gt lt Link type SPTTHotLink URL gt lt Link type AutoLaunchHotLink URL gt lt Desktop gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt cfg type Time value mm dd yyyy HH MM SS a pm gt lt cfg type BacklightLevel value from DB gt lt cfg type BatteryBacklightTimeout value from DB gt lt cfg type ACBacklightTimeout value 60 gt lt cfg type BatteryBacklightOnKeyPress value 1 gt lt cfg type ACBacklightOnKeyPress value 1 gt lt cfg type BacklightOnOff value 1 gt lt cfg type BacklightEnableOnNotifMsg value 0 gt lt cfg type MenuTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type WebServicePopupTime value 2 gt lt cfg type WebServiceResponseTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type PopupErrorTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type SilentModeTimeout value 120 gt lt cfg type DNDModeTimeout value 1800 gt type PressNHoldTime value 2 gt type NotifEnable value Y gt type NotifAllowOnCallActive value Y gt type CacheTimeToLive value 60 gt lt cfg lt cfg ccfg lt cfg 7 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide lt cfg type LogoutBarcode value UcaLogout gt lt cfg type UcaExitBarcode value UcaClientExit gt lt cfg type BadRFSampleThreshhold value 3 gt lt cfg type GoodRFSampleThreshhold v
349. l For safety and stability it is recommended that you use the appropriate wall mounting hardware for installation For safe mounting it is essential to use wall anchors appropriate to the wall type i e plaster drywall concrete etc Mount to wood studs whenever possible The wall mount bracket mounting slots are designed for a fastener with a 8 pan head B 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Mounting Instructions J NOTE Connect an approved power supply to the cradle s prior to attaching the cradle s to the wall mount bracket See Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger on page B 8 and Eight Slot CA50 Charging Cradle on page B 3 for power supply information 1 When mounting one eight slot CA50 battery charger CHS5000 8000CR slide the four bracket mounting tabs into the receptacles on the bottom of the charger as shown in Figure B 14 Ensure the screw holes in the bracket flanges align with the screw holes in the cradle When mounting two eight slot battery chargers SAC5000 8000CR slide two bracket mounting tabs into each battery charger as shown in Figure B 15 Flange Figure B 14 _ nsert Bracket into CHS5000 8000CR Cradle Figure B 15 nsert Bracket into SAC5000 8000CR Cradle Accessories B 1 2 Screw the bracket to the cradle s CHS5000 8000CR Screw the two supplied 5 Phillips screws into the two bracket flanges and tighten until the cradle is securely attached to the bracket as sho
350. lation Guidelines Overview The planning and preparation for customer deployment is a critical step in optimizing the implementation and utilizing details of the UCA server and the UCA client application on the CA50 It involves setting up the server to meet the exact needs of the customer A server set up can range from basic configurations that include required customer settings and options to developing various custom business applications a customer specific user authentication Web service and a PBX integration service The Motorola UCA product requires information about a site environment to be seeded into the UCA server at installation time This information is used to organize device users into phone book groups identify statically assigned phone extensions walkie talkie channels etc The accuracy of this data must also be maintained over time as the site environment changes Certain types of site changes can have ripple effects on multiple types of data For example new departments could be added which would affect the list of groups device users phone extension pool and additional phone book entries J NOTE 1 Foracomplete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual Maximum Number of
351. le alert settings 2 0 00 cece eee ees 8 16 client settings 8 15 create MENUS ee ee 8 21 create new profile a 8 4 desktop settings 8 11 device settings A AAA 8 14 download files settings 8 10 metrics 4 logging 8 13 phone settings aa 8 6 volume settings 8 12 walkie talkie settings 8 7 XML sample base XML profile 00 0000 7 25 completed user XML profile 7 27 XML user profile 0 0 00 cee ee ee 7 4 Index 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Tell Us What You Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 627 7184 or mail to Motorola One Motorola Plaza M S B 10 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager IMPORTANT If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number provided Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual Very familiar Cj Slightly familiar Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added
352. ler or a scrollable information screen Press the Volume Up key Note Receiver volume can be adjusted while on a voice call only Press the Volume Down key Note Receiver volume can be adjusted while on a voice call only Press the Volume Up key Note Speaker volume can be adjusted from any screen except when on a voice call Press the Volume Down key Note Speaker volume can be adjusted from any screen except when on a voice call Press and hold the left soft key at boot time USB Mini B Charging contacts for cradle connections Earbud audio jack 2 5mm Sound out for voice calls Green red and amber Sound in for walkie talkie and voice unicast calls Sound out for walkie talkie and notifications Emits laser for scanning bar codes 4 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide CA50 Indications LED Indications Table 4 3 CA50 LED Indications Event LED Status Walkie Talkie Indications Start walkie talkie Off communication transmit Start walkie talkie Off communication receive Voice Unicast Call Indications Receive a call Blink green during ring Make a call Off Busy Off Scanning Indications Active scanning laser on Off Successful decode Single green blink Network Indications Connecting to network server Off Connected to UCA server Single green blink Connection failure Slow red blink No connection lost connection Slow red blink Battery Charging Indications No
353. lick and select Remove 1 Right click the main menu Options AppCallActive and select Add Static Menu Element 2 Select the new Static menu item New Menu2 UCA Profile Builder New Menu Menus amp Meru Stahes E Menuz Stalie Heru Element H Options applic Meru Tille Menu Stabes Benu Hamz Figure 8 31 Add a Static Menu Element 3 Enter a Menu Title e g Transfer in the text box under Static Menu Element 8 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 Enter a Menu Name e g TransferPhoneBook in the text box under Static Menu Element UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu kenus amp keru Slabe E Manut Static Meru Element Options Appl active bieru Tille Tuaresler 4 New Menu AA Menu States Maru Name Farsin honakoa Figure 8 32 Enter Menu Name Add a Dynamic Menu Element 1 Right click the main menu Options AppCallActive and select Add Dynamic Menu Element 2 Select the new dynamic menu item Dynamic Menu3 UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu Profle Menus Help Menus amp Meru Stahes E Maut Dynamis Menu Elenen Options bppCslbclive Meru Tile Dynamic Merw3 Tanger TJ URI FE Figure 8 33 Add a Dynamic Menu Element 3 Enter a menu title e g FirstName in the text box under Dynamic Menu Element 4 Select a URI e g First Name URI from the URI drop down list under Dynamic Menu Element UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu
354. lick next InstallShield Figure 6 47 Welcome 7 Click Next on the Welcome window The License Agreement displays Motorola Installation Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully MOTOROLA INC END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Motorola is willing to license its Software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this License Agreement Agreement IMPORTANT READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCTS BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON BELOW YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU LICENSE THE PRODUCTS TO YOU HE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON TO DISCONTINUE THE ALL COPIES OF THE ENTIRE PRODUCT IF YOU HAVE NOT PHYSICALLY RECEIVED A PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND 1 Definitions x 9 accept the terms of the license agreement do not accept the terms of the license agreement Instalei lt Back Ne Coca Figure 6 48 License Agreement 8 Read the license agreement and click Yes to accept and continue the installation The Customer Information window displays with the current user name and company Change if necessary ee Motorola Installation Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Associate Name Company Name AA Company Name Serial Number from UCA Server Installation CD Install this application for O Anyone who uses this com
355. lid Red Spare battery is charging Blinking Red Charge error check placement of spare battery Off No battery inserted B 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Earbud You can use a mono earbud for audio communication when using an audio enabled application To use an earbud plug the earbud 2 5mm jack into the mono audio connector on the side of the CA50 Plugging an earbud into the jack disables the internal speaker microphone and receiver Figure B 6 Mono Earbud Connection Accessories B 11 Lanyard with Clip For ease of use the CA50 can be attached to the lanyard with clip enabling the device to be worn around the neck as shown in Figure B 7 Figure B 7 Wearing Lanyard Attaching and Removing the Lanyard Figure B 8 Attaching and Removing the Lanyard B 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide USB Cable This section describes how to set up and use the cable The USB cable is available to use for communication between the CA50 and a PC It cannot be used to charge the battery in the CA50 Communication Setup To connect a device communication cable to a USB device 1 Connect the USB A end of the device communication cable to the communication port of the PC 2 Connect the USB Mini B end of the device communication cable to the device For more information on communication setup procedures see Appendix G ActiveSync Figure B 9 ActiveSync Cable Comm
356. lid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value UnHold Text to display over the soft key specified in id J 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name PHNTRANSFERCALL options 1 192 168 7 75 5060 value Transfer gt lt input type Command id RightSoftKey name PHONEMUTE options value Mute gt This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to transfer an active call to another user input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHNTRANSFERCALL PHNTRANSFERCALL is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to transfer an active call to another user options 1 192 168 0 22 1720 012345 Dialing string DTMF supported format Options is formatted as follows PBX 0 or P2P 1 extension port DTMF string Where all s must be present even if it is PBX and there is no port or if there is no DTMF string Extension IP address or an actual extension on the PBX Port for P2P DTMF string id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Transfer Text to display over the soft key specifi
357. lkie communication are less taxing than voice unicast calls e Increasing the RF activity from non CA50 devices Access Points noise etc in the area of CA50 usage can decrease the CA50 run time voice quality and range e Increasing CA50 distance from an associated Access Point can decrease CA50 run time due to rate scaling even when no perceptible degradation in voice quality is noted Votes When a CA50 is out of range of an Access Point radio power consumption is maximized significantly degrading run time battery life In 802 11b and 802 11g implementations it is recommended to use radio channels 1 6 and 11 to minimize inter channel interference which decreases run time J NOTE Standard mobile suspend sleep mode resume and auto suspend modes used in Motorola mobile devices do not apply to the CA50 voice device because the radio must stay active to transmit walkie talkie conversations and receive incoming voice calls Getting Started 3 11 Powering On the CA50 Pre deployment The CA50 device powers on when a charged battery is installed see nserting the Battery on page 3 4 If a charged battery was already installed and the device is put into sleep mode press any key to wake the device J NOTE f the device does not power on the battery charge may be depleted See Charging Batteries on page 3 8 Upon initial use first time out of box the Motorola splash screen displays briefly and then the device boots up
358. lkie talkie communications e Listen Only Channel e Users can listen but cannot talk on Listen Only channels e Users cannot manually select and enter single channel mode on Listen Only channels e A channel can be set to listen only by setting the type to LO in the WITT gt Chlist gt Ch element e Accessible Non listen Channel e By default users cannot hear anything on this channel The channel is used as a reserve channel for single channel mode e A user must select this channel manually to access this channel e Selecting this channel puts a user in Single Channel mode e When selected in Single Channel mode users can talk and listen only on this channel e A channel can be set as Accessible single channel only by setting the type to SCO in the WTT gt Chlist gt Ch element There are four walkie talkie communication modes These different modes tell the device how to handle the channels to which it has access The modes are e Single Channel Mode e Users can talk and listen only on this channel e The only way to end Single Channel mode is to leave the channel manually e Normal Mode e Users listen on Listen Talk channels and Listen Only channels e Users talk on the default channel only e Normal mode is exited when the user manually selects a channel other than the default talk channel causing the device to enter Single Channel mode e Scan Mode e Users listen on Listen Talk channels and Listen Only channels e Whe
359. ll System AllowDynamicWhenStaticFails System DefaultLocation System Device Activity Threshold System Language LanguagelD System Logging Level Port for the phone gateway used for PBX communications The protocol and type of gateway with which the phone client attempts to communicate Device Type set to 7960 Enable direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls for CA50 devices Device phone calls do not utilize a PBX if this is enabled The port on which to make direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls The starting number of ranges to attempt to break a list into Maximum number of extensions to display as a single menu before breaking into ranges multiple menus The maximum number of extensions to put in a range Age in hours of past calls to consider as a recent call Determines whether or not the user associated with multiple groups appears in each department Determines whether or not to allow for a dynamic ext if the static fails to register Default external location ID to use on this server In many cases this would be a store number The length of idle time hours before a device is considered in an unknown state Language ID of the localized UCA Client read only Diagnostic trace logging This setting controls how much detail is written to the trace log table T DebugTrace All log entries of the specified level and greater are logged Any log entries with lower priority levels are not logged Possible Value
360. ll gt value Applications M L Applications gt value Exit Quiet Mode S L QuietMode N gt title Backlight gt value low S L SetBkltLvl 0 gt value medium low S L SetBkltLvl 1 gt value medium S L SetBkltLvl 2 gt value medium high S L SetBkltLv1 3 gt value high S L SetBkltLvl1l 4 gt title Bklgt Tmr 5 value 2 secs 5 L SetBkltTimeout 2 7 5 value 5 secs 8 L SetBkltTimeout 5 5 value 10 secs S L SetBkltTimeout 10 gt vValue 20 secs S L SetBkltTimeout 20 gt title Phn Bk 35 XML Profile for Configuration 7 31 lt entry ID 1 value Extensions M S Range022 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asm x GetMenuExtRanges sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortTy pe Number gt sentry LD 2 value Last Names M S Range024 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType LastName gt lt entry ID 3 value Departments M S Depts xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client phonebook asmx GetMenuGroupList sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType All amp amp sSortType Name gt lt entry ID 4 value First Names M S Range023 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Transfer amp
361. ls e Do not modify or remanufacture attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery immerse or expose to water or other liquids or expose to fire explosion or other hazard Getting Started 3 7 Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer e Battery usage by children should be supervised e Please follow local regulations to promptly dispose of used re chargeable batteries e Do not dispose of batteries in fire e Seek medical advice immediately if a battery has been swallowed e Inthe event of a battery leak do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes If contact has been made wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice e If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support to arrange for inspection Charging Temperature 1 IMPORTANT Charge batteries in temperatures from 0 C to 35 C 32 F to 95 F Note that at temperatures above 30 C the charging temperature is monitored and controlled by the device and the charging accessory Charging is halted at temperatures above 35 C The device or accessory indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures via its LED and or battery icon See Table 4 1 on page 4 5 Table 4 3 on page 4 10 and Table B 2 on page B
362. lt Level 0 4 gt Example lt entry ID 1 value low S L SETBKLTLVL 0 gt SetBkltTimeout lt time in seconds gt Example lt entry ID 1 value 2 secs S L SETBKLT TIMEOUT 2 gt Value of O means the backlight is always on ExitClient Example lt entry ID 11 value Exit S L EXITCLIENT gt DOWNLOADFILES Example lt entry ID 1 value Download Files S L DOWNLOADFILES gt DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFILES Example lt entry ID 2 value Delete Files S L DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFIL ES gt J 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Commands Usage in Business Applications HTML Pages Commands can be used in HTML based business applications to perform various user based functions For example a user can make a phone call from the business application This section describes how to embed commands as part of business applications Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Element Description lt input type Command This input element allows business application developers to define a name SETSCANMODE options soft key for users to set the Walkie Talkie in Scan mode id RightSoftKey value WT Scan gt input type Commana Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name SETSCANMODE SETSCANMODE is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to set
363. ly on this channel J NOTE One Listen Talk channel must be designated as the default channel for normal mode Walkie Talkie Steps in setting Walkie Talkie values vary through the profile builder wizard Configure Walkie Talkie channels and multicast settings There can be up to three Walkie Talkie settings views Adding and Removing Channels 1 To add a new Walkie Talkie channel click Add to display the Channel Details screen UCA Profile Builder Mow Profile Enable wWakieTakie C Enable Sean Made Multicast Settings Waku Talkie IP Address za 19222 Inthe Mudticast mode the IP address and Port ane used bo Nullicadt Nargmissong wakis talkiscommunicaliong 35 wel ss the Pait meremenl melhed Selling Chernelinciement Pai causes channels bo be notemenbed based on diferent pails where as Chanel liement Pail Dhenmelraemeani P is incremerted based on IP addresses Wake Takie Channel 5elings Channel Number Channel Tape Channel Mame Channel Detal Listers Oriy Shore Broadeadt Channel Mumber 4 Litter Oriy Cisl agus Dalai Salas Channel Type S00 Channel ame FrontEnd Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 10 Display Channel Details 2 After adding the channel the new channel appears in the Walkie Talkie channel list see the New Channel screen UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile F Enebe wake Take C Enable Sean Made Multicast Settings Waki Talkie IP Qderess asa 18227 In tha Midtios
364. marus information IF the mend ix chosen from te exiting profile hen menus infonnalion preset in hg selected polle wil ba displaped in the Ines view Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 5 Configure Profiles Phone Settings The Phone element specifies the settings necessary to configure the phone component This includes the caller ID value sent to the gateway and the password used to register the assigned extension with the PBX Currently the only configurable value is Enable Y to allow phone usage or Enable N to not allow phone usage The remaining parameters are disabled They are populated from the database before the profile is sent from the UCA server to the device UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Phone Details Galeway Parameters Enable Phone Pade Su Extension Auto Pott ay Caler ID aaa Type Extension Pasewerd Protocol kuto MAC Address Aug Devica Typa Au FAC CalPak a FAC Cal Pick A PackelRale auo Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 6 Phone Settings XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 7 Walkie Talkie Settings The Walkie Talkie settings specifies the settings required to set up the default Walkie Talkie communication To enable the Walkie Talkie and Scan mode UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Enable walkie Talkie Enable Sean Mode Mula Seings Wako Talkie IP Address z 19222 In tha Miudticsst mods the F address and Port are used ko mallicast
365. maxlength etc CA50 Business Application Development 10 7 Table 10 1 HTML Elements Contained in the Head Element Continued Element Description lt meta http equiv reboot content warm gt This custom tag causes the device to reboot once the business application page is received and parsed The content value can either be warm or cold for a warm or cold boot respectively lt meta http equiv visibleindicator This custom tag causes the LED to blink indefinitely or turn on for content indicatortoken gt the life of the business application page There are a set of indicator tokens that allow the Web developer to choose the color and blink rate for the LED These tokens are as follows indictortoken possible values RedSlowBlink LED is red and blinks once every second RedMedBlink LED is red and blinks once every 2 second RedFastBlink LED is red and blinks once every 1 10 second RedOn LED is red and stays on GreenSlowBlink LED is green and blinks once every second GreenMedBlink LED is green and blinks once every 7 second GreenFastBlink LED is green and blinks once every 1 10 second GreenOn LED is green and stays on AmberSlowBlink LED is amber and blinks once every second AmberMedBlink LED is amber and blinks once every 12 second AmberFastBlink LED is amber and blinks once every 1 10 second AmberOn LED is amber and stays on lt meta http equiv vibrateindicator This custom tag causes
366. me login however once the settings are changed the new values are saved and are used with the next time log on Use the Volume Settings screen to set the volume level for audio output controls Allowed values are between 0 and 6 UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Yoluma Sailings Volume Settings Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 14 Volume Settings XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 13 Metrics amp Logging Metrics The metrics section specifies the required device metrics what is sent to the server and defines the interval UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Logging Infomation Colection Irtawal Sec E0 Walkie Takie Device Phone walkie Takie F map lacoming Cal Dugong Call F Browser Scanner Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 15 Metrics Table 8 5 Metrics Settings Field Description Collection Interval Specifies the send interval for sending the metrics data to the server This applies only to device and push to talk messages Device Check this box to include device specific information as part of metrics data sent to the server Walkie Talkie Check this box to include Walkie Talkie messages as part of metrics data sent to the server Incoming Call Check this box to include incoming call metrics as part of metrics data sent to the server Outgoing Call Check this box to include outgoing call metrics as part of metrics data sent to the server Logging The Loggi
367. ment continued 10 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 10 2 HTML Elements Contained in the Body Element Continued Element Description continued ShowArrows The contents of this attribute represents whether or not to put an up and down arrow around the current digit that is being edited It is only applicable if the spin box is placed on line two Possible values for ShowArrows are yes or no The default setting for this attribute is no if this attribute is not detected SpinBoxLine The contents of this attribute represents what line number to put on the spin box The line number can be one two or three where line one is the line after the status bar line The default line for the spin box is line number two if this attribute is not detected in the spin box input element SpinBoxMaskDigit The contents of this attribute represents what character or characters are mask characters for the value attribute For example if this character is a then all characters that are in value attribute is replaced by the character O when displayed in the browser window The user can then edit all these characters by pressing the up or down buttons The default mask character is the character if this attribute is not detected in the spin box input element Value The contents of this attribute represents what displays on the CA50 device except the mask characters are replaced by 0 whe
368. mod 10 10 both check digits are MOD 10 True enables the property False disables the property lt META HTTP Equiv msi Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv scanner Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi reportchec kdigit Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi Content enabled gt lt META HTT P Equiv msi minlength Content 30 gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv msi maxlength Content 30 gt lt META HT TP Equiv msi CheckDigit Scheme Content msi chkdgt mod 1 1 105 lt META HTTP Equiv msi Content enabled gt lt META HTT P Equiv msi checkdigits Content true gt C 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table C 1 Symbology Property Custom Meta Tags Continued Description Custom Tags Parameters Example Code 128 Code128 Code128 Redundancy Code128 Other128 Code128 MinLength Code128 MaxLength Code128 ISBT128 Code128 EAN128 Code 39 Code 39 The Code128 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the code128 decoder By default enabled The Code128 Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 redundancy property The Code128 Other128 META Tag is an action tag used to set the code128 other128 property The Code128 MinLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code
369. mport files Required Development Tools e Visual Studio 2005 Team Edition for Developers with SP1 installed e Microsoft Web Deployment Projects installed 6 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Theory of Operation The The following lists the basic process the CA50 client executes at start up Registration see Device Registration on page 6 4 Authentication login see Chapter 11 UCA Server Optional APIs Profile retrieval see Chapter 7 XML Profile for Configuration Desktop launch see CA50 Login Post deployment on page 4 2 following sequential steps are an overview of the events that occur when a CA50 powers on runs the UCA client application and a user logs in 1 2 10 11 12 13 The client calls the DeviceRegistration Web Service method page 6 4 to let the server know that it is present The server adds the device information to a table for identification and checks if the device is authenticated directly or if the user must login If the device is authenticated the server immediately builds and sends the XML profile to the client step 5 If the device is not authenticated the server proceeds to the user login process step 3 The server sends back an XML command to browse to a Web page to begin the login process The client posts back user input while proceeding through the login process When the login process reaches the point where the server has enough information
370. must be enabled so that phone calls are reported to the UCA server to create the user s call history GetUserListByGroup Use this to get the login IDs of the users who are currently logged into a particular group The parameters required for this web service are Parameters a sStoreNumber Specifies the Store ID sGroup One of valid UCA group name 7 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Menu States Defines the menus applicable for different menu states For each state of the device AppCallActive indicates that the device Is in a call is active and an application is open in the browser state menu states define what is shown as the menu for the left soft key and the right soft key Following is a sample code snippet for the menu state AppCAllActive lt MenuStates gt lt State ID 4 Name AppCallActive LSKey Options M L AppCallActive RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt MenuStates gt The format for representing a menu for LSKey and RSKey use is title to display M L menu name In this example the LSKey refers to the menu titled Options and the menu name is AppCallActive State AppCallActive Left Soft key LSKey displays options as a menu and the actual menu referenced is AppCallActive Right Soft key RSKey displays end as a command and the actual command referenced is PhoneHangUp The name attribute identifies the client state a
371. n 11 15 updateextension 11 16 phone profile elements 7 4 phone walkie talkie additional phone entries 9 14 creating additional extensions 9 15 creating phone extension 9 9 deleting phone extensions 9 17 editing additional extensions 9 16 editing phone extension properties 9 11 phone extension imports 9 13 phone extension pool 0200005 9 8 phone extension status 9 7 PUNCVCAUY i aan a ma on ee ge ee 4 3 10 3 E 14 ping test on CA50 device 4 27 post deployment OQIN AA AP AP 4 2 DOWOR OM maala pi ao YN ars ras et GA deg 4 2 DOUCHE erena rieren konas at Ave chars A Gord de areas B 2 power off 3 Baan 9 cca ag We yaa ow won Gre oo BE ew es 3 13 power off cradle 0 B 7 PONOT OI aaa id Ga BA ee ee Pa 4 8 post deployment a 4 2 pre deployment cece eee 3 11 pre deployment See out of box profile builder alert settings 0 0 00 e eee eee 8 16 client settings 0 2 0 0 8 15 create MENUS 2 2 eee 8 21 create new profile a 8 4 desktop settings 8 11 device settings 2 0 0 0 0 cee a 8 14 download files settings 8 10 metrics amp logging 8 13 phon
372. n Figure 8 3 nput Profile Basic Details J NOTE English is the default language The language list consists of English French Italian Japanese Korean German and Spanish 3 Click Next The Menu Section page appears If creating a new profile select the Default Menu or select Choose Menu to select from the existing profile XML files UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Choose a SML file containing Menus and Manu States information Menu Type Saket Meru Typa O Delauk Meru C Choose Menu In cage of ceesting a new profile user could select the Defaull menu oi choose the mema from sadsting Profile HHL file conbainiag Iho mars information If thie mend k chosen from te exiting profile then menus information present in Ng selected polie wil ba displapad in the Ines views Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 4 Menu Section Page 8 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 4 The Default Menu option appears initially To choose an existing menu click the Choose Menu radio button Click Browse to select an existing menu an XML file containing menu information UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Choon a AML file containing kenus and Manu States information Menu Type Sale Meru Typa O Delauk Meru Choose Menu Menu DAPioien KFE Deskop EngihPrelieam Bowe In case of csealing a new profile user could select the Defsult menu o choose the mena mam existing Profile HL file conbaining the
373. n German and Spanish The language entry resides in the UCAClient reg Please ensure that the languages selected from MSP for the client and sever selected during the installation from install shield match 12 4 CAb0 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Staging Process for a CA50 The following steps explain how to stage the CA50 so that it enables the MSP allows universal conditions contains persistent network settings relay server settings UCA client settings and warm boot the device Upon reboot the UCAClient application launches since its UCA settings are stored in the registry 1 Creating the Agent 30 settings definition In a Web browser go to hitp server ip msp web to log in to an MSP server Select the Library tab Select the Settings tab Select the Create button Select the Agent 30 setting xml Enter Enable30 for the name field Select the Next button Enter Enable 30 Agent in the description field Enter Enable30 for the name field Set the schedule interval to a time that is applicable to your environment This time represents how often the MSP agent checks for MSP downloads MSP jobs It is recommended to check in every 15 minutes Set the update discovery document interval Force regDoc Uploads to a time that is applicable to your environment It is suggested to set this to a value of 32 so that the discovery document is sent back to the MSP server every 8 hours 32 15 minutes if it changed
374. n turns off Press the right soft key to go back to the main NLed screen UCA NLedTest continues on the next page 4 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCA NLedTest 13 On the main NLed screen scroll to VIBRATOR and press Scan Select to display the continued VIBRATOR screen VIBRATOR ON OFF BLINK 14 Scroll to ON and press Scan Select The vibrator motor turns on 15 Scroll to OFF and press Scan Select The vibrator motor turns off 16 Scroll to BLINK and press Scan Select The vibrator motor turns on and off five times then turns off 17 Press the right soft key to go back to the main NLed screen CA50 Modes of Operation 4 27 Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCAPing This application can be used to verify that the device can reach another device and record the response time To ping another device from your CA50 device e On the CA Menu scroll to select Programs gt UCAPing The application executes and the UCAPing Version screen displays for 2 seconds UCAPing V X X 1 The Ping IP Address Entry screen follows the Version screen all Ping f all Ping AN AN 57235020246 157235020249 Vv Vv Next Exit Next a Enter the IP address of the device to ping by using the Up and Down arrows to modify a number and the left soft key to move t
375. n Wav laser wav QUIETMODE Put the device on Do not disturb SetDND S L QUIETMODE Y mode See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about WT channels and modes POWEROFF PowerOff S L POWEROFF REBOOT Reboot S L REBOOT ABOUT About S L About SETBKLTLVL SetBkLT S L SetBkitLvl 0 SETBKLT TIMEOUT Set backlight timeout value BkLT Time S L SetBkltTimeout 2 Note 0 means backlight is always on J 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table J 3 Commands Usage in Notification Messages Continued Command Name Description Usage with Left and Right Soft Keys EXITCLIENT Exit the UCAClient and go to the Exit S L ExitClient Shell Menu DOWNLOADFILES Initiate download of files DwndFls S L DOWNLOADFILES mentioned in the profile section lt DownloadFiles gt See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 for more information DELETEALLDOWNLO Delete all files on the device in DelFiles S L DELETEALLDOWNLOADEDFILES ADEDFILES the download location NApplicationNDownload See User Profile Elements on page 7 4 for more information Numerics 1D bar codes 0 cee 4 15 DU Kama paa maga DENG Se beere es anaes 4 29 D 16 A accessories CADDIES AAP AA B 12 PIOU amma 50a oe ees 6444585 54 6 2 B 2 eight slot battery charger B 2 B 8 eight slot CA50 charging cradle B 2 B 3 IAVIVANG 25 dei ou cca wee 6 os oe hee hee B 2 mounting brackets B 13 B 15 server soft
376. n a user presses Talk the mode switches to Single Channel mode on the last Listen Talk channel heard e Do not disturb Mode e Supports an extended period of time when a user wants needs to be unreachable but is still able to use the business application This may be required when a user takes a break or is given a task that does not require the communication feature e In this mode the device does not receive any notifications or incoming walkie talkie communication 7 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide IP Address The multicast IP address to which the devices send receive the WI messages All the devices in the same subnet must subscribe to the same multicast IP address so they can listen and talk to other devices on the subnet Port The base port on which the device receives the text messages All the other WT voice message channels listen on port numbers relative to this port Channel increment Defines how the WT channels are incremented relative to the base multicast address or base port If the increment type is set to port the device listens on the port number next to the base port number for Channel 1 For example if the base port is 5000 If the channel increment type is set to port the device listens on port 5001 for Channel 1 port 5003 for Channel 3 etc Note that the device subscribes to only one Multicast IP address The device sends the WT messages to the same multicast address base multicast
377. n be used and the Select S key allows the user to submit the current selection The business application developer can define a soft Cancel key so the user can cancel the selected element Access to Communication Options and the Web Application The lt MenuStates gt area of the XML profile and the Web application together define the key definitions for the user experience The XML profile definitions typically provide access to the communications options change walkie talkie channel access phone book hang up phone call etc and links to Web applications The Web application defines keys for use during a Web based business application Design Considerations Table 10 3 Design Considerations Design Option Whether users should have access to the phone and walkie talkie settings while they are running Web based business applications Whether users should have access to Web based business applications during a phone call Functionality There are two soft keys available The business application and communication functionality must share these keys so ensure the business application does not define both soft keys or access to the communication options is unavailable If a business application screen is a simple Yes or No question presented to the user you can define both soft keys for that screen If the business application is very simple and does not define any keys spread the communication options across both keys for easy
378. n boxes to enter the quantity S Windowsce B 34 File Zoom Tools Help Figure l 4 Enter a Quantity Sample HTML Code Add Spin Boxes Post Quantity to Server Mi WindowscE DEX File Zoom Tools Help Pepsi KA tons 15 Ny Peek Cancel Figure l 5 Enter a Quantity Using Spin Boxes lt body gt lt form method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx gt lt input type submit id spinbox name USERID SpinBoxLabel Pepsi Cartons SpinBoxLabelPos beforespinbox ShowArrows no SpinBoxLine 2 SpinBoxMaskDigit value LeftBtnLbl Next RightBtnlbl Cancel gt lt form gt lt body gt CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide The code below includes a default value for the Spin box lt input type submit id spinbox name USERID SpinBoxLabel Pepsi Cartons SpinBoxLabelPos beforespinbox ShowArrows no SpinBoxLine 2 SpinBoxMaskDigit value SpinBoxDefault 15 LeftBtnLbl Next RightBtnLbl Cancel gt Adding and Enlarging Images Fonts Sample HTML Code Enlarge Font Size Mi WindowscE 2 G x O 88 Windowsce B X File Zoom Tools Help File Zoom Tools Help Figure l 6 Enlarged Font Sample Code 1 lt body gt lt form name formi method get action http 192 168 7 138 motorola uca samples UCASampleApp exitapplication aspx TO form1 gt lt text align center style font 14px
379. n occurred while getting parameter info for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58066 An exception occurred while getting parameter info for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58137 A data layer exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 17 Notification Errors Continued Error Code Description 58138 An exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58163 An Argument exception occurred while processing notification fields for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58164 An exception occurred while processing notification fields for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58193 An Argument exception occurred while getting a user ip address destination for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event log for more details 58194 An exception occurred while getting a user ip address destination for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event log for more details 58233 An Argument exception occurred while getting an IP address destination for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58234 An exception occurred while getting an IP address destination for an asynchronous message Refer to the NT E
380. n page 4 36 By Departments 1 To view departments in the phone book press the Up or Down keys to scroll the Phone Book menu Figure 4 17 B and Select Last Names The Departments menu displays an alphabetical scrollable list of Departments in the store with users who are currently logged in ll Depts all Bath Electrical Garden Back Figure 4 22 Departments Menu 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select a Department All users currently logged in within the selected department are listed wll Depts ail Charles D Franklin E Jones B Back Figure 4 23 Last Names Menu 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select the name to call A voice unicast call connects see Voice Unicast Calls on page 4 36 CA50 Modes of Operation 4 45 Making a Voice Unicast Call To make a call browse for extensions names and or departments in the phone book The UCA server dynamically managed phone book downloaded at the initiation of each voice call displays only logged in users Additional phone book entries see Additional Phonebook Entries on page 9 14 those not UCA based e g a wired land line phone are always displayed The CA50 displays the name of the person called throughout the active call When the call connects the caller hears a ringing sound through the receiver While the call is in progress the CA50 displays the caller ID and a call timer Call options such as
381. n the UCA server 1 Click the Profile Management tab 2 Select an ID base profile association number in the list under the D column The Profile Association Detail window displays Profile Management Profile Associations gt Profile Association Detail Profile Associations P osete ta 1 Profile Association Detail ID 1 Template File bpaSales xml Description BPA 1 Sales Role Sales Group Figure 9 27 Profile Association Detail Window 3 Click Edit The Edit Profile Association window displays Profile Management Profile Associations gt Profile Association Detail gt Edit Profile Association Profile Associations 1 Profile Association Details ID Template File bpaSales xml Description BPA 1 Sales Role Sales yv Group none Save Cancel Figure 9 28 Edit Associated Base Profile Window UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 29 4 Enter a new description in the Description text box select a role and group from the drop down list menus as needed 5 Click Save to change the associated base profile or Cancel to terminate the session Deleting Associated Base Profiles See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting entries in the UCA server 9 30 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Roles and Groups Tab View Click the Roles and Groups tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI wind
382. n the format 00 15 70 XX XX XX If there is no MAC for the WLAN adaptor there is a problem communicating with the radio al mac ff 00 15 70 80 F5 5 7 00 00 00 00 00 00 Mext Exit J IMPORTANT Note The CA50 must be used for RF site surveys that require optimization of CA50 voice communications For these sites the CA50 is the only acceptable survey tool Other mobile devices such as an MC50 do not produce an equivalent signal strength indication as displayed on the CA50 e wlan screen RF Site Survey Tool Displays the active profile and monitors RF signal strength The signal strength displaying the RSSI value in dB is updated every few seconds A user can walk from area to area with the device and the display updates show the coverage in different areas ul wlan 96 f Booooood 60 dBm Sig Qual 4 Heat Exit CA50 Modes of Operation 4 23 Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description UCA Sys Info To access UCA Sys Info screens continued 1 On the CA Menu scroll to select Programs gt UCA Sys Info The application executes and displays the Mem screen 26500 TOTAL RAM 18080 AVAIL RAM 29120 AVAIL VIRT Next Evil 2 Press the left soft key to display the next screen Batt screen 3 Continue pressing left soft key to scroll through all the UCA Sys Info screens 4 Press the right soft key to exit UCA Sys Info 4 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Table 4
383. n the spin box is rendered on the browser window This is explained in more detail in the SpinBoxMaskDigit explanation LeftBtnLbl The contents of this attribute represents the label of the left soft key It defaults with the label next The function of the key allows the user to move from each digit by moving one to the right It wraps back to the first editable digit when the left soft key is pressed and the last editable digit has focus RightBtnLbl The contents of this attribute represents the label of the right soft key It defaults with the label Cancel The right soft key cancels the spin box and posts an empty string as the value portion of the name value pair for this input element CA50 Business Application Development 10 11 Table 10 2 HTML Elements Contained in the Body Element Continued Element lt input type Command name PHNPLACECALL options 1 192 168 0 22 1720 012345 id RightSoftkey value Expert gt Description This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to press to place a phone call based on the attributes for the Command input type Type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHNPLACECALL PHNPLACECALL is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to dial the string found
384. name and price is delivered back to the device and displayed see Figure 4 50 If the item lookup is unsuccessful the server returns an tem Not Found message and the decoded bar code content to the device for display see Figure 4 51 3 10 52 ON 515 95 Pedestal sink white Exit Figure 4 50 Successful Decode Item Lookup ail 3 10 52 Ca Not found 123456 78901234 96789012367 Exit Figure 4 51 Unsuccessful Decode ltem Lookup Users can perform scan functions at the desktop in a business application or while on a voice unicast call Voice Unicast Calls on page 4 36 Accessing the Menu and Phone Book in the Business Application If the business application uses an Exit option via soft keys press the appropriate soft key to exit the business application and return to the desktop The business application developer can modify the XML profiles to provide soft key options for Menu and Phn Bk for the user to access these options The business application developer can use a meta refresh HTML tag to send the application back to a prior screen after a period of time specified in the tag CA50 Modes of Operation 4 55 Answering an Incoming Voice Unicast Call in a Business Application J NOTE The following steps include instructions to answer a voice unicast call from an items detail screen that is part of the sample item lookup application These instructions apply to any busin
385. ndow Enter changes as needed 5 Click Save to save the edits or Cancel to terminate the session Deleting Phone Extensions See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting phone extensions 9 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Device User Accounts Tab View Click the Device User Accounts tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the view The Device User Accounts tab has two views e Recent Users Figure 9 18 e All Users Figure 9 19 Each view contains all information about users defined in the UCA server To toggle between views click on a tab Recent Users and or All Users Recent Users Recent Users view displays the First Last Name External User ID Role Login Group Assigned Phone Extension User Login and Activity Logs of users recently seen by the UCA server In this view create edit and delete users Device User Accounts Recent Users Recent Users All Users Returned 2 results Find First Mame First Hame Last Hame External UserlD Role Login Group User Status Phone Extension Last log in Last activity Steve Nielsen 1100 Sales Bath Logged In 220 alala TASNAD aaa 30 MG 2009 11 56 45 3219 2005 11 58 10 Luther Melson 1101 Sales Bath Logged In 209 Ah Figure 9 18 Recent Users View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 19 All Users All Users view displays the First Last Name Common Name External User ID Role and Stat
386. ne phone are always displayed The UCA server supports the following IP PBX protocols e H 323 e Cisco s SCCP Skinny Call Control Protocol for integration of Cisco Cell Manager versions 4 and 5 e Avaya s SIP Session Initiated Protocol The following H 323 IP PBX is certified to work with the CA50 e Avaya Communication Manager 5 0 using the H 323 protocol The following IP PBXs have been tested to work with the CA50 e Avaya SIP support though the Avaya SIP Enablement Service SES version 5 0 e Avaya H 323 Distributed Office V 1 1 2 and 1 2 e Cisco Call Manager Version 5 1 Is the UCA server required to enable a CA50 to communicate through an IP PBX The answer depends on where the call originates 4 38 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide e The IP PBX does not require UCA server involvement to route a call to a CA50 NOTE The specifics of the IP PBX are entered into the UCA server so they can be downloaded and V programmed into a CA50 at login enabling the CA50 to contact and register with the IP PBX After registration is complete a PBX based call can be routed to a CA50 e The UCA server is required to place a call from a CA50 In order to place a call the CA50 must access and use a dynamically accessed phone book located on the UCA server J NOTE When the phone book is previously viewed from a CA50 any portion of the phone book viewed from the CA50 and only this portion of the phone book is cached
387. nfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store Number rolelnfo Role Information info class that describes the organizational role ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log Related Classes public class RoleInfo public RoleInfo string RoleToken string RoleName string RoleExtID UCA Server Optional APIs 11 23 Rolelnfo Class Members Table 11 7 Rolelnfo Class Members Class Member Description Role Token Role ID Must be unique RoleName Role name for display purpos es RoleExtID Role number RemoveRole This method removes a role from the UCA system The roles are removed from the B Roles table int RemoveRole string sStoreNumber string sRoleToken string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSSiatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store number sRole Token Role ID Identifier for the Role ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when u
388. ng Deployment Chaka naaa NE NGA NANA AA 2 1 2 2 13 2 Sel OF tee Pro BUC OI AA AA AA AA AA AT AA E 1 Deployment Example UCA Server Install and Basic User Setup maaasar AA AA aa baa NGA a D 1 CA50 Hardware Physical Key GA deuseccatuesaocasenns 3 2 4 7 4 19 Vol me Control Mute NOO NGO Cham NAA AA eee eee AA 3 2 4 7 4 13 CA50 Configuration Staging Deploying Reboot DEVICES ACCESS the CA IV CI aa eceiets recede terse eee Sateen ene tpent ee udm a cae 3 12 4 17 4 18 Device Staging and Deployment USING MSP ou cece cecscscscscsesesesesesavssecacsesesssesesasasasacsesesesesesesasacecsesesees 3 12 4 19 12 1 12 2 D 16 F 1 XML Profile Configures CA50 when Downloaded from Server ccccccscscsessssscececscscscsssesesesesesavasasassesesessseavaasacssseseiesesecacatataeseeesees 7 1 D 6 Battery Management Recommendations ou ccccscscscececseseseecsssesavssesesesassesesavassesesecscsesesacessesesacssseececsesesavaes 3 6 3 9 4 4 A 1 B 8 B 12 Determining version miormation Jo Cene CUC AA caesar aes eee deca ese eond ceases 4 7 4 29 Ee AA 5 1 6 2 D 1 nstaling Uninstalling server 5 ON WANG saaan hangan E ESE EE ET ESE ween ana 6 10 6 47 6 45 e Server Hardware Software Requirements cccccccccsssssesssssscecsesesesesesesssacecassescsesesesasasasescacsssesesesesesssesasasacasisecsesesesecacscseseeesees 6 7 e Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance 111701701XXQ XXX amma 6 45 Web Console
389. ng bracket sold separately Spare Battery Kit Single battery or 8 battery kits available n a Miscellaneous Accessories Earbud A monaural earbud with microphone can be attached to the CA50 for telephony VoIP or audio playback applications Upon insertion of an earbud jack the CA50 automatically disables its internal soeaker microphone and receiver The CA50 is compatible with standard off the shelf earbuds Lanyard with clip Used to wear the CA50 around user s neck B 11 Server software The UCA server software uses a database to store the data n a for configuring maintaining and tracking CA5Os Soft Pouch Optional carrying case for the CA50 p n 11 104787 01R n a Wall mount bracket Available for wall mounting the multi slot device charger and B 13 spare battery charger Accessories B 3 Eight Slot CA50 Charging Cradle This section describes how to set up and use an eight slot cradle with the device J NOTE 1 Only genuine Motorola batteries p n 82 83172 01 should be used with CA50 devices and charging accessories 2 Use only an approved power supply KT 14000 148R output rated 12 Vdc and minimum 3 3 A with AC line cord 23844 00 00 The power supply is certified to EN60950 1 with SELV outputs Use of an alternative power supply invalidates any approval given to this device and may be dangerous The eight slot CA50 charging cradle Provides 5 1 VDC power for operating the device e Charges the CA50 batter
390. ng section determines the levels of logging for various device functions such as Walkie Talkie Phone Agent Browser and Scanner or whether to turn logging off for each of these UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile caging Infomation Collection Interval Sec 60 a Walkie Takie Error Devica Phone Err Wakie Takie F Incoming Cal Dugong Call 7 Ewe o o o oo He Hew Profis Creation Figure 8 16 Logging 8 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 8 6 Logging Settings Field Description Off No logging Info Logs high level information such as device and server IP addresses Error Logs all error messages along with information messages Warn Logs information error and warning messages Debug Logs all messages Device Settings This section captures the device settings such as backlight and RF sample time UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Device Configuration AC Backlght On Key Press s Enable Backlight AC Backlght Timeout Sec E p Backlight On Key Press on 40 Powe Check Interval 562 Enable Beep On Low Balleny 4 Min Simal Sirengih Enable Backlight On Motif Mag 43 AF Sample Time Sec AEC For Headset Good AF Sample Tiweshold Bad RF Semple Thiezhold La a gt Backlignl T meatier Becklignt Level Battery Been Inberval Sec halat Low Batha Wiar File Hott Msg Wibrabe Cycle Court ii Nott Msg Wisible Cycle Court
391. nicating with the radio e Use the left soft key Next to display the MAC screen to see if there is a MAC for the radio If the IP is 0 0 0 0 the radio cannot connect to an AP If the IP is 0 0 0 0 verify that the Active Profile is correct and the AP is within range 3 Verify that the country code of the AP matches the country code of the wireless profile The 802 11d feature is enabled by default and prevents a connection to an AP with a different country code or with no country code Keys pressed on the CA50 do not operate From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select to select Programs gt UCA KeyCheck Press the keys on the CA50 to see if a key code is generated by every key press If key codes are not generated contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support see Service Information on page xxi LEDs do not light or vibrator motor does From the CA Menu use the Up and Down arrow keys and press Scan Select not turn on to select Programs gt UCA NLedTest Test the red and green LEDs and the vibrator motor by selecting each option If LEDs and the vibrator motor are not operable contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support see Service Information on page xxi Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 13 UCA Server System Error Code Number Index Client Generated Error Messages Table 14 6 below describes the five sets of client generated error messages Table 14 6 Clien
392. ninstall you are returned to the Add or Remove Programs screen 1 IMPORTANT Option A If you are reloading the same version of the UCA server continue to Actions 2 and 3 Option B If you are upgrading the UCA server to a newer version STOP HERE the uninstall process is complete Action 2 Uninstalling the UCA Database Component Instance of the SOL Server 2005 To uninstall only the UCA database engine instance without removing any other SQL instances 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 On the Add or Remove Programs window select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and click REMOVE 3 A dialog displays showing all installed SQL Server 2005 instances J NOTE lf this screen does not appear cancel out of the un install and repeat Step 2 but select REMOVE Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Uninstall Component Selection Select SOL Server 2005 components to uninstall To uninstall existing components select components to remove and click Next Remove SOL Server 2005 instance components Select an instance r 1 I I 1 E SQLESPRESS Database Engine ROJUCA Database Engine Remove SOL Server 2005 common components E workstation Components Figure 6 69 UCA Database Engine Uninstall Click the radio button to select the instance labeled UCA Database Engine J NOTE 1 Do not select remove any other SQL Server 2005 instances that may be present For example in Figure 6 69 do not
393. nsion 4 50 Settings scan epee mses ae AA RE GA 4 28 from any extension within group department 4 51 SSCS ccc we Sree eee is we ae os a hon ee eee A 2 troubleshooting 000 eee eee 4 52 supported code types C 2 RF network troubleshooting 14 6 14 7 14 11 ACV o ee a nang Or Gan Ea de wd 3 10 wireless 20 eee 6 58 connectivity a aa a oie ewe de Soa oe WAG WG B 4 wireless scanning 00 c eee eee eee 1 2 infrastructure 2 0 eee 12 1 scanning See data capture lost connection ee ee 4 12 scansamp app 1 eee ee 4 19 14 11 maximizing runtime 000085 3 10 SCOP ccc ee eee ees 4 37 4 38 4 39 6 49 optimization for walkie talkie 4 0 aag TR ee alat 6 50 6 51 7 9 9 8 Sa AA e PA 9 9 11 15 14 23 14 25 ile AA ds wr eave ee ee 7 8 screen indications 0000 cece ee eee 4 12 RF network connectivity 00e eee B 7 search server GUI 0 0000 eee eee 9 52 ring tONe CA 3 eek Bobo ada ack Spt 7 16 security roles and groups server passwords 6 18 6 40 groups wireless protocols 4 14 A 2 creating AA AA 9 31 server deleting a 9 33 capabilities when server is offline 6 58 CANINO ee pro aa Ng 9 32 demo solution 00000 ee 12 1 E 1 OVEIVIEW 2 a 9 30 deployment example D 1 Index 8 CA
394. nsole User Passwords System Settings Console Users Tools 1 General User Details First Name Last Name User ID Password Confirm Password Save Cancel Figure 9 49 Edit Console User Passwords Window 4 Enter the new password into the Password text box 5 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password text box 6 Click Save to change the password or Click Cancel to terminate the session Deleting a Console User See Delete Utility on page 9 52 for information about deleting entries in the UCA server Tools Tools present two options to a console user e MSP Staging This is a link to MSP Stage After setting the system setting System Tools Stage to point to MSP stage in your environment this link can be used for quick access to the Motorola MSP Stage product e Debug Trace Log Utilities Through the Tools tab the console user can export purge and export purge the debug trace log found in the UCA database The trace logs are exported to the directory specified in the System Setting System Maintenance DB Export Path The trace files are exported in CSV format for easy loading into Microsoft Excel 9 48 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide To access Tools 1 Click the System Management tab gt Tools tab The Tools window displays System Management Tools System Settings Console Users Tools 1 MSP Staging Link Stage Z Debug Trace Logs Exp
395. nt Settings Alerts Menus Menu States 4 a Choose New Menus Browse E Menus Client Command Menu Saleshenu Menu Title Footwear Options 5 alesApphlenu Fhn Ek FhoneB ook Command 5etChannet 3 Moma 77 Appins Applications Channels Sales T Channels Front End Settings Settings Ring Tone RingTone Options DeskCallActive Options SppCallctve OnCall Desk Quiet Backlight Backlight Bkelgt Tmr BacklightT imer E F E H F H F Help C Program Files Motorolajwcd ServertProFiles Footwear sml Figure D 7 WT Settings Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 11 Step 6 Populate the UCA Server Database with 2 Users User information such as Roles Groups Group Phone Extensions Base XML Profile Association Name and ExternalUser ID Barcode Login are added to the UCA server databases in the UCA server Web Console GUI To add user information 1 Login to the UCA server Web Console GUI Go to http localhost Motorola UCA UCAConsole Login aspx e Enter Username admin e Enter Password admin 2 Create a ShoeSales Role Roles and Groups Roles gt Role Create Groupz 1 Role Details Role ID must be unique hoeSales Hame Shoe Sales Role Humber Figure D 8 Create a Role 3 Create a Footwear Group Roles and Groups e Click e Click D 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Groups gt
396. ntenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 33 Table 14 22 Console Users Errors Continued Error Code Description 62331 An exception occurred while attempting to update console user info Refer to the NT Event log for more details 62361 A data layer exception occurred while setting a console user s pin 62362 The specified user was not found in the database 62363 Database error occurred while attempting to set a console user s pin 62391 Import of users to CSV failed 62392 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to import user data to CSV format 62393 An exception occurred while attempting to import user data to CSV format Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Console Status Data Table 14 23 Console Status Data Errors Error Code Description 72511 Exception occurred while checking if DB maintenance is due Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72521 Exception occurred while getting last DB maintenance timestamp Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72531 Exception occurred while adding last DB maintenance record Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72541 Exception occurred while updating last DB maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72551 Exception occurred while removing record of last DB maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 72571 Exception occurred while getting all DB maintenance records Refer to the NT Event Log for more details
397. nue Figure 10 3 Both Soft Keys Defined HTML for Web Application Defining Both Soft Keys lt html xmlns http www w3 org 1999 xhtml gt lt head gt lt title gt Dup Login Page lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt form name form2 method post action ConfirmDuplicateLogin aspx userName 10017319 amp sStoreNumber 0002 id form2 gt lt font FACE courier size 2 gt lt b gt User Already lt b gt lt br gt lt b gt logged in lt b gt lt br gt lt b gt Continue lt b gt lt font gt lt input type submit name btn id RightSoftKey value No gt lt input type submit name btn id LeftSoftKey value Yes gt lt input type hidden name userName value 10017319 gt lt input type hidden name sStoreNumber value 0002 gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt 10 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Business Applications and their Extensions During the execution of a Web based business application it may be necessary to interface with the UCA server to query user information or status This functionality is provided through the Business Application Extensions This Web service exposes methods that can be called from a Web application Business Application Extensions Web Service In the default installation the business application extensions are located at http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA Client BAP
398. o UPC A False disables conversion of UPC EO bar codes to upca Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables reporting of the check digit False disables reporting of the check digit PREAMBLE NON E no preamble PREAMBLE SYST EM CHAR system character preamble PREAMBLE COU NTRY AND SYST EM CHARS both system and country code preamble True enables conversion of UPC E1 bar codes to UPC A False disables conversion of UPC E1 bar codes to UPC A Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder Example lt META HT TP Equiv upce0 convertt oupca Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce1 Content enabled gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce 1 reportch eckdigit Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce1 preambl e Content PREAMBLE_COU NTRY_AND_SYSTEM_CHA RS gt lt META HTTP Equiv upce1 convertt oupca Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv upca Content enabled gt C 9 C 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Table C 1 Custom Meta Tags Continued Symbology Property Description Custom Tags Parameters Example lt META HT TP Equiv upca preamble content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv upca preamble upca preamble PREAMBLE_NON E no preamble PREAMBLE SYST EM CHAR system character preamble PREAMBLE COU NTRY AND SYST EM CHARS both system and coun
399. oCal AcvCabloCall AcXTTHoCall Tore Auto Selection PTTMoCall MoiNaCal MotiCalbclive AppAletCaAive VWibrele Indication Hore Wisble Indicator None Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 23 NotifNoCall There are three alert resources 1 Tone A tone plays based on information from either the data within the notification message or from the profile data The device checks if the notification message has data to play the tone and plays the tone if the data is available If the notification message has no data for tone the user profile is checked for the information If the profile contains valid tone attribute information associated with NotifNoCall the tone plays The information in the notification takes precedence over the profile XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 19 2 LED The LED flashes based on information from either the data within the notification message or from the user profile The device checks if the notification message has the visible indicator data If data is available the LED flashes If the notification message has no data for the visible indicator the user profile is checked for the information If the profile contains the visible indicator information associated with NotifNoCall the corresponding LED flashes The information in the notification takes precedence over the profile 3 Vibrate The device vibrates based on information from either the data within the notification mes
400. ode add menu option 00 000 eee I 2 add timer to indicators I 4 add user infoto HTTP header I 6 assign default value to spin box I 7 download delete files I 5 enable backlight 0000005 I 5 launch app on startup l 3 set HTML page title l 4 sending text and audio 11 26 troubleshooting scanner 14 11 using the scanner 10 6 10 8 vibrate device eee 10 7 C CA menu ACCCSS AA AA 4 9 accessing when app loaded 4 18 A DOOU PA PN 4 4 Cold DOOL AA 4 17 configuration using rapid deployment F 3 definition 2 0 0 0 cc eee 3 12 she gered eaaa owed to we ee oe 3 11 eee AA 4 19 redeployment aa 4 2 sleep mode ees 4 8 sleep mode selection 3 13 text configuration using rapid deployment F 1 warm boot 00 eee eee eee 4 8 4 17 CADIE oere ee a AG B 12 cables communication setup B 12 call park Xa a AG AGA AA nA Na 4 42 4 47 call retrieve 0 ee 4 50 Cal eera a gh Sask wae eee eae eae eae ee dee 4 8 answering a voice call 4 45 initiating walkie talkie activity 4 34 making a voice call 4 45 parking a voice call 4 47 PEX E Ad wear ABA AA MAN Kara ad ae 4 37 re
401. odes for the CA50 To create RD bar codes for the CA50 in the Staging Profiles window 1 2 3 Click the Staging tab Click Staging Profiles Under Profile ID on the CA50 Stage line click Create under Barcode On the Generate RD Barcode Sheets pop up window select Linear for barcode type and click Generate to generate the barcodes D 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 10 Deploy CA50s Prepare the CA50 Insert a charged battery into the device see page 3 4 3 8 Deploy CA50s at the Site Location Warm boot to CA Menu see Performing a Warm Boot on page 4 17 To go to CA Menu press and hold the left soft key Launch the Rapid Deployment Client on the CA50 from the CA50 Menu see CA Menu on page 3 12 Scan the RD bar codes created in step Step 7 Generate Employee Login Bar Codes on page D 15 The CA50 device is ready to use Press OK to continue Validate that the CA50 was Deployed Properly M From the CA Menu use the Up and Down keys to scroll and select Warm Boot to boot the CA50 NOTE To automate the warm boot of the device and automatically launch the UCA client application see page 12 2 Wireless signal strength bars appear in the upper left corner of the CA50 display This shows connectivity The UCA client application on the CA50 launches and negotiates registers with UCA server The CA50 displays Scan bar code to log in S Scan bar code to log in Exit
402. oes not apply to SCCP if the registration succeeds however the call manager does not return the number that was expected PhoneRegistrationRetryInterval is the time in seconds between retries The value must be greater than or equal to zero NewPhoneRegistrationRetryCount specifies the number of times the client should request a new number when an attempt to register with a prior number fails based on the PhoneRegistrationRetryCount NotifMsg VibrateCycleCount specifies the number of times the device should vibrate on receipt of notification message NotifMsg VisibleCycleCount specifies the number of times the device should show a visible indication on receipt of notification message AECForHeadset enables echo cancellation for the headset mode when selected By default this option is disabled This parameter is applied only to the headset mode and it is enabled for the handset at all times Alerts Use the alerts to configure device alerts for events The indication types are defined as Tone played Visible indicator LEDs lit in different colors Blinking the LEDs Vibrate Indicator For example NotifCallActive setting controls as what kind of alert is given to the user when a notification is sent to the user and the user is in an active call It defines what kind of tone should be played whether LED should blink or not If so which LED should blink and how fast Also controls whether the device should vibrate or not and if so ho
403. of day in hh mm format default 12 hour clock 10 52 On a menu phone book or business application screen a title displays The title is one to four characters in length If no title is available the default is time of day 4 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 1 CA50 Display Icons CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Continued Icon Description Battery Strength Battery Strengths from left RET a e Battery is fully charged 100 75 charge remains e 75 50 charge remains e 50 25 charge remains e 25 10 charge remains e 10 no charge remains e When the capacity of the battery reaches this level the battery icon blinks and an error tone sounds once every minute 4 AC Power Battery is charging 2 Battery capacity is unknown On USB Battery Installed pit On USB No Battery Installed AC Power No Battery Installed AC Power Charge Complete AC Power Too Cold to Charge 1 AC Power Too Hot to Charge AC Power Charger Fault CA50 Modes of Operation 4 7 CA50 Keys Actions and Features Table 4 2 CA50 Key Functionality Device Actions and Features Key Action Feature Description KEYS Soft Keys Scan Select S key Front Application Key Walkie Talkie Side Application Key Walkie Talkie Up and Down Arrow Keys Volume Keys Mute Key Left and right soft key functions are identified by the screen display
404. of what gets logged at the component level The higher the log level the more log messages get printed out These entries reside in UCAClient reg The WebServiceResponse Timeout entry informs the CA50 client application how long to wait for a response from the server in seconds when attempting to make a Web Service call The WebSericeTimeBeforeWarning is the amount of time to wait before displaying its Waiting For Server screen when waiting for a response from a Web service call This entry resides in UCAClient reg The WebSericeTimeBeforeWarning is the amount of time to wait before displaying its Waiting For Server or Waiting for Web Server screen when waiting for a response from a Web service call or Web server respectfully This entry resides in UCAClient reg The LocalProfileFile entry is used if a profile is created and stored on the device so that the CA50 client application can run without a UCA server However the profile would have to be specifically made to run without the UCA server This may be useful if the user only wishes to use the walkie talkie and business applications This entry resides in UCAClient reg The LogFileLocation entry is used to inform the CA50 client application where to write the log file if logging is enabled This entry resides in UCAClient reg The language entry informs the CA50 client application which language the strings on the UCA client are to be shown The supported languages are English French Italia
405. ofileFile application ucaclient bpasales xml When the XML file is found the XML in the file provides the CA50 with enough information so that the device does not required communication with the UCA server XML Profile for Configuration 7 3 XML Profile Layout The XML profile contains a root element of lt XMLProfile gt which is comprised of two elements lt Profile gt and lt Menus gt lt Profile gt Section of the XML Profile The lt Profile gt portion of the XML profile contains several User Profile Elements that set the UCA client configuration settings The lt Profile gt portion of the XML profile is organized into the following categories elements e User e Audio e Phone e Walkie Talkie e DownloadFiles e Desktop e Device Config e Alerts e MetricsLog e DebugLog e Menu States lt Menu gt Section of the XML Profile The lt Menus gt portion of the XML profile defines the static menu pages that the UCA client will display These menus also provide the entry points to business applications and dynamic menu pages such the phone book The lt Menus gt portion of the XML profile is organized as a list of menus it is not organized into categories like the lt Profile gt portion of the XML profile J NOTE The structure of the static menu pages is identical to those used by the dynamic menu pages returned by the server as a result of Web service calls i e the Call Manager Web service 7 4 CA50 UCA Client
406. oft Net 2 0 Framework Click Yes to install the UCA Server Software InstallShield Wizard Nag UCA Server Version 2 0 Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard 2 Extracting UCA Server Version 2 0 msi aag Figure 6 1 nstall UCA Server Software 3 Microsoft Net 2 0 Framework installs This may take several minutes When complete the Welcome window displays Motorola Installation Wizard xi AA UCA Server Software v2 0 Thank you for choosing Motorola for your enterprise mobility solution This installation wizard will guide you through the steps necessary to setup the Motorola UCA Server Softwareon your computer To continue click next InstallShield Figure 6 2 Welcome 4 Click Next on the Welcome window The License Agreement displays Motorola Installation Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully MOTOROLA INC END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Motorola is willing to license its Software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this License Agreement Agreement IMPORTANT READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCTS BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON BELOW YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGRE
407. og off and log on to see the changes Server Error in Motorola UCA UCAConsole Application Exception Details e System NullReferenceException e Object reference not set to an instance of an object One of the reasons for this error to occur is Encrypt bat script did not execute properly during installation Solution 1 Reboot the computer on which UCA Server software was installed 2 Go to C Program Files Motorola UCA Server Utilities 3 Execute Encrypt bat twice Logging File Provided by the UCAClient Application The UCAClient application provides the means to generate a log file called UCAClient txt in case there ever is a need to resolve an issue on the CA50 or on the UCA server The contents of this log file are derived from two sources The first source is the UCAClient reg file which contains log settings that are imported into the CA50 registry The second source is from the XML profile The log settings from the UCAClient reg file are used until a user profile is downloaded at which time the log settings are replaced from the Debug node in the user profile Log Settings in the UCAClient reg File Use ActiveSync with a standard USB Mini DIN cable to access the UCAClient reg and the log file The default log file name is UCAClient txt The log settings contained in the UCAClient reg file are as follows REGEDIT4 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Motorola UcaClient Params LoggingEnabled dword 00000001 WITDebugLevel dword
408. ogging an out going call Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging an out going call Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while logging metrics A data layer exception occurred while logging device metrics Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging device metrics Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while updating a user s DND status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while updating a users DND status Could not add a metrics entry Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while logging DND status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging DND status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Error occurred while logging a user s login status Could not add a metrics entry Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while logging login status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while logging login status Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 30 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 18 Metrics Errors Continued Error Code Description 59163 59164 59165 59193 59194 59195 59264 59265 59291 59331 Groups Error occurred while updating a user s login status Could not add a metrics entry R
409. ogin Devices with unknown status Inactive for gt H 0 hours 3 Database Maintenance Debug Trace Cleanup 3 24 2009 3 00 01 AM MetricsCleanup 3 24 2009 3 00 01 AM Local Users Cleanup 3 24 2009 3 00 01 AM Devices Cleanup 3 24 2009 3 00 01 AM Check Idle Users 3 24 2009 11 33 18 AM Cleanup Call Park Table 4 Software Versions Current Server Version 02 00 05 00 Serial Number Current Installer Version 2 00 0000 Previous Server Version UcaClient Minimum Compatibility mgs 5 Misc Current Location ID 0002 Figure 9 3 Server Status View 9 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Devices Devices view displays a list of devices recently seen by the UCA server Displayed information includes Device ID Serial Number Device model Last Known User ID Last Known User Name User Status Assigned Phone Extension Last Login and Activity Time system Status Devices Server Status Devices Returned 2 results Find Device ID Device ID SH Model Hoge WL Lusili inn Hala User Status Phone Extension Last Login Time kusing pai User ID Hame Ee Time 001570820F2E8 00000000 CASO 2079 user one Logged In 492 AMADOSI ER AE ANA naa AM AM 0015709BD1BE 11111111 CASO 1102 Fred Smith Logged In 200 oo Nia Maa Figure 9 4 Devices View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 7 Phone and Walkie Talkie Tab View Click the Phone and Walkie Talkie tab on the UCA server WebC
410. ogin ID firstName User first name lastName User last name userName User display name Format last name first initial RoleToken Token representing user role e g Manager Sales FrontEnd etc This data is found in the B_ Roles table locExtiD Location ID store number userStatus User status e g Active Suspended Disabled This data is found in the S_UserStatus Type table userPhExtn User phone extension if user is logged into server If not available the value is NA UCA Server Optional APIs 11 31 UserGrouplnfo Class Members Table 11 11 UserGroup nfo Class Members Class Member Description GroupToken Token for the department This data is found in the B_Groups table Rank Group rank Used for presenting multiple groups to a user A rank of 1 displays first in a list IsSelectable Indicates whether or not a group can be selected in a list presented to a user GroupName Display name of a group The WSStatus variable should be examined in cases where the return value from the Web Service indicates a failure public class UCAWebServiceStatus public UCAWebServiceStatus public int returnStatus public string sMessage Table 11 12 UCAWebService Class Members Class Member Description returnStatus Error code sMessage Message describing the error UCAWebService Class Members returnstatus Error Code sMessage Message describing the error 11 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server
411. olume depending on the state of the device Mutes speaker or microphone depending on the state of the device Press the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously to perform warm and cold boots 4 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 2 CA50 Key Functionality Device Actions and Features Continued Key Action Feature Description ACTIONS Boot Warm Use the Up and Down keys and select Warm Boot from the CA Menu or Press and hold the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously for button locations see page 3 2 until a blank screen displays Release the buttons while the red LEDs are flashing This takes approximately 3 seconds See Performing a Warm Boot on page 4 17 for detailed information Boot Cold Remove and re insert the battery or Use the Up and Down keys to select Cold Boot from the CA Menu or Press and hold the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously until the screen displays the characters shown below When these characters display release the Mute and Scan Select S keys Failure to release these keys re initiates a cold boot bata See Performing a Cold Boot on page 4 17 for detailed information Calls Walkie Talkie Press either the side or front Walkie Talkie key Calls Voice Find a name in the phone book on the device and press the Scan Select S key Note The phone book is configurable via the server application Device on Press any key to turn the
412. ommunication 2 Q XX 4 31 Walkie Talkie Functions 4 32 Naming Walkie Talkie Channels cccccccseeececeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesseeseessaeeeeseaeeeees 4 33 Operating Wallet TUS sa mGA AKA NAAAGNAS 4 34 VOCS WIC ASE CANG aa AANGAL NAAN E 4 36 Communication Hierarchy aa 4 36 sanda NOPE CANS ma NA NANG AA AL 4 37 PBX Calle eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ere ee eee 4 37 Voice Unicast Call Functionality PBX Calls vs Direct CA50 to CA50 IP Based Calls aa 4 40 Browsing mie Phone BOOK AA NAA AA AA AA 4 42 Making a Voice Unicast Call X a 4 45 Receiving a Voice UNICAST Call 2a ANA AA 4 45 US Ke aosiaesseetansadenmuved tossed 4 46 pahinga Call aaa aaa AG ALONA E 4 47 Retrieving a Parked Call a 4 50 Park Retrieve Troubleshooting a 4 52 Lore Unica Call ola aaa PAGAN 4 53 Sample Business Application 4 54 Accessing the Menu and Phone Book in the Business Application 4 54 Answering an Incoming Voice Unicast a 4 55 Launching the Sample Business Application While in a Voice Unicast Call 4 56 Accessing Communication Options from a Business Application 4 57 Chapter 5 UCA Client Application on the CA50 UCA Client Application Overview U 11 5 1 Chapter 6 UCA Server ONT gec
413. ommunication Naming Walkie Talkie Channels There are two options for naming walkie talkie channels e Default naming By default all channels are numbered sequentially up to 32 channels Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 32 e Manual naming Channel names can be manually changed in the server application for details see page 7 24 Names can include alpha numeric and special characters _ and are limited to a maximum of 14 16 characters An example of channel naming in store might include channels for a sales associate front end and open channels Channel names are not displayed in the status bar only the channel number displays 4 34 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Operating Walkie Talkie Initiating Walkie Talkie Communication The user can initiate walkie talkie communication on any screen when not in a voice unicast call or in Do not disturb mode 1 Press and hold the Walkie Talkie key see CA50 Front Back Views on page 3 2 2 A short walkie talkie start tone sounds 3 Begin speaking into the microphone 4 To end the call release the Walkie Talkie key Receiving Walkie Talkie Communication The user can receive walkie talkie communication on any screen except when on a voice unicast call or in Do not disturb mode A start tone sounds on the device when the device detects incoming walkie talkie communication and a message plays through the speaker To respond the use
414. on Mobile Unit Access Contral Figure E 5 WLAN1 Security Encryption Methods CO WEP 64 40 bit key WEP Key Settings Co WEP 128 104 bit key O KeyGuard keyguard Settings CO VWWRANPA TEIP WIPANNPA TKIP Se O WPAZCCMP 802 111 WPA Z CCMP Settings ab No Encryption _ Enable IP Filtering IP Filtering Allow access for all Mobile Units except Start MAC End MAC CA Du ndo Chang BE Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 9 7 On the left side of the window under Network Configuration select Access Ports gt 802 11 a b g Defaults gt Beacon Settings to set DTIM values of 2 aes Network Configuration i LAN Le subnet i VLAN p KB WAN eh Wireless bpi WLAN Lf WANT Security Q Wireless Gas 802 11b g Defaults Radio Settings Advanced Properties Beacon Settings Ed ipot Short Preamble reshold 2341 bytes Beacon Settings Beacon Settings Beacon Interval 100 K US Cee Access Parts BSSIO OTIM Period in Beacons Ugh 802 11 b g Defau Ugh 802 1 Port Authe igh AP BG tah APS Al Detector Access T Unadopted Rogue AP Detection wen HotSpot T pag Firewall 2 Port Config versity Full Diversity a4 undo Changes Figure E 6 Beacon Settings e Change DTIM Per BSSID to 2 e Click OK Click Apply 8 On the left side of the window under Network Configuration select Wi
415. on For a list of CA Menu options see Table 4 6 on page 4 19 To access the CA Menu see Accessing the CA Menu on page 4 18 Getting Started 3 13 Sleep Mode J NOTE When in sleep mode CA50 power consumption is significantly reduced but not eliminated The CA50 can remain out of a charger for approximately 48 hours before requiring a recharge Placing the CA50 into sleep mode prevents the occurrence of communications e g OS upgrades phone book updates etc If the device is in sleep mode and placed in the cradle the device wakes up and logs off the user To place the CA50 device in sleep mode e Select Sleep mode from the CA Menu see CA Menu Options on page 4 19 or e On the UCA client application desktop press the left soft key to display the UCA client application desktop menu defined by the user profile and the current menu state Use the Up and Down keys to select Sleep mode wll 3 10 52 mT wall Menu mT WT channels First name L Key lock x123 Menu Phn Bk Back Figure 3 7 Desktop Display UCA Client Application Desktop Menu e The Sleep mode confirmation window displays all 10 52 im Power off Yes No Figure 3 8 S eeo Mode Confirmation Display e Press the left soft key to select Yes to turn off the screen and radio and put the device into sleep mode e Press the right soft key to select No to avoid sleep mode and return to the prior screen Power Off Remo
416. on any available extension within group department 4 48 troubleshooting 000 cece eee 4 52 passwords for server security 6 57 for validating server install 6 45 installing UCA server software 6 13 6 21 6 34 server lOg N a a AG AN aa a BUGA 6 45 server security eee ees 6 54 strong 6 13 6 21 6 22 6 34 6 35 strong definition 6 13 6 21 6 34 system administrator 6 13 6 21 6 34 PBX and voice call 1 3 6 2 6 5 call park Ca an a ae eo eee ee eae 4 47 CONS tot aiden E cst oe kee ee ne ee es 4 37 configuring an IP PBX 4 36 4 38 importing and creating extensions 9 13 11 14 integration 1 2 4 36 13 2 13 8 13 10 optional CA50 components 1 4 password ees 9 10 phone extension status 9 7 phone settings 6 48 9 41 FEQISIIQUION aaa wwe hwa od NG 7 4 14 14 supported IP PBX protocols 4 36 system data aaa 14 3 system phone book entries 9 14 UCA phone extension 11 47 PBX connectivity parameters 7 9 phone extension web service 11 14 bulk loading extensions 9 13 methods addextension 11 14 getextensioninfo 11 17 removeextensio
417. on data into the UCA server go to http lt UCAInstallMachine gt Motorola UCA Samples UCAPhoneExtensions default aspx where UCAlnstallMachine is the UCA server IP address Messaging To enter messaging information into the UCA server go to http lt UCAInstallMachine gt Motorola UCA Samples UCAMessaging default2 aspx where UCAlnstallMachine is the UCA server IP address Source C Program Files Motorola UCA Server DevelopmentToolkit PhoneExtensions UCA Server Optional APIs 11 5 CA50 Device User Authentication Process The UCA server uses a combination of NET Web services and NET aspx pages for the CA50 device user Authentication Process Process Flow Upon startup the CA50 client calls the DeviceRegistration method in the DeviceManagement Web Service to register with the UCA system The DeviceManagement Web Service calls the AuthenticateMAC method in the Authentication Web Service to potentially authenticate the device MAC address and determine the next step for the UCA Authentication Process The MAC level authentication is only attempted if the feature is enabled in the system settings In most cases this is not used because of the operational work involved in tracking the MAC address of each device in an enterprise MAC authentication is enabled by a setting in the UCA database DB If enabled the AuthenticateMAC method attempts to match the MAC of the device as an external user ID to the entries in the UCA B User tabl
418. on hold If Cisco phone puts the CA50 on hold music on hold is heard on both ends if the PBX is setup with music on hold Table 4 7 PBX Calls versus Standard Non PBSX Calls Continued Function CA50 Already on a Call Call Transfer Callinga Caller gets a call H 323 progress tone from PBX If called account is setup with coverage path on the PBX the call is forwarded to the coverage path If the called CA50 keeps the current call caller hears the call progress tone until timeout setup on PBX or caller places the phone on the hook If the called CA50 hangs up the current call it can answer this call One step blind transfer If the call is transferred between CA50s both ends of the CA50 show the transferee caller ID and not the actual caller ID H 3232 P2P e Caller hears a busy tone SIP PBX e Caller gets a call progress tone from PBX If called account is setup with coverage path on the PBX the call is forwarded to the coverage path If the called CA50 keeps the current call caller hears the call progress tone until timeout setup on PBX or caller places the phone on the hook If the called CA50 hangs up the current call it can answer the new call CA50 Modes of Operation 4 41 SIP P2P e Caller hears a busy tone e One step blind transfer e lf the call is transferred between CA50s both ends of the CA50 show the upda
419. on take precedence over the keys defined in the lt MenuStates gt area of the XML profile Note The name attribute s value must be the same as the value for the name attribute of the LeftSoftKey when both are on a page of the business application The labels for the soft keys are displayed above the physical buttons on the device In addition the soft keys are controlled by the UCA client application if these soft key inputs are not present CA50 Business Application Development 10 9 Table 10 2 HTML Elements Contained in the Body Element Continued Element Description lt input type submit id spinbox The spin box element allows the user to select a series of digits to name USERID SpinBoxLabel User ID enter numeric information and submit this information to the server SR ENGR ELECT poe oer The left soft key allows the user to move from one numeric digit to the AA AA next numeric digit and then wrap when at the last edit field The Up SpinBoxMaskDigit value LeftBtnLbl Next RightBtnLbl Cancel and Down keys allow the user to select from zero through nine for ie each numeric digit which is designated by the SpinBoxMaskDigit attribute characters within the value attribute The right soft key cancels the spin box and posts an empty string as the value portion of the name value pair for this input element The Select or Enter key submits the name value pair for this input element where the value is the
420. on the CA5O0 If the UCA server is temporarily not accessible the CA50 can access the cached phone book information IP PBX Integration with the UCA Server The site IT administrator configures the UCA server with PBX information IP address available extensions etc enabling CA50 voice calls to be routed to and from the IP PBX The following settings must be entered into the UCA server to work with the IP PBX e Phone Gateway IPAddress e Phone Gateway Port note the phone Gateway port for H 323 is 1719 port 5060 for SIP and port 2000 for SCCP e Phone Gateway Protocol Type e Phone Peer2Peer Enable port 1720 for H 323 and port 5060 for SIP e Phone Peer2Peer Port note the peer to peer direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call port 1720 for H 323 and port 5060 for SIP e Phone Gateway CallPark Enable e Phone Gateway FAC CallPark e Phone Gateway FAC CallPick For details and definitions of each of these parameters see Table 6 2 on page 6 48 For details on the entering phone settings into the UCA server Web Console see page 9 41 Additionally to enable a CA50 to access phone extensions contained within the IP PBX they must be mapped into the UCA server See Creating a UCA Phone Extension on page 9 9 for more details Losing a Connection Between the CA50 and IP PBX When the connection between a CA50 and IP PBX is lost a No Phone error message displays on the CA50 Users in No Phone state do not appear in the Phonebook of other logg
421. on wwav ringtone basic way True True client PhoneReqRetry Count 3 True False Client PhoneReqretry interval 1 True False Client Volume Receiver 3 True True Client olume Speaker 3 True True Phone Call UnicastPacketRate 40 True False Phone Gateway CallPark By Group Enable 1 False False Phone Gateway CallPark Enable 1 False False Phone Gateway FAC CallPark Doo True False Phone Gateway FAC CallFick Ooo True False Figure 9 37 System Settings View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 39 e Click to view System Settings in a tree structure System Management system Settings System Settings Console Users Tools l5 Live Token Value Profile Is User Preference Client Client Backlight Client Backlight Battery Client Backlight Battery Timeout 5 True True Client Backlight Level 4 True True Client Desktop Client Desktop Link Client Desktop Link Defautt5can http 92 168 7 138Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp2 detaut aspx7item True False Client Mew PhoneRegRetry Count 3 True False Client Phone Client Phone Ring Application wav ringtone basic wav True True Client PhoneRegRetry Count 3 True False Figure 9 38 System Settings Tree Structure View J NOTE See Configure System Settings on page 9 42 for details about configuring system settings 9 40 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Client Settings Client settings are default CA50 device settings used to
422. one selection information in the message does not exist on the device the profile tone is played 2 LED The LED flashes based on information from either the data within the notification message or from the user profile e The device checks the notification message for the visible indicator data If data is available the LED flashes appropriately e Ifthe notification message has no visible indicator data the device checks the user profile If the profile contains the visible alert information associated with NotifNoCall the corresponding LED flashes e The visible indicator selection information takes precedence over the profile visible indicator selection information 3 Vibrate The device vibrates based on information from either the data within the notification message or from the user profile e The device checks if the notification message has data regarding the vibrate indicator If data is available the device vibrates e Ifthe notification message has no data for vibrate indicator the device checks the user profile If the profile contains the vibrate alert information associated with NotifNoCall the corresponding device vibrates e The vibrate selection information takes precedence over the profile vibrate selection information e NotifCallActive This setting defines the alert behavior when receiving a notification message when on an active phone call e The behavior of the alerts is the same as that of NotiNoCall except t
423. oneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType LastName gt entry ID 3 value Departments M S Depts xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client phonebook asmx GetMenuGroupList sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType All amp amp sSortType Nam e gt lt entry ID 4 value First Names M S Range023 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType FirstName gt entry ID 5 value Recent Calls M S Recent xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetRecentCal lList sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType ALL amp amp sSortType MostRecent gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 4 lt entry ID 1 value Price Check S S http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp Sample aspx gt name Applications title Applns gt sentry ID 2 value PriceCheck2 S S http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Samples UCASampleApp2 Default as oy Sam a a lt Menu gt lt Menu TD 5 title WT Channels gt lt entry ID 1 value My WT Settings S L SetChannel 5 Normal gt lt entry ID 2 value Sales S L SetChannel 3 Single gt name FrontWTChannels lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 6 name Settings title Settings gt lt
424. onsole GUI window to display the view The Phone and Walkie Talkie tab has three views e Phone Extension Status Figure 9 5 e Phone Extension Pool Figure 9 6 e Additional Phonebook Entries Figure 9 14 Each view contains all information phone extensions about users defined in the UCA server In these views create edit and delete phone extensions for CA50 and other phone devices To toggle between views click on a tab Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool and or Additional Phonebook Entries Phone Extension Status The Phone Extension Status view displays the status of all phone extensions that can be assigned to a CASO It also lists any phone extensions that failed when attempting to register with the PBX This view shows Extension Group Extension Status Current Owner External ID and Current Owner IP Address of all active users in the UCA server Phone and WT Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Statue Phones Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries Returned 9 results Find Esn fl Extension Group dension Stat Current Owner External ID Current Owner IP Address 200 Bair Failed to register 20H Bath Assigned 001 570960796 192 168 7 173 202 Bair Failed to register 303 Bsaih Failed to register 001 S7OS6D7 BS 192 1687 50 205 Balh Failed to register 206 Baik Falled to register 1101 192 168 7173 207 Bsaih Failed to register 210 Electrical Assigned 1106 132 168 7120 341 Bath Assigned 1109 182 168 7117 Fi
425. onsole authentication Authentication of the specified user and password failed The specified user does not have active status which is required for log in Authentication of the specified user and password failed Exception occurred while attempting console authentication Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while attempting console login Exception occurred while attempting console login Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Console login failed because of authentication error Console login failed because of user update error No console users found in the database A data layer exception occurred while getting the list of console users A data layer exception occurred while getting a console user s information An exception occurred while attempting to get a console user s info Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while adding a console user The specified console user is already in the database Null input data supplied to the add console user method An exception occurred while attempting to add a console user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details A data layer exception occurred while removing a console user The specified console user was not found in the database A data layer exception occurred while updating a console user The specified user was not found in the database Null input data supplied to the update console user method Mai
426. ontent true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 reportc heckdigit Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 redund ancy Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv code39 minlen gth Content 30 gt lt META HTTP Equiv code39 maxlen gth Content 30 gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 fullasci i Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 conver ttocode32 Content true gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 concat enation Content true gt C 5 C 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table C 1 Custom Meta Tags Continued Custom Tags Parameters Symbology Property Description Example Code39 Code32Prefix Code 93 Code93 Code93 Redundancy Code93 MinLength Code93 MaxLength Interleaved 2 of 5 i2015 20f5 VerifyCheckDigit I20f5 ReportCheckDigit The Code39 Code32Prefix META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 code32prefix property The Code93 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the code93 decoder The Code93 Redundancy META Tag is an action tag used to set the code93 redundancy property The Code93 MinLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code93 min length property The Code93 MaxLength META Tag is an action tag used to set the code93 max length property The i20f5 META Tag is an action tag used to enable or disable the i2of5 decoder By default enabled The I2o0f5 Ve
427. op The CA50 cannot be used for ping testing Ensure firewalls are disabled or allow access to this IP address from the wireless network Step 3 Install UCA ServerDemo Software e Confirm that the PC meets the hardware requirements see Minimum Server Hardware Requirements on page 6 7 Confirm that the PC meets the OS and software requirements see Server Software Requirements on page 6 7 e Load UCA server software on the PC see Installing UCA Server Software on page 6 10 e During the UCA server installation process use the following login information SA password SQLisGreat015 for additional information see page 6 13 Step 10 UCA database login ID Motorola02 for additional information see page 6 15 Step 15 UCA database password UCAisGreat02 for additional information see page 6 75 Step 15 IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on whether or not NET Compact AN Framework is already loaded and the computer processor speed During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process stopped Self Contained Pre BuiltDemo E 5 Step 4 Validate Successful Server Installation on Laptop To verify the installation and configuration of the UCA server software follow the process documented in Validate Successful Server Installation and Proper Performance on page 6 45 When
428. or cold boot clears deployment settings such as network login and UCA server IP address Performing a Warm Boot The state of the device pre deployment or post deployment determines the display when the warm boot completes If the state of the device is pre deployment by default the device boots into the CA Menu If the state of the device is post deployment by default the device boots into the UCA client application and attempts to connect to the UCA server To boot into the CA Menu when the boot completes the user must press and hold the left soft key during the boot There are two ways to perform a warm boot e Use the Up and Down keys and select Warm Boot from the CA Menu or e Press and hold the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously until a blank screen displays and the red LED flashes This takes approximately 3 seconds IMPORTANT When the blank screen displays the user must release the keys when the warm boot initiates to AN avoid initiating a cold boot Performing a Cold Boot The state of the device pre deployment or post deployment determines what is displayed when the cold boot completes e Ifthe state of the device is pre deployment by default the device boots into the CA Menu lf the state of the device is post deployment by default the device boots into the UCA client application and attempts to connect to the UCA server To boot into the CA Menu when the boot completes the user must press and hold the left sof
429. or department 1 On the Active Call window press the left soft key Options to display the Call Options menu ail 10 52 On Abruzzo R 0 01 Options End Figure 4 36 Active Call Display 2 On the Call Options menu press the Up or Down keys to scroll to Park and press Select ail Call maT Transfer Hold Back Figure 4 37 Call Options Menu 3 The Departments menu displays Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to the department to which the call should be parked and press Select all Depts Om Electrical Garden Back Figure 4 38 Departments Menu CA50 Modes of Operation 4 49 4 The system selects an available extension on which to park the call and the Park window displays the extension Press the right soft key Ok to accept the extension and park the call all S Park CHIN Call parked Ok Figure 4 39 Park Display On the device on which the call was parked J NOTE When the user selects Ok the device display returns to the desktop or the prior business application After three seconds of no user action the device display also returns to the desktop or the prior business application 5 A message transmits to all other users logged into the same group where the call was parked to inform them that a call is parked on an extension The user can press the left soft key to pick up the call or the right soft key to dismiss the message 10 10
430. or the left soft key and PhoneBook menu may be assigned for the right soft key J NOTE The structure of the static menu pages is identical to the structure used by the dynamic menu pages and returned by the server after web service calls i e the Call Manager web service 8 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide XML Profile Profile Section Create New Profile To create a new UCA XML profile specify the new settings and save the profile Specify the profile information such as the profile name and the language UCA Profile Builder Profile Builder iz a standalone Windows applicabon installed with ICA sofware This application provides a user interfaca for an administrator bo create new UCA ML profiles and also io modify existing UCA XML profiles Figure 8 1 Create New Profile 1 Choose Profile gt New to create a new profile The New Profile Basic Details page appears 4 UCA Profile Builder Profile Builderis a standalone Windows application installed wih US cofhware This application provides a user interece for an administrator io create mew UCA DAL profiles and alao ta modik existing UCA XML profiles Figure 8 2 New Profile Basic Details XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 5 2 Enter the profile name and select the language Ah UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Basic Details Language Settings Profle Name bpeSeles Language Engizh Hew Profile Creatio
431. ororoLa Regulatory pa Writing Area dal Main am I Rapid Deploy Sac Display Programs ae Settings Speaker System info Left Soft Key Right Soft Key Scan Select S Key Down Arrow Application Key Walkie Talkie Talk Key default Top View Bottom View Soar Charge Window Contacts 2 USB Client Port Lift cover Figure 3 1 CA50 Front Back Views CA50 Side hear 3 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Preparing the CA50 for Use To prepare the CA50 for first time use e Install the battery e Charge the CA50 charge spare batteries as needed e Configure the CA50 device via Rapid Deployment bar codes see Appendix F Rapid Deployment J NOTE When Rapid Deployment completes device configuration the device has a valid network configuration and the UCA client application communicates with a UCA server assuming a valid UCA server address is contained within the Rapid Deployment bar codes RF settings and settings to communicate to the UCA server can be set several ways by scanning one set of bar codes that configure both RF and UCA server settings by scanning two separate sets of bar codes one containing RF settings the other containing UCA server settings or by scanning one set of RF parameters and setting the UCA server through an On Demand server function of M
432. ort Trace Log Purge Trace Log Export and Purge Trace ExportPurge Log 3 Profile Builder Link Profile Builder Figure 9 50 Tools Window Profile builder is installed on the UCA server by default This link is provided so that Profile builder can be installed on another system The provided link points to the profile builder installable and not the profile builder itself After installing the profile builder launch the profile builder from Start gt All ProgramssMotorolasUCA ServersUtilss Profile Builder Exporting the Debug Trace Log To export the debug trace logs found in the UCA server UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 49 1 Click the System Management tab gt Tools tab gt Export The Export Debug Trace Log window displays system Management Tools gt Export Debug Trace Logs System Settings Console Users You are about to export the debug trace log Continue Cancel Figure 9 51 Export Debug Trace Log Window 2 Select Continue to export the trace log 3 Select Cancel to return to the Jools tab Purging the Debug Trace Log To purge the debug trace logs found in the UCA server 9 50 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 1 Click the System Management tab gt Tools tab gt Purge The Purge Debug Trace Log window displays System Management Tools gt Purge Debug Trace Logs System Settings Console Users You are about to purge the debug trac
433. oss separate calls By default mute is off at the start of a voice Last name First unicast call During a voice unicast call Mute is a toggle switch muting and 0 01 unmuting the microphone for the duration of a single call See Answering an Options End Incoming Voice Unicast on page 4 55 for information about receiving a voice unicast call while in a business application Hold When a user selects the hold option while on an active call the call is placed on i 1052 om hold While on hold the call timer continues uninterrupted See Answering an a H 0 P Incoming Voice Unicast on page 4 55 for information about receiving a voice aa 2 First unicast call while in a business application a aaa Me Press the left soft key to display Options Options End alls Call 0 Unhold Transfer Back e Select Unhold Hold to place the call off and on hold and return to the active call screen e Select Transfer to transfer a call to another party see Transferring a Call on page 4 46 4 54 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Sample Business Application J NOTE For additional sample business applications see Appendix I Business Applications Supplement By default pressing the Scan key at the desktop launches the scanner and delivers decoded data to the sample item look up application If the item lookup is successful data corresponding to the bar code such as the product type
434. ossible values e RedSlowBlink e RedMedBlink e RedFastBlink Red LED blinks once every 1 10 second e RedOn Red LED blinks once every second Red LED blinks once every 1 2 second Red LED remains on e GreenSlowBlink Green LED blinks once every second e GreenMedBlink e GreenFastBlink Green LED blinks once every 1 2 second Green LED blinks once every 1 10 second e GreenOn Green LED remains on e AmberSlowBlink e AmberMedBlink e AmberFastBlink e AmberOn Vibrate Indicator attribute possible values Amber LED blinks once every second Amber LED blinks once every 1 2 second Amber LED blinks once every 1 10 second Amber LED remains on e SlowVibrate Device vibrates once every second e MedVibrate Device vibrates once every 1 2 second e FastVibrate Device vibrates once every 1 10 second e VibrateOn Devices vibrates 9 MetricsLog The MetricsLog element controls which possible metrics related activities are sent to the server for logging and to which server they are sent Include the activities to be logged in the options list Valid settings are PTT Walkie Talkie Device information specific to this device OutgoingCall information on calls to others and IncomingCall information on calls received The amount of time between sends of this information can be modified by changing the CollectionInterval 60 statement The value is in minutes The CollectionIntervall is only for device
435. ot Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt lt entry ID 7 value Settings M L Settings gt lt entry ID 8 value Log Off S L LogOffConfirm 5 lt entry ID 9 value Power Off S L PowerOfft gt lt entry ID 10 value About S L About gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 2 name FrontAppMenu title Options gt lt entry ID 1 value WT Channels M L FrontWTChannels gt lt entry ID 2 value PhoneBook M L PhoneBook gt lt entry ID 3 value Parked calls M L CallPick gt lt entry ID 4 value Do Not Disturb S L QuietMode Y gt centry ID 5 value Log Off S L LogOffConfirm 5 lt entry ID 6 value Power Off S L PowerOft gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 3 name PhoneBook title Phn Bk gt entry ID 1 value Extensions M S Range022 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asm x GetMenuExtRanges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType N umber gt lt entry ID 2 value hast Names M S Range024 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType LastName gt lt entry ID 3 value Departments M S Depts xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client phonebook asmx GetMenuGroupList sMenuType Call amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType All amp amp sSortType Nam e gt lt entry ID 4 values First
436. ot found in the UCA database 34168 Error obtaining the device s P address 34170 An exception occurred during user authentication Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 13 DB Maintenance Errors Error Code 35031 35032 35091 35092 36031 36032 36061 36062 36091 36092 Table 14 14 Console Status Errors Error Code 52031 52032 52062 52092 52102 52132 52162 52191 DB Maintenance Database level exception generated while purging Debug Trace Exception occurred while exporting the Debug Trace Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Database level exception generated while exporting Debug Trace Exception occurred while updating DB maintenance record to reflect that the user idle check occurred Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Database level exception generated while performing DB Maintenance Exception occurred while performing DB Maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Database level exception generated while exporting Debug Trace Exception occurred while exporting and purging the Debug Trace Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Database level exception generated while configuring DB Maintenance Exception occurred while configuring DB Maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Console Status No rows were found for the specified lookup A data layer exception occu
437. oved from the B Groups table int RemoveGroup string sStoreNumber string sGroupToken string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store number sGroup Token Group ID Identifier for the Group joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserlD of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass when user logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UpdateGroup This method updates a Group s information in the UCA system The Group s information is updated in the B Groups table in the UCA database int UpdateGroup string sStoreNumber Grouplnfo grouplnfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store Number group nfo Group Information info class that describes the organizational group department ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful
438. ow to display the view The Roles and Groups tab has two views e Groups Figure 9 29 e Roles Figure 9 33 Each view contains all information about groups and roles in the server To toggle between views click on a tab Groups and or Roles Groups A Group contains any number of users comprising a unit such as a department For example the Electrical Department in a store would include several employees who can be users comprising a Group Groups view displays the current groups in the server In this view create edit and delete groups Roles and Groups Groups Groups Add To List For Delete Returned 13 results Find Group ID v Group ID Name Group Number Managers Managers Bath Bath Electrical Electrical Garden Garden DeptHead Dept Head New Hire New Hire Cashiers Cashiers Lot Lot Lumber Lumber Seasonal Seasonal SvcDesk Service Desk Other Other Fi Fi oO oO d F d oO Paging Paging Figure 9 29 Groups View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 31 Creating Groups To create a group in the UCA server 1 Click the Roles and Groups tab gt Groups tab gt Create The Group Create window displays Roles and Groups Groups gt Group Create Groups 1 Group Details Group ID must be unique Hame Group Number Figure 9 30 Group Create Window 2 Enter a unique Group ID in the Group ID must be unique text
439. performing the validation process use the default Web Console user login information e Default User ID admin Password admin 1 IMPORTANT Ensure to enter all settings called out on page 6 45 exactly as shown IMPORTANT At the initial login to the Web Console for details see page 9 3 it is required to use the default Web Console administrator Username and Password e Factory Default Web Console Username admin e Factory Default Web Console Password admin It is strongly suggested that the default administrator Username and Password be changed after the initial login Note that the Username and Password entered during the UCA server software installation process step on page 6 13 are for SQL database access and should not be mistaken with the default Web Console administrator Username and Password shown above Step 5 Configure the RF Hardware Configure the WS2000 and its AP using the settings listed in Table E 1 Table E1 W52000 and AP Configuration Field Setting LAN Subnet 1 192 168 0 1 lt Default gt LAN Subnet 1 Assigned Ports 1 6 and WLAN1 Subnet 1 DHCP Server On DHCP Range 192 168 0 100 to 192 168 0 150 WLAN 1 ESSID UCA WLAN 1 Security Authentication and Encryption Both Open Access Ports 802 11 a b g Defaults Beacon Settings DTIM per BSSID to 2 Wireless QoS Use Voice Prioritization for WLAN1 Checked 1 IMPORTANT WS2000 firmware version 2 2 3 or higher is recommended E 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Se
440. pleApp2 UCAMessaging and UCAPhoneExtensions Installs Windows services Motorola UCA Maintenance Service Medial Relay Service Installs support utilities DBExport Start UCA Services Stop UCA Services UDT Encrypt and Decrypt Installs sample profile templates files used by the UCA login process as specified in the sample data Installs a named instance of Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Creates the UCA database and adds system defined data and sample data Creates a SampleLookup database for the Sample Applications and populates with sample data Creates three IIS Application pools Client UCAConsole and ServerManagement and configures the corresponding Web applications to use those pools Sets Basic Authentication for the ServerManagement virtual directory but not for the Authentication subfolder under it Creates a customer specified login for the database with a database role allowing it to access the necessary portions of the database for the UCA server Gives the IIS user group permission to access the export folder under Program Files Encrypts the Web config and application config files to protect the connection strings and make it more difficult for someone to redirect the authentication Web service calls Installs Motorola UCA Backup and Restore tool Installs Motorola UCA Profile Builder Installs Motorola UCA Diagnostics Tool Installs resource files for localization support Installation Prerequisites Se
441. ption occurred attempting to get a list of all profile associations Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57264 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a profile association ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57265 An exception occurred while attempting to get a profile association ID Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 57301 Exception occurred while attempting to get a profile object 57331 Exception occurred while attempting to get an XML object 57361 An exception occurred while replacing menu references 57362 Not all Menu Files referenced in project were found 57401 An exception occurred while generating a walkie talkie menu 57431 An exception occurred while exporting a menu to file 57461 An exception occurred while exporting a menu to file 57531 An exception occurred while generating a profile template Login Authentication Table 14 12 Login Authentication Errors Error Code Description 34031 Error obtaining the device s store number from the supplied MAC 34033 An exception occurred during user authentication Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 34038 Input parameter error during user authentication 34068 An exception occurred during user authentication Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 34162 Error obtaining the device s store number from the supplied MAC 34165 Error occurred while sending an asynchronous log off command to a device 34166 Specified user was n
442. puter all users Only for me Symbol Associate ists lt Back Memo Coco Figure 6 49 Customer Information 9 Enter the serial number that appears on the back of the UCA installation CD sleeve 6 34 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 10 Click Next The SQL Server 2005 Information window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Please enter SQL Server 2005 information WARNING A strong password consisting of at least 8 characters including 3 of the following uppercase lowercase numeric and non alphanumeric is REQUIRED Enter STRONG sa password to be used for Authentication of SOL Server 2005 UCA Confirm or change DNS resolvable hostname to access this machine SYMBOL SBC5E TBH InstallShield Figure 6 50 SQL Server 2005 Information 11 Enter a strong password to use for SQL server authentication J NOTE The password entered in this field is the system administrator sa password The sa account in SQL Server 2005 has full access and read write permissions to all DB instances It is used during the installation process and for future upgrades This password should be recorded and retained in a safe location by the integrator or customer IMPORTANT Microsoft Strong Password Guidelines for SQL Server 2005 authentication AN Strong passwords are not readily guessed by a person and are not easily hacked using a computer program Strong passwords cannot use prohibited condition
443. quence as the install proceeds Framework is already loaded and the computer processor speed During the installation process the Installshield progress bar may not always appear to be moving This is normal behavior and does not mean the installation process stopped 1 IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on whether or not NET 6 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Be Installing Prerequisites Installs software components required prior to installing SQL 1 Server SQL Server Component Update will install the following components required for SOL Server Setup gt Microsoft SOL Native Client Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Support Files Configuring components Setup Status J Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup X Setup Progress The selected components are being configured Product Status MSXML CEN Setup Support Files Setup finished gt SQL Native Client Configuring components SOL V55 Writer SOL Server Database Services Workstation Components Books Onlin r Status Copying new files File msmd h Directory C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server 90 SDK Inel 29001 PITT TTT TTT TT UU Figure 6 11 SQL Server Setup cv CG WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Configuring ASP Net Encryption Adding ACL for access to the RSA Key container Succeeded Adding ACL for access to the RSA Key container
444. r 12 months from date of shipment provided the product remains unmodified and is operated under normal and proper conditions Accessories CA50 accessories such as cables and power supplies carry a warranty term of ninety 90 days from the date of shipment CA50 Server Software The CA50 Server Software ships with Motorola s standard 90 day software warranty During the warranty period Motorola will replace damaged or defective media Telephone and e mail access are also provided for the sole purpose of reporting a non conformance issue and for Motorola to verify the existence of the issue and determination of the conditions under which the issue may recur For enhanced support over the standard warranty including full access to technical support resources and rights to download entitled software releases Motorola recommends purchasing a CA50 Server Software Support agreement To maintain MSP support beyond the 90 day warranty period Motorola recommends purchasing an MSP Software Support agreement Note MSP Software Support agreements must be purchased separately or in addition to CA50 Server Software Support agreements CA50 Client UCA Server Developer Guide Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below Change Date Description 72E 93914 01 Rev A 3 2008 Initial release 72E 93914 02 Rev A 11 2009 Updates UCA Server and test applications PBX support Profile Wizard Localization Scanning suppor
445. r Developer amp User Guide UCA Server Optional APIs Overview The UCA server optional APIs are an alternate administration mechanism enabling a developer to programmatically accomplish the tasks listed below as an alternative to using the UCA server Web Console as the primary data entry interface e Login and Authentication of e CA50 users see page 11 5 e Web Console Users see page 11 40 e Server Management and Maintenance of Customer Data e Phone extensions see page 11 14 e Groups see page 11 18 e Roles see page 11 22 e Device Users see page 11 29 e Console Users see page 11 36 e Sending Text Messages to the CA50 see page 11 26 The Application Programming Interfaces APIs in this chapter can be utilized to extend the standard UCA server functionality provided from Motorola These APIs enable integration of the UCA server into existing store processes The use of these APIs is optional These optional APIs can be used by customers or third party programmers to customize the login process assist in the creation of external programs that might be used to initialize or maintain the UCA server data and send text messages The APIs are implemented using Web services UCA Server Optional APIs 11 3 Location of Optional APIs and Web Messaging Service The default authentication Web services are located in the Motorola UCA Client Authentication and the Motorola UCA ServerManagement Authentication directories under II
446. r Footwear aspx J NOTE This application must be created by a Web developer and is not part of the UCA installation This is used for example purposes only J NOTE For sample business applications see Appendix Business Applications Supplement D 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Step 2 Setup Static IP on Server Hardware UCA Server Static IP Address 192 168 0 253 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To do this in Windows 2003 1 2 3 4 Go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections and click on Local Area Connection In the Local Area Connection Status window select Properties In the Local Area Connection Properties window highlight the Internet Protocol TCP IP option and click Properties Select the Use the following IP address button and enter the values above Important Notes Step 3 The CA50 device must know where the UCA server IP address is for configuration via Rapid Deployment bar codes For this to occur set the UCA server hardware to the UCA server static IP address above 192 168 0 253 Ensure this IP address can be pinged through the wireless network using the CA50 for the ping testing see UCAPing on page 4 27 Ensure firewalls are disabled or allow access to this IP address from the wireless network Install UCA Server Software Confirm that the PC meets the hardware requirements see Minimum Server Hardware Requirements on page 6 7 Conf
447. r more information on charge times see Charging Batteries on page 3 8 3 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Table 3 1 Battery Management Continued CA50 Usage Battery Management Recommendation Optimizing a Wireless Network for Voice Communication Maximizing Run Time wireless infrastructure optimization Using the VoIP capabilities of the CA50 requires the wireless network to be optimized for voice which places special demands on the network beyond those required for data alone Many networks in use today are only optimized for data traffic e Most wi fi systems are built to deliver a signal strength of 75dBm This is enough power for laptops to surf the Web and email e VolP requires a better signal to maintain a call and should be designed at 65dBm which assures at least a 20dB SNR even with a high noise floor For details on tools to perform a voice centric network site survey see what is the first step in selling the CA50 Solution The items below are listed in order of importance with the most important recommendation first e A high multicast bit rate set at the Access Point increases run time while decreasing walkie talkie range and quality e Increasing the number of CA50 devices actively engaged in voice unicast calls associated with the same Access Point can decrease CA50 run time and voice unicast call quality Loads associated with wireless bar code scanning and walkie ta
448. r presses the Walkie Talkie key and speaks through the microphone on the device Changing the Transmit Channel Using the CA50 Menu The CA50 desktop displays the default transmit channel To change the channel users can access the walkie talkie channel menu directly from a business application or the desktop Default Transmit Channel all 2 10 56 i Admin Channel 2 Floor Menu Phn bk Figure 4 13 CA50 Desktop To change the transmit channel 1 On the CA50 desktop Figure 4 13 press the left soft key to display the Desktop menu wl Menu S Applications WT channels Key lock Back Figure 4 14 Desktop Menu CA50 Modes of Operation 4 35 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select walkie talkie communication channels The WT Channels menu displays oul WT CHIN Channel 1 Channel 2 Back Figure 4 15 WT Channel Menu The Channels menu lists an option to access walkie talkie settings My WT settings all available transmit channels and possibly additional server configurable options such as Scan mode 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select a channel The Desktop menu or prior business application screen displays the updated status bar showing the current receive channel all 10 52 aT Name x123 Menu Phn Bk Figure 4 16 Desktop Menu 4 36 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Voice Unicast Calls Voice unica
449. re details 73121 Exception occurred while getting all non UCA extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73131 Exception occurred while getting all UCA extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73141 Exception occurred while getting all recently assigned extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73181 Exception occurred while getting the PetlD of the User Refer to the NT Event log for more details System Settings Table 14 27 System Settings Errors Error Code Description 73511 Exception occurred while getting the value for a system setting Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73512 Specified system setting not found in DB Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73521 Exception occurred while getting the boolean value for a system setting Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73522 Specified system setting not found in DB Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73531 Exception occurred while getting the list of tokens for all system settings Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73541 Exception occurred while getting user preference token for system setting Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73551 Exception occurred while getting all system settings Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73561 Exception occurred while setting the value for a system setting Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73571 Exception occurred while getting a s
450. re is not available from Motorola and must be purchased separately Recommended UCA server hardware configuration to support up to a 50 device CA50 deployment e CPU 3 GHz Pentium 4 Processor e RAM 2 GB e Hard drive Minimum 10 GB free disk space IMPORTANT The recommended UCA server hardware configuration listed above is an estimate and should be AN tested based on usage needs Server Software Requirements The UCA server software must be run on a server operating system that meets the requirements listed below Operating System e Server Operating System J NOTE The UCA server must be set to a static IP address or a DNS resolvable host name to allow communication from CA50 devices e Demo and Deployment Microsoft Windows Server 2003 v 6 0 SP1 This Operating System is required for site deployments e Demo only Microsoft Windows XP Pro SP2 v 5 1 This Operating System is for demonstration purposes only J NOTE 1 Windows XP Pro lacks a DHCP server 2 By default Windows XP Pro IIS is limited to 10 connections mobile devices 6 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Operating System Components That Must Be Enabled e Internet Information Services IIS e Common Files e World Wide Web Service e IS IIS Snap In Windows XP Pro IIS Manager Windows 2003 J NOTE IIS must be installed and running before the installation software runs To confirm IIS is enabled and running properly perform th
451. reachable hostname This value populates into sample data in the database and other sample files by the installer This is used as part of URLs delivered to the CA50 to be used to access different services on the server The default value that the installer presents should be changed if a CA50 would not be able to resolve the address via DNS This can also be the static IP address of the server to avoid or work around any DNS resolution issues 6 22 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 7 Enter a strong password for SQL database access Motorola Installation Wizard Please enter SQL Server 2005 information WARNING A strong password consisting of at least 8 characters including 3 of the following uppercase lowercase numeric and nor alphanumeric is REQUIRED Enter STRONG sa password to be used for Authentication of SQL Server 2005 UCA Confirm or change DNS resolvable hostname to access this machine SYMBOL SBC5E TBH instal lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 6 24 SQL Server 2005 Information 8 Enter the user name Login ID and the password for SQL database access Motorola Installation Wizard Database Server Login Database server requires login credentials to continue WARNING A strong password consisting of at least 8 characters including 3 of the following uppercase lowercase numeric and non alphanumeric is REQUIRED Login ID ucaadmin AA Password lt Back Cancel Figure 6 25
452. red while attempting to release a phone extension 53194 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to release a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53195 An exception occurred while attempting to release a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53202 Could not update the user s phone extension 53203 Could not get an extension for assignment during request for a new one 53204 Could not mark bad extension during request for a new one 53205 An exception occurred while attempting to request a new phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53206 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to request a new phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53231 No non UCA extensions defined in the database 53234 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of non UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53235 An exception occurred while attempting to get a list of non UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53261 No UCA extensions defined in the database 53264 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53265 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of UCA phone extensions Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53291 No recently assigned phone extensions in the database
453. red while removing a device user role Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79051 Exception occurred while getting all device user roles Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Console Users Data Table 14 37 Console Users Data Errors Error Code Description 79511 Exception occurred while getting All Console Users Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79521 Exception occurred while getting a Console User Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79531 Exception occurred while adding a console user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79541 Exception occurred while removing a Console User Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79551 Exception occurred while updating a Console User Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79561 Exception occurred while updating a Console User s password Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 79571 Exception occurred while updating a Console User s login status Refer to the NT Event log for more details 14 40 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Server Files Table 14 38 Server Files Errors Error Code Description 89501 Exception occurred while configuring DB Maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 89502 Input file specified for CSV import was not found Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 89503 Input file had no valid CSV records Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 89531 Exception occurred while pa
454. reless QoS pS Network Configuration Wireless QoS Configuration Bandwidth Share Mode wor Bandwidth Share for Each WLAN ak teh Wireless Lip VLAN L ty WLANI Security lt Qireless 09 gt 1 f Access Parts 802 112 Defaults E 002 116 Defaults Ugh 802 11b g Defau Ugh 802 1 Port Authe gh AP BG tah APS A T Detector Access T Unadopted i Rogue AP Detection WLAN Mame Use oice Prioritization Multicast Address 1 multicast Address 2 a HotSpot LAN 01 200 5E 00 00 00 09 00 0E 00 00 00 W Firewall Port Config LANZ L 01 00 5E 00 00 00 09 00 0E 00 00 00 a Route Eo into craroes He J Loaou WLAN Mame eight Voice Prioritization and Multicast Address Settings Figure E 7 Wireless QoS Configuration E 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 10 11 Check Use Voice Prioritization for WLAN1 Click Apply The RF hardware is now configured for the Demo Solution Close the browser Before continuing validate the laptop s static IP address is set to 192 168 0 253 the subnet mask is set to 255 255 255 0 For details on how to check the computer IP address see page E 4 Ensure all firewalls are disabled on the laptop For more details see page 6 47 Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 11 Step 6 Scan Rapid Deployment Bar Codes to Deploy CA50s To deploy the CA50s onto the Demo Solution RF network and establish communication with the U
455. resented to a user GroupName Display name of a group The WSStatus variable should be examined in cases where the return value from the Web Service indicates a failure public class UCAWebServiceStatus public UCAWebServiceStatus public int returnStatus public string sMessage Table 11 3 UCAWebService Class Members Class Member Description returnStatus Error code sMessage Message describing the error UCAWebService Class Members returnstatus Error Code sMessage Message describing the error UCA Server Optional APIs 11 11 AuthenticateMAC This method is used to authenticate a device If authMac required is enabled the MAC is looked up as a user in the B USER table int AuthenticateMAC string sStoreNumber string sMAC string ipAddr ref AuthenticateResponse AuthResp ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Device store number sMAC Device MAC address ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required AuthResp Result of authentication attempt See CA50 Device User Authentication Process on page 11 5 WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful If successful AuthResp is populated with the result of the authentication attempt If return value is 0 check WSStatus for error code and description Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT E
456. ress e WebsServicePopup Time is the number of seconds to wait on the response from the server before displaying a Waiting for Server message e WebServiceResponse Timeout is the amount of time a Web service call stays connected waiting for a response 7 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide e PopupErrorTimeout is the amount of time in seconds an error message displays on the screen before it dismisses itself e SilentMode Timeout is the amount of time in seconds that the UCA client application mutes after Mute is pressed e DNDModeTimeout is the amount of time in seconds that the UCA client application stays in Do not disturb mode when that mode is entered e PressNHoldTime is ignored It is currently not implemented e NotifEnable is set to Y to enable notifications set NotifEnable to N to disable notifications e NotifAllowOnCallActive is set to Y to enable notifications while on a phone call set NotifAllowOnCallActive to N to disable notifications while on a phone call e CacheTimeToLive is ignored It is currently not implemented e Bar code scanning Set the LogoutBarcode value to allow the user to scan a bar code to logout Set this value to to disable log off by bar code scanning Note that when enabled scanning a bar code to log off works only when the user is logged in e Set the UCAExitBarcode value to allow the user to scan a bar code to exit the UCA client application Set this v
457. rifyCheckDigit META Tag is an action tag used to set the i20f5 verifycheckdigit property The l20f5 ReportCheckDigit META Tag is an action tag used to set the msi reportcheckdigit property lt META HT TP Equiv code39 code3 2prefix content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv code93 content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv code93 redund ancy content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code93 minlen gth content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code93 maxlen gth content parameter gt lt META HTTP Equiv i20f5 content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv i20f5 verifyche ckdigit content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv i20f5 reportche ckdigit content parameter gt True enables reporting the Code 32 prefix when a Code 39 bar code is converted False disables reporting the Code 32 prefix when a Code 39 bar code is converted Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables the property False disables the property nn O to 55 nn O to 55 Enabled enables the decoder Disabled disables the decoder True enables verifying of the check digit False disables verifying of the check digit True enables reporting of the check digit False disables reporting of the check digit lt META HT TP Equiv code39 code3 2prefix Content true gt lt META HTTP Equiv code93
458. rmation about using Microsoft ActiveSync to manually update data on the CA50 Appendix H UCA Server Backup and Restore Provides information about the UCA server backup and restore process Appendix I Business Applications Supplement Provides examples and tips for writing business applications for the CA50 device Appendix J Commands and Command Usage Provides the commands used in the profile business applications and notification messages that can be executed on the CA50 device Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e The terms client device and terminal refer to the CA50 hand held device e Italics are used to highlight the following e chapters and sections in this and related documents e dialog box window and screen names e drop down list and list box names e check box and radio button names e icons on a screen e Bold text is used to highlight the following e key names on a keypad e button names on a screen e Bullets indicate e action items e lists of alternatives e lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists e Text boxes J NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader Failure to read the note does not result in physical harm to the reader equipment or data About This Guide xxi CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this
459. rofile False Is User Preference False s live profile is a setting that is added to a base profile at login Menila Is user preference is a setting that can be controlled by the UCA user Figure 9 42 System Settings View Configure System Settings To configure System Settings settings 1 Click the System Management tab gt System Settings tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the tab view system Management System Settings System Settings Returned 42 results Setting Y Find Is Live Profile Is User Preference True True True True Client Des Link http M0 10 10 2 Motorol CASampleApp2 default aspx items True False Client Phone Ring Applicationiwvav ringtone basic way True True Client volume Receiver 3 True True Client Volume Speaker 3 True True Phone Gateway IPAddress 101010 2 True False Phone Gateway Port 1719 True False Phone Gateway Type True False Phone Peer2Peer Enable False False Phone Peer2Peer Port False False Phonebook Ranges BaseRanqgeCount False False Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRanqeSize False False Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize False False System DefaultLocation False False System Device ActivityThreshold False False System Logging Level False False System Login MACAuthOnly False False System Login Token GetPrimaryGrou GetGroup aspx False False System Login Token GetUserlD http 210 10 10 2Motorol UCAJUCAWeb ClientPages UCA GetUser aspx False False 123
460. rofiles can be modified to customize menus displayed on the device This section describes the commands and how to use them on CA50 menus Table J 1 Profile Commands and Usage Command Name Description Usage in Profile As Part of Menus SETSCANMODE SETSCANMODE Example lt entry ID 2 value WT Scan Mode S L SETSCANMODE gt Set Walkie Talkie into Scan mode See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about Do not disturb mode SETCHANNEL Set a particular Walkie Talkie channel SetChannel lt Channel gt lt Mode gt Example See Device Modes on page 4 33 for lt entry ID 1 value My WT details about Do not disturb mode Settings S L SETCHANNEL 3 Normal gt SETRING Set a ring type SetRing lt Wave File gt Example lt entry ID 1 value Basic Ring S L SETRING Application Wav ringt one basic wav gt PHNPLACECALL Place a phone call to the given IP PHNPLACECALL PBX 0 or P2P 1 extension port DTMF string Example lt entry ID 1 value Call S L PHNPLACECALL 1 192 1 68 7 172 5060 gt PHONEHANGUP Hang up an active call PhoneHangUp Example lt entry ID 1 value HangUp S L PHONEHANGUP gt PHONEHOLD Put an active call on hold PhoneHold Example lt entry ID 2 value Hold S L PHONEHOLD gt PHONERESUME Resume a call on hold PhoneResume Example lt entry ID 3 value UnHold S L PHONERESUME gt PHNTRANSFERCALL Transfer an active phone call to some PHNPTRANSFERCALL PBX 0
461. rograms listed below e Action 1 Remove the UCA server version x x e Action 2 Remove the UCA database component of SQL server 2005 also known as the UCA Instance J NOTE This action does not require the complete removal of Microsoft SQL Server 2005 e Action 3 Remove the database files containing customer data For additional details about this process see step under Action 2 Uninstalling the UCA Database Component Instance of the SQL Server 2005 on page 6 43 J NOTE The UCA server must be removed prior to removing modifying the SQL Server 2005 software Action 1 Uninstall the UCA Server To uninstall the UCA server 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Select UCA Server Version x x from the Add or Remove Programs list 3 Click Remove 4 A dialog displays for confirmation to uninstall the UCA server software Confirm Uninstall Do vou want ko completely remove the selected application and all of its Features Cancel Figure 6 68 Confirm Uninstall 5 Click OK to proceed or click Cancel 6 Upon clicking OK a dialog displays asking to keep or delete the UCA databases Select the radio button corresponding to your choice then click Next J NOTE f any of the databases were populated with customer data it is recommended that they remain on the PC for an upgrade 7 The uninstall runs without further intervention UCA Server 6 43 8 Upon a successful u
462. rola recommends purchasing an MSP Software Support agreement Note MSP Software Support agreements must be purchased separately or in addition to CA50 Server Software Support agreements 6 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Server Functionality The UCA server software uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the functionality IMPORTANT Before running the server ensure that any firewall s between the server component and the CA50 are appropriately open to allow CA50 devices to communicate with the server and receive communications from the server Device Registration The CA50 client registers with the UCA server and receives the initial commands required to begin the login process Login Process An associate identifies him herself to the UCA server by scanning a user identification bar code and is authenticated by the server for CA50 use within a given role and group User Profile Delivery The server uses the associate s role and group to select a profile template assigns a phone extension retrieves user preferences and then fills in and delivers the completed profile to the CA50 J NOTE A profile configures a CA50 with authorization levels and privilege rights by setting the user identification phone configuration walkie talkie configuration Ul appearance and navigation and device configuration settings Voice Communication Setup and Maintenance Voice Unicas
463. ront Walkie Talkie key is pressed from the desktop e SPTTHotLink occurs when the side Walkie Talkie key is pressed from the desktop e AutoLaunchHotLink occurs when the user logs into the CA50 device JY NOTE The user cannot use Walkie Talkie if both FPTTHotLink and SPTTHotLink point to an application DeviceConfig The DeviceConfig element is used to set the clock on the device and configure various other operational parameters such as timeouts The Time BacklightLevel and BatteryBacklightTimeout values are set from the server DeviceConfig values e CA50 Backlight ACBacklightTimeout is the number of seconds the backlight stays on while the device is in the cradle e Set BatteryBacklightOnKeyPress to 1 if the backlight should turn on when a key is pressed while on battery power Set BatteryBacklightOnKeyPress to 0 if the backlight should not turn on when a key is pressed while on battery power e Set ACBacklightOnKeyPress to 1 if the backlight should turn on when a key is pressed while on AC power set ACBacklightOnKeyPress to O if the backlight should not turn on when a key is pressed while on AC power e Set the BacklightOnOff to 1 to enable the backlight set the BacklightOnOff to O to disable it e Set the BacklightEnableOnNotifMsg to 1 to enable the backlight on receiving a notification message set the BacklightEnableOnNotifMsg to O to disable it e MenuTimeout is the number of seconds that a menu is displayed without a key p
464. roubleshooting UCA Server Install Uninstall Continued Cause The database files SampleLookup mdf and SampleLookup log ldf were not deleted from a previous install UCA instance of the SQL server still resides on the target machine from a previous version of the UCA server During install of SQL Server 2005 the sa password must meet SQL Server password policy requirements 14 5 Solution Uninstall the UCA instance of SQL Server 2005 from Add Remove programs Remove or relocate UCA and Sample Lookup databases and logs from C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 2 MSSQL DATA Reinstall the UCA server Uninstall the UCA instance of SQL Server 2005 from Add Remove programs Remove or relocate UCA and Sample Lookup databases and logs from C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 2 MSSQL DATA Reinstall the UCA server Cancel then Next then Finish and then cancel UCA install Otherwise after the remainder of the install fails with 27502 error uninstall UCA instance of SQL Server 2005 from Add Remove programs Start UCA server install again using strong passwords 14 6 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Client Table 14 2 Troubleshooting the CA5O Client Problem Cause Solution Invalid bar code scanned An error screen displays the following message on the CA50 Invalid log in Try again Error logging in Scan another bar code to
465. rred while attempting to get a database lookup table A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get the system status lookup table A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get add a users status A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add a device s status A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add database maintenance status A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add the server versions info A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add misc status Description Description Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 23 Phone Extension Management Table 14 15 Phone Extension Management Errors Error Code Description 53031 The specified phone extension already exists in the database 53032 SCCP MAC cannot be NULL 53034 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to add a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53035 An exception occurred while attempting to add a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53037 SCCP MAC already exists 53064 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get information about a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53065 An exception occurred while attempting to get information about a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53091 Phone extension update failed It does not exist in the database 53094 A data layer excep
466. rsing CSV file Refer to the NT Event log for more details Chapter 15 Localization Overview This chapter includes a description of the functionality of localized versions of the UCA client software on the CA50 device Localization applies only to the UCA client The UCA server continues to display the User Interface in English The language setting is selected by the administrator during UCA server software installation Supported languages include e English e French e Italian e German e Spanish 15 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide UCA Server Localization Although the UCA server continues to display the User Interface in English data can be entered on the UCA console in one of the supported languages Supported language data entry can include the following information e UCA device user information e First last and common name e Groups e Roles When installing UCA server software the administrator chooses the appropriate language to display on CA50 devices from the Language ID drop down list Motorola Installation Wizard Langusgs ID Insti Figure 15 1 UCA Server Installation Language ID All devices associated with one UCA server use the language set on this screen Localization 15 3 CA50 Device Localization No settings are required on the CA50 device to support languages other than English However during staging while creating UCA settings on the MSP server using MSP 3
467. rver Developer amp User Guide For step by step instructions on how to configure the WS2000 and its AP follow the steps below 1 Connect the CAT 5 cable from the network port in the laptop to the WS2000 port 5 or 6 and provide power to the WS2000 2 Connect the AP with a Cat 5 cable into WS2000 port 1 3 Open the web browser to http 192 168 0 1 to view the WS2000 Web Console J NOTE 1 To access the WS2000 Web Console your PC must have Java for Windows Internet Explorer ver 1 4 or later This is available at Java com 2 It is assumed you are configuring the WS2000 using the PC that hosts the UCA server If not make sure the PC is set to DHCP by default IMPORTANT f after loading the Java plug in your IE browser is unable to display Figure E 2 make sure the AN ActiveX control is enabled Go to Tools gt Internet Options gt Security tab and select the Custom Level button Scroll down to ActiveX controls and plug ins and enable the item Run ActiveX Controls amp Plug ins Login in to the WS2000 using the factory default username and password WS2000 Wireless Switch P 355WOF g Release 2 2 3 0 020F Figure E 2 WS2000 Wireless Switch Login e Enter the default User ID admin e Enter the default Password symbol e Click Login e When prompted to change the WS2000 password change symbol to Symbol change the s to upper case S e New Password Symbol Self Contained Pre Built Demo E 7
468. rver Developer 4 User Guide 4 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll to an extension in the list and press Scan Select S When selected the parked call on the extension unparks and the Active Call displays wth 10 54 OM Smith T 0 01 Options End Figure 4 49 Active Call Display J NOTE When a parked call is not picked up within the time configured in the PBX the PBX may transfer the call back to the originating device 5 Press the right soft key to End the call Park Retrieve Troubleshooting Table 4 8 Park Call Retrieve Call Troubleshooting Situation Description Caller Terminates Parked Call If a caller terminates a parked call the UCA server and the CA50 device still treat the call as a parked call When the user navigates to pick up the call a fast busy tone sounds on the device from the PBX The fast busy tone terminates the call on the CA50 and signals the UCA server that the call was picked up The UCA server removes the extension from the parked calls list Calls parked by devices other than e Calls parked on the PBX by devices other than a CA50 are not recognized by the the CA50 UCA server Parked call timeout The timeout duration of parked calls is a configurable parameter on the PBX When a parked call times out the call is diverted back to the device that parked the call e When a parked call times out because the CA50 device is already engaged in conversation the call does not transfer
469. rvice can be used by external programs to send asynchronous messages to logged on CA50 users Alternate Mechanism for Login and Authentication Device user authentication is based on the user information on the UCA server Alternatively customers with an existing database that contains user staff information can use their existing user authentication mechanism Note that the customer s authentication process is used only for authentication purposes other user information must be stored in the UCA database such as the user s group and role In this case the customer can use a Web service with the same signature as that of the UCA Authentication web service and include this in the web config See Customizing the Process Flow on page 11 6 for information on updating web config c Inetpub wwwroot Motorola UCA Client web config lt applicationSettings gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings lt setting name UCACommon_localhost_Authentication serializeAs String gt lt value gt http localhost Motorola UCA Client Authentication Authentication asmx lt value gt lt setting gt lt UCACommon Properties Settings gt lt applicationSettings gt Similarly if a customer s database contains the console users typically administrators information the customer must provide an alternative web service similar to the one UCA uses for console user authentication in order to use this for console user authentication To do this t
470. rwarding feature The Phonebook description then displays in the phone book when the user is not logged in 4 Select a Group from the drop down list menu 5 Select an Extension Type from the drop down list menu 6 Click Save to store the user or Cancel to terminate the session UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 11 Editing the Properties Connected to a UCA Phone Extension To edit the properties connected to a UCA phone extension in the UCA server 1 Click the Phone and Walkie Talkie tab gt Phone Extension Pool tab 2 Click the phone extension to edit from the list of UCA extensions in the Extension column see Figure 9 6 on page 9 8 The Phone Extension Detail window displays Phone and Wialkie T alkie Phone Extension Pool gt Phone Extension Detail Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries a 1 Phone Extension Detail Extension 200 Group Bath PBX Password 1234 Extension Type D Figure 9 10 Phone Extension Detail Window 3 For SCCP the SCCP Phone Extension Detail window displays Phone Extension Pool Phone Extension Detail Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Phone Extension Detail Extension Too Group Electrical PBS Password 1234 Extension Type 5 Static Owner External ID 1104 Phonebook Description Joe Smith Always Show True SCCP MAC 111111111111 Figure 9 11 SCCP Phone Extension Detail Window
471. s Error occurred while cleaning a user extension assignment during phone extension maintenance Refer to the NT Event Log for more details SCCP Mac already exists it must be unique A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get the SCCP MAC Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to Get the SCCP MAC Info Refer to the NT Event log for more details A data layer exception occurred while attempting to Set a Phone Extension Invalid Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to Set a Phone Extension Invalid Refer to the NT Event log for more details A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get the PetID of the User Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to get the PetID of the User Refer to the NT Event log for more details Update of extension status failed Update of extension status failed A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a phone extension status Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to update a phone extension status Refer to the NT Event log for more details An error occurred while attempting to release a phone extension by ownerlD A data layer exception occurred while attempting to release a phone extension by owner ID Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while at
472. s Phone Extension Table 14 26 Phone Extension Errors Error Code Description 73011 Exception occurred while adding phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73021 Exception occurred while getting phone extension info Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73031 Exception occurred while updating phone extension info Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73041 Exception occurred while removing phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73051 Exception occurred while getting a list of available extensions for a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73061 Exception occurred while assigning an extension to a specific user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73071 Exception occurred while getting an extension assignment Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Table 14 26 Error Code Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages 14 35 Phone Extension Errors Description 73081 Exception occurred while removing an extension assignment Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73091 Exception occurred while updating an extension assignment Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73101 Exception occurred while getting the static extension list for phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73111 Exception occurred while getting all static extensions in a given range for the phone book Refer to the NT Event Log for mo
473. s 0 Debug 1 Flow 2 Status 3 Warning 4 Error Logging levels of 0 and 1 result in large amounts of logging data saved in the database These levels are not recommended for normal system operation They should be used with caution and only in cases where an issue was reported and is being monitored and investigated by Motorola The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect 6 50 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 6 2 System Settings Continued Setting Description Phone Gateway Port Phone Gateway Protocol Type Phone Gateway SCCP Device Type Phone Peer2Peer Enable Phone Peer2Peer Port Phonebook Ranges BaseRangeCount Phonebook Ranges MaxNonRangeSize Phonebook Ranges MaxRangeSize Phonebook RecentCalls Interval Phonebook SelectableGroups ShowaAll System AllowDynamicWhenStaticFails System DefaultLocation System Device Activity Threshold System Language LanguagelD System Logging Level Port for the phone gateway used for PBX communications The protocol and type of gateway with which the phone client attempts to communicate Device Type set to 7960 Enable direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls for CA50 devices Device phone calls do not utilize a PBX if this is enabled The port on which to make direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls The star
474. s follows e DesktopNoCall 8 The user is at the desktop and not on a phone call e AppNoCall The user is running a Web application and is not on a phone call e DesktopCallActive The user is at the desktop and is on a phone call e AppCallActive The user is running a Web application and is on a phone call e DesktopQuietMode The user has entered quiet mode from the desktop e AppQuietMode The user has entered quiet mode while running a Web application e DesktopCallOnHold The user is on a call at the desktop and is on hold e AppCallOnHold The user is on a call on hold while running a Web application Menus and actions can be assigned to keys for each of the client states These menus are accessible to the user through the keys while the device is in that client state Key and menu assignments must be thought through a bit For example for the AppCallActive client state is recommended to assign a menu to a key that presents a Hang up menu option As mentioned earlier keys defined by the Web application take precedence over keys defined in the lt MenuStates gt area of the profile The CA50 is a dual purpose device communication and Web browser The UCA Web developer must consider the lt MenuStates gt key assignments when designing a Web application for the CA5O J NOTE Examples of base profiles are found in the following directory in the default UCA server software installation Program Files Motorola UCA Server Profil
475. s for existing profiles e Disable Disable profile Profile remains in the list e Edit Profile Only profiles entered with the Add Profile option can be edited Profiles scanned in with RD bar codes or imported are encrypted and the details cannot be viewed e Connect Connect to this profile e Move Up Move up in the profile list e Move Down Move down in the profile list e Delete Delete profile from registry Note If profile was scanned in or exported a reg key is created on the CASO If this reg key is not deleted the profile remains on the device and appears in the list after a cold boot Rapid Deployment creates the following two reg keys on the CA50 in the Application directory FuPBAPIPluginCBO reg FuPBAPIPluginCBP reg e Export Profiles Export current profiles into reg key s e Import Profiles Import profile reg key s e Adaptor Params Adaptor Type and MAC address of radio e Select 802 11 Band Enable Disable B G and or A band B G only is on by default e Select 802 11d Options Enable Disable 802 11d is on by default e Enable Profile Roaming Profile Roaming is disabled by default e Fusion Version Info Version numbers of the Fusion Components e Save Fusion Log This saves a snapshot of the Fusion log to a file in the Application folder called FusionLog txt Certificates Manage certificates Date and Time Set date time and time zone on the device System Properties View and chang
476. s gt lt MetricsLog URI http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client Metrics asmx options PTT Device OutgoingCall IncomingCall CollectionInterval 60 gt lt DebugLog gt lt Log category WTT level Error gt lt Log category Phone level Error gt lt Log category Agent level Error gt lt Log category Browser level Error gt lt Log category Scanner level Error gt lt DebugLog gt lt MenuStates gt lt State ID 1 Name DesktopNoCall LSKey Menu M L FrontMenu RSKey Phn Bk M L PhoneBook LPHK ey RPHK ey FPTTKev default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 2 Name AppNoCall LSKey Options M L FrontAppMenu RSKey Phn Bk M L PhoneBook LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 3 Name DesktopCallActive LSKey Options M L DeskCallActive RSKey End S L PhoneHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey default SPTTKey default gt lt State ID 4 Name AppCallActive LSKey Options M L AppCallActive RSKey End S b Pho neHangUp LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKeyz default SPTTKey deftault gt lt State ID 5 Name DesktopQuietMode LSKey Exit DND S L QuietMode N RSKey LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey detault SPTTKevyz default 3 lt State ID 6 Name AppQuietMode LSKey Exit DND S L QuietMode N RSKey LPHKey RPHKey FPTTKey z default SPTTKeyz default 3 lt State ID 7 Name DesktopCallOnHold LSKey Options M L DeskCallOnHold RSKey
477. s inserted into a charging cradle it maintains RF communication over the wireless network J NOTE CASO cradles do not support wired ethernet communication B 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Eight Slot Spare Battery Charger This section describes how to use the eight slot spare battery charger to charge up to eight spare batteries J NOTE 1 Only genuine Motorola batteries p n 82 83172 01 should be used with CA50 devices and charging accessories 2 Use only an approved power supply KT 14000 148R output rated 12 Vdc and minimum 3 3 A with AC line cord 23844 00 00 The power supply is certified to EN60950 1 with SELV outputs Use of an alternative power supply invalidates any approval given to this device and may be dangerous Charging LED s Cradle Power Figure B 5 Spare Battery Installation Spare Battery Charging 1 Connect the charger to a power source 2 Insert the spare battery into a spare battery charging well and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact Accessories B 9 Battery Charging Indications An LED is provided for each battery charging well See Table B 3 for charging status indications The battery fully charges in approximately three hours Charging Temperature See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed information LED Indications Table B 3 LED Indications LED Indication Solid Green Spare battery charging is complete So
478. s off Off Vibrate is always off Blink LED changes state between on off for the Blink Vibrate indicator changes state between duration specified in ONDUR and OFFDUR on off for the duration specified in ONDUR and OFFDUR ONDUR Time in milliseconds the LED is on Time in milliseconds the Vibrate is on OFFDUR Time in milliseconds the LED is off Time in milliseconds the Vibrate is off CYCLECOUNT Number of blink cycles Number of Vibrate cycles ONDUR OFFDUR and CYCLECOUNT are application only if the STATE BLINK Sample Business Applications I 5 Enabling the BackLight for HTML Pages To enable a backlight on the CA50 device the following meta tag must be added to the HTML page By default the backlight is disabled on all HTML pages lt meta http equiv bklight content ON gt When the meta tag value is set ON the backlight lights when the page launches Download Files Delete Downloaded Files Download Files to the CA50 Device Upon User Login The UCAClient has the capability to download files from an HTTP server to the CA50 device This feature is useful for downloading custom wav files to use with notification or business applications Information about the types of files to download can be provided in the profile xml as follows lt DownloadFiles DownloadAtStartUp Y gt ank lt File HTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HYTTPURL PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HTTPURL
479. s or terms including a blank or NULL condition Password Admin Administrator sa sysadmin IMPORTANT A strong password cannot be the following terms associated with the installation computer the name AN of the user currently logged onto the machine the machine name A strong password must be more than 8 characters in length and satisfy at least three of the following four criteria It must contain at least one number and must contain at least one non alphanumeric character e g or 12 Change the installer suggested hostname to a DNS reachable hostname or the IP address of the server J NOTE The installer suggests the hostname of the computer as the default DNS reachable hostname This value populates into sample data in the database and other sample files by the installer This is used as part of URLs delivered to the CA50 to be used to access different services on the server The default value that the installer presents should be changed if a CA50 would not be able to resolve the address via DNS This can also be the static IP address of the server to avoid or work around any DNS resolution issues UCA Server 6 35 13 Enter the user name Login ID and a strong password for SQL database access Motorola Installation Wizard Database Server Login Database server requires login credentials to continue WARNING A strong password consisting of at least 8 characters including 3 of the following uppercase lowerc
480. s the caller ID value that gets sent to the gateway and password that is used to register the assigned extension with the PBX Currently the only configurable value is Enable Y to allow phone usage or Enable N to not allow phone usage Additional parameters taken from the UCA console are PhoneRegRetyCount PhoneRegRetryInterval NewPhoneReg RetryCount PBX MAG FACCALLPARK FACCALLPICK PACKETRATE 4 Walkie talkie The walkie talkie element specifies all necessary settings to set up the walkie talkie component for default behavior with this profile The first configurable value is Enable Y to allow walkie talkie usage or Enable N to not allow walkie talkie usage Multicast settings specify the multicast address to which the device should subscribe to receive walkie talkie messages from other devices There are three walkie talkie channel settings XML Profile for Configuration 7 5 e Listen Talk Channel e Users can listen and talk on Listen Talk channels e A channel can be set to Listen Talk by setting the type to T in the user profile under the WTT gt Chlist gt Ch element e The default channel is also Listen Talk A default channel is the channel used in normal mode and it is the channel that a user uses to talk A channel can be set as a default channel by setting the type to Def in the WIT gt Chlist gt Ch element J NOTE One Listen Talk channel must be designated as the default channel for normal mode wa
481. sage or from the user profile The device checks if the notification message has the vibrate indicator If data is available the device vibrates If the notification message has no data for the vibrate the user profile is checked for the information If the profile contains the vibrate information associated with NotifNoCall the device vibrates The information in the notification takes precedence over the profile NotifCallActive The setting defines the alert behavior when receiving a notification message on an active phone call UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile Hoala Tore Winrele Indication Wiebe redaction Hone Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 24 NotifCallActive The behavior of the alerts is the same as NotiNoCall except that the settings in the profile take precedence over the message settings These alerts function only if the NotifAllowOnCallActive is set to Yes This setting is under the device configuration see device configuration page 7 7 AppAlertCallActive The setting defines the receiving a notification alert behavior when the device is already running an application and an active call is in progress The allowed values for tone visible and vibrate indicators are boolean values 8 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide whether the alerts are allowed or not in that state If the tone visible and or vibrate indicator is allowed the behavior of these alerts follo
482. se A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of roles Refer to the NT Event Log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to get a list of roles Refer to the NT Event Log for more details No permissions defined for the specified role A data layer exception occurred while attempting to get a list of permissions for a given role Refer to the NT Event log for more details An exception occurred while attempting to get a list of permissions for a given role Refer to the NT Event log for more details Server Logging Server Logging Errors Description Exception occurred while exporting the Debug Trace Refer to the NT Event log for more details Exception occurred while exporting the Debug Trace Refer to the NT Event log for more details 14 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 21 Server Logging Errors Continued Error Code Description 61561 Database level exception generated while purging Debug Trace 61591 Database level exception generated while purging the Debug Trace 61592 Exception occurred while purging the Debug Trace Refer to the NT Event Log for more details Console Users Table 14 22 Console Users Errors Error Code Description 62031 62034 62035 62036 62037 62061 62062 62063 62064 62091 62092 62131 62161 62191 62192 62193 62231 62261 62262 62291 62292 62293 A data layer exception occurred while attempting c
483. sed name PHNPLACECALL PHNPLACECALL is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to dial the string found in options when the specified key is pressed options 1 192 168 0 22 1720 012345 Dialing string DTMF supported format Options is formatted as follows PBX 0 or P2P 1 extension port DTMF string Where all s must be present even if it is PBX and there is no port or if there is no DTMF string Extension IP address or an actual extension on the PBX Port for P2P DTMF string id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Expert Text to display over the soft key specified in id This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to hang up when on an active phone call input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHONEHANGUP PHONEHANGUP is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to hang up if on an active phone call options This command does not take any parameter id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value HangUp Text to display over the soft key specified in id Commands and Uses J 7 Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Contin
484. sed on and applies to each group listing downstream Return Values The method returns a valid XML menu structure If there are no groups with extensions then it returns an empty menu that the client properly handles GetMenuExtListByGroup This method returns a list of all extensions in the selected group The entries in the returned menu will either place a new call or transfer an existing call Parameters sListType All supported All UCA or External sSortType Name FirstName LastName or Number Return Values The method returns a valid XML menu structure If there are no extensions in the selected group then it will return an empty menu that the client will properly handle 7 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide GetMenuExtRanges This method returns a list of extension ranges according to the parameters The type of range is based on whether the sort order is by number or by a name If the sort order is by number then the ranges will be based on the actual phone extensions If the sort order is by some name then the ranges will be based on the first letter of the name portion specified Parameters sListType UCA sSortType Name FirstName LastName or Number Return Values The method returns a valid XML menu structure If there are no extensions available according to the parameters then it will return an empty menu that the client will properly handle Remarks e If the number of extensions to
485. select remove SQLEXPRESS Database Engine 2 Ensure the check box es in the section of the window labeled Remove SQL Server 2005 common components is not selected For example in Figure 6 69 Workstation Components must NOT be checked 4 Click Next to proceed with the removal of the UCA database engine 5 A window labeled CONFIRMATION and calling out the DATABASE ENGINE UCA appears confirming the uninstall of the UCA database engine 6 44 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 6 Click Finish 7 A Microsoft SQL Server 2005 dialog box displays as the instance of the UCA database engine uninstalls 8 Upon its successful removal the Add or Remove Programs window displays 1 IMPORTANT Option A If you are reloading the same version of the UCA server continue to Action 3 Option B If you are upgrading the UCA server to a newer version STOP HERE the uninstall process is complete Action 3 Validate the Removal of Database Files Containing Customer Data If there were any errors during the UCA server portion of the uninstall process manual cleanup may be required e Use Windows Explorer to navigate to C Program Files Microsoft SQL Serven e There may be multiple MSSQL x folders MSSQL 1 MSSQL 2 etc To determine which folder represented the UCA instance look in MSSQL n MSSQL data for UCA mdf UCA log ldf SampleLookup mdf and SampleLookup log ldf These should be the only files in the folder If so delet
486. ser accounts are created on the server application The login bar code sheet must be generated by a third party application e Numeric input login CA50 users enter a unique four digit number that is tied to a specific user account Input is Supported through a spin box Ul J NOTE The numeric input can be a number from 1 to 5 digits If a device must be redeployed an administrator must access the CA Menu and launch Rapid Deployment or perform another deployment option See Powering On the CA50 Pre deployment on page 3 11 for information about pre deployment See Appendix F Rapid Deployment for information about loading software onto the CA50 and configuring the device for use Power On 1 The CA50 device powers on when a charged battery is installed see nserting the Battery on page 3 4 lf a charged battery was already installed and the device is put into sleep mode press any key to wake the device J NOTE f the device does not power on the battery charge may be low or depleted See Charging Batteries on page 3 8 2 The Motorola splash screen displays during boot The device ID and boot type also display XX OS version Figure 4 1 Motorola Splash Screen J NOTE Because login options are server configurable see Login Options on page 4 2 an automatic login can be enabled on the server and the screen samples that follow may not display at login 1 The device attempts to connect to the network n
487. ser logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide UpdateRole This method updates a role s information in the UCA system The role s information is updated in the B Roles table in the UCA database int UpdateRole string sStoreNumber Rolelnfo rolelnfo string ipAddr string sUser ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store Number rolelnfo Role Information info class that describes the organizational role ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required sUser UserID of user making WS call optional used for logging Pass WSStatus when user logging is not required UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 25 GetRolelnfo This method retrieves role information from the UCA system public int GetRolelnfo string sStoreNumber string sRoleToken string ipAddr string sUser ref Rolelnfo roleinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber Store number sRole Token Role ID Identifier for the Role joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging
488. serdata 11 8 11 34 11 40 phone book web service 7 19 removedeviceuser 0000 e eee 11 32 removeextension 11 15 setdeviceuserpin 11 34 updatedeviceuser 11 33 updateextension 2 0 0 11 16 metricslog profile elements 7 11 microphone ca BA KG ENG ee ed aw 4 8 MUO Kanan a wan AA AA ARKA NG AALAGA 4 8 walkie talkie 0 00 0000 3 2 4 9 mounting brackets B 13 B 15 MSP license act sa ce apa wy a ve acd mse tw Dh wre 12 1 PFOVISION ce eee 12 1 rapid deployment bar codes 12 2 generate 0 ce eee D 16 SCAN apo Dana boa os we by ee a ee oe F 1 server function aaa 3 4 software a Gerd AA nd eee 1 4 12 1 staging 2 eee eee ee 6 53 9 47 12 1 staging amp localization 4 12 6 troubleshooting 000 cee eee ee 14 4 IN ANE UY ma sence oak Ba os eae ee a Oh A ws jii multi slot battery charger B 2 B 8 multi slot charger 0 0 0 c eee aes B 2 B 3 mute key quiet mode key 0000 eee eee eee 3 3 N network connectivity generate wireless profile 3 9 DIO 2c bose pees yee ae ee ee oe 4 27 RF network optimization 4 31 signal strength 4 22 4 23 signal strength recommendation 3 10 wireless security protocols
489. sers Add To List For Delete Returned 52 results Find First Name 4 EZE External UserID First Name Last Name Common Hame Role Status C 10027318 Kevin Smith Kevin Smith Sales Active 10037317 John Doe John Doe Sales Active C 10047316 Jane Doe Jane Doe Sales Active C 10007310 Abigail Jones Abigail Jones Sales Active oO 10057315 Bill Gordon Bill Gordon Manager Active C 10067314 Joan Walker Joan Walker FrontEnd Active O 10017319 Anna Carter Anna Carter Sales Active O 10077313 Dave Miles Dave Miles FrontEnd Active O 1100 Steve Nielsen Steve Nielsen Sales Active O 1101 Luther Nelson Luther Nelson Sales Active oO 1102 Fred Smith Fred Smith Sales Active O 1103 Nick Fischer Nick Fischer Sales Active O 1104 George Lloyd George Lloyd Sales Active O 1105 Robert Davidson Robert Davidson Sales Active O 1106 Chris Smith Chris Smith Sales Active O 1107 Greg Davis Greg Davis Sales Active O 1108 Bryan Green Bryan Green Sales Active O 1109 Mike Donovan Mike Donovan Sales Active O 1110 David Krause David Krause Sales Active F 1111 Laura Thompson Laura Thompson Sales Active 123 Figure 9 56 A Users View 9 54 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 2 Click the check boxes to the left of each entry to delete Device User Accounts All Users Recent Users All Users Add To List For Delete Returned 52 results Find First Name v External UserID First Name Last Name Common Name Role St
490. server installed Error 27506 Error executing SQL script _uca_CreateDB sal Line 8 CREATE DATABASE failed Some file names listed could not be created Check previous errors Operating System Server 2003 Server 2003 XP Pro SP2 Server 2003 XP Pro SP2 Server 2003 XP Pro SP2 Server 2003 XP Pro SP2 Server 2003 Cannot load server software on a 2003 server running active directory that operates as a domain controller Permission error Firewall on the UCA server is not turned off or CA50s cannot connect to the Server IP address through the wireless infrastructure Incorrect UCA server IP address setup using MSP 3 1 Stage Profile for RD Client MSP Client is not enabled on the device A policy that contains an updated version of the UCA client application does not exist on the MSP server Password chosen for sa and or database login is not strong the password does not meet Windows policy requirements because it is not complex enough The password must exceed eight characters and contain three of the following uppercase lowercase numeric and non alphanumeric The database files UCA mdf UCA log ldf SampleLookup mdf and SampleLookup log ldf were not deleted from a previous install Solution See UCA Server Requirements and Setup on page 7 Active server pages and ASP NET v2 0 50727 must be set to allow for Web service extensions in IIS Ensure firewall is turned off on the UCA
491. server or allows CA50s to connect to the Server IP address through the wireless infrastructure Try to ping UCA server IP address with another wireless device Confirm that the correct UCA IP address is setup correctly in MSP 3 1 Verify the MSP Client is enabled on the device Verify a policy exists on the MSP server that contains an updated version of the UCA client application Uninstall UCA instance of SQL Server 2005 from Add Remove programs Start UCA server install again using strong passwords Uninstall the UCA instance of SQL Server 2005 from Add Remove programs Remove or relocate UCA and Sample Lookup databases and logs from C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 2 MSSQL DATA Reinstall the UCA server Table 14 1 Operating System XP Pro SP2 and Server 2003 Symptom Reinstalling on a target machine that had a previous version of the server installed Error 27506 Error executing SQL script _ucaSample_CreateDB sal Line 4 Cannot create file C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL D ata SampleLookup mdb because it already exists XP Pro SP2 Server 2003 Reinstalling on a target machine that had a previous version of the server installed Error 27502 displays could not connect to Microsoft SQL Server lt hostname gt Login failed for user Sa XP Pro SP2 and Server 2003 SQL Server 2005 install fails Maintenance Troubleshooting and Error Messages T
492. settings and the menus that user can access Some menus are not downloaded at login time but are only available by making Web service calls These are especially important for dynamic data such as phone lists since those lists contain only extensions that are currently logged in J NOTE The UCA client application cannot be launched from the CA50 CA Menu until a valid UCA server address is loaded into the device For details about how to load this information onto a CA50 see Appendix F Rapid Deployment Once a UCA server IP address is loaded the CA Menu automatically launches the UCA client after a reboot J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual UCA Client Application on the CA50 5 3 Page intentionally blank 5 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Chapter 6 UCA Server Overview This chapter provides information about the UCA server software and the UCA server database Valuable topics in this chapter include UCA server overview page 6 7 Theory of operation page 6 6 Minimum server hardware requirements page 6 7 Server software requirements page 6 7 UCA server installation page 6 9 Uninstalling UCA serv
493. siness applications see page C 12 Scanner configuration is implemented as proprietary HTML elements in the browser J NOTE Chinese 2 of 5 and Decode Pointer configuration is not supported C 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Supported Code Types The CA50 supports the following code types UPC E0O UPC A UPCE1 EAN 8 EAN 13 Trioptic39 Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code11 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Webcode Chinese 2 of 5 Decode Pointer GS1 DataBar 14 GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Enabled Code Types The CA50 has the following code types enabled by default UPC E0O UPC A MSI EAN 8 EAN 13 Codabar Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 C 3 Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies Configuring Symbologies Proprietary HTML elements allow business application developers to configure symbologies based on the application requirement The UCA client supports proprietary HTML elements to enable the scanner disable the scanner and scan and read bar code data UCA client also supports configuring the scanner symbologies and their parameters The supported proprietary HTML elements or custom meta tags follow the same convention as the proprietary HTML elements implemented in the Symbol Pocket Browser SPB Table C 7 lists the custom meta tags to use to configure symbologies and their associated parameter properties Table C 1 Custom Meta
494. sisting of at least 8 characters including 3 of the following uppercase lowercase numeric and non alphanumeric is REQUIRED Enter STRONG sa password to be used for Authentication of SOL Server 2005 UCA AA Confirm or change DNS resolvable hostname to access this machine SYMBOL 9BC5E TBH InstallShield lt Back Next gt Figure 6 5 SQL Server 2005 Information 8 Enter a strong password to use for SA account J NOTE The password entered in this field is the system administrator sa password The sa account in SQL Server 2005 has full access and read write permissions to all DB instances It is used during the installation process and for future upgrades This password should be recorded and retained in a safe location by the integrator or customer IMPORTANT Microsoft Strong Password Guidelines for SQL Server 2005 authentication AN Strong passwords are not readily guessed by a person and are not easily hacked using a computer program Strong passwords cannot use prohibited conditions or terms including a blank or NULL condition Password Admin Administrator sa sysadmin IMPORTANT A strong password cannot be the following terms associated with the installation computer the name AN of the user currently logged onto the machine the machine name A strong password must be more than 8 characters in length and satisfy at least three of the following four criteria It must contain at least one number and must contain
495. st calls are initiated and controlled from the UCA client application running on the CA50 device The VoIP capabilities provide a means for initiating the call via an IP address or extension depending on the protocol chosen and if the system set up requires PBX support Voice unicast calls are treated as a higher priority than walkie talkie multicast communication At initial login availability of the UCA server is required for voice unicast calls to function For additional information see CA50 Capabilities with an Offline UCA Server on page 6 58 J NOTE When the phone book is previously viewed from a CA50 it caches the last accessed phone book information If the UCA server is temporarily not accessible then CA50 can access this cached phone book information within the device itself Volume control of the output of a voice call is performed by a key press and can only be adjusted while in a voice call See Client Settings on page 9 40 for volume keys functionality J NOTE For a detailed overview of voice unicast calls see Voice Call Unicast Functionality on page 1 3 Communication Hierarchy On Voice Unicast Call When a user is on a voice unicast call e Walkie talkie does not function Incoming walkie talkie voice is not played and Walkie Talkie keys are inactive e When walkie talkie scan mode is active before a voice unicast call it is automatically re enabled after the voice unicast call ends e When walkie
496. st mods the F address and Port are used koi mulicadt karsmissong wakis talkiscommunicalong 35 wel as the Pait movement method Selling Charmelnecremert Pol causes channels bo ba nctemented based on diferent pails where as Channel nc2emenis P is incremerted based on IP sddiesses Listen Orly Shore Binadcast Listen Oriy Cus Regus Dalai Salas SCO FrotE rd Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 11 New Channel 8 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 3 Remove the channel by selecting the check box and clicking Remove Table 8 2 Channel Settings Field Description Channel Number Defines the channel number Channel Type There are four available channel types Only one channel can be selected as default Channel Name Channel Name displays on the device menu User can switch channels by selecting a channel name Download Files Settings The Download File settings provides files to select from an HTTP server to download to the CA50 device This feature is useful when downloading files that can be used with notification or business applications UCA Profile Builder New Profile Genoa Files Download At Start Up Hup URL hilp servat samecompang com Dismiss way Download At Startup Path on Derice VAapolcstion Download Waw Overaite O J Few Food Hip URL Path On device hip A serea SOCOM aA con Riesporgo may AppicalonDoeannad Yay hip A serven samaoompan com Thanks wary Anpic
497. stination Folder Installshield Figure 6 7 Installation Destination Window 12 Choose the destination directory in which to install the UCA server software The default directory is C Program Files Motorola UCA Server UCA Server 6 15 13 Click Next to continue The Start Copying Files window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files Curent Settings UCA Server v2 0 Destination Directory C Program Files Motorola UCA Server Database instance UCA AA Client Lanugage Englishfen US fasta Beck S neo Figure 6 8 Start Copying Files Window J NOTE Ensure that the settings match the summary and client The installation process may take some time to complete Command windows flashing is typical during the installation process 14 Click Back to change settings or click Next to proceed with the installation The InstallShield begins to extract files and the install runs without further intervention Extracting Files Extracting File setup program filessmicrosott sql To Directory co 493bb8 054f7 3e2f4bd4be01 520 ine Figure 6 9 Extracting Files IMPORTANT This installation requires Internet Information Services IIS If IIS is not installed on the host machine the installation aborts 15 The SQL Server 2005 Express is installed Figure 6 10 to Figure 6 16 display in se
498. stopped 1 IMPORTANT The installation takes approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on whether or not NET UCA Server 6 25 A Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Pa Installing Prerequisites Installs software components required prior to installing SQL bi i Install Cance Figure 6 30 nstalling Prerequisites Setup Status microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup pelea Figure 6 31 SQL Server Setup 6 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Motorola Installation Wizard Setup Status UCA Server Version 2 0 is configuring your new software installation C Web References GetSysVariablew ebS ervice GetSysV arable wsdl Installs Figure 6 32 SQL Server Setup Status c CAWINDOWS system32 cmd exe Configuring ASP Net Encryption Adding ACL for access to the RSA Key container Succeeded Adding ACL for access to the RSA Key container Succeeded Processing Motorola UCA ServerManagement Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Processing Client Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Encrypting configuration section Succeeded Processing UcaConsole Encrypting configuration section Figure 6 33 Adding ACL Microsoft ASP NET 2 0 AJAX Extensions 1 0 ald Please wait while Windows configures Microsoft ASP NET 2 0 AJAX Extensions 1 0 Gathering required information TTTTI
499. system The user s information is updated in the B_USER table in the UCA database int SetDeviceUserPIN string sStoreNumber string sUser string sPIN string ipAddr ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber User s store number sUser Reference to a user s login ID sPIN User password joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11 35 GetDeviceUserData This method retrieves user information from the UCA system The user s information is updated in the Userlnfo class passed to the method int GetDeviceUserData string sStoreNumber string sUser string ipAddr ref Userinfo userinfo ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber User s store number sUser User s login ID ipAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required Userlnfo A reference to a Userlnfo class that describes the user WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful When successful Userlnfo is populated with the specified user s information Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log 11 36 CA50 U
500. t Appendix H UCA Server Backup and Restore Adds CA50 802 11a band support CA menu options Appendix Business Applications Supplement Appendix J Commands and Command Usage Table of Contents PASIS asses ee cape E peat cee NAA ANG II WA AI IY AA AA AA il Maa iii PCC SSS OCS sorire unis coe aiena AEA a be habe A E A E EEE NEEE HI ADO Server SOMW ANC ana AGE nka GT EG AA NAINA iii ROVIO FI SOY aaa E AA AA ispel antasiaun IV ONAA xvii About This Guide CA50 Config ratiornS AA xviii SMa IE WSSU ONS carats cars a AA E xviii Notational Conventions a XX Related Documents and SOMW ANC L A na Aka AA XX Serice INONMA NON aaa DNA NANG GA XX Chapter 1 Overview ONE NON aa eco pe nA AD NA YAAD AG AA aloesaeeceacenes 1 1 CA50 Features a 1 2 Bar Code Scanning Functionality a 1 2 Messaging Paging Functionality 1 3 Walkie Talkie Multicast Functionality aa 1 3 Voice Call Unicast Functionality 2 22 Xa 1 3 Components in the CA50 Solution Kama AA AA 1 4 Quick Startup Guide Overview 2 a 1 4 Quick Startup GUNS sssrin E AA 1 5 Chapter 2 Development and Deployment Checklist 1AE A 2 1 Steps in the Development and Deployment Checklist a 2 1 Overview of the CA50 Solution 2 aa 2 2 otep L UCA Server MISCO sares EE aE aaa Ei 2 2 Vi CA50 UCA Cli
501. t Calls To enable dialing without a keypad the server maintains a dynamic phone book of extensions that are delivered to the CA50 upon request Voice unicast calls are placed and transferred from the phone book via menu options Walkie Talkie Communication When a profile that specifies walkie talkie channels is downloaded to a CA50 no further UCA server interaction is required to enable walkie talkie communication The phone book is not used when communicating via walkie talkie mode Delivery of Text and Commands to a Device Enables text and commands from external and system sources to be routed to CA5Os Metrics Collection The server can be configured to collect CA50 usage metrics such as the following number of walkie talkie communications voice unicast calls and their duration In addition battery level signal strength and time in Do not disturb mode are also collected Console for UCA Server Setup and Maintenance A Web based console is provided for server setup and maintenance UCA Server 6 5 Demo Solution The CA50 demo solution allows a user to easily showcase all the major CA50 UCA server functionality e Walkie talkie communication e Voice unicast calls without a PBX e Price lookup business application e HRA business application e Stock check business application e Item locationing business application This demo includes all the documentation and bar codes required to configure and demonstrate t
502. t amp Integration Tool kit 1 The UCA server uses a database to store the data for configuring maintaining and tracking the following functionality Figure 6 20 UCA Server Software Readme 6 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Installing Demo Version To install the Demo version of the UCA server software 1 Start the UCA Server Software from the CA50 CD Wee Motorola UCA Server Demo Version 2 0 Setup is preparing the bi InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the program setup process Please wait Extracting Motorola UCA Server Demo Version 2 0 msi Figure 6 21 UCA Server Demo 2 From the CD main menu double click the UCA Server 2 0 5 demo exe The Welcome window displays Motorola Installation Wizard UCA Server Demo Software v2 0 Thank you for choosing Motorola for your enterprise mobility solution This installation wizard will guide you through the steps necessary to setup the Motorola UCA Server Demo Softwareon your computer To continue click next InstallShield Figure 6 22 Welcome UCA Server 6 21 3 Click Next to continue The Customer Information window displays Motorola Installation Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Company Name AA My Company Install this application for Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me My Name sv stig lt Back Net Coca Figure 6 23 Custom
503. t Aetry Interval UCA Exit Barcode New Reg Rety Court Hew Profile Creation Figure 8 18 Client Settings Table 8 8 Client Settings Field Description Time Format Select time format from the drop down list the time format displayed on the device Menu Timeout The amount of time in seconds that a menu displays without a key press Pop Error Timeout The amount of time in seconds an error message displays Silent Mode Timeout The amount of time in seconds that the UCA client application mutes after pressing Mute 8 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 8 8 Client Settings Continued Field Description DND Timeout The amount of time in seconds that the UCA client application stays in Do not disturb mode WebService Response Timeout The amount of time a Web service call stays connected waiting for a response WebService PopupTime The number of seconds to wait for a response from the server before displaying a Waiting for Server message Logout Barcode Set the Logout Barcode value to allow the user to scan a bar code to logout Set this value to to disable log off by bar code scanning Note that when enabled scanning a bar code to log off works only when the user is logged in UCA Exit Barcode Set the UCA Exit Barcode value to allow the user to scan a bar code to exit the UCA client application Set this value to to disable exiting the UCA client application by bar code scanning
504. t Generated Error Messages Error Set Error Message Description Phone Related Errors Destination timeout A timeout occurred waiting for the destination to answer the continued on next phone page Invalid call handle The handle used to access the phone subsystem component is invalid Contact help desk or technical support for assistance Invalid state The phone call operation is not appropriate for the current state of the phone subsystem The phone subsystem may still be functional depending on the operation attempted Report problem to help desk Invalid init String The initialization string for the phone subsystem is invalid Check user profile and UCA server setup Report problem to help desk or technical support Destination invalid The destination phone number or extension is invalid when placing a call or transferring a call Check extensions on the UCA server If problem persists report problem to help desk or technical support Not initialized An attempt was made to perform a phone subsystem operation without it being properly initialized Check UCA server settings for phone If problem persists report problem to help desk or technical support Not registered The phone subsystem is not registered to a PBX server or for direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call functionality Check UCA server and PBX Server settings If problem persists report problem to help desk or to technical support No call exis
505. t fully implemented at this time and the SerialNo is invalid MAC The MAC address of the device PlatformInfo This is the platform information obtained from the Windows CE API SystemParameterslInfo function Response Format The Web server is responsible for the content of the Response header The Response body must be a well formed HTML document for the UCA client application browser to parse CA50 Business Application Development 10 5 HTML Elements The UCA client application browser provides rendering of HTML Web pages for both standard HTML elements and proprietary HTML elements Virtual non visible buttons are used to provide a way for the UCA client application browser to send event data such as function key presses scanner data etc to the server to be processed Given the limited user interface requirements and the display size only a small subset of HTML selectors tags and attributes are applicable The UCAClient s physical display size is 64 x 96 pixels The intent is that the server sends preformatted text inserting spaces as needed to make columns line up Standard HTML Elements As mentioned earlier given the display size of the CA50 device most standard HTML elements are not applicable for business applications being run by the CA50 device For the most part graphical controls buttons drop down lists scrolling lists visible input fields etc hyperlinks frames tables style sheets and formatting ta
506. t key during the boot There are three ways to perform a cold boot Use the Up and Down keys and select Cold Boot from the CA Menu or e Press and hold the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously until the screen displays the characters shown in Figure 4 12 When these characters display release the Mute and Scan Select S keys Failure to release these keys re initiates a cold boot ea Figure 4 12 Cold Boot Display or e Remove and reinsert the battery 4 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Waking the CA50 When the device is in sleep mode Suspended wake the device by pressing any key Accessing the CA Menu To access the CA Menu when an application and or network settings are already loaded on a CA50 for example after the CA50 is deployed in a store environment 1 Warm boot the device Press and hold the Mute and Scan Select S keys simultaneously for button locations see page 3 2 until a blank screen displays Release the buttons while the red LEDs are flashing This takes approximately 3 seconds 2 IMMEDIATELY WHILE THE RED LED IS STILL FLASHING press and hold the left soft key until the CA Menu screen displays DO NOT RELEASE the left soft key until the CA Menu displays and remains on the display for 5 seconds For details about the CA Menu see CA Menu on page 3 12 CA50 Modes of Operation 4 19 Out of Box CA Menu Options Table 4 6 lists the out of box m
507. tClient gt lt Menu gt Sample Business Applications l 3 Launching a Business Application on UCAClient Startup In this example the developer can provide an option to launch a business application when the user logs into the UCAClient No user action is needed When the user logs in the business application displays To allow the developer to customize the URL to launch an entry is provided in the profile xml called AutoLaunchHotLink see below The attribute URL should contain the URL of the business application to launch lt Desktop gt lt Link type DefaultScan URL from DB gt lt Link typer UpHotlink URL gt lt Link type DownHotLink URL gt lt link Cyoe FPTTHothink URL gt lt Link type SPTTHotLink URL gt lt Link type AutoLaunchHotLink URL gt lt Desktop gt XSD changes required for developers cxs complexType name LinkType gt lt xs attribute name type use required gt cxs simpleTypes lt xs restriction base xs NMTOKEN gt cxs enumeration value DefaultScan gt lt xs enumeration value DownHotLink gt cxs enumeration value FPTTHotLink gt cxs enumeration value SPTTHotLink gt cxs enumeration value UpHotLink gt lt xs enumeration value AutoLaunchHotLink gt lt xS restriction gt c xs simpleTypes lt xs attribute gt lt xs attribute name URL type xs string use required gt lt xs complexType gt 1 4 CA50 UCA Client amp S
508. talkie single channel mode is active before the voice unicast call it is automatically re enabled after the voice unicast call ends e Business or other application notifications play based on the user profile configuration Notification tones play through the receiver Any screen data related to the notification is displayed on the screen e A second or additional incoming voice unicast calls do not come through and the caller receives a busy signal when no PBX is involved If a PBX is so configured the second call could go to voice mail Off Voice Unicast Call e Incoming walkie talkie activities play e Incoming business or other application notifications play CA50 Modes of Operation 4 37 Standard Non PBX Calls The CA50 device may make voice unicast calls to other CA50 devices without the use of a PBX These are direct CA50 to CA50 IP based calls The UCA server is required to place a call from a CA50 In order to place a call the CA50 must use a dynamically accessed phone book located on the UCA server The UCA server dynamically managed phone book downloaded at the initiation of each voice call displays only logged on users J NOTE When the phone book is previously viewed from a CA50 it caches the last accessed phone book information If the UCA server is temporarily not accessible then CA50 can access this cached phone book information within the device itself PBX Calls The integration of an IP PBX into a CA50
509. te The Create User window displays Device User Accounts All Users gt Create UCA User Recent Users 1 General User Details First Name Sales NY Active v 2 User Groups Available r Selectable Managers These groups are selectable upon logging onto the system Bath r Electrical Garden Dept Head New Hire Cashiers Lot Lumber Seasonal Serice Desk Other Permenent Paging These groups are permently assigned to the user Figure 9 20 Create User Window 2 Enter in First Name Last Name Common Name and External User ID in the appropriate text boxes J NOTE The External User ID is the bar code a user scans to log in to the UCA server 3 Select a Role from the drop down list menu 4 Select a Status from the drop down list menu 5 Add Selectable and Permanent assignments for the user by selecting an item in the Available list and clicking Assign to add the item to the appropriate assignment category If an incorrect assignment was added to a group click X to delete J NOTE The set of Selectable Groups allows a user to select a primary group at login The set of Permanent Groups allows a user to always display as part of a specific group All users must be assigned to at least one group selectable or permanent 6 Click Save to store the user or Cancel to terminate the session UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 21
510. te CA50 LED lights only when the device is in cradle Charge in progress Solid red Charge complete Solid green When the AC power cord is removed LED turns off Charge error Red blink No AC power Off LED Indications Notification Indications The device LED indications on the notification message are configurable through profile as well as from the messaging API See SendNotification on page 11 26 Note All LED indications are on the CA50 device unless otherwise noted CA50 Modes of Operation 4 11 Audio Indications Table 4 4 CA50 Audio Indications Event Audio Status Walkie Talkie Indications Start Walkie Talkie Start walkie talkie communication transmit tone communication transmit Start Walkie Talkie Start walkie talkie communication transmit tone communication receive Voice Unicast Call Indications Receive a call Ring tone end user configurable Make a call Ringing tone via receiver Busy Busy tone via receiver Scanning Indications Active scanning laser on No sound Successful decode Successful decode tone Network Indications Connecting to network server No sound Connected to UCA server Connection tone Connection failure Single error tone No connection lost connection Single error tone Battery low indicator Plays an audio file configurable in the profile Power Indications Low battery Beeps every 60 seconds when the battery is 10 percent or lower Screen Indi
511. te File Description Role bpaSales xml BPA 1 Sales Sales bpaFrontEnd xml BPA 2 Front End Front End bpaManager xml BPA 3 Mar Store 2 Manager Figure 9 25 Profile Management View UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 27 Create an Associated Base Profile To create an associated base profile to a Role entry in the UCA server 1 Click the Profile Management tab gt Profile Associations tab gt Create The Profile Association Create window displays Profile Management Profile Associations gt Profile Association Create Profile Associations 1 Profile Association Details Template File bpaFrontEnd xml v Description Role none k Group none k Figure 9 26 Profile Association Create Window 2 Select a template from the Template File drop down list menu The template is an actual base profile XML file J NOTE Templates are found in the directory specified by the system setting System Profile Template Path 3 Enter a description in the Description text box 4 Selecta role to associate with this profile from the Role drop down list menu 5 Select a group to associate with this profile from the Group drop down list menu 6 Click Save to store the group or Cancel to terminate the session 9 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Editing an Associated Base Profile To edit an associated base profile to a Role entry i
512. ted actual caller ID Cisco Call Manager Caller gets a call progress tone from PBX If called account is setup with coverage path on the PBX the call is forwarded to the coverage path If the called CA50 keeps the current call caller hears the call progress tone until timeout setup on PBX or the caller disconnects the call One step blind transfer If the call is transferred between CA50s both ends of the CA50 show the updated actual caller ID 4 42 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 4 7 PBX Calls versus Standard Non PBSX Calls Continued H 3232 P2P Function H 323 CallPark e CA50 whose call Call was parked is put on Retrieve hold CA50 who parks call gets prompt tone du du du from PBX and then auto hang up Other CA50 units in the same group department get vibration notification User can either pickup the call or dismiss it After the parked call is retrieved the caller ID displayed on the screen is ID of the parked number not the actual caller ID N A N A N A Cisco Call Manager CA50 whose call was parked is put on hold CA50 who parks call gets prompt tone from PBX and then auto hang up Other CA50 units in the same group department get vibration notification User can either pickup the call or dismiss it After retrieved the parked call the actual caller ID shows on the screen Browsing the Phone Book
513. tem Webservice CallManager URI System Webservice CallPark URI WT Base MCAddress WT Base Port WT ChannellncrementMethod Time in minutes between checks for stale UCA user sessions UCA session timeout in minutes Command Port for the Media Relay Server This setting may be used in future versions IP address for the Media Relay Server Command Port for the Media Relay Multicast address for System MC Notif Channel Text Only Multicast port for System MC Notif Channel Text Only Path to profile repository on server This setting specifies a local path on the server s hard drive where the base XML profile files and profile schema are retrieved from by the UCA Authentication Process Path to folder for XML schema to be used for profile validation Path to the folder that contains the user profile templates Path to the folder that contains profile builder wizard workspaces The path for resource files read only URL link to Motorola MSP Stage IP address of the UCA server Base URI to Call Manager Web service UCA phone book Base URI to Call Park Web service Base multicast IP address used for walkie talkie audio Base port address used for walkie talkie audio Describes the method used for changing walkie talkie channels Values are e Port e IP address The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect
514. tempting to release a phone extension by Owner ID Refer to the NT Event log for more details 14 26 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide User Authentication Table 14 16 User Authentication Errors Error Code Description 55031 A data layer exception occurred during user authentication 55033 The specified user was not found in the UCA database 55034 The user is a UCA user but does not have an active status 55061 The specified user was not found in the UCA database 55066 A data layer exception occurred while getting user data Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55067 An exception occurred while getting user data Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55091 The specified user is already registered as a CA50 device user 55094 No group specified for the user A user must be belong to at least one group 55096 A data layer exception occurred while adding a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55097 An exception occurred while adding a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55132 An exception occurred while removing a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55133 A data layer exception occurred while removing a user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 55134 Cannot remove a logged on user 55135 The specified user was not found in the UCA database 55136 Could not remove the user from the UCA database 55137 Could not remove the user from the UCA database 5
515. tended period of time to prevent the battery from depleting Ensure the power mode is set to Max Power Save This parameter is set through the scanning of MSP generated Rapid Deployment bar codes See pages 72 7 and F 7 e Use Ring mode versus Vibrate mode Ring mode consumes less power than Vibrate mode e Disable the vibrate indicator by modifying the user XML profile in the Alert element RecvCallNoCall within the Alerts node The RecvCallNoCall element must have a valid token for the value of the Visiblelndicator attribute and an empty string for value of the Vibratelndicator attribute Example lt Alerts gt lt Alert Event RecvCallNoCall tone Application Wav NewMsg wav Visiblelndicator RedSlowBlink Vibratelndicator gt lt Alerts gt e Use the earbud when possible versus the CA50 internal speaker use of an earbud consumes less power than using the CA50 internal speaker e Backlight The backlight is a contributor to battery usage Excessive backlight usage can contribute to reducing run time The backlight can be modified using the UCA server Web Console System Settings gt Client Backlight Level see System Settings on page 9 37 e Suspend the CA50 by putting it into sleep mode V Note When in sleep mode CA50 power consumption is significantly reduced but not eliminated In this mode the CA50 can remain out of a charger for approximately 48 hours before requiring a recharge Fo
516. the File option The Select File screen displays 5 On the Select File screen navigate to a file to play and press Scan Select to select the highlighted file The AudSamp Play screen displays the selected file File LASER WAY 6 Scroll down to Play and press Scan Select to play the wav file When the Repeat option is set to Off the selected audio file plays one time all 4udSamp ig File LASER WAY 7 Ifthe Repeat option is set to Off scroll down to Repeat and press Scan Select to toggle Repeat ON and OFF Set Repeat to On ail AudSamp Audio Test App continues on the next page CA50 Modes of Operation 4 21 Table 4 6 CA Menu Options Continued Menu Description Audio Test App continued 8 10 11 12 13 14 Scroll up to Play and press Scan Select to play the wav file When the Repeat option is set to On the selected audio file plays continually all 4SudSamp i File LASER WAY Press the left soft key to stop the audio file from playing Press the right soft key to go back to the main AudSamp screen On the main AudSamp screen above scroll down to Record Audio and press Scan Select to display the AudSamp Record screen below File best waw Record Play Scroll down to Record and press Scan Select Recording begins Play a sound into the CA50 receiver The recording sound saves to the test wav file Recording best aw 05 of 60 s
517. the user must supply a valid user name and password for the UCA machine Because Windows Basic authentication sends user name and password to the server in the clear it is recommended that SSL be enabled for the ServerManagement application if it is to be used Encryption Decryption of the UCA Server Configuration Files To protect information found in the UCA server config files sections within the files are encrypted during the install This encryption uses the RSAProtectedConfigurationProvider This provider uses the RSA public key encryption to encrypt and decrypt data To ease in the decryption of the files for maintenance purposes a few batch files are provided They are found in C Program Files Motorola UCA Server Utilities Decrypt bat and Encrypt bat encrypts and decrypts the various config files associated with the UCA server Decrypt bat should not be deployed to a production environment for obvious reasons In addition keep in mind that because of the way the files are encrypted they are tied to the machine on which they are encrypted They cannot be unencrypted or used on another machine Encryption of Passwords Stored in the UCA Database To protect passwords found in the UCA server database they are encrypted before they are stored The passwords are encrypted using Microsoft Cryptographic Service Provider 6 58 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Capabilities with an Offline UCA Server If the UCA
518. the walkie talkie to Scan mode options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value WTScan Text to display over the soft key specified in id See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about WT channels and modes Commands and Uses J 5 Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command This input element allows business application developers to define a name SETCHANNEL soft key for users to set the walkie talkie channel options 3 Normal id RightSoftKey value WTSetCh 5 input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name SETCHANNEL SETCHANNEL is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to set the walkie talkie to the channel specified in the options property Options 3 Normal Options is formatted as follows Channel Mode See Device Modes on page 4 33 for details about WT channels and modes id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value WTSetCh Text to display over the soft key specified in id lt input tyoe Command name SETRING This input element allows business application developers to define a
519. thenticale MAC Pr rk agistarDavic i authenticated wruesitalases continueOn truaifalse token link in OB to next step in authentication process XML based user profile If UCA Server authenticated or URL for next step in authentication process Device requests supplied URL User barcode Authentication Page is displayed and user pa a a scans login barcode Barcode is bahind posted to the server Authenticate User te mi authenticated truafalsa XML based user profile if UCA Server continueOn trueffalse authenticated or URL for token link in DB to next step in next step in authentication authentication process process HE a User password Authenlication Web Service Device requests supplied URL Page is displayed and the user enters pasaword Password la posted to the server GelPassword aspx and code behind Authenticate UserPass word AML based user profile if yeas vulhenticated or URL for next aids slep in mulhenlicalion pPr acess a authenticated irueifalse continueOn true false token link in DB to next step in authentication process ooo Device requests supplied a l URL Page is displayed User group Authentication Web and the user enters GetGroup aspx dept Service selects group Group la and code behind posted to the server UpdateUserlntfo ia XML based user profile if UCA Server authenticated true false authenticated or URL for continueOn tres false next step in authentication
520. tic ranges of currently logged in extensions Each range contains a maximum of approximately 25 extensions al Ext s CI 001 025 026 050 051 075 Back Figure 4 18 Extensions Menu 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select an extension range The Extension List for the selected range of extensions displays wall Ext s ST 001 002 003 Back Figure 4 19 Desktop Menu 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select the extension to call A voice unicast call connects see Voice Unicast Calls on page 4 36 By Last Names 1 To view last names in the phone book press the Up or Down keys to scroll the Phone Book menu Figure 4 17 B and Select Last Names The Letter Range menu displays a scrollable list of letters alphabetical ranges representing the last names of currently logged in users Each range contains a maximum of approximately 25 logged in users wall Last CI A C D G H L Back Figure 4 20 Letter Range Menu 4 44 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 2 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select a range of letters The Last Names menu displays the names of logged in users alphabetically in the range selected wl Last Cin Amity J Bennet T Back Figure 4 21 Last Names Menu 3 Press the Up or Down keys to scroll and Select the name to call A voice unicast call connects see Voice Unicast Calls o
521. tiflnfo RSKey Using these parameters the left soft key is WT Scan and the right soft key is Dismiss P 16 73 Test WT Scan Dismiss Figure J 1 Assigned Left and Right Soft Keys J NOTE When LSKey and RSKey are left blank default values are assigned The default value for LSKey is Ack and the default value for RSKey is Dismiss In the example in Figure J 1 pressing the left soft key sends the SETSCANMODE command to the UCAClient The UCAClient then sets the WT mode to Scan mode Additional commands that can be used with SendNotification are listed in the table below Commands and Uses J 15 Table J 3 Commands Usage in Notification Messages Command Name Description Usage with Left and Right Soft Keys WTScan S L SETSCANMODE SETSCANMODE Set walkie talkie into Scan mode See Device Modes on page 4 33 for more information about WT channels and modes SETCHANNEL Set a particular walkie talkie SetCh S L SetChannel 3 Normal channel See Device Modes on page 4 33 for more information about WT channels and modes PHNPLACECALL Call S L PHNPLACECALL 1 192 168 7 126 5060 PHONEHANGUP HangUp S L PHONEHANGUP PHONEHOLD Hold S L PHONEHOLD PHONERESUME UnHold S L PHONERESUME PHNTRANSFERCALL Transfer an active phone call to Transfer S L PHNTRANSFERCALL 1 192 168 7 75 5060 some other device user PHONEMUTE Mute an active call Mute S L PHONEMUTE SETRING Set a ring type SetRing S L SetRing Applicatio
522. ting number of ranges to attempt to break a list into Maximum number of extensions to display as a single menu before breaking into ranges multiple menus The maximum number of extensions to put in a range Age in hours of past calls to consider as a recent call Determines whether or not the user associated with multiple groups appears in each department Determines whether or not to allow for a dynamic ext if the static fails to register Default external location ID to use on this server In many cases this would be a store number The length of idle time hours before a device is considered in an unknown state Language ID of the localized UCA Client read only Diagnostic trace logging This setting controls how much detail is written to the trace log table T DebugTrace All log entries of the specified level and greater are logged Any log entries with lower priority levels are not logged Possible Values 0 Debug 1 Flow 2 Status 3 Warning 4 Error Logging levels of 0 and 1 result in large amounts of logging data saved in the database These levels are not recommended for normal system operation They should be used with caution and only in cases where an issue was reported and is being monitored and investigated by Motorola The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect Table 6
523. tion occurred while attempting to update a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53095 An exception occurred while attempting to update a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53097 SCCP MAC already exists 53102 Remove Extension Failed The extension does not exist in the database 53104 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to remove a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53105 An exception occurred while attempting to remove a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53131 No phone extensions available for assignment 53133 Phone extension assignment to a user failed 53134 Phone extension was assigned to a user 53135 An exception occurred while attempting to assign a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53136 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to assign a phone extension Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53161 Update of extension assignment failed 53164 A data layer exception occurred while attempting to update a phone extension assignment Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 24 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 15 Phone Extension Management Errors Continued Error Code Description 53165 An exception occurred while attempting to update a phone extension assignment Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 53191 An error occur
524. tionality Wireless Local Area WLAN radio Conexant USI Jedi 802 11a b g radio module Data Capture Specifications Working Range Typical working range on UPC 100 bar codes is 2 in to 21 in from the scan window 1D Scanner SE950 Specifications Roll 100 UPC at5 in 35 from vertical Pitch Angle Condition 100 UPC at 5 in 65 from normal Specifications A 3 Table A 1 CA50 Client Specifications Continued Item Description Skew Tolerance Condition 100 UPC at 5 in 50 from normal Ambient Light Sunlight 10 000 ft candles 107 640 lux Artificial Light 450 ft candles 4 844 lux scan Repetition Rate 104 12 scans sec bidirectional Scan Angle Narrow 35 3 typical Laser Power 1 7mW nominal peak power A 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Accessory Specifications Table A 2 Single Slot Cradle Specifications Feature Dimensions Weight Power Typical Wall Power Storage Temperature Charging Temperature Humidity Drop Electrostatic Discharge ESD Description 3 9 in L x 3 2 in W x 1 9 in H 9 85 cm L x 8 23 cm W x 4 95 cm H 4 1 oz 1159 5 4 VDC 6W 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C 32 F to 95 F 0 C to 35 C See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed charging information 5 to 95 non condensing 6 drops 1 per side 30 0 in 76 2 cm drops to vinyl tiled concrete at room temperature 4kVdc direct dischar
525. to 20 minutes depending on whether or not NET CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide A Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Installing Prerequisites Installs software components required prior to installing SOL Figure 6 57 nstalling Prerequisites Setup Status Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Figure 6 58 SQL Server Setup UCA Server 6 39 Motorola Installation Wizard Setup Status UCA Server Version 2 0 is configuring your new software installation C Web References GetSysVariablewWebS ervice GetS ysV aniable wsdl Figure 6 59 SQL Server Setup Status Media Relay Me mem 3 Pa a ag ee IA ee ae re Gathering rec ured information Pt Figure 6 60 Media Relay Motorola UCA Diagnostics Tool dows configures Motorola UCA Diagnostics Se Figure 6 61 UCA Diagnostics Motorola UCA Server Backup amp Restore figures Motorola UCA Server Backup Nad ka Figure 6 62 UCA Server Backup amp Restore 6 40 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Motorola UCA Server Profile Builder Please wait while Windows configures Motorola UCA Server Profile ie Builder Gathering required information LU Figure 6 63 UCA Server Profile Builder Click Yes to start the i or click No Figure 6 6 64 Start Web Console 22 If Yes is clicked to start the Web Console now the following Web Console window
526. to configure ESSID i ee Network Configuration 3 LAN Le Subnet VLAN o fel WAN WLAN configuration ALAM Security Q Wireless Gog Q wiPs 7 Access Ports 7 T Rogue AF Detection 82 HotSpot 7 paa Firewall 2 Port Config aa Router IF Filtering 1 ae System Configuration e System Settings gt Sf Certificate Mart a il User Authentication ON Redundancy o CC CfolFirrnware Mat i Logging Configuration Figure E4 WLAN1 ESSID In the ESSID field change 101 to UCA Click Apply Subnet Vian _ Disallow MU to MU Communications _ Answer Broadcast ESS _ Secure Beacon Apply Undo Changes a 6 On the left side of the window under Network Configuration select WLAN1 Security Ensure the radio buttons next to No Authentication and No Encryption are selected Click Apply if required o HE Network Configuration WLAN1 Security LAN L Authentication Methods a Subnet sg VLAN O 902 1 EAP a 1x EAP t 802 1 EAP Configuratio ey Wireless 12 1 Configuration ip WLAN CO Kerberos LGB WLANT Security D D Wireless Gos Q wiPs Access Ports Rogue AP Detection way HotSpot A Firewall G2 Port Config aa Router IP Filtering 1 ay System Configuration lt 2 System Settings o SB Certificate Mart a i User Authentication ey Redundancy eS CfolFirrnware Mat F Logging Configuration Kerberos Configuration No Authenticati
527. to remain in the DB Path to folder for DB maintenance exports If the default path is changed to a different folder the IIS WPG user group must be given permissions to write files to it Hour of day to run DB maintenance Values are 0 23 DB Maintenance can create potential server loading depending on the amount of data stored in the UCA database DB Maintenance should be performed at off hours or when the system is least utilized Number of days between cleaning local user records Number of days to allow local user records to remain in the DB Number of days between metrics records cleaning Number of exported metrics log files to leave on the disk Number of days to allow metrics records to remain in the DB The Motorola UCA Maintenance Service must be restarted for changes to the System Maintenance DB and System Maintenance Session variables to take effect Table 6 2 System Settings Continued Setting UCA Server 6 53 Description System Maintenance Session PollPeriod System Maintenance Session Timeout system Notif CA50MediaRelay Port system Notif MediaRelay DefaultAudioEncoding System Notif MediaRelay IPAddress System Notif MediaRelay Port System Notif MCChannel Address System Notif MCChannel Port System Profile Path System Profile Schema Path System Profile Template Path System Profile Workspace Path System Resource Path System Tools Stage System UCAServer PAddress Sys
528. to the CA50 call waiting is not supported e When a parked call times out and the CA50 device is not in conversation mode the parked call is be diverted back to the device that parked the call Two different devices attempt to pick One device picks up the parked call and the other device receives a fast busy tone up the same parked call The fast busy tone terminates the pick up attempt and the device display returns to desktop CA50 Modes of Operation 4 53 Voice Unicast Call States Table 4 9 Voice Unicast Call States State Description Busy Signal When caller receives a busy signal when the person called is on another voice unicast call all N 10 SIT i 10 52 Caller ID and new soft key controls display Last name First gt Retry redials extension e End returns to prior phone book Item listing Retry End End Call When a call ends when either party presses the right soft key to end the call the timer stops incrementing When the call ends the CA50 returns to the desktop or prior business application screen see Sample Business Application on page 4 54 IN 10 52 Om Last name First 0 01 Options End Mute On When the user presses the Mute see Mute Key on page 4 7 the microphone IN 10 52 Ei is muted While muted the call timer continues uninterrupted Mute is in place until the user presses Mute again or the call ends The mute state does not Mute on carry acr
529. to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments Quick Startup Guide Introduction to CA50 Solution 2c cece ces ceseeseeseeseeseensenssnesnesscsnessenseseesessssnssesseseessessstsssesssessesseessesseeseeseessenseeseneens 1 1 1 2 Walki Talkie 1032010 anasa nini naninaman naa imaaaaaanaaaa a 3 2 4 31 4 34 4 56 5 1 6 4 9 7 13 7 14 37 E 1 Channel Selection NAMING u s aa iaaiiai 4 34 7 24 Let HA ranana 5 1 6 4 9 14 9 7 14 18 14 17 4 36 E 1 e Phone Bodku amak amminamsaaisaaaaaasanna on ARA 13 7 13 10 4 36 4 42 e Making Receiving Transfering Calls 2oooocmeh AY AA AA 4 45 4 46 Business Applications Like Price Lookup amma na nnmn na MAAM wa gsm ANA 4 54 6 5 11 2 13 10 E 1 Messaging PagING 2 10 1110 asaasaa naaa aaa a aaa aasa PAA 1 2 11 26 11 44 Components in CASO Solution mann nnummmsns amma mun nna ll ARA 1 4 A Good Place to Start a A a MANA 1 1 1 2 Development and Deployment Checklist 20 ccecccccceccscssscsscscsssessvsscsesesesssssasesasssvasasacsesesasisssvavassteesnsatstaasasieeneassteeenees 2 1 2 2 13 2 Self Contained Pre Built Demo asana aaa GC E 1 Deployment Example UCA Server Install and Basic User Setup BF namana AK D 1 CA50 Hardware BAS Cla AA AA AA 3 2 47 4 19 Volume Control Mute Modes
530. token is used to look up a URL in the UCA DB System Settings The token string appends to System Login Token and the resulting string is looked up in the S SystemVariables table for a reference to the B SystemSettings table svID The svID is looked up in the B SystemSettings to get the URL The DeviceRegistration Web Service returns the URL to the device to which it browses In the default DB configuration the token maps to GetUser aspx The code behind GetUser aspx calls the AuthenticateUser method also in the Authentication Web Service The return values from AuthenticateUser are utilized in the same manner as the response from Authenticate MAC described above The return values indicate whether or not the process is complete and if not report the next step This process can continue to collect a password a group department etc from the user during login This process is configurable When the device or user is finally validated a user profile is generated and embedded in a Web page or returned to the device in response to the DeviceRegistration Web Service call See Figure 11 1 on page 11 7 for a diagram of the UCA Authentication Process Customizing the Process Flow The default UCA Authentication Web Service used in the UCA Authentication Process can be replaced by an Authentication Web Service written by a customer or integrator This can be accomplished as follows 1 Create an Authentication Web Service that matches the sign
531. try code preamble The upca preamble META Tag is an action tag used to set the upca preamble property Content PREAMBLE COU NTRY AND SYSTEM CHA RS 5 EAN 8 EAN8 The ean8 META Tag is lt META HTTP Equiv ean8 Enabled enables lt META HTTP Equiv ean8 an action tag used to content parameter gt the decoder Content enabled gt enable or disable the Disabled disables ean8 decoder By the decoder default enabled ean8 converttoean13 The lt META True Enables the lt META ean8 converttoean13 HTTP Equiv ean8 convertto property HTTP Equiv ean8 convertto META Tag is an action ean13 False disables the ean13 Content true gt tag used to set the ean8 content parameter gt property converttoean13 property EAN 13 EAN13 Theean13 META Tagis lt METAHTTP Equiv ean13 Enabled enables lt META HTTP Equiv ean13 an action tag used to content parameter gt the decoder Content enabled gt enable or disable the Disabled disables ean13 decoder By the decoder default enabled Code 11 Code11 The Code11 META Tag lt META Enabled enables lt META is an action tag used to HTTP Equiv code11 the decoder HTT P Equiv code11 enable or disable the content parameter gt Disabled disables Content enabled gt code11 decoder By the decoder default disabled Code11 Redundancy The lt META True Enables the lt META Code11 Redundancy HTTP Equiv code11 redund property HTT P Equiv code11 redund
532. ts This error may occur if an attempt to transfer a call when one does not exist Report problem if it is certain that a phone call exists Already registered This error may occur if an attempt is made to register the phone subsystem while the phone subsystem is already registered Report problem to help desk or technical support Invalid parameter This error indicates that an invalid parameter was used when attempting to access the phone subsystem Report problem to help desk or technical support Report problem to help desk or technical support 14 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Table 14 6 Client Generated Error Messages Continued Error Set Error Message Description Phone Related Errors continued This error indicates that an attempt was made to perform an operation with the phone subsystem but the operation is not implemented Report problem to the help desk or technical support Report problem to help desk or technical support Not Implemented Invalid DTMF tone A DTMF tone was attempted be sent over the established phone connection but the DTMF tone was invalid Check the user profile If the problem still persists report problem to help desk or technical support Registeration failed A registration to a PBX server or to a gatekeeper or direct CA50 to CA50 IP based call registration failed Check PBX gatekeeper user profile and UCA server settings If pro
533. u ID 11 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt entry ID 5 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 12 lt entry ID 1 lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 13 name FrontWTChannels name Settings name RingTone name DeskCallActive name AppCallActive name DeskQuiet name Backlight name BacklightTimer name TransferPhoneBook title WT Channels gt value My WT Settings S L SetChannel 5 Normal gt value Sales 8 L 5etChannel 3 Single 7 5 Et uCles Settings gt value Backlight M L Backlight gt value Backlight timer M L BacklightTimer gt value Ring tone M L RingTone 5 value AEC for Headset M L AECForHeadset gt title Ring Tone gt value Basic S L SetRing Application Wav ringtone basic wav gt value Steeldrum S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone steeldrum wav gt value Atmosphere S L SetRing Application Wav Ringtone atmosphere wav gt title Options gt value HangUp S L PhoneHangUp gt value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt value Hold S L PhoneHold gt value Park M L CallPark gt value Applications M L Applications gt value Settings M L Settings gt title Options gt value HangUp S L PhoneHangUp gt value Transfer M L TransferPhoneBook gt value Hold S L PhoneHold gt value Park M L CallPark gt value Settings M L Settings gt title 0OnCa
534. ude the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Motorola Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Motorola products MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the US Patent amp Trademark Office Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http Awww motorola com enterprisemobility Patents This product is covered by one or more of the patents listed on the Web site http www motorola com enterprisemobility patents Warranty Mobile Device The CA50 is warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one yea
535. ued Element Description lt input type Command This input element allows business application developers to define a name PHONEHOLD options soft key for users to put an active call on hold id RightSoftKey value Hold gt input tyoe Commana Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHONEHOLD PHONEHOLD is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to put the active call on Hold options This command does not take any parameter id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Hold Text to display over the soft key specified in id lt input type Command This input element allows business application developers to define a name PHONERESUME options soft key for users to resume the call previously put on hold id RightSoftKey value UnHold gt input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name PHONERESUME PHONERESUME is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to resume the call previously put on Hold options This command does not take any parameter id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiate the command Va
536. ues explained below 0 A value of O means that no logging will be provided 1 A value of 1 means that only information messages will be logged in the log file 2 A value of 2 means that information and error messages will be logged in the log file 3 A value of 3 means that information error and warning messages will be logged in the log file 4 A value of 4 means that information error warning and debug messages will be logged in the log file Log Settings in XML Profile User Profile The log settings in the XML or user profile are contained in the XML node called DebugLog as illustrated below lt DebugLog gt lt Log category WIT level Off gt lt Log category Phone level Info gt lt Log category Agent level Warn gt lt Log category Browser level Error gt lt Log category Scanner level Debug gt lt DebugLog gt The DebugLog node contains entries where each entry is a Log element The Log element contains two attributes The first attribute is the category The category can contain one of five values These values correspond to the log settings in the UCAclient reg file as illustrated in Table 14 3 Table 14 3 Log Elements Category Values Parameters in the UCAClient reg File Log Entry in the XML Profile WTTDebugLevel WTT PhoneDebugLevel Phone ScannerDebugLevel Scanner AgentDebugLevel Agent BrowserDebugLevel Browser 14 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide
537. uired data rates No other data rate values should be set as required data rates 4 32 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Walkie Talkie Functions Channel Settings There are three walkie talkie channel settings V Listen Talk Channel Users can listen and talk on Listen Talk channels A channel can be set to Listen Talk by setting the type to T in the user profile under the WTT gt Chiist gt Ch element The default channel is also Listen Talk A default channel is the channel used in normal mode and it is the channel that a user uses to talk A channel can be set as a default channel by setting the type to Def in the WITT gt Chlist gt Ch element NOTE One Listen Talk channel must be designated as the default channel for normal mode walkie talkie communications Listen Only Channel Users can listen to but cannot talk on Listen Only channels Users cannot manually select and enter single channel mode on Listen Only channels A channel can be set to listen only by setting the type to LO in the WIT gt Chlist gt Ch element Accessible Non listen Channel By default users cannot hear anything on this channel The channel is used as a reserve channel for single channel mode A user must select this channel manually to access this channel Selecting this channel puts a user in Single Channel mode When selected in Single Channel mode users can talk and listen only on this channel
538. unication J NOTE The CA50 cannot be charged over an ActiveSync connection Accessories B 13 Wall Mount Brackets Two optional wall mount brackets are available for mounting a CA50 battery charger and or a spare battery charger to a wall e The KT 102376 01R wall mount bracket is used to mount one SAC5000 8000CR eight slot battery charger e The KT 102375 01R wall mount bracket is used to mount one CHS5000 8000CR eight slot CA50 charger KT 102376 01R KT 102375 01R Figure B 10 Wall Mount Brackets KT 102376 01R Bracket The KT 102376 01R bracket mounts one SAC5000 8000CR eight slot spare battery charger to a wall Use the wall mount bracket as a template to mark the locations of the four mounting screws Included Hardware e One KT 102376 01R Mounting Bracket e One black 5 Phillips round head thread cutting screw J NOTE Use the 5 Phillips round head screw supplied in mounting bracket kit to attach the eight slot spare battery charger to the mounting bracket This screw is not intended for mounting the bracket on a wall For safety and stability it is recommended that you use the appropriate wall mounting hardware for installation For safe mounting it is essential to use wall anchors appropriate to the wall type i e plaster drywall concrete etc Mount to wood studs whenever possible The wall mount bracket mounting slots are designed for a fastener with a 8 pan head B 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Develop
539. unication charge cables B 12 communication status 0 000 00 4 5 communication charge cables communication setup B 12 configuration walkie talkie 4 31 connection loss CA50 and PBX 4 38 connectivity LE AA AAP AA 12 1 PBX parameters a 7 9 DE eeu th baa ae ae ak ee E a et nG B 4 B 7 connectors activesync 1 0 eee 4 9 CARO CA 3 3 4 9 console user auth web service methods authenticateuserpassword 11 41 getuserdata 11 40 console users Creating AA AA hake dd wa 9 44 deleting AA 9 47 CONG aram a ear he wo areas gee ee Satter 9 45 editing user passwords 9 46 OVEIVIEW 2 aa 9 43 conventions NOLANAI AA XX cradles eight slot battery charger B 2 B 8 eight slot CA50 charging B 2 B 3 four slot spare battery charger Cena awa pa ee AKN MAPA ea eas B 8 mounting brackets B 13 B 15 single slot USB serial B 6 single slot aaa donee lb Arm KWAK B 2 single slot CA50 charger B 5 creating additional extensions 9 15 creating new users eee 9 20 creating phone extension 9 9 D data capture laser scanning eee 4 15 one dimensional bar codes 4 15 scan angle AA 4 15 scan FANGS ee ee eee 4 15 scan Window 00 00
540. us Figure G 1 ActiveSync Window 2 Inthe ActiveSync window select File gt Connection Settings The Connection Settings window displays Connection Settings Waiting for device to connect Ivf Show status icon in taskbar be Allow USE connections i Allow connections to one of the following COM bd This computer is connected to Automatic Bhd M Open ActiveSync when my device connects Help OF Cancel Figure G 2 Connection Settings Window 3 Ensure the Allow USB connections check box is selected 4 Select the Show status icon in taskbar check box 5 Select OK to save any changes made ActiveSync 6 3 Connecting to the CA50 After ActiveSync installation is complete the ActiveSync Setup Wizard may start automatically to set up a partnership between the CA50 and host computer Cancel the Wizard set up as setting up a partnership is not required When the CA50 is connected to the host computer a connection initiates automatically and no setup is required To create a connection between the CA50 and host computer 1 Connect the small end of the USB cable to the CA50 client and the large end of the USB cable to the appropriate USB client port on the host computer 2 When the CA50 client device is detected by the host computer the ActiveSync Connected window displays Microsoft ActiveSync File View Tools Help SYNC Schedule yo Explore
541. us of all device users configured to use the UCA server In this view create edit and delete users Device User Accounts All Users Recent Users All Users Returned 162 results Find First Name External UserID First Name Last Name Common Name Role Status D 10027318 Kevin Smith Kevin Smith Sales Active O 10037317 John Doe John Doe Sales Active TI 10047316 Jane Doe Jane Doe Sales Active TI 10057315 Bill Gordon Bill Gordon Manager Active T 10067314 Victoria OConnor Victoria OConnor FrontEnd Active T 10017319 Anna Carter Anna Carter Sales Active M 10077313 John H Du Hart I v John H Du Hart I FrontEnd Active O 1105 Robert Davidson Robert Davidson Sales Active T 10007310 Abigail Jones Abby Sales Active T 1100 Steve Nielsen Steve Nielsen Sales Active D 1101 Luther Nelson Luther Nelson Sales Active O 1102 Fred Smith Fred Smith Sales Active T 1103 Nick Fischer Nick Fischer Sales Active T 1104 George Lloyd George Lloyd Sales Active D 1106 Chris Smith Chris Smith Sales Active O 1107 Greg Davis Greg Davis Sales Active O 1108 Bryan Green Bryan Green Sales Active TF 1109 Mike Donovan Mike Donovan Sales Active 1110 David Krause David Krause Sales Active CO 1111 Laura Thompson Laura Thompson Sales Active Figure 9 19 A Users View 9 20 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Creating a New User To create a user in the UCA server 1 Click the Device User Accounts tab gt All Users tab gt Crea
542. usiness application aim the device scan window at a bar code and press Scan aii 10 52 Om Abruzzo R 0 01 Options End Figure 4 55 Active Call Display 2 The Item Detail screen displays the scanned product detail aIl NY 10 52 UI 15 95 Pedestal sink white Options End Figure 4 56 tem Detail Display By default call control soft keys Options and End display Soft key options are server configurable To return to the active unicast call 1 Ifthe business application uses the Back soft key option press the appropriate Back soft key to return to the prior screens active unicast call screen or 2 A business application developer can use a meta refresh HTML tag to send the application back to a prior screen after a period of time specified in the tag CA50 Modes of Operation 4 5 7 Accessing Communication Options from a Business Application Initiating Walkie Talkie Communication By default walkie talkie communication can be initiated at any time while in a business application by pressing the Walkie Talkie key s J NOTE f the application developer changes the function of the Walkie Talkie key s this option may not be available Accessing the Menu or Phone Book There are two options to access the menu and or phone book while in a business application e Exit the Business Application Use one of the soft keys to select Back or Exit In the sample item lookup applic
543. ute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name REBOOT REBOOT is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to cold boot the device options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value Reboot Text to display over the soft key specified in id This input element allows business application developers to define a soft key for users to display the About information for the UCAClient It shows the UCAClient version information input type Command Command is a key word for the browser It instructs the browser to execute the command specified in name when the specified key is pressed name ABOUT ABOUT is a key word for the browser On receiving this the browser instructs the UCAclient to display it s About window options This command does not take any parameters id RightSoftKey Specifies the key that initiates the command Valid values are RightSoftKey and LeftSoftKey value About Text to display over the soft key specified in id Commands and Uses _J 11 Table J 2 Commands and HTML Usage Continued Element Description lt input type Command id RightSoftKey This input element allows business application developers to define a name SETBKLTLVL options 4 soft key for users to set the
544. value Applications M L Applications gt value Exit Quiet Mode S L QuietMode N gt name DeskQuiet lt entry ID 2 lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 11 lt entry ID 1 name Backlight title Backlight gt value low S L SetBkltLv1l 0 gt entry ID 2 entry ID 3 entry ID 4 Sentry ID 5 value medium low S L SetBkltLvl 1 gt value medium S L SetBkltLv1l1 2 gt value medium high S L SetBkltLv1 3 gt value high S L SetBkltLv1l 4 gt lt Menu gt lt Menu ID 12 lt entry ID 1 name BacklightTimer title Eklgt Tmr 5 value 2 secs S L SetBkltTimeout 2 gt value 5 se ecs S l SetBkltTimeout 5 gt value 10 secs S L SetBkltTimeout 10 gt value 20 secs S L SetBkltTimeout 20 gt lt entry ID 2 lt entry ID 3 lt entry ID 4 lt Menu gt lt Menu IDE 13 lt entry ID 1 value Extensions M S Range022 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asm x GetMenuExtRanges sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortTy pe Number gt name TransferPhoneBook title Phn Bk gt lt entry ID 2 value Last Names M S Range024 xml http server somecompany com Motorola UCA Client PhoneBook asmx GetMenuExt Ranges sMenuType Transfer amp amp sStoreNumber Location ID amp amp sListType UCA amp amp sSortType LastName i lt entry ID 3 value Departments M S Depts xml http server somecompany com Motorola
545. ve the battery to power off the CA50 device 3 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 4 CA50 Modes of Operation Overview This chapter covers various information about using the CA50 post deployment Valuable topics in this chapter include re pang logging ont beginning on CASO 0g 1 Post d gt oli yyment on page 4 2 Employee identity validation page 4 3 Status icons page 4 5 Keys controls and features on the device page 4 7 Earbud use page 4 73 Scanning page 4 15 Resetting page 4 17 Desktop menus page 4 79 Walkie talkie page 4 37 RF network optimization for walkie talkie communication page 4 37 Naming walkie talkie channels page 4 33 Voice unicast calls page 4 36 Business applications page 4 54 Messaging paging page 11 26 and page 11 44 NOTE 1 For a complete checklist AA a ns arial deli anog potas Aia activities Soung to implement a CA50 solution see the L nent ana Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual 4 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Login Post deployment Login Options There are two login options for a store location Only one method can be used at a single location e Scan bar codes login CA50 users scan a bar code to log into the device U
546. vel 14 9 browserdebuglevel 14 9 logfilelocation 14 8 loggingenabled 14 8 PEO aa ee a a ee 14 10 phonedebuglevel 14 8 scannerdebuglevel 14 8 WTTdebuglevel 14 8 UGAGIIER IXI a NA BG ho ag 14 8 XML profile a 14 8 login post deployment a 4 2 pre deployment 020000 e eee ees 3 11 login bar code employee identity validation 4 2 4 3 E 14 generating a oat aaa AN wa eee dak D 15 SCANNING sea dwara cued dee dees 4 2 4 3 E 14 login to Server cece eee 9 3 lost RF connection eee eee ees 4 12 M maintenance cleaning disinfecting the CA50 14 3 scheduled cece eee eee 14 2 UGA server aa deine AGA wire al dak aera 14 2 menu CA See CA menu states code sample 7 22 menu options POON AIS cerere ee BANG KN ee ee et ew 4 19 rapid deployment 0000 eee 4 19 menustates profile elements 7 12 messaging aa 1 2 1 3 4 55 MAA PA 6 5 6 9 6 58 MAGA 11 26 11 44 11 47 methods adddeviceuser AAA eee eee 11 29 addextension 0 000 cece eens 11 14 authenticatemac 11 11 authenticateuser 11 12 authenticateuserpassword 11 13 11 41 getextensioninfo a saanunna aaan 11 17 getu
547. vent Log for more details 58261 Destination type must be walkie talkie channel if server side audio file is specified as part of an asynchronous message 58262 Parameter Error Unable to process Destination Information while sending an asynchronous message See the NT Event log for more details 58263 Unable to retrieve routing information for sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58264 Unable to build payload for sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NI Event Log for more details 58265 A data layer exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58266 An exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58291 Unable to retrieve predefined asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58292 Destination type must be walkie talkie channel if server side audio file is specified as part of an asynchronous message 58293 Parameter Error Unable to process destination information while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58294 Unable to perform string replacements for predefined asynchronous message while sending an asynchronous message 58295 A data layer exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 58296 An exception occurred while sending an asynchronous message Refer to the N
548. vent log Related Classes public class AuthenticateResponse public AuthenticateResponse public bool authenticated public bool continueOn public string token AuthenticateResponse Class Members Table 11 4 AuthenticateResponse Class Members Class Member Description authenticated Is the user authenticated continueOn Are there more steps to the UCA Authentication Process token DB token representing the next step in the UCA Authentication Process if there is another step 11 12 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide AuthenticateUser This function attempts to authenticate a CA50 device user int AuthenticateUser string sStoreNumber string sUser string ipAddr ref AuthenticateResponse AuthResp ref UCAWebServiceStatus WSStatus Parameters sStoreNumber User s store number sUser User s login ID joAddr IP address of source machine optional used for logging Pass when address logging is not required AuthResp Result of authentication attempt See CA50 Device User Authentication Process on page 11 5 WSStatus UCAWebServiceStatus class describes the status of the call Return Values Returns a value of 1 when successful If successful AuthResp is populated with the result of the authentication attempt If the return value is 0 check WSStatus for the error code and description Remarks Any errors are logged to the NT Event log UCA Server Optional APIs 11
549. vices 1 UCA Users Total Users Logged In 2 Users in DHD o 2 CA50 Devices Total Devices In System 2 Devices with Active User Sessions Devices charging Available o for login Devices with unknown status Inactive for gt H o hours 3 Database Maintenance Debug Trace Cleanup 242009 3 00 01 AM MetricsCleanup 242009 3 00 01 AM Local Users Cleanup 242009 3 00 01 4M Devices Cleanup 242009 3 00 01 4M Check lille Users 22009 11 33 18 AM Cleanup Call Park Table 4 Software Versions Current Server Version 02 00 05 00 Serial Humber Current Installer Version 2 00 0000 Previous Server Version UcaClient Minimum Compatibility ile 5 Misc Current Location ID ooo Figure 9 2 System Status Tab UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 9 5 System Status Tab View Click the System Status tab on the UCA server WebConsole GUI window to display the view The System Status tab has two views e Server Status Figure 9 3 e Devices Figure 9 4 To toggle between views click on a tab Server Status and or Devices Server Status Server Status view displays the status of all UCA Users CA50 Devices Database Maintenance Software Versions and Miscellaneous entries System Status Server Status Server Status Devices 1 UCA Users Total Users Logged In 2 Users in DHD 0 2 CA50 Devices Total Devices In System 2 Devices with Active User Sessions Devices charging Available o For l
550. w fast the device should vibrate RevCalINoCall Defines the alert behavior when a phone call is received The tone is picked up from the database user cannot set the value for this attribute in the profile Other attributes Vibrate and Visible indicator can be set by the user in the profile RevWTTNoCall Defines the alert behavior when receiving walkie talkie audio data while not on an active call User can set only the value for tone attribute in the profile PTTNoCall Defines the alert behavior when you press either Walkie Talkie key when not on an active call User can set only the value for tone attribute in the profile 7 10 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide e NotifNoCall Defines the alert behavior when receiving a notification message while not on a phone call There are three alert resources 1 Tone A tone plays based on information from either the data within the notification message or from the profile data e The device checks if the notification message has data to play the tone If data is available it plays the tone e Ifthe notification message has no data for tone the device checks the user profile for this information If the profile contains the tone information associated with NotifNoCall and the tone attribute is valid that tone is played e The tone selection information in the notification message takes precedence over the profile tone selection information J NOTE f the t
551. w value can be stored here if for any reason the Web Service name changes for the request new phone extension operation This Web Service operation is used by the CA50 client application when it is necessary to obtain a new phone extension This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The SessionCheckService entry contains the name of the Web service that provides the client checks in with UCA server ServerCheckln operation This name should not change but a new value can be stored here if for any reason the Web service name changes for the ServerCheckln operation The CA50 client application checks in with the UCA server if it is determined that the CA50 device went out of range and then back in range This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The ServerlP entry contains the IP address of the UCA server This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg The StorelD entry contains the store number of the store and is associated with the CA50 device This entry resides in UCAPlugInPersist reg Note that there are other UCAClient application registry definitions that are not necessary to stage that reside in UCAClient reg These settings can be changed manually or via a package that can be downloaded when deemed necessary The additional settings are as follows The LoggingEnabled entry allows a yes or no toggle for logging A value of 1 means logging is on A value of 0 means logging is off If logging is on the DebugLevel keys allow more control
552. ware aaa B 2 single slot CA50 charging cradle B 5 single slot cradle B 2 SON POUCH 6040444404 namn ew bu kahaba B 2 spare battery kit B 2 specifications ee ee A 4 wall mount bracket 2000005 B 2 Activesync communication between CA50 and host G 3 Asang pisan 5x AB EKEDAA Beans ened wean G 2 setting upa connection G 2 ANDEAN kaa oe arnad PAT KG Sao dtead ead eee aka 4 27 alerts profile elements 0000005 7 9 e EEEE TEE EEEE E EE suena re 11 2 console users 2 eee ee eee 11 36 device users 1 ee 11 29 GQNOUDS erse wa ack oor seed aes ora ws oe eee 11 18 phone extensions 000 eae 11 14 OC paawa Case Hee sees JOMAR NG 11 22 application deployment 11 1 12 1 rapid deployment 4 19 F 1 application keys 3 2 3 3 4 7 audio indications AA 4 11 audio jack aa 3 3 4 9 audio profile elements 7 4 audio test app 4 20 4 21 authentication methods authenticatemac 11 11 authenticateuser 11 12 authenticateuserpassword 11 13 getuserdata 11 8 11 34 web service eee 11 8 auto launch UCA client app 12 6 B B ConsoleUser table
553. ware using the MSP installation instructions IMPORTANT When installing MSP 3 2 1 the UCA settings screen includes a Language drop down list Select the appropriate language to localize the CA50 device The language selected must match the language selected when installing UCA server software If the language selections does not match the UCA server software language selected during the UCA server software installation the localization of device happens after the user login Use MSP 3 2 1 to prepare the CA50 devices for use To generate Rapid Deployment bar codes to connect the CA50 device to the wireless network and establish communication with the UCA server ensure all settings RF wireless network settings IP address of the UCA server etc are at hand ESSID UCA Encryption None Open e UCA Server IP 192 168 0 253 Store 0002 Prior to creating RD bar codes for the CA50 see Chapter 12 Staging and Deploying CA50Os for detailed information about MSP settings and MSP staging profiles including e CA50 Parameters Required to Generate RD Bar Codes on page 12 2 e UCA settings xml File for Configuring the UCA Client Application on page 12 2 Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup e Creating the Agent 30 settings definition on page 12 4 e Creating the UCA settings definition on page 12 4 e Creating an MSP bundle on page 12 5 e Creating an MSP staging profile on page 12 5 Create RD Bar C
554. when a user is logged in The UCAClient application adds the universal condition registry key defined above when a user is logged out This in turn allows you to instruct the MSP client to process the policy 12 8 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Chapter 13 Site Installation Guidelines Overview This chapter provides information for planning and preparing the UCA server and CA50 client for proper customer deployment Valuable topics in this chapter include e UCA server requirements page 13 7 e Stages of planning and preparation page 13 8 e Pre deployment activities first site page 13 8 e Deployment activities per site page 13 8 e Planning and preparation activities page 13 9 e Developing a list of roles page 13 9 e Developing a list of groups page 13 9 e Planning walkie talkie channels and addresses page 13 9 e Planning user authentication device users and console users page 13 9 e Planning PBX integration page 13 10 e Developing user profile templates and associations page 13 10 e Developing custom business applications optional page 13 10 e Identifying site specific settings page 13 10 e Configuring site user lists with role group assignments page 13 10 e Configuring a site phone extension pool page 13 10 e Configuring additional phone book entries page 13 10 13 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Site Instal
555. when the device is at the desktop screen e Menu selection logoff Select the log off option from the menu e Cradle logoff Put the device into the charge cradle to logoff Logoff is triggered by detecting an AC power connection Upon initial use initial boot or after a reboot the Motorola splash screen displays for approximately 10 seconds and the device boots up to a text based interface to CA Menu that displays the Start menu CA50 Modes of Operation 4 5 Display Status Icons Communication Status Battery Status Signal Strength Title al 10 52 LIN Status Bar Name x123 Menu Phn Bky rtion Bar Figure 4 7 CA50 Display Screen Table 4 1 CA50 Display Icons CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Icon Description Wireless Signal Strength aul Excellent wireless network signal 100 75 signal PI Fair wireless network signal 5075 2576 signal K No wireless network signal Communication Status Walkie talkie communication transmit channel number A number from 1 32 channels displays in walkie talkie communication non scan mode 1 32 Channel number Single channel walkie talkie communication mode Walkie talkie communication scan mode On Call icon Displays when on an active voice unicast call SOB Mute mode Displays when speaker is muted and when microphone is muted while on a voice unicast call SZ SUN Do not disturb x Title Time
556. wn in drawing A Figure B 16 SAC5000 8000CR Screw one supplied 5 Phillips screw in each flange and tighten one flange to each cradle as shown in drawing B Figure B 16 Figure B 16 Screw the Bracket to the Cradle 3 Use six screws not supplied to mount the bracket s to a wall J NOTE Ensure to use additional wall mounting hardware as needed for safe mounting to the wall type Figure B 17 Mount Bracket s B 18 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionally blank Appendix C Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies Overview This chapter describes the 1 dimensional symbologies supported by the SE950 scan engine in the CA50 and how to enable and change the parameters of the scanner symbologies Enabling Disabling Symbologies The CA50 has several symbologies enabled by default page C 2 In addition several symbologies are supported but not enabled page C 2 Both default and supported symbologies can be enabled and or disabled by the developer When enabled the parameters associated with a specific bar code symbology can also be configured Configuration examples include setting the minimum and maximum allowable decode length for bar code symbology such as Code128 and enabling check digits for Code 39 Enabling and disabling symbologies is achieved through HTML meta tags This can be accomplished during the user login process See page C 12 or in Web based bu
557. wnloadAtStartUp Y gt lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Response wav PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt File HTTPURL http server somecompany com Acknowledge wav PathOnDevice Overwrite N gt lt DownloadFiles gt lt Desktop gt lt Link type DefaultScan URL from DB gt lt Link type UpHotLink URL gt lt Link type DownHotLink URL gt lt link type FPTTHotLink URLS gt lt Link type SPTTHotLink URL gt lt link type AutoLaunchHotLink URL gt lt Desktop gt lt DeviceConfig gt lt cfg type Time value mm dd yyyy HH MM SS a pm gt lt cfg type BacklightLevel value from DB gt lt cfg type BatteryBacklightTimeout value from DB gt lt cfg type ACBacklightTimeout value 60 gt lt cfg type BatteryBacklightOnKeyPress value 1 gt lt cfg type ACBacklightOnKeyPress value 1 gt lt cfg type BacklightOnOff value 1 gt lt cfg type BacklightEnableOnNotifMsg value 0 gt lt cfg type MenuTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type WebServicePopupTime value 2 gt lt cfg type WebServiceResponseTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type PopupErrorTimeout value 20 gt lt cfg type SilentModeTimeout value 120 gt lt cfg type DNDModeTimeout value 1800 gt lt cfg type PressNHoldTime value 2 gt lt cfg type NotifEnable value Y gt 7 28 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide lt cfg type NotifAllowOnCallA
558. ws the same rules as that of NotifCallActive The device checks if the alerts attributes tone visible and vibrate are enabled If the alert attributes are enabled the attribute behavior applicable for NotifCallActive will apply UCA Profile Builder Mew Profile AppeJaCalSclive AcwCaNoTall AovwTTHoCal Tore PTTMoCall HohiHaCal ViesleIndicstor Hore NobiCalEcive Appike cie Vibia relics Mon low Tone C BinklEO 7 Vibeate F Figure 8 25 AppAlertCallActive AppAlertCallActive alert has three configurable options e Allow Tone Check box to activate tone e Blink LED Check box to display visible indicator e Vibrate Check box activate vibrate indicator NOTE Attributes defined for NotifNoCall NotifCallActive and AppAlertCallActive apply only when the client setting Enable Notification is set to Yes If this attribute is set to No the notification is not sent to the device and none of the attributes defined for notification will apply XML Profile Builder for Device Configuration 8 21 Create Menus Click Help for detailed descriptions of menus and menu states To create the main menu 1 Run the Profile Builder application and select Menus gt New The Menus amp Menu States window appears UCA Profile Builder New Menu Menus 5 Meru States Meru Menu Skates Figure 8 26 Menus amp Menu States 2 Right click Menus and select Add Menu UCA Profile Builder Mew Menu Profle Menus Help
559. xample D 1 D 11 Step 5 Wireless Infrastructure Optimize for CA50 Generate Wireless Profile page 3 9 Use the CA50 to perform 1 RF Site Survey Note The CA50 must be used for RF site surveys that require optimization of CA50 voice communications For these sites the CA50 is the only acceptable survey tool Other mobile devices such as an MC50 do not produce an equivalent signal strength indication as displayed on the CA50 e Ping page 4 27 e Signal Strength Meter on the CA50 page 4 22 Optimize RF Infrastructure Use the CA50 to perform 2 9 validation RF Site Survey THIS is a mandatory step Recommended Signal Strength page 3 70 Step 6 IP PBX Integration Optional Step 7 e IP PBX Integration to UCA Server 4 37 6 48 9 13 9 41 Deploy CA50 Solution e Generate Rapid Deployment Bar Codes 12 1 e Charge CA50 Device 000 eee eee 3 4 3 8 e Deploy CA50s at Store Location e Bootto CA Menu 00 ee eee 3 11 3 12 4 17 4 18 4 19 e Launch Rapid Deployment Client on CA50 F 1 4 19 e Scan Rapid Deployment Bar Codes F 1 e Validate the CA50 was Deployed Properly e Confirm Network Connectivity 4 5 e Scan Bar Code to Login to UCA Server 4 3 Train Employees to Use the CA50 1 1 1 2 3 2 4 3 4 7 4 31 4 36 E 17 2 4 CAb0 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Page intentionall
560. xample Uses the optional API to add a new dynamic UCA phone extension to the UCA database UCA Messaging Sample The compiled application installs along with UCA Server installation When installed the location of the UCA Messaging Sample API is http UCAInstallMachine Motorola UCA Samples UCAMessaging default2 aspx This sample API uses the DeviceMessaging Web Service and allows the developer to send a message text and specify an audio file wav to be played on the device J NOTE The specified audio file must be present on the device The message can be sent to a specific user or all users When installed the sample source code for this sample can be found in the directory Program Files Motorola UCA Server DevelopmenttToolkit Messaging UCA Server Optional APIs 11 45 UCA Messaging Screen 4 Motorola UCA Microsoft Internet Explorer Tex File Edit view Favorites Tools Help lt Back O x a A po Search NG Favorites 63 3 KA Address http Installmachine Motorola UCAYSamples UCAMe EJ co Links msa j Search Pop ups Allowed UCA Messaging Sample Store Number User Message Audio File Visible Indicator Red Slow Blink v Vibrate Indicator Slow Vibrate v User Credentials User Password Send To User Send to All 2007 Copyright Motorola Inc All tights reserved a Local intranet Figure 11 2 UCA Messaging Screen Sampl
561. xes 3 Select a Group from the drop down list menu 4 Click Save to store the user or Cancel to terminate the session 95 Ito 9 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Editing an Additional Phone Extension To edit an additional phone extension in the UCA server 1 Click the Phone and Walkie Talkie tab gt Additional Phonebook Entries tab 2 Click the phone extension to edit from the list of phone numbers in the Phone Number column see Figure 9 14 on page 9 14 The Additional Phonebook Entry Detail window displays Phone and YValkie T alkie Additional Phonebook Entries gt Additional Phonebook Entry Detail Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Additional Phonebook Entry Detail Phone Extension 100 Group Bath Phonebook Description Bath Figure 9 16 Additional Phonebook Entry Detail Window UCA Server WebConsole Graphical User Interface 3 Click Edit The Edit Additional Phonebook Entry window displays Phone and Walkie Talkie Additional Phonebook Entries 5 Additional Phonebook Entry Detail 5 Edit Additional Phonebook Entry Phone Extension Status Phone Extension Pool Additional Phonebook Entries 1 Additional Phonebook Entry Details Phone Extension Group Bath Phonebook Description Bath Figure 9 17 Edit Additional Phonebook Entry Window 4 Any field except Phone Extension can be updated in this wi
562. xtensions 11 12 and 13 D 14 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide 6 Create two users User1 and User2 each with a Shoe Sales Role in the Footwear Group Useri is using the External UserID 1001 e User2 is using the External UserID 1002 To create User1 and User2 Device User Accounts Enter the field information for User1 shown in Figure D 12 and click Save Remember to assign the users to Role Shoe Sales and Permanent Group Footwear Group All Users gt Create UCA User Recent Users AllUsers 1 General User Details First Name Last Hame Common Name User1 External UserID 001 ate Status Active ng 2 User Groups Available Selectable These groups are selectable upon logging onto the system Electrical Garden Seasonal Service Desk Other Permanent Paging These groups are permanently assigned to the user Seymours Group Footwear Group Cancel Figure D 12 Create Users Repeat the process to create User2 using External UserID 1002 Deployment Example UCA Server Install amp Basic User Setup D 15 Step 7 Generate Employee Login Bar Codes Generate a login bar code s using the newly created external User ID Bar codes can be generated using off the shelf third party bar code generating software This bar code is scanned in Step 8 For additional details on scanning a login bar code see page 4 3 D 16 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guid
563. y The Code39 concatenation META Tag is an action tag used to set the code39 concatenation property Enabling Disabling Scanner Symbologies Custom Tags lt META HTTP Equiv code39 verityc heckdigit content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 reportc heckdigit content parameter gt lt META HTT P Equiv code39 redund ancy content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 minlen gth content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 maxlen gth content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 fullasci I content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 conver ttocode32 content parameter gt lt META HT TP Equiv code39 concat enation content parameter gt Parameters True enables verifying of the check digit False disables verifying of the check digit True enables reporting of the check digit False disables reporting of the check digit True enables the property False disables the property nn O to 55 nn O to 55 True enables full ASCII conversion of the bar code False disables full ASCII conversion of the bar code True enables conversion of Code 39 bar codes to Code 32 False Disables conversion of Code 39 bar codes to Code 32 True enables Code 39 bar code concatenation False disables Code 39 bar code concatenation Example lt META HT TP Equiv code39 verifyc heckdigit C
564. y blank Chapter 3 Getting Started Overview This chapter shows the parts of the CA50 and provides information about installing removing the battery charging the battery sleep mode and powering the CA50 on Valuable topics in this chapter include e CA50 views page 3 2 e Inserting and removing the battery page 3 4 e Average charge time page 3 7 e Charging batteries page 3 8 e Battery management recommendations page 3 9 e Powering on the CA50 pre deployment page 3 11 e CA menu page 3 12 e Sleep mode page 3 73 e Powering off the CA50 page 3 13 J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist AGA al ime cereale and a activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual Unpacking the CA50 Carefully remove all protective material from the CA50 and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping Verify that you received the following equipment e CA50 e Lithium ion battery e Regulatory Guide e Quick Start Guide Inspect the equipment If any a Is ee or 1s a te contact the Motorola Enterprise Mobility support center immediately See Service Information on page xxi for contact information 3 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide CA50 Front Back Views Front View Back View LED m
565. y in the device Setup 7 O Cradle a Figure B 1 Eight Slot Cradle Power Connection B 4 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide Battery Charging Indications The eight slot cradle charges up to eight CA50 devices simultaneously The LED on each CA50 indicates the status of the battery charging in the device See Table 4 3 on page 4 10 for charging status indications Batteries nominally take three hours to charge at ambient temperatures of 30 C or below Charging Temperature See Charging Temperature on page 3 7 for detailed information RF Connectivity When a CASO is inserted into a charging cradle it maintains RF communication over the wireless network J NOTE CASO cradles do not support wired ethernet communication Accessories B 5 Single Slot CA50 Charging Cradle with Spare Battery Charger This section describes how to set up and use a single slot cradle with the device J NOTE 1 Only genuine Motorola batteries p n 82 83172 01 should be used with CA50 devices and charging accessories 2 Use only an approved power supply 50 14000 147R output rated 12 Vdc and minimum 3 3 A with AC line cord 50 16000 182R The power supply is certified to EN60950 1 with SELV outputs Use of an alternative power supply invalidates any approval given to this device and may be dangerous The single slot CA50 charging cradle Provides 5 1 VDC power for operating the device e Charges the CA50 battery
566. y step exercise that takes a developer through the installation of a UCA server its configuration and the deployment of CA50s in addition to the topics listed below e Installing and configuring UCA server production version software Setting up the CA50 device e Generating Rapid Deployment bar codes using MSP software e Creating an XML profile from UCA Profile Builder which configures the device when it is loaded from the UCA server to the CA50 device e Populating UCA server files and databases with site user specific information Generating an employee login bar code e Deploying a CA50 e Logging an employee into the UCA server Upon completing this exercise the user can use the CA50 to communicate via voice calls and walkie talkie communication This exercise does not enable price lookup For a self contained pre built demo that enables price lookup voice calls and walkie talkie communication see Appendix E Self Contained Pre Built Demo J NOTE 1 For a complete checklist outlining all the development and deployment activities required to implement a CA50 solution see the Development and Deployment Checklist on page 2 1 2 For a table listing the most commonly requested topics within this manual see the Quick Startup Guide on the last page of the manual D 2 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer 4 User Guide Outline of Steps to Perform To get the CA50 Demo Solution running perform the following steps 1 2
567. year and charged to half of full charge Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected Standard warranty period for all Motorola batteries is 30 days regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the mobile computer For more information on Symbol batteries please visit http mysymbolcare symbol com battery batbasics1 html Battery Safety Guidelines e The area in which the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals Particular care should be taken where the device is charged in a non commercial environment e Follow battery usage storage and charging guidelines found in the user s guide e Improper battery use may result in a fire explosion or other hazard e To charge the mobile device battery the battery and charger temperatures must be between 32 F and 95 F 0 C and 35 e Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery ora charger contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support e Do not disassemble or open crush bend or deform puncture or shred e Severe impact from dropping any battery operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat e Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic or conductive objects to contact the battery termina
568. ystem setting Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 73581 Exception occurred while getting list of all values for a given domain Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 14 36 CA50 UCA Client amp Server Developer amp User Guide User Authentication Table 14 28 User Authentication Errors Error Code Description 74521 Exception occurred while adding a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74531 Exception occurred while getting a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74541 Exception occurred while removing a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74551 Exception occurred while updating a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74561 Exception occurred while adding a group to a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74571 Exception occurred while getting a specific device user group association Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74581 Exception occurred while removing a specific device user group association Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74591 Exception occurred while updating a specific device user group association Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74601 Exception occurred while getting all groups for a device user Refer to the NT Event Log for more details 74611 Exception occurred while setting a device user s PIN Refer to the NT Event Log for more details User Management Table 14

CA50/UCA Client & Server Developer & User Guide (p/n 72E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CA50/UCA Client &amp; Server Developer &amp; User Guide (p/n 72E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CA50/UCA Client & Server Developer & User Guide (p/n 72E